Engineering_Policy_Guide - User contributions [en]

File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report a.pdf

2018-07-23T17:50:53Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report a.pdf

File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 13 to 15.pdf

2018-07-23T17:49:52Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 13 to 15.pdf

File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 12 to 14.pdf

2018-07-23T17:38:37Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 12 to 14.pdf

File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 11 to 13.pdf

2018-07-23T17:36:51Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 11 to 13.pdf

File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 10 to 12.pdf

2018-07-23T17:31:04Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 10 to 12.pdf

File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 09 to 12.pdf

2018-07-23T17:29:43Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 09 to 12.pdf

File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 08 to 10.pdf

2018-07-23T17:27:25Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 08 to 10.pdf

File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 07 to 09.pdf

2018-07-23T16:26:04Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 07 to 09.pdf

File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 06 to 08.pdf

2018-07-23T16:25:27Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:104.7 Engineering Factors Report 06 to 08.pdf

File:104.2 Project Scoping Process.pdf

2018-07-23T16:24:09Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:104.2 Project Scoping Process.pdf

File:102.2 CPQ.pdf

2018-07-23T16:21:57Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:102.2 CPQ.pdf

File:101 Request for Transfer of Inpsected Materials.pdf

2018-07-23T16:21:09Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:101 Request for Transfer of Inpsected Materials.pdf

File:101 Producer Supplier List.pdf

2018-07-23T16:20:09Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:101 Producer Supplier List.pdf

File:101 No Rise Certificate 2017.pdf

2018-07-23T16:19:21Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:101 No Rise Certificate 2017.pdf

File:101 No Rise Certificate 2015.pdf

2018-07-23T16:16:43Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:101 No Rise Certificate 2015.pdf

File:101 Maintenance - Commuter Lot Survey.pdf

2018-07-23T16:03:21Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:101 Maintenance - Commuter Lot Survey.pdf

File:101 Maintenance - blankinspreport.pdf

2018-07-23T16:01:54Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:101 Maintenance - blankinspreport.pdf

File:101 Land Disturbance Inspection QRG.pdf

2018-07-23T15:58:40Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:101 Land Disturbance Inspection QRG.pdf

File:101 Land Disturbance Initial Setup QRG.pdf

2018-07-23T15:57:39Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:101 Land Disturbance Initial Setup QRG.pdf

File:101 Land Disturbance Deficiency QRG.pdf

2018-07-23T15:38:19Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:101 Land Disturbance Deficiency QRG.pdf

Category:753 Bridge Inspection Rating

2018-07-23T13:07:15Z

EPGsysop: Per BR, updated contact info

{| align="right"
|-
|[[Image:753 800 Bridge PR.jpg|175px]]||[[Image:753 Bridge photo.jpg|170px]]
|-
|[[Image:753 Pubic Mtg.gif|175px]] ||[[Image:753 Ratings Graph.gif|182px]]
|}

The Bridge Inspection Rating guidance shall be used by MoDOT's internal staff, as well as consultants, contractors, local agencies and may be used by other department of transportation agencies as a reference. The guidance was developed to ensure uniformity in the inventory and appraisal of all bridges within the state of Missouri. It defines the general guidelines and processes of MoDOT's Non-State Bridge Inspection program along with giving specific load rating procedures for bridges in Missouri.

In case of conflict or apparent error the user should advise the State Bridge Office in Jefferson City.

The guidance is provided in Acrobat Reader format. To use the guidance as it is intended, you will need to download the Free Adobe [http://adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep.html Adobe Acrobat Reader] from Adobe's web site.

----

{| style="margin:1em auto 1em auto" border="1" class="wikitable" align="center" style="text-align:center"
|+ '''Bridge Inspection Rating Guidance'''
| [[media:Bridgetableofcontents.pdf|Table of Contents]] ||style="background:#99FFFF"|
|-
| [[media:Bridgesection1english.pdf|EPG 753.1 (Section 1)]] || align="left"|Recording and Coding Guide for the Structure Inventory and Appraisal of the Nation's Bridges
|-
| [[media:Bridgesection 2.pdf|EPG 753.2 (Section 2)]] || align="left"|Critical Inspection Findings Missouri Bridge and Culvert Rating Guidelines Figures
|-
| [[media:Bridgesection 3.pdf|EPG 753.3 (Section 3)]] || align="left"|Inspection and Reporting Aids
|-
| [[media:Bridgesection 4.pdf|EPG 753.4 (Section 4)]] || align="left"|Rating Off-System Bridges
|-
| [[media:Bridgesection 5.pdf|EPG 753.5 (Section 5)]] || align="left"|Inspection of Fracture Critical Bridge Members
|-
| [[media:Bridgesection 6.pdf|EPG 753.6 (Section 6)]] || align="left"|Legal Aspects of Public Work
|-
| [[media:Bridgeappendix.pdf|EPG 753.7 Appendix]] || align="left"|Various Forms and Figures
|}

If you have any questions or comments regarding this guidance please contact David Koenig at 573-526-0556 or by email at David.Koenig@modot.mo.gov.

File:101 Floodplain Development Permit Application Oct 2015.pdf

2018-07-23T12:38:42Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:101 Floodplain Development Permit Application Oct 2015.pdf

File:101 Floodplain Development Permit Application 2015.pdf

2018-07-23T12:38:05Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:101 Floodplain Development Permit Application 2015.pdf

File:101 Floodplain Development Permit Application.pdf

2018-07-23T12:37:26Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:101 Floodplain Development Permit Application.pdf

File:101 Affidavit for Compliance with Prevailing Wage.pdf

2018-07-23T12:36:05Z

EPGsysop: EPGsysop uploaded a new version of File:101 Affidavit for Compliance with Prevailing Wage.pdf

Help Article

2018-07-19T13:56:34Z

EPGsysop:

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:7px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="480px" align="right"
|-
|'''[http://sharepoint/sites/de/epg/Lists/EPGResponse/Item/newifs.aspx?List=8224cbb0%2D2570%2D419a%2Da4a0%2D4eb7416e97d3&RootFolder=&Web=c952a564%2D1467%2D40b5%2Da053%2D422131a2ca38 Engineering Policy Revision Request Form]'''
|-
|Form to Propose [[#Level 1 Approval|Level 1, 2 and 3 Revisions]] for the EPG and other MoDOT Standards
|}

The Engineering Policy Guide (EPG) contains MoDOT policy, procedure and guidance for the planning, design, construction and maintenance of roadway and related facilities. It also includes specific technical topics of right of way, bridge, traffic and materials. The information is presented in numerous articles having as simple a layout as possible. These articles are numbered to reflect as closely as possible the pay items and divisions from the spec book, ''Missouri Standard Specifications for Highway Construction''.

The EPG is not a contract document and EPG articles are referenced as EPG XXX.X or "articles" - not "sections" - to avoid confusion with MoDOT specs. Where a conflict exists between the EPG and a contract, the contract document rules. References and links to the ''Missouri Standard Specifications'' are given as "Sec XXX.XX" or "Section XXX.XX of the Standard Specifications." References and links to the ''Missouri Standard Plans for Highway Construction'' are "Standard Plan XXX.XX".
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:7px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="280px" align="right"
|-
|'''EPG articles are not referenced as "sections" but as EPG XXX.X or "articles" to avoid confusion with MoDOT specs.'''
|}

===Organization===

Articles are grouped into the spec book’s divisions (for example, the EPG articles in [[:Category:100 GENERAL|EPG 100 General]] mirror Division 100 specs, articles in [[:Category:300 BASES|EPG 300 Bases]] mirror Division 300 specs, etc.). Many articles have been subdivided into additional articles. For example, the reader may notice that [[903.6 Warning Signs|EPG 903.6 Warning Signs]] and other EPG 903 articles are listed at the bottom of [[:Category:903 Highway Signing|EPG 903 Highway Signing]].

In most articles the reader will notice numerous words in blue. These words are links to another article, figure or website with related information. This allows the reader to effectively navigate.

While every effort has been made to base the article numbers on MoDOT pay items and specs, not all articles in the EPG are reflected in the pay items and specs. For example, many EPG “100 General” articles are important to the design and construction of roadway facilities but do not directly correspond to specific pay items. Some of these are:

* [[:category:121 Project Planning, Prioritization and STIP Commitments|EPG 121 Project Planning, Prioritization and STIP Commitments]]

* [[:Category:127 MoDOT and the Environment|EPG 127 MoDOT and the Environment]]

* [[:Category:130 Value Engineering|EPG 130 Value Engineering]]

* [[:Category:132 Safety|EPG 132 Safety]]

* [[:Category:133 Snow and Ice Control|EPG 133 Snow and Ice Control]]

Similar examples are to be found in the EPG 200, EPG 300, etc. articles.

===How best to view the articles===

The articles are best viewed on your computer monitor with the following settings:

<center>''Click on any picture to view''</center>

{|align="center"
|-
|'''17-in. Monitors:'''||[[Image:Help Section Screen Resolution.GIF|175px|thumb|<center>'''1024 x 768 pixels screen area'''</center>]]||[[Image:Help Section Text Size.gif|175px|thumb|<center>'''Medium text size in wiki "View" settings'''</center>]]|| ||
|-
|'''Wide Screen Monitors:'''||[[image:Help, Resolution Wide Screen.jpg|180px|thumb|<center>'''1680 x 1050 pixels screen area'''</center>]]||[[image:Help, Text Size Wide Screen.jpg|180px|thumb|<center>'''Medium text size'''</center>]]||[[image:Help, EPG Text Size Wide Screen.jpg|180px|thumb|<center>'''Larger text size in wiki "View" settings'''</center>]]
||[[image:Help, View Zoom.jpg|180px|thumb|<Center>'''125% zoom in wiki "View" settings'''</center>]]
|}

===How to Easily Select and Print an Entire Article or a Portion of an Article===

:'''1)''' Highlight the selected article or portion of article
[[image:Help Article Print 1.jpg|center|800px]]

:'''2)''' Click “File”
[[image:Help Article Print 2.jpg|center|500px]]

:'''3)''' Click “Print Preview”
[[image:Help Article Print 3.jpg|center|450px]]

:'''4)''' Select “As selected on screen”
[[image:Help Article Print 4.jpg|center|700px]]

:'''5)''' Should your selection include a large table or figure that creates an undesirable appearance, you may want to click the “Shrink To Fit” tab and perhaps select “85%”.

:'''6)''' Print the selection.

===Use of Terms in the EPG===
:'''Shall''' and '''Will''' indicate a required, mandatory, or specifically prohibitive practice. Shall and will statements shall not be modified or compromised based on engineering judgment or engineering study.
:'''Should''' indicates a recommended, but not mandatory, practice in typical situations. Deviations are allowed if [[:Category:900 TRAFFIC CONTROL#Engineering Judgment|engineering judgment]] or [[:Category:900 TRAFFIC CONTROL#Engineering Study|engineering study]] indicates the deviation to be appropriate.
:'''May''' indicates a permitted practice and carries no requirement or recommendation.

===EPG Approval Process===
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:left; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="360px" align="right"
|-
|style="background:#99ffff"|<center>'''I would like to propose a specific, authoritative revision. What do I do?'''</center>
|-
|Proposed revisions are submitted on the [http://sharepoint/sites/de/epg/Lists/EPGResponse/Item/newifs.aspx?List=8224cbb0%2D2570%2D419a%2Da4a0%2D4eb7416e97d3&RootFolder=&Web=c952a564%2D1467%2D40b5%2Da053%2D422131a2ca38 Engineering Policy Revision Request Form]. Just copy and paste the affected portion of your division's EPG article into a Word file. Place the Word file into revision mode and make your proposed changes to the file. (If your division’s info is already in the EPG, do not email Word files of revisions to your division’s old manual. Base your division's proposed revisions on EPG text, not the old manuals.) Attach this proposal to the form with the "Click here to attach a file" button. Along with the actual proposed textual revision of the EPG, provide:
|-
| 1) Any other standard affected by the revision,
|-
| 2) The name of the proposal's sponsor,
|-
| 3) The proposal's summary,
|-
| 4) The proposal's fiscal impact and
|-
| 5) A description of any effort to engage industry and FHWA in the revision development.
|}
Revisions to engineering policy are proposed using the [http://sharepoint/sites/de/epg/Lists/EPGResponse/Item/newifs.aspx?List=8224cbb0%2D2570%2D419a%2Da4a0%2D4eb7416e97d3&RootFolder=&Web=c952a564%2D1467%2D40b5%2Da053%2D422131a2ca38 Engineering Policy Revision Request Form]. Submittals are evaluated and processed on a quarterly schedule. Final decisions on proposed ballots are submitted to the Policy and Innovations Engineer for disposition. The Assistant Chief Engineer submits the final decision on Level 2 revisions and the Chief Engineer submits the final decision on Level 3 revisions.

Every submittal must document, along with the actual proposed textual revision to the EPG:

:'''1) Any other standard affected by the revision.''' Provide electronic files of all the revisions to other MoDOT standards (Standard Plans, specs, JSPs, etc.) impacted by the proposal. Word files in revision mode are required for textual changes. Dgn files are preferred for Standard Plan revisions although a redlined hard copy showing the proposed changes is also acceptable.

:'''2) Sponsor.''' The name of the sponsor from within the division proposing the revision is required. The sponsor is the person most knowledgeable or central to the proposal.

:'''3) Summary.''' Provide the reason why the idea should be carried out (why it is necessary or its benefit). This justification may be critical in the decision to approve the proposal or not.

:'''4) Fiscal Impact.''' Provide a dollar estimate for the proposal’s costs or savings to MoDOT. Include whatever calculations (initial savings or life cycle savings, for example) or assertions are necessary to accurately convey the proposal’s financial impact. The fiscal impact must be a numeric dollar value, not simply a vague financial discussion.

:'''5) Involvement.''' Provide a summary of any efforts undertaken during the development of the item to engage affected industry groups and the FHWA. Provide specific examples of who was involved and how that the involvement occurred. This may not be applicable to every submittal, but is critical for the determination of the associated approval level for borderline items.

Proposed revisions will be categorized by the Policy and Innovations Engineer based on the following guidelines:

<div id="Level 1 Approval"></div>
'''Level 1 Approval.''' If, upon submittal in the Engineering Policy Revision Request Form, a proposed revision is determined to be a routine technical matter, an errata correction or a clarification, it can be approved by the Policy and Innovations Engineer without comment from the district engineers, the division engineers or the Chief Engineer. The EPG will be revised as necessary.
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:5px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="485px" align="right"
|-style="background:#99ffff"
|align="center"|'''Tips on Text'''
|-
|While Engineering Policy Services edits all submittals, a few grammatical guidelines for the EPG include:
|-
|'''Assure/Ensure/Insure:''' The word “assure” is a personal guarantee based on reputation. “Ensure” is used when the party is to make certain of something or to be careful. “Insure” refers to actions protected by insurance, and indicates that money is involved.
|-
|'''Dimensions:''' Typically use “high”, “wide” and “long” instead of “in height”, “in width” and “in length”.
|-
|'''Farther/Further:''' Use “farther” to express a physical distance, such as 10 miles farther, and “further” for a non-physical dimension, such as further thought.
|-
|'''Fewer/less:''' Use “few” or “fewer” for something comprised of a small number of countable components (such as fewer dollars, fewer gallons of water, etc.). Use “less” for amounts that are not being counted (less money, less water, etc.).
|-
|'''Gender:''' Minimize the use of “he/she”, “he and she” and “she or he”.
|-
|'''High/Tall:''' Use “high” to express a lofty position, such as the clouds are high. Use “tall” to express a great vertical dimension, such as the tall post.
|-
|Also refer to [[Help:Contents#Use of Terms in the EPG|Use of Terms in the EPG]], above.
|}

'''Level 2 Approval.''' If, upon submittal in the Engineering Policy Revision Request Form, a proposed revision is determined to be a moderate technical change, if it requires specific expertise (e.g. structural design, etc.) or if it impacts more than one division, the proposal is processed as a Level 2 Ballot item. The District Engineers and select Division Directors/Engineers are provided 7 days to provide their comments to the Assistant Chief Engineer who will consider the idea before providing their decision to the Policy and Innovations Engineer. The Federal Highway Administration is given 10 working days to provide comment or approve the Engineering Policy Administrator. The revision is submitted on the Engineering Policy Revision Request Form. Upon approval any associated documents and the EPG will be revised as necessary.

'''Level 3 Approval.''' If, upon submittal in the Engineering Policy Revision Request Form, a proposed revision is determined to be a complex technical change, contentious, has high cost or impacts MoDOT's external conduct of business, the proposal is processed as a Level 3 Ballot item. The District Engineers and select Division Directors/Engineers are provided 7 days to provide their comments to the Chief Engineer who will consider the idea before providing their decision to the Policy and Innovations Engineer. The Federal Highway Administration is provided 10 working days to provide comment or approve the proposal. Upon approval, any associated documents and the EPG will be revised as necessary.

Changes to the Standard Specification, Standard Drawings, Pay Items and significant changes to JSPs are documented by [https://spexternal.modot.mo.gov/sites/de/DSL/Forms/ByYear.aspx Design Standards Letters] and posted both internally and externally. Substantive EPG changes are documented on the EPG Main Page under the heading “Recent Changes”.

====EPG Ballot Cycles====
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-right:20px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="965x" align="center"
|-
!style="background:#99efff" colspan="5"| 2018 Engineering Policy Services Ballot Schedule
|-
!style="background:#99ffff" width="250"| Engineering Policy Revision Requests Due to CO Engineering Policy Services !!style="background:#99ffff" width="200"| Ballot Items Due to Asst. Chief Engineer !!style="background:#99ffff" width="200"| Ballot Items Due to FHWA !!style="background:#99ffff"|Publish Revisions !!style="background:#99ffff"|Effective Date
|-
|December 22, 2017|| January 8, 2018 ||January 22, 2018 ||February 2, 2018 ||April 1, 2018
|-
|style="background:#FFFFFF"|March 23, 2018 ||style="background:#FFFFFF"|April 6, 2018 ||style="background:#FFFFFF"|April 20, 2018 ||style="background:#FFFFFF"|May 4, 2018 ||style="background:#FFFFFF"|July 1, 2018
|-
|June 22, 2018 ||July 6, 2018 ||July 20, 2018 ||August 3, 2018 ||October 1, 2018
|-
|style="background:#FFFFFF"|September 21, 2108 ||style="background:#FFFFFF"|October 5, 2018 ||style="background:#FFFFFF"|October 19, 2018 ||style="background:#FFFFFF"|November 2, 2018 ||style="background:#FFFFFF"|January 1, 2019
|-
|December 21, 2018 ||January 7, 2019 ||January 18, 2019 ||February 1, 2019 ||April 1, 2019
|}

====Style Guide for Submitting Proposed EPG Revisions====

When a division proposes a revision to the Engineering Policy Guide (EPG), what should be submitted to Engineering Policy Services?

The division should usually begin by referencing the current contents of the EPG article to be revised. Submit a Word document in revision mode showing both proposed additions and deletions to the EPG article. The proposed revision should use complete sentences and paragraphs as much as possible. Bullets are permissible, but they are typically used sparingly.

If changes are proposed to EPG figures, provide the new .jpg files for photos and .pdf or MicroSoft Word documents for the textual figures. The EPG wiki can accommodate a number of other types of files, but .jpg, .pdf and .doc files tend to be most efficient.

===Division Contacts===
Since the divisions provide authoritative input, consulting with their liaisons or contacts may provide the help you require or receive your input. Below is a listing of divisional personnel with whom the Engineering Policy staff works and who may be helpful to you:

::'''''Bridge:''''' Greg Sanders

::'''''Chief Counsel's Office:''''' Adam Brown

::'''''Construction and Materials'''''

:::Chemical Laboratory: Todd Bennett, Leonard Vader

:::Construction Engineering: Jeremy Kampeter

:::Geotechnical Engineering: Kevin McLain

:::Materials:

:::Physical Laboratory: Brett Trautman

::'''''Design:'''''

:::Environmental & Historic Preservation: Mike Meinkoth

:::Right of Way:

::'''''Maintenance:''''' Tim Jackson

::'''''Motor Carrier:'''''

::'''''Multimodal:''''' Michelle Teel

::'''''Planning:''''' Machelle Watkins

::'''''Traffic:'''''

Main Page

2018-07-19T13:54:29Z

EPGsysop:

[[Image:EPG 2013b.jpg|1030px|center]]

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:0px; border:3px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 100%; background:#E3C87E" width="1030px" align="center"
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''<Big>Want help on how to update your EPG guidance?  It is available at [[:Help Article#EPG Approval Process|EPG Approval Process]].'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''___________'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''<Big>[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/highwayspecs.htm The Electronic MoDOT Spec Book for Mobile Devices] is now available. You may also [https://www6.modot.mo.gov/eMoDOTWeb/jsp/signon/signon.jsp sign up for E-Update notices]. To receive notices regarding Engineering Policy Revisions, select "Engineering Policy" then mark the appropriate subjects of interest. '''
|}

<div style="padding-bottom: .3em; margin: 0 .5em .5em"></div>
{| cellspacing="3"
|- valign="top" width="100%"
|style="border: 1px solid #696969; color: #000; background-color: #A9A9A9"|<big><center>'''WELCOME'''</center></big>
| valign="top" width="60%" cellspacing="3" cellpadding="3" style="border: 1px solid #FF8C00; background:#FFA500" align="center"|'''<big>RECENT POLICY CHANGES IN THE EPG</big>'''
|-
|valign="top" style="border: 1px solid #A9A9A9; color: #000; background-color: #F8F8FF"|

MoDOT has made great strides to build a good transportation system and increase taxpayers' trust in its ability to deliver what was promised. Innovative concepts, such as [[:Category:143 Practical Design|Practical Design]] and [[:Category:139 Design - Build|design-build]], were used to deliver those commitments and have made MoDOT a leader in the transportation industry.

These forward-thinking, innovative concepts are reflected in the ''ENGINEERING POLICY GUIDE'' (EPG). This document provides a single reference for all engineering and engineering-related guidance by combining the former [http://sharepoint/sites/de/RealEstate/SitePages/Home.aspx Right of Way], [http://sharepoint/sites/de/Pages/default.aspx Design], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/br/pages/default.aspx Bridge], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/cm/Pages/default.aspx Construction], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/tr/Pages/default.aspx Traffic] and [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/mt/default.aspx Maintenance] manuals.

MediaWiki, the engine behind the Wikipedia on the World Wide Web, is the software delivering the EPG. Millions of hits on the EPG endorse this format to be easy to navigate and pleasing to read. A small [[:Help:Contents|'''HELP ARTICLE''']] is included to assist with helpful hints on how to use the EPG as well as other points of interest.

|valign="top" cellspacinepgg="0" cellpadding="5" style="border: 1px solid #FFA500; background:#ffdead"|
'''[[:Category:618 Mobilization#Basis of Payment for Mobilization (Per Sec 618.2 Basis of Payment)|EPG 618 Basis of Payment for Mobilization]]'''

6/29/18: New guidance clarifies how REs should administer payment for mobilization.

'''[[236.7 Negotiation#236.7.5.4 Acquisition from State of Missouri Agencies|EPG 236.7.5.4 Acquisition from Conservation Commission and the University of Missouri]]'''

6/28/18: Comments about MoDOT acquiring property from the Univ. of MO and Dept. of Conservation were added.

'''[[238.2 Land Surveying#238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review|EPG 238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review]]'''

6/26/18: Guidance was clarified with current business practices.

'''[[751.11 Bearings#ASTM F1554 Grade 105 anchor bolts|Design of Elastomeric Bearings' Anchor Bolts]]'''

6/5/18: ASTM F1554 Grade 105 anchor bolts may be used when Grade 55 is not adequate.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#(B3.2)|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

6/1/18: Note B3.2 was clarified.

'''[[751.10 General Superstructure#751.10.3.1 Type, Alignment and Spacing|EPG 751.10.3 Bridge Deck Drainage - Slab Drains]]'''

5/24/18: Guidance now states the allowed slab drain color coatings.

'''[[106.12 Pre-Acceptance Lists (PAL)#Upon receipt and review|EPG 106.12 PAL Material Arrival Confirmation]]'''

5/22/18: Pre-Acceptance Identification Tag guidance was clarified to allow for identifying PAL material shipped to MoDOT projects.

'''[[:Category:806 Pollution, Erosion and Sediment Control#Design Guidance|EPG 806.7 Temporary Erosion Control Blankets Design Guidance]]'''

5/17/18: The types of erosion control blankets were increased and guidance now includes a matrix for choosing blanket types based on the region, length of slope and the necessary blanket duration.

'''2-loop and 3-loop Concrete Barriers'''

5/17/18: In [[616.19 Quality Standards for Temporary Traffic Control Devices#2- and 3-Loop Type F|EPG 616.19.2.5 Temporary Traffic Barriers]] and [[617.2 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 617#Temporary Concrete Traffic Barrier|EPG 617.2 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 617]], guidance was clarified for anchoring 2-loop and 3-loop concrete barriers on asphalt, composite and concrete pavements in work zones.

'''Design Agreements and Contracts'''

5/14/18: Those who need to review [[153.8 Design#DE43|DE43, DE44 and DE46-49]] prior to contractual execution has been updated.

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#Uniformed Services|Three new Federal Aid Projects Posters]]'''

5/11/18: Three new posters are required to be displayed on Federal-Aid project sites: [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/27_USERRA.pdf Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act (USERRA)],
[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/28e_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (English)] and [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/29s_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (Spanish)].

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2|EPG 110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2]]'''

5/9/18: New guidance agreed to by the DOL is now available about the DOL's PW-2 form.

'''[[231.4 Shoulder Width#A minimum shy distance at least|EPG 231.4 Shoulder Width]]'''

5/9/18: Guidance about guardrail placement from the edge of the shoulder was clarified.

'''[[751.1 Preliminary Design#751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating|EPG 751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating]]'''

5/3/18: New bridge preliminary design guidance for assessing asbestos and lead considerations for structure removal, rehabs and recoatings as well as how to address these considerations on the Bridge Memorandum.

'''[[237.14 Electronic Design Data Delivery#237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction|EPG 237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction]]'''

5/2/18: Guidance about the initial request for the Construction files has been clarified.

'''Outdoor Advertising'''

4/30/18: Guidance in [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.8.5 Vegetation Site Inspection|EPG 236.16.8.5 Vegetation Site Inspection]], [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.4 Cutting of Vegetation|EPG 236.16.15.4 Cutting of Vegetation]], [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.6 Trimming of Trees|EPG 236.16.15.6 Trimming of Trees]] and [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.9 Releasing a Vegetation Permit|EPG 236.16.15.9 Releasing a Vegetation Permit]] have been impacted by Administrative Rule revisions.

'''[[102.2 Contractor Performance Rating System#102.2.7 Performance Discussion|EPG 102.2.7 Performance Discussion]]'''

4/27/18: Guidance for when certified mail is necessary for the Contractor Performance Rating has been updated.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#(E2.27)|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

4/25/18: A new standard detailing note about deviations in galvanized pile penetration is now available.

'''[[903.4 Overhead Sign Mounting#The standard footing for steel and aluminum box truss|EPG 903.4.6 Span, Cantilever and Butterfly Box Trusses]]'''

4/16/18: Guidance about drilled shaft footings has been clarified. MoDOT may be the designer of the footing and if not, others will have to submit signed and sealed drawings.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

4/13/18: In [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#D. Temporary Bridge (Notes for Bridge Standard Drawings)|EPG 751.50 D. Temporary Bridge]], revisions include a new clarifying note D1.5 and replacing an archaic option in D1.21 with the current option. In [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#H9. Thrie Beam and Other Rail Types (Notes for Bridge Standard Drawings)|EPG 751.50 H9. Thrie Beam and Other Rail Types]], revisions include the new H9.29 for two thrie beam standard drawings.

'''[[751.8 LRFD Concrete Box Culverts#751.8.3.4 Wing Walls on Rock|EPG 751.8.3.4 Wing Walls on Rock]]'''

4/11/18: New guidance for culvert wing walls on rock is now available.

'''Inclusion of DOL Wage Rates In Contracts'''

4/10/2018: In [[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#110.1 Wage Rates (Guidance for Sec 110.1)|EPG 110.1 Wage Rates]], guidance about including the correct wage rate order from the Dept. of Labor on MoDOT projects was updated.

'''[[127.29 Storm Water#Special Watersheds where MoDOT|Special Watersheds where MoDOT has been assigned a Wasteload Allocation]]'''

4/9/18: Guidance to go with the MDNR permit agreement has been added.

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#Required Notices and Posters|Project Bulletin Board Inspection Rate]] '''

4/5/18: The bulletin board inspection rate was revised from every two months to every three months.

'''[[:Category:749 Hydrologic Analysis#749.5.3 Time of Concentration|EPG 749.5.3 Time of Concentration]]'''

4/5/18: Time of Concentration guidance was revised by providing an optional combination of Kirby-Hathaway and Kirpich equations and adding the optional low slope factor presented in new research.

Main Page

2018-06-29T18:52:12Z

EPGsysop: EPG 618

[[Image:EPG 2013b.jpg|1030px|center]]

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:0px; border:3px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 100%; background:#E3C87E" width="1030px" align="center"
|-
|rowspan="2" align="right" |'''HELPFUL EPG VIDEOS: || ||align="left"|''' <BIG>'''[[media:Logging into the EPG.wmv|•Logging into the EPG]] ||align="left"|''' <BIG>'''[[media:Help Finding EPG Info.wmv|•Finding Info in the EPG]]'''
|-
| ||align="left" colspan="2"|''' <Big>[[media:Article History and Receiving.wmv|•Article History & How to Receive EMails When Articles are Revised]]
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''___________'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''<Big>Want help on how to update your EPG guidance?  It is available at [[:Help Article#EPG Approval Process|EPG Approval Process]].'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''___________'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''<Big>[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/highwayspecs.htm The Electronic MoDOT Spec Book for Mobile Devices] is now available. You may also [https://www6.modot.mo.gov/eMoDOTWeb/jsp/signon/signon.jsp sign up for E-Update notices]. To receive notices regarding Engineering Policy Revisions, select "Engineering Policy" then mark the appropriate subjects of interest. '''
|}

<div style="padding-bottom: .3em; margin: 0 .5em .5em"></div>
{| cellspacing="3"
|- valign="top" width="100%"
|style="border: 1px solid #696969; color: #000; background-color: #A9A9A9"|<big><center>'''WELCOME'''</center></big>
| valign="top" width="60%" cellspacing="3" cellpadding="3" style="border: 1px solid #FF8C00; background:#FFA500" align="center"|'''<big>RECENT POLICY CHANGES IN THE EPG</big>'''
|-
|valign="top" style="border: 1px solid #A9A9A9; color: #000; background-color: #F8F8FF"|
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:Main Page June 28, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> The [http://r20.rs6.net/tn.jsp?f=0015Kxif6svRLAkcT0AtJCdoaayIRLSHfegvqn5AL4Sf5uEtNz7NxI8tMztE7Pndv1mozuqhnN-j8jZSrWSS6bf54VquTRNEjDVPUDT8Jd0JF7ZNmbVCZNe9fZLnnQOvufncQ1eu52h5pk7DqEv-QPZWM9bVXMW6P2UbihY-6hUuH8y5tEt1lC6DVA7eyZ8vcBWsS6Vzfk9VBeiKHYdaUGhlO-3UunSLGLnBRcwca9Ry0wFKSBKmwRfw1B9GXly8tD-en7lHjS3nAgRSVRIw1LxZEAXxVY-CfQj&c=FHGcu55yQadWFW-Kn_CmoEFoMtH5NMOdDRQPDJDIJBIGaLeRQx9e_A==&ch=kW0UzCtWQVT6qszH4mJmMfe24mKssQyIZTHH82Uk77M7Q2Xl1UZFww== JAWS Debris Remover] is being internationally honored on Aug. 21 in Minneapolis by the [http://www.ite.org/aboutite/index.asp Institute of Traffic Engineers’] Transportation Achievement Award-Safety. The KC District team headed up by Equipment Tech. Supervisor Chris Zurn and Incident Management Coordinator Marcus Slaughter developed the Dickson People’s Choice Award innovation that allows employees to safely remove roadway debris without exiting the truck. </center>''']]
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 23, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> Employees at the Kansas City District General Services Garage get a demonstration of Jeff, the [http://www.modot.org/kansascity/newrelease/District4Release.shtml?action=displaySSI&newsId=215977 new, agile mini-robot] (lower center), that will be used to conduct some surveys and pipe inspections. The robot will spare workers from dangerous situations such as cave-ins. </center>''']]
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 18, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> The new [http://www.modot.org/northeast/newsandinformation/District3Release.shtml?action=displaySSI&newsId=215953 I-70 interchange at Warrenton] will include three roundabouts. The $8.5 million project is expected to be completed this fall. </center>''']]
|}

MoDOT has made great strides to build a good transportation system and increase taxpayers' trust in its ability to deliver what was promised. Innovative concepts, such as [[:Category:143 Practical Design|Practical Design]] and [[:Category:139 Design - Build|design-build]], were used to deliver those commitments and have made MoDOT a leader in the transportation industry.

These forward-thinking, innovative concepts are reflected in the ''ENGINEERING POLICY GUIDE'' (EPG). This document provides a single reference for all engineering and engineering-related guidance by combining the former [http://sharepoint/sites/de/RealEstate/SitePages/Home.aspx Right of Way], [http://sharepoint/sites/de/Pages/default.aspx Design], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/br/pages/default.aspx Bridge], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/cm/Pages/default.aspx Construction], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/tr/Pages/default.aspx Traffic] and [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/mt/default.aspx Maintenance] manuals.

MediaWiki, the engine behind the Wikipedia on the World Wide Web, is the software delivering the EPG. Over 50 million hits on the EPG endorse this format to be easy to navigate and pleasing to read. A small [[:Help:Contents|'''HELP ARTICLE''']] is included to assist with helpful hints on how to use the EPG as well as other points of interest.

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="background-color: #F8F8FF"
|-
|colspan="5" | '''Perhaps you've wondered how many hits the most popular EPG articles have. As of late June, the numbers of hits are:'''
|-
|'''20.''' [[:Category:136 Local Public Agency (LPA) Policy|EPG 136]]|| 171474
|| '''10.''' [[751.5 Standard Details|EPG 751.5]]|| align="right"| 241971
|-
|'''19.''' [[:Category:134 Engineering Professional Services|EPG 134]]|| 180462 || '''9.''' [[616.23 Traffic Control for Field Operations|EPG 616.23]]||align="right"| 276251
|-
|'''18.''' [[136.4 Consultant Selection and Consultant Contract Management|EPG 136.4]]|| 180717 || '''8.''' [[:Category:600 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION|EPG 600]]||align="right"| 286090
|-
|'''17.''' [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40]]|| 180933 || '''7.''' [[:Category:100 GENERAL|EPG 100]]||align="right"| 335903
|-
|'''16.''' [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B)|EPG 620.2]]|| 191958 || '''6.''' [[:Category:700 STRUCTURES AND HYDRAULICS|EPG 700]]||align="right"| 353044
|-
|'''15.''' [[:Category:903 Highway Signing|EPG 903]]|| 200357 || '''5.''' [[:Category:900 TRAFFIC CONTROL|EPG 900]]||align="right"| 371573
|-
|'''14.''' [[:Category:200 GEOMETRICS|EPG 200]]|| 212538 || '''4.''' [[136.12 Figures, Glossary and Other Useful Links|EPG 136.12]] ||align="right"| 394122
|-
|'''13.''' [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50]]|| 215133 || '''3.''' [[:Category:101 Standard Forms|EPG 101]]||align="right"| 398775
|-
|'''12.''' [[136.9 Plans, Specs and Estimates (PSE)|EPG 136.9]]|| 221347 || '''2.''' [[:Category:751 LRFD Bridge Design Guidelines|EPG 751]]||align="right"| 460533
|-
|width="130"|'''11.''' [[:Category:616 Temporary Traffic Control|EPG 616]]|| 226081 || width="150"| '''1.''' EPG Main Page||align="right"| 3178097
|}

|valign="top" cellspacinepgg="0" cellpadding="5" style="border: 1px solid #FFA500; background:#ffdead"|
'''[[:Category:618 Mobilization#Basis of Payment for Mobilization (Per Sec 618.2 Basis of Payment)|EPG 618 Basis of Payment for Mobilization]]'''

6/29/18: New guidance clarifies how REs should administer payment for mobilization.

'''[[236.7 Negotiation#236.7.5.4 Acquisition from State of Missouri Agencies|EPG 236.7.5.4 Acquisition from Conservation Commission and the University of Missouri]]'''

6/28/18: Comments about MoDOT acquiring property from the Univ. of MO and Dept. of Conservation were added.

'''[[238.2 Land Surveying#238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review|EPG 238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review]]'''

6/26/18: Guidance was clarified with current business practices.

'''[[751.11 Bearings#ASTM F1554 Grade 105 anchor bolts|Design of Elastomeric Bearings' Anchor Bolts]]'''

6/5/18: ASTM F1554 Grade 105 anchor bolts may be used when Grade 55 is not adequate.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#(B3.2)|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

6/1/18: Note B3.2 was clarified.

'''[[751.10 General Superstructure#751.10.3.1 Type, Alignment and Spacing|EPG 751.10.3 Bridge Deck Drainage - Slab Drains]]'''

5/24/18: Guidance now states the allowed slab drain color coatings.

'''[[106.12 Pre-Acceptance Lists (PAL)#Upon receipt and review|EPG 106.12 PAL Material Arrival Confirmation]]'''

5/22/18: Pre-Acceptance Identification Tag guidance was clarified to allow for identifying PAL material shipped to MoDOT projects.

'''[[:Category:806 Pollution, Erosion and Sediment Control#Design Guidance|EPG 806.7 Temporary Erosion Control Blankets Design Guidance]]'''

5/17/18: The types of erosion control blankets were increased and guidance now includes a matrix for choosing blanket types based on the region, length of slope and the necessary blanket duration.

'''2-loop and 3-loop Concrete Barriers'''

5/17/18: In [[616.19 Quality Standards for Temporary Traffic Control Devices#2- and 3-Loop Type F|EPG 616.19.2.5 Temporary Traffic Barriers]] and [[617.2 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 617#Temporary Concrete Traffic Barrier|EPG 617.2 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 617]], guidance was clarified for anchoring 2-loop and 3-loop concrete barriers on asphalt, composite and concrete pavements in work zones.

'''Design Agreements and Contracts'''

5/14/18: Those who need to review [[153.8 Design#DE43|DE43, DE44 and DE46-49]] prior to contractual execution has been updated.

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#Uniformed Services|Three new Federal Aid Projects Posters]]'''

5/11/18: Three new posters are required to be displayed on Federal-Aid project sites: [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/27_USERRA.pdf Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act (USERRA)],
[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/28e_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (English)] and [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/29s_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (Spanish)].

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2|EPG 110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2]]'''

5/9/18: New guidance agreed to by the DOL is now available about the DOL's PW-2 form.

'''[[231.4 Shoulder Width#A minimum shy distance at least|EPG 231.4 Shoulder Width]]'''

5/9/18: Guidance about guardrail placement from the edge of the shoulder was clarified.

'''[[751.1 Preliminary Design#751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating|EPG 751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating]]'''

5/3/18: New bridge preliminary design guidance for assessing asbestos and lead considerations for structure removal, rehabs and recoatings as well as how to address these considerations on the Bridge Memorandum.

'''[[237.14 Electronic Design Data Delivery#237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction|EPG 237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction]]'''

5/2/18: Guidance about the initial request for the Construction files has been clarified.

'''Outdoor Advertising'''

4/30/18: Guidance in [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.8.5 Vegetation Site Inspection|EPG 236.16.8.5 Vegetation Site Inspection]], [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.4 Cutting of Vegetation|EPG 236.16.15.4 Cutting of Vegetation]], [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.6 Trimming of Trees|EPG 236.16.15.6 Trimming of Trees]] and [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.9 Releasing a Vegetation Permit|EPG 236.16.15.9 Releasing a Vegetation Permit]] have been impacted by Administrative Rule revisions.

'''[[102.2 Contractor Performance Rating System#102.2.7 Performance Discussion|EPG 102.2.7 Performance Discussion]]'''

4/27/18: Guidance for when certified mail is necessary for the Contractor Performance Rating has been updated.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#(E2.27)|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

4/25/18: A new standard detailing note about deviations in galvanized pile penetration is now available.

'''[[903.4 Overhead Sign Mounting#The standard footing for steel and aluminum box truss|EPG 903.4.6 Span, Cantilever and Butterfly Box Trusses]]'''

4/16/18: Guidance about drilled shaft footings has been clarified. MoDOT may be the designer of the footing and if not, others will have to submit signed and sealed drawings.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

4/13/18: In [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#D. Temporary Bridge (Notes for Bridge Standard Drawings)|EPG 751.50 D. Temporary Bridge]], revisions include a new clarifying note D1.5 and replacing an archaic option in D1.21 with the current option. In [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#H9. Thrie Beam and Other Rail Types (Notes for Bridge Standard Drawings)|EPG 751.50 H9. Thrie Beam and Other Rail Types]], revisions include the new H9.29 for two thrie beam standard drawings.

'''[[751.8 LRFD Concrete Box Culverts#751.8.3.4 Wing Walls on Rock|EPG 751.8.3.4 Wing Walls on Rock]]'''

4/11/18: New guidance for culvert wing walls on rock is now available.

'''Inclusion of DOL Wage Rates In Contracts'''

4/10/2018: In [[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#110.1 Wage Rates (Guidance for Sec 110.1)|EPG 110.1 Wage Rates]], guidance about including the correct wage rate order from the Dept. of Labor on MoDOT projects was updated.

'''[[127.29 Storm Water#Special Watersheds where MoDOT|Special Watersheds where MoDOT has been assigned a Wasteload Allocation]]'''

4/9/18: Guidance to go with the MDNR permit agreement has been added.

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#Required Notices and Posters|Project Bulletin Board Inspection Rate]] '''

4/5/18: The bulletin board inspection rate was revised from every two months to every three months.

'''[[:Category:749 Hydrologic Analysis#749.5.3 Time of Concentration|EPG 749.5.3 Time of Concentration]]'''

4/5/18: Time of Concentration guidance was revised by providing an optional combination of Kirby-Hathaway and Kirpich equations and adding the optional low slope factor presented in new research.

Category:618 Mobilization

2018-06-29T18:51:52Z

EPGsysop: Per CM, new guidance clarifies how REs should always have been administering payment for Mobilization according to the current spec

[[image:618 Mobilization.jpg|right|300px]]
Mobilization includes the movement and preparation of facilities, equipment, supplies and personnel for work on the project. Mobilization costs are included on every project and may be estimated at

:* 4% to 5% for pavement surfacing (resurfacing, seal coat, UBAWS, etc.),
:* 5% to 6% for grading and turn-key projects,
:* 7% to 8% for bridge projects and
:* up to 10% for miscellaneous projects.

The percent selected should be applied to the project’s total cost (the cost that includes all items) when the estimate has been completed. This figure will be more carefully analyzed and adjusted by Design.

No standard plans are associated with mobilization, but the [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/Sec0618.pdf Mobilization standard spec] is included in the ''Missouri Standard Specification for Highway Construction''.

See [[103.2 Contract Bond for Sec 103.4|EPG 103.2 Contract Bond for Sec 103.4]] for guidance on how to adjust mobilization in order to reimburse the contractor for the cost of the contract bond and railroad liability insurance.

==Basis of Payment for Mobilization (Per Sec 618.2 Basis of Payment)==

[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/Sec0618.pdf Sec 618] describes how the RE should calculate progress payments for mobilization and when to make each payment. This specification is set up to pay the contractor incrementally for mobilization and also discourage excessive mobilization bids. Before calculating the amount of the mobilization payments, the RE should first verify whether the contractor wishes to exercise the option to receive immediate payment for the contract bond and/or railroad liability insurance. This adjustment to mobilization should be made as stated in [[103.2 Contract Bond for Sec 103.4|EPG 103.2 Contract Bond for Sec 103.4]].

The incremental mobilization payments will be the lesser of these two amounts.

:Amount 1: Adjust the mobilization down for contract bond and/or railroad liability insurance (when appropriate) then divide that adjusted price by four to determine the amount of the four equal payments.

:Amount 2: Multiply 2.5% times the original contract amount.

If Amount 2 is the lower amount any remaining mobilization after the four payments are made will not be paid until the final inspection (i.e. all corrections are complete and the project has been accepted for maintenance).

Examples are provided below for both scenarios. Refer to Sec 618 for direction on when to make each of the four partial payments.

'''Example 1'''

The contract amount is $1,400,000. Mobilization was bid at $100,000. The contract bond was $10,000 and the railroad insurance bond was $10,000.

The contract bond and railroad insurance is submitted and paid at the beginning of the project. These amounts are deducted from mobilization. Therefore, the original mobilization bid of $100,000 minus $20,000 ($10,000 for the railroad plus $10,000 for the contract bond) leaves a remainder of $80,000 for mobilization.

Partial payments are the lesser of 2.5 percent times the original contract price of $1,400,000, which is $35,000, or 25 percent of the remaining mobilization of $80,000, which is $20,000. The smaller amount is $20,000 which will be used as the payment at the incremental completion percentages.

:1. When 5 percent of the original contract is completed ($1,400,000 times 5 percent = $70,000) a mobilization payment of $20,000 would be paid.
:2. When 10 percent of the original contract is completed ($1,400,000 times 10 percent = $140,000) an additional mobilization payment of $20,000 would be paid.
:3. When 25 percent of the original contract is completed ($1,400,000 times 25 percent = $350,000) an additional mobilization payment of $20,000 would be paid.
:4. When 50 percent of the original contract is completed ($1,400,000 times 50 percent = $700,000) the final mobilization payment of $20,000 would be paid.

'''Example 2'''

The contract amount is $2,000,000. Mobilization was bid at $500,000. The contract bond was $70,000 and the railroad insurance bond was $30,000.

The contract bond and railroad insurance is submitted and paid at the beginning of the project. These amounts are deducted from mobilization. Therefore, the original mobilization bid of $500,000 minus $100,000 ($30,000 for the railroad plus $70,000 for the contract bond) leaves an adjusted value of $400,000 for mobilization.

Partial payments are the lesser of 2.5 percent times the original contract price of $2,000,000, which is $50,000, or 25 percent of the adjusted mobilization of $400,000, which is $100,000. The lesser amount of $50,000 will be used as the payment at the incremental completion percentages.

:1. When 5 percent of the original contract is completed ($2,000,000 times 5 percent = $100,000) a mobilization payment of $50,000 would be paid.
:2. When 10 percent of the original contract is completed ($2,000,000 times 10 percent = $200,000) an additional mobilization payment of $50,000 would be paid.
:3. When 25 percent of the original contract is completed ($2,000,000 times 25 percent = $500,000) an additional mobilization payment of $50,000 would be paid.
:4. When 50 percent of the original contract is completed ($2,000,000 times 50 percent = $1,000,000) an additional mobilization payment of $50,000 would be paid.
:5. When the engineer has accepted the project for maintenance in accordance with Sec 105 the remaining mobilization amount of $200,000 would be paid.

Main Page

2018-06-28T20:15:10Z

EPGsysop:

[[Image:EPG 2013b.jpg|1030px|center]]

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:0px; border:3px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 100%; background:#E3C87E" width="1030px" align="center"
|-
|rowspan="2" align="right" |'''HELPFUL EPG VIDEOS: || ||align="left"|''' <BIG>'''[[media:Logging into the EPG.wmv|•Logging into the EPG]] ||align="left"|''' <BIG>'''[[media:Help Finding EPG Info.wmv|•Finding Info in the EPG]]'''
|-
| ||align="left" colspan="2"|''' <Big>[[media:Article History and Receiving.wmv|•Article History & How to Receive EMails When Articles are Revised]]
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''___________'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''<Big>Want help on how to update your EPG guidance?  It is available at [[:Help Article#EPG Approval Process|EPG Approval Process]].'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''___________'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''<Big>[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/highwayspecs.htm The Electronic MoDOT Spec Book for Mobile Devices] is now available. You may also [https://www6.modot.mo.gov/eMoDOTWeb/jsp/signon/signon.jsp sign up for E-Update notices]. To receive notices regarding Engineering Policy Revisions, select "Engineering Policy" then mark the appropriate subjects of interest. '''
|}

<div style="padding-bottom: .3em; margin: 0 .5em .5em"></div>
{| cellspacing="3"
|- valign="top" width="100%"
|style="border: 1px solid #696969; color: #000; background-color: #A9A9A9"|<big><center>'''WELCOME'''</center></big>
| valign="top" width="60%" cellspacing="3" cellpadding="3" style="border: 1px solid #FF8C00; background:#FFA500" align="center"|'''<big>RECENT POLICY CHANGES IN THE EPG</big>'''
|-
|valign="top" style="border: 1px solid #A9A9A9; color: #000; background-color: #F8F8FF"|
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:Main Page June 28, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> The [http://r20.rs6.net/tn.jsp?f=0015Kxif6svRLAkcT0AtJCdoaayIRLSHfegvqn5AL4Sf5uEtNz7NxI8tMztE7Pndv1mozuqhnN-j8jZSrWSS6bf54VquTRNEjDVPUDT8Jd0JF7ZNmbVCZNe9fZLnnQOvufncQ1eu52h5pk7DqEv-QPZWM9bVXMW6P2UbihY-6hUuH8y5tEt1lC6DVA7eyZ8vcBWsS6Vzfk9VBeiKHYdaUGhlO-3UunSLGLnBRcwca9Ry0wFKSBKmwRfw1B9GXly8tD-en7lHjS3nAgRSVRIw1LxZEAXxVY-CfQj&c=FHGcu55yQadWFW-Kn_CmoEFoMtH5NMOdDRQPDJDIJBIGaLeRQx9e_A==&ch=kW0UzCtWQVT6qszH4mJmMfe24mKssQyIZTHH82Uk77M7Q2Xl1UZFww== JAWS Debris Remover] is being internationally honored on Aug. 21 in Minneapolis by the [http://www.ite.org/aboutite/index.asp Institute of Traffic Engineers’] Transportation Achievement Award-Safety. The KC District team headed up by Equipment Tech. Supervisor Chris Zurn and Incident Management Coordinator Marcus Slaughter developed the Dickson People’s Choice Award innovation that allows employees to safely remove roadway debris without exiting the truck. </center>''']]
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 23, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> Employees at the Kansas City District General Services Garage get a demonstration of Jeff, the [http://www.modot.org/kansascity/newrelease/District4Release.shtml?action=displaySSI&newsId=215977 new, agile mini-robot] (lower center), that will be used to conduct some surveys and pipe inspections. The robot will spare workers from dangerous situations such as cave-ins. </center>''']]
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 18, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> The new [http://www.modot.org/northeast/newsandinformation/District3Release.shtml?action=displaySSI&newsId=215953 I-70 interchange at Warrenton] will include three roundabouts. The $8.5 million project is expected to be completed this fall. </center>''']]
|}

MoDOT has made great strides to build a good transportation system and increase taxpayers' trust in its ability to deliver what was promised. Innovative concepts, such as [[:Category:143 Practical Design|Practical Design]] and [[:Category:139 Design - Build|design-build]], were used to deliver those commitments and have made MoDOT a leader in the transportation industry.

These forward-thinking, innovative concepts are reflected in the ''ENGINEERING POLICY GUIDE'' (EPG). This document provides a single reference for all engineering and engineering-related guidance by combining the former [http://sharepoint/sites/de/RealEstate/SitePages/Home.aspx Right of Way], [http://sharepoint/sites/de/Pages/default.aspx Design], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/br/pages/default.aspx Bridge], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/cm/Pages/default.aspx Construction], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/tr/Pages/default.aspx Traffic] and [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/mt/default.aspx Maintenance] manuals.

MediaWiki, the engine behind the Wikipedia on the World Wide Web, is the software delivering the EPG. Over 50 million hits on the EPG endorse this format to be easy to navigate and pleasing to read. A small [[:Help:Contents|'''HELP ARTICLE''']] is included to assist with helpful hints on how to use the EPG as well as other points of interest.

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="background-color: #F8F8FF"
|-
|colspan="5" | '''Perhaps you've wondered how many hits the most popular EPG articles have. As of late June, the numbers of hits are:'''
|-
|'''20.''' [[:Category:136 Local Public Agency (LPA) Policy|EPG 136]]|| 171474
|| '''10.''' [[751.5 Standard Details|EPG 751.5]]|| align="right"| 241971
|-
|'''19.''' [[:Category:134 Engineering Professional Services|EPG 134]]|| 180462 || '''9.''' [[616.23 Traffic Control for Field Operations|EPG 616.23]]||align="right"| 276251
|-
|'''18.''' [[136.4 Consultant Selection and Consultant Contract Management|EPG 136.4]]|| 180717 || '''8.''' [[:Category:600 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION|EPG 600]]||align="right"| 286090
|-
|'''17.''' [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40]]|| 180933 || '''7.''' [[:Category:100 GENERAL|EPG 100]]||align="right"| 335903
|-
|'''16.''' [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B)|EPG 620.2]]|| 191958 || '''6.''' [[:Category:700 STRUCTURES AND HYDRAULICS|EPG 700]]||align="right"| 353044
|-
|'''15.''' [[:Category:903 Highway Signing|EPG 903]]|| 200357 || '''5.''' [[:Category:900 TRAFFIC CONTROL|EPG 900]]||align="right"| 371573
|-
|'''14.''' [[:Category:200 GEOMETRICS|EPG 200]]|| 212538 || '''4.''' [[136.12 Figures, Glossary and Other Useful Links|EPG 136.12]] ||align="right"| 394122
|-
|'''13.''' [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50]]|| 215133 || '''3.''' [[:Category:101 Standard Forms|EPG 101]]||align="right"| 398775
|-
|'''12.''' [[136.9 Plans, Specs and Estimates (PSE)|EPG 136.9]]|| 221347 || '''2.''' [[:Category:751 LRFD Bridge Design Guidelines|EPG 751]]||align="right"| 460533
|-
|width="130"|'''11.''' [[:Category:616 Temporary Traffic Control|EPG 616]]|| 226081 || width="150"| '''1.''' EPG Main Page||align="right"| 3178097
|}

|valign="top" cellspacinepgg="0" cellpadding="5" style="border: 1px solid #FFA500; background:#ffdead"|
'''[[236.7 Negotiation#236.7.5.4 Acquisition from State of Missouri Agencies|EPG 236.7.5.4 Acquisition from Conservation Commission and the University of Missouri]]'''

6/28/18: Comments about MoDOT acquiring property from the Univ. of MO and Dept. of Conservation were added.

'''[[238.2 Land Surveying#238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review|EPG 238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review]]'''

6/26/18: Guidance was clarified with current business practices.

'''[[751.11 Bearings#ASTM F1554 Grade 105 anchor bolts|Design of Elastomeric Bearings' Anchor Bolts]]'''

6/5/18: ASTM F1554 Grade 105 anchor bolts may be used when Grade 55 is not adequate.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#(B3.2)|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

6/1/18: Note B3.2 was clarified.

'''[[751.10 General Superstructure#751.10.3.1 Type, Alignment and Spacing|EPG 751.10.3 Bridge Deck Drainage - Slab Drains]]'''

5/24/18: Guidance now states the allowed slab drain color coatings.

'''[[106.12 Pre-Acceptance Lists (PAL)#Upon receipt and review|EPG 106.12 PAL Material Arrival Confirmation]]'''

5/22/18: Pre-Acceptance Identification Tag guidance was clarified to allow for identifying PAL material shipped to MoDOT projects.

'''[[:Category:806 Pollution, Erosion and Sediment Control#Design Guidance|EPG 806.7 Temporary Erosion Control Blankets Design Guidance]]'''

5/17/18: The types of erosion control blankets were increased and guidance now includes a matrix for choosing blanket types based on the region, length of slope and the necessary blanket duration.

'''2-loop and 3-loop Concrete Barriers'''

5/17/18: In [[616.19 Quality Standards for Temporary Traffic Control Devices#2- and 3-Loop Type F|EPG 616.19.2.5 Temporary Traffic Barriers]] and [[617.2 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 617#Temporary Concrete Traffic Barrier|EPG 617.2 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 617]], guidance was clarified for anchoring 2-loop and 3-loop concrete barriers on asphalt, composite and concrete pavements in work zones.

'''Design Agreements and Contracts'''

5/14/18: Those who need to review [[153.8 Design#DE43|DE43, DE44 and DE46-49]] prior to contractual execution has been updated.

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#Uniformed Services|Three new Federal Aid Projects Posters]]'''

5/11/18: Three new posters are required to be displayed on Federal-Aid project sites: [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/27_USERRA.pdf Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act (USERRA)],
[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/28e_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (English)] and [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/29s_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (Spanish)].

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2|EPG 110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2]]'''

5/9/18: New guidance agreed to by the DOL is now available about the DOL's PW-2 form.

'''[[231.4 Shoulder Width#A minimum shy distance at least|EPG 231.4 Shoulder Width]]'''

5/9/18: Guidance about guardrail placement from the edge of the shoulder was clarified.

'''[[751.1 Preliminary Design#751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating|EPG 751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating]]'''

5/3/18: New bridge preliminary design guidance for assessing asbestos and lead considerations for structure removal, rehabs and recoatings as well as how to address these considerations on the Bridge Memorandum.

'''[[237.14 Electronic Design Data Delivery#237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction|EPG 237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction]]'''

5/2/18: Guidance about the initial request for the Construction files has been clarified.

'''Outdoor Advertising'''

4/30/18: Guidance in [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.8.5 Vegetation Site Inspection|EPG 236.16.8.5 Vegetation Site Inspection]], [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.4 Cutting of Vegetation|EPG 236.16.15.4 Cutting of Vegetation]], [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.6 Trimming of Trees|EPG 236.16.15.6 Trimming of Trees]] and [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.9 Releasing a Vegetation Permit|EPG 236.16.15.9 Releasing a Vegetation Permit]] have been impacted by Administrative Rule revisions.

'''[[102.2 Contractor Performance Rating System#102.2.7 Performance Discussion|EPG 102.2.7 Performance Discussion]]'''

4/27/18: Guidance for when certified mail is necessary for the Contractor Performance Rating has been updated.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#(E2.27)|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

4/25/18: A new standard detailing note about deviations in galvanized pile penetration is now available.

'''[[903.4 Overhead Sign Mounting#The standard footing for steel and aluminum box truss|EPG 903.4.6 Span, Cantilever and Butterfly Box Trusses]]'''

4/16/18: Guidance about drilled shaft footings has been clarified. MoDOT may be the designer of the footing and if not, others will have to submit signed and sealed drawings.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

4/13/18: In [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#D. Temporary Bridge (Notes for Bridge Standard Drawings)|EPG 751.50 D. Temporary Bridge]], revisions include a new clarifying note D1.5 and replacing an archaic option in D1.21 with the current option. In [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#H9. Thrie Beam and Other Rail Types (Notes for Bridge Standard Drawings)|EPG 751.50 H9. Thrie Beam and Other Rail Types]], revisions include the new H9.29 for two thrie beam standard drawings.

'''[[751.8 LRFD Concrete Box Culverts#751.8.3.4 Wing Walls on Rock|EPG 751.8.3.4 Wing Walls on Rock]]'''

4/11/18: New guidance for culvert wing walls on rock is now available.

'''Inclusion of DOL Wage Rates In Contracts'''

4/10/2018: In [[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#110.1 Wage Rates (Guidance for Sec 110.1)|EPG 110.1 Wage Rates]], guidance about including the correct wage rate order from the Dept. of Labor on MoDOT projects was updated.

'''[[127.29 Storm Water#Special Watersheds where MoDOT|Special Watersheds where MoDOT has been assigned a Wasteload Allocation]]'''

4/9/18: Guidance to go with the MDNR permit agreement has been added.

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#Required Notices and Posters|Project Bulletin Board Inspection Rate]] '''

4/5/18: The bulletin board inspection rate was revised from every two months to every three months.

'''[[:Category:749 Hydrologic Analysis#749.5.3 Time of Concentration|EPG 749.5.3 Time of Concentration]]'''

4/5/18: Time of Concentration guidance was revised by providing an optional combination of Kirby-Hathaway and Kirpich equations and adding the optional low slope factor presented in new research.

'''[[media:747 Bridge Survey Report April 2018.docx|Bridge Survey Report]]'''

4/4/18: The latest version of this form is now available.

File:402 CLC Contractor June 2018.pdf

2018-06-28T20:00:28Z

EPGsysop:

Category:402 Bituminous Surface Leveling

2018-06-28T20:00:07Z

EPGsysop: minor correction

{|border="4" align="right" style="margin-left:8px"
|-
|style="background:#BEBEBE" align="center" colspan="2"|'''[[media:402 FY2019 Contract Leveling Coat Guidelines a.docx|Contract Leveling Course Guidelines]]'''
|-
|style="background:#BEBEBE" align="center"|'''[[media:402 CLC Contractor June 2018.pdf|Contractor pdf files]]'''||style="background:#BEBEBE" align="center"|'''[[media:402 CLC MoDOT 2018.pdf|MoDOT pdf files]]'''
|-
|style="background:#BEBEBE" align="center" colspan="2"| '''[http://spexternalsignin/sites/de/JSP/CLC_JSPs.doc?d=w62b26cd49ef94862aa99b053a837a02c Job Special Provisions]'''
|-
|style="background:#BEBEBE" align="center" colspan="2"|''' Contract Leveling Course dgn seed files are available in ProjectWise.
|}

==402.1 Design of Contract Leveling Course Projects==

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="200px" align="right"
|-
|'''AC Price Index Adjustments'''
|-
|[[media:403 Guidance for Asphalt Cement Price Index Adjustments May 2018.docx|Guidance for Asphalt Cement Price Index Adjustments]]
|}
===402.1.1 Plan Preparation===
In order to coordinate and expedite the preparation of projects for the contract leveling course program, plans shall be prepared in English units and submitted to the Design Division by August 1 of the program year. This will enable the bidding and contract services section to adjust the groupings, if necessary, and to appropriately schedule the bid opening dates.

The contract leveling course program is intended for use on roadways with less than 3500 AADT, and on which a BP-1, Type C, Type IC or superpave mixture has not been previously placed. Superpave resurfacing is viewed as more involved work, and should be programmed as a thin lift overlay project outside of the contract leveling course program.

To shorten the processing time, improve the quality of plans and to standardize procedures across the state, the following should be used when preparing plans in English units:

*No conceptual study report is necessary for contract leveling course projects, but the core team should give the corridor an elementary examination and document major safety or operational deficiencies. Unless there are very low-cost countermeasures available, the narrow scope of these projects will require that most remedial work be accomplished with maintenance forces or programmed into future projects.

*Each project should have, as a minimum, the following plan sheets:

:1. Title Sheet, with north arrow pointing to the top of the sheet, if possible.
:2. Length of Project Sheet - should include "exceptions".
:3. Typical Section Sheet - should include "estimate factors".

*Leveling course projects must have logical termini. Do not break projects at district, county or city limit lines (short projects which abut should not be shown as separate projects). Coordination with adjoining districts should be done when a project abuts a district boundary.

*[[#PDFs of Contract Leveling Course Plan Templates|Contract Leveling Course (CLC) Plan Templates]] provide sample templates for typical sections but not the location sketch or project length and typical sections. Examples of CLC plans are electronically available in Microstation format on district servers.

*The Bridge Division will analyze all bridges within the project limits to determine which bridges can be overlayed based on bridge rail height and load rating. With supporting information from District Operations and/or Design, the Bridge Division will verify the load ratings for each bridge and verify that any standard rail will not be made substandard by the Contract Leveling Course operations. Bridges should be excepted unless prior written approval is obtained from the Bridge Division and submitted with the transmittal package.

*Districts need to supply at time of submittal conflict of interest documentation (see [[237.9 Submission of Plans and Supporting Documents|Submission of Plans and Supporting Documents]]).

*Use of district forces for any operation, such as milling, that may affect the progression of the contractor operation, shall be approved in accordance with [[646.4 Work Funded by Maintenance|Work Funded by Maintenance.]]

===402.1.2 Mix and Quantities===
Tack quantities are based on tacking the entire roadway surface at an estimated minimum rate of 0.08 gallons/yd2. The asphalt binder for the contract leveling course mixture (surface leveling) should typically be PG 64-22. Asphalt lift thickness and estimate factors used for calculating mix quantities should be shown on the typical section sheets for the project. Minimum thicknesses are 1 in. for Plant Mix Bituminous Surface mixtures, 1 1/2 in. for BP-2 mixtures and 1 3/4 in. for BP-1 mixtures. Additional asphalt quantities should be included with single lift overlays to account for surface irregularities. The additional asphalt quantities added should be in accordance with the average rutting depth measurements from the roadway as provided in the following table:

<center>
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" align="center"
|+ '''Table 402.1.2.1'''
! style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300"|Average Rut Depth* (inches)!! style="background:#BEBEBE" width="300"|Additional Asphalt Quantities (Tons per Lane Mile)
|-
| align="center" width="300"| ≤ 1/16 inch ||align="center" width="400"| None Required
|-
|align="center"| > 1/16 to 1/8 inch||align="center"| 16 tons per lane mile
|-
|align="center"| > 1/8 to ¼ inch||align="center"| 32 tons per lane mile
|-
|align="center"| > ¼ to 3/8 inch||align="center"| 48 tons per lane mile
|-
|align="center"| > 3/8 to ½ inch||align="center"| 64 tons per lane mile
|-
|align="center"| > ½ inch||align="center"| Profile mill or additional lifts required
|-
|colspan="2" align="left" width="710" |'''*''' The average rut depths can be estimated by one of the following methods: 
'''Method 1 –''' Field measurements using a 4-ft straight edge across the wheel path. An average of rut depths should be taken that encompass a well representation of the roadway profile (curves, tangents, superelevations, etc…). Field measurements should be taken with the appropriate traffic control in place to provide a safe working environment. '''Method 2 –''' Average rut depths may be queried from TMS ARAN database for the roadway (if available). '''Other additional quantities''' to account for profile corrections, wedging, and/or edge treatments should be estimated separately.
|}
</center>
The Bitminous Mixtures Criteria for Contract Leveling Course Projects table below is a guide for selecting bituminous mixtures for contract leveling course projects. If the district elects to use a mixture other than what is specified, the project manager should submit by letter to the Design Division the justification for specifying a different mixture or thickness than given in the table below. In addition, at the bottom of the letter an approval signature block similar to that on the [http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/131.1_Design_Exception.docx Design Exception Information Form] should be provided for the State Design Engineer.

{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|+ '''Table 402.1.2.2, Bituminous Mixtures Criteria for Contract Leveling Course Projects'''
! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Corridor Designation !! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Traffic !! Style="background:#BEBEBE"|Recommended Mix and Thickness
|-
|text align="center"|Light Duty || text align="center"|AADT < 1750 || text align="center"|1 in. Sec 402 Mixture'''1'''
|-
|text align="center"|Light Duty || text align="center"|1750 < AADT < 3500 || text align="center"|1 1/2 in. BP-2'''2''' (Sec 401)
|-
|colspan="3"|'''1''' For structurally sound pavements, 3/4 in. Sec 402 mixture meeting BP-3 requirements may be substituted.
|-
|colspan="3"|'''2''' A 1 3/4 in. BP-1 (Sec 401) mixture may be substituted for this application if, in the district's judgment, this substitution is warranted.
|}

If special situations require limiting loads on a given route, a "Haul Road Restriction" special provision will be considered on a project-by-project basis. Otherwise, the only load restrictions, other than the 80,000-pound legal load limit, will be any posted bridge load limits.

===402.1.3 Traffic Control, Pavement Marking and Signing===
Traffic control plans and job special provisions should be prepared and submitted by the districts. Traffic control plan templates are available on district servers. Sample job special provisions are also available from the Design Division Review Section. The quantity of "No Center Stripe" Signs should be included as necessary to sign the entire project. On contract leveling jobs, final pavement marking may be required in the contract, included in a district wide pavement marking contract, or done by district forces. The guidance for pavement marking, [[620.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 3A)#620.1.6 Permanent Pavement Markings|General (MUTCD Chapter 3A) - Permanent Pavement Markings]] provide guidance for selection of pavement marking material.

==402.2 Construction Inspection for Sec 402==
This is not a contract document and is to be used solely as a commentary on Standard Specification Section 402. Surface leveling mixes will be referred to as SL throughout this section. SL mixes are used to correct any irregularities in the surface of an existing pavement on a route with low traffic volumes.

===402.2.1 Material (Sec 402.2)===

'''Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement''' (Sec 402.2.3)

See [[460.3 Plant Inspection#460.3.11 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP)|Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP)]] in Plant Inspection.

===402.2.2 Composition of Mixture (Sec 402.3)===

'''Gradation of Combined Aggregates''' (Sec 402.3.1)

The aggregate sources used in the mix must be the same as those required by the JMF. The combined aggregate shall meet the gradation required in [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=7 Standard Specification Section 402.3.1].

'''Alternate Gradation''' (Sec 402.3.2)

If wet bottom boiler slag is used to replace coarse aggregate, the combined aggregate shall meet the gradation required in Standard Specification Section 402.3.2.

'''Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement''' (Sec 402.3.3)

See [[460.3 Plant Inspection#460.3.11 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP)|Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP)]] in Plant Inspection.

===402.2.3 Job Mix Formula (Sec 402.4)===

The requirements of [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=7 Standard Specification Section 401.4] apply.

===402.2.4 Gradation Control (Sec 402.5)===

The inspector should perform a sieve analysis on the hot bins or the combined cold feed at a minimum of once per day. Testing may be waived, with the RE’s approval and the contractor’s certification of the mix, when less than 200 tons are produced per day. The combined aggregate gradation must be within the master range specified in [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=7 Standard Specification Section 402.3.1] at all times. The combined aggregate gradation can vary from the JMF by the maximum tolerance shown in the table below. The mix shall be produced at the binder content shown on the JMF. However, the binder content of the mix, as determined by calculations or sampling and testing, must be within the following maximum tolerance from the JMF.

{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Property||style="background:#BEBEBE"|Tolerance
|-
| #200 || ±2.0%
|-
| Binder Content || ±0.5%
|}

The Standard Specifications do not put testing requirements on the binder content. However, if there is any reason to suspect that the binder content of the mix is not within these specifications, the inspector should take a sample and determine the binder content of the mix. For example, a sample should be taken and tested if the mix appears too dry or too wet. The binder content, as shown on the JMF, cannot be changed during production without written approval from Construction and Materials, even if the resulting binder content is within the tolerance from the JMF. If a new binder content is approved, the tolerance will apply to the new target. If a sieve analysis indicates a deviation from the JMF exceeding the specified tolerances, the contractor will be notified immediately. The contractor shall then review the cold feed settings and make any necessary adjustments. As soon as any adjustments are completed, another test will be performed. If excessive deviation still exists, the contractor will be informed and production shall stop. Further adjustments or revisions shall be made until an acceptable sieve analysis is obtained. At this time, production can resume. Adjustments in the cold feed percentages in excess of 5.0% may require a new JMF.

===402.2.5 Sample Location (Sec 402.6)===
See "Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP)" and "Sieve Analysis" in [[460.3 Plant Inspection|Plant Inspection]]. When sampling for the binder content of the mix, see also "Asphalt Binder Content."

===402.2.6 Moisture Content (Sec 402.7)===
See [[460.3 Plant Inspection#460.3.14 Asphalt Binder Content|Asphalt Binder Content]]. When sampling for the binder content, also determine the moisture content of the mix.

===402.2.7 Contamination (Sec 402.8===
See [[460.6 Paving Operations#460.6.6 Material Acceptance|Material Acceptance]].

===402.2.8 Field Laboratory (Sec 402.9)===
See [[460.3 Plant Inspection#460.3.7 Field Laboratory|Field Laboratory]].

===402.2.9 Construction Requirements (Sec 402.10)===

'''Weather Limitations''' (Sec 402.10.1)

See [[460.6 Paving Operations#460.6.3 Weather Conditions|Weather Conditions]]. SL mixes shall not be placed if the ambient air temperature or the existing surface temperature is below 50°F.

'''Bituminous Mixing Plants''' (Sec 402.10.2)

See [[:Category:404 Bituminous Mixing Plants|Bituminous Mixing Plants]].

'''Subgrade Preparation''' (Sec 402.10.3)
In this case, subgrade refers to the existing pavement. Before the project begins, District Maintenance should perform any necessary repairs that may not be compensated for by the surface leveling. Deep rutting or dips should be filled prior to the placement of the surface leveling unless otherwise directed by the District Construction and Materials Engineer. The existing pavement surface should be cleaned and tacked in accordance with Standard Specification Section 407.

'''Hauling Equipment''' (Sec 402.10.4)

See [[460.4 Paving Equipment#460.4.2 Haul Trucks|Haul Trucks]].

'''Spreading''' (Sec 402.10.5)

See [[460.6 Paving Operations#460.6.4 Spreading|Spreading]] and [[460.6 Paving Operations#460.6.5 Hand Spreading|Hand Spreading]] in Paving Operations.

:'''Irregularities''' (Sec 402.10.5.1)

See [[460.6 Paving Operations#460.6.4 Spreading|Spreading]] in Paving Operations.

'''Joints''' (Sec 402.10.6)

See [[460.6 Paving Operations#460.6.8 Transverse Joints|Transverse Joints and Longitudinal Joints in Paving Operations]].

'''Compaction''' (Sec 402.10.7)

See [[460.4 Paving Equipment#460.4.5 Rollers|Rollers in Paving Equipment]] and [[460.6 Paving Operations#460.6.7 Compaction|Compaction]] in Paving Equipment. At least 3 passes shall be made over the entire mat with either a pneumatic tire roller or a steel wheel roller. The steel wheel roller may be a static or vibratory roller. SL mixes are generally placed very thin (minimum of 1 in.). Therefore, the reaction of the mat to compaction must be watched very closely. The inspector should ensure that the roller(s) used for compaction weigh at least 10 tons. A steel wheel roller, or a vibratory roller operated in static mode, must be used for final rolling.

'''Surface Condition''' (Sec 402.10.8)

See [[460.6 Paving Operations#460.6.6 Material Acceptance|Material Acceptance]].

===402.2.10 Method of Measurement===

The total tonnage accepted will be measured to the nearest 0.1 ton.

===402.2.11 Basis of Payment===

The accepted quantity of SL mix will be paid for at the contract unit price. The contract unit price is set up as total mix (mineral aggregate and asphalt binder are no longer paid for separately).

==402.3 Materials Inspection for Sec 402==

===402.3.1 Scope===
To establish procedures for mix design of plant mix bituminous surface leveling. Ingredients for use in plant mix bituminous surface leveling are to be inspected in accordance with the applicable guidelines. Trial mix aggregate samples shall be submitted in accordance with [[:Category:1001 General Requirements for Material|EPG 1001 General Requirements for Material]]. Plant calibrations, if requested, shall be performed in accordance with [[106.4 Plant Inspections|EPG 106.4 Plant Inspections]].

===402.3.2 Procedure===
Mix design procedures are identical to those shown in [[:Category:403 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement#403.2 Materials Inspection|Materials Inspection]] in Asphaltic Concrete Pavement. If it becomes necessary to calculate a mix, the formulae, procedure and reporting shall be performed as described in [[:Category:403 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement#403.3 Laboratory Procedures for Sec 403|EPG 403.3 Laboratory Procedures for Sec 403]].

==402.4 Laboratory Procedures for Sec 402==
This establishes procedures for Laboratory testing and reporting of plant mix bituminous surface leveling trial mixtures.

===402.4.1 Procedure===
Trial mixture test results and calculations required for plant mix bituminous surface leveling will be determined as shown in [[:Category:403 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement#Laboratory Procedures for Sec 403|Laboratory Procedures for Sec 403]]. No field compacted density samples are required.

===402.4.2 Sample Record===
The sample record shall be completed in SiteManager, as described in [[:Category:101 Standard Forms#Sample Record General Information| Sample Record General Information]] [[image:bulldozer.jpg|20px]]. Test results shall be reported on the appropriate templates under the Tests tab.

==402.5 Maintenance Operations Following Contract Level Course Projects==
Once the contractor completes a surface leveling project (1” contract overlay), there are several tasks left for MoDOT to complete before the job is finished. (Note: this guidance may apply to other overlay projects as well, depending on the requirements of the contract). To ensure these tasks are completed, the Resident Engineer must coordinate the activities with local maintenance staff. This should start by inviting the maintenance superintendent to the pre-construction conference and continue by keeping maintenance staff up to date with the contractor’s schedule.

Work items to be completed by MoDOT:

:'''1. Eliminate Pavement Edge Drop-offs.''' Maintenance crews will need to eliminate edge drop-offs by adding edge rock, or by pulling up existing material with a motor grader or shoulder disc.

:'''2. Bring Entrances up to Grade.''' Additional rock may be needed to bring aggregate entrances up to grade, or there may be sufficient rock on the entrance that can be pulled up.

:'''3. Pavement Marking.''' Unless otherwise indicated in the contract, permanent pavement marking will be included in the contract. If MoDOT striping crews will place the final pavement markings, the contractor shall install [[620.1 General (MUTCD Chapter 3A)#Temporary Raised Pavement Markers|Temporary Raised Pavement Markers]] (TRPMs) and [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=616.6_Temporary_Traffic_Control_Zone_Devices_%28MUTCD_6F%29#616.6.47_NO_CENTER_LINE_Sign_.28WO8-12.29_.28MUTCD_6F.47.29 NO CENTER LINE] signs. Additionally, the contractor will remove and retain the NO CENTER LINE signs after the markings are complete. MoDOT will remove the TRPMs after the MoDOT placed pavement marking is complete.

:'''4. Removal of Temporary Raised Pavement Markers (TRPM).''' Per specification, the contractor is only responsible for removing TRPMs when they are also responsible for providing the final pavement marking. When MoDOT provides the pavement marking, MoDOT is responsible for removing the TRPMs. The TRPMs should be removed following placement of the pavement marking. Leaving the TRPMs in place until snowplowing operations is not an acceptable option since it may result in property damage claims, creating holes in the pavement and littering the roadsides and streams with the markers. There are many creative ways to safely remove the TRPMs mechanically, including the Tab Remover, which was a regional winner in the [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/TP/Documents/InnovationsChallenge.aspx Innovations Challenge].

File:Main Page June 28, 2018.jpg

2018-06-28T19:29:55Z

EPGsysop:

Main Page

2018-06-28T19:29:37Z

EPGsysop:

[[Image:EPG 2013b.jpg|1030px|center]]

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:0px; border:3px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 100%; background:#E3C87E" width="1030px" align="center"
|-
|rowspan="2" align="right" |'''HELPFUL EPG VIDEOS: || ||align="left"|''' <BIG>'''[[media:Logging into the EPG.wmv|•Logging into the EPG]] ||align="left"|''' <BIG>'''[[media:Help Finding EPG Info.wmv|•Finding Info in the EPG]]'''
|-
| ||align="left" colspan="2"|''' <Big>[[media:Article History and Receiving.wmv|•Article History & How to Receive EMails When Articles are Revised]]
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''___________'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''<Big>Want help on how to update your EPG guidance?  It is available at [[:Help Article#EPG Approval Process|EPG Approval Process]].'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''___________'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''<Big>[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/highwayspecs.htm The Electronic MoDOT Spec Book for Mobile Devices] is now available. You may also [https://www6.modot.mo.gov/eMoDOTWeb/jsp/signon/signon.jsp sign up for E-Update notices]. To receive notices regarding Engineering Policy Revisions, select "Engineering Policy" then mark the appropriate subjects of interest. '''
|}

<div style="padding-bottom: .3em; margin: 0 .5em .5em"></div>
{| cellspacing="3"
|- valign="top" width="100%"
|style="border: 1px solid #696969; color: #000; background-color: #A9A9A9"|<big><center>'''WELCOME'''</center></big>
| valign="top" width="60%" cellspacing="3" cellpadding="3" style="border: 1px solid #FF8C00; background:#FFA500" align="center"|'''<big>RECENT POLICY CHANGES IN THE EPG</big>'''
|-
|valign="top" style="border: 1px solid #A9A9A9; color: #000; background-color: #F8F8FF"|
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:Main Page June 28, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> The [http://r20.rs6.net/tn.jsp?f=0015Kxif6svRLAkcT0AtJCdoaayIRLSHfegvqn5AL4Sf5uEtNz7NxI8tMztE7Pndv1mozuqhnN-j8jZSrWSS6bf54VquTRNEjDVPUDT8Jd0JF7ZNmbVCZNe9fZLnnQOvufncQ1eu52h5pk7DqEv-QPZWM9bVXMW6P2UbihY-6hUuH8y5tEt1lC6DVA7eyZ8vcBWsS6Vzfk9VBeiKHYdaUGhlO-3UunSLGLnBRcwca9Ry0wFKSBKmwRfw1B9GXly8tD-en7lHjS3nAgRSVRIw1LxZEAXxVY-CfQj&c=FHGcu55yQadWFW-Kn_CmoEFoMtH5NMOdDRQPDJDIJBIGaLeRQx9e_A==&ch=kW0UzCtWQVT6qszH4mJmMfe24mKssQyIZTHH82Uk77M7Q2Xl1UZFww== JAWS Debris Remover] is being internationally honored on Aug. 21 in Minneapolis by the [http://www.ite.org/aboutite/index.asp Institute of Traffic Engineers’] Transportation Achievement Award-Safety. The KC District team headed up by Equipment Tech. Supervisor Chris Zurn and Incident Management Coordinator Marcus Slaughter developed the Dickson People’s Choice Award innovation that allows employees to safely remove roadway debris without exiting the truck. </center>''']]
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 23, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> Employees at the Kansas City District General Services Garage get a demonstration of Jeff, the [http://www.modot.org/kansascity/newrelease/District4Release.shtml?action=displaySSI&newsId=215977 new, agile mini-robot] (lower center), that will be used to conduct some surveys and pipe inspections. The robot will spare workers from dangerous situations such as cave-ins. </center>''']]
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 18, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> The new [http://www.modot.org/northeast/newsandinformation/District3Release.shtml?action=displaySSI&newsId=215953 I-70 interchange at Warrenton] will include three roundabouts. The $8.5 million project is expected to be completed this fall. </center>''']]
|}

MoDOT has made great strides to build a good transportation system and increase taxpayers' trust in its ability to deliver what was promised. Innovative concepts, such as [[:Category:143 Practical Design|Practical Design]] and [[:Category:139 Design - Build|design-build]], were used to deliver those commitments and have made MoDOT a leader in the transportation industry.

These forward-thinking, innovative concepts are reflected in the ''ENGINEERING POLICY GUIDE'' (EPG). This document provides a single reference for all engineering and engineering-related guidance by combining the former [http://sharepoint/sites/de/RealEstate/SitePages/Home.aspx Right of Way], [http://sharepoint/sites/de/Pages/default.aspx Design], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/br/pages/default.aspx Bridge], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/cm/Pages/default.aspx Construction], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/tr/Pages/default.aspx Traffic] and [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/mt/default.aspx Maintenance] manuals.

MediaWiki, the engine behind the Wikipedia on the World Wide Web, is the software delivering the EPG. Over 50 million hits on the EPG endorse this format to be easy to navigate and pleasing to read. A small [[:Help:Contents|'''HELP ARTICLE''']] is included to assist with helpful hints on how to use the EPG as well as other points of interest.

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="background-color: #F8F8FF"
|-
|colspan="5" | '''Perhaps you've wondered how many hits the most popular EPG articles have. As of late June, the numbers of hits are:'''
|-
|'''20.''' [[:Category:136 Local Public Agency (LPA) Policy|EPG 136]]|| 171278
|| '''10.''' [[751.5 Standard Details|EPG 751.5]]|| align="right"| 241641
|-
|'''19.''' [[:Category:134 Engineering Professional Services|EPG 134]]|| 180109 || '''9.''' [[616.23 Traffic Control for Field Operations|EPG 616.23]]||align="right"| 276044
|-
|'''18.''' [[136.4 Consultant Selection and Consultant Contract Management|EPG 136.4]]|| 180574 || '''8.''' [[:Category:600 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION|EPG 600]]||align="right"| 285214
|-
|'''17.''' [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40]]|| 180743 || '''7.''' [[:Category:100 GENERAL|EPG 100]]||align="right"| 335130
|-
|'''16.''' [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B)|EPG 620.2]]|| 191789 || '''6.''' [[:Category:700 STRUCTURES AND HYDRAULICS|EPG 700]]||align="right"| 352151
|-
|'''15.''' [[:Category:903 Highway Signing|EPG 903]]|| 200037 || '''5.''' [[:Category:900 TRAFFIC CONTROL|EPG 900]]||align="right"| 370826
|-
|'''14.''' [[:Category:200 GEOMETRICS|EPG 200]]|| 211862 || '''4.''' [[136.12 Figures, Glossary and Other Useful Links|EPG 136.12]] ||align="right"| 393784
|-
|'''13.''' [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50]]|| 214538 || '''3.''' [[:Category:101 Standard Forms|EPG 101]]||align="right"| 396987
|-
|'''12.''' [[136.9 Plans, Specs and Estimates (PSE)|EPG 136.9]]|| 221105 || '''2.''' [[:Category:751 LRFD Bridge Design Guidelines|EPG 751]]||align="right"| 459831
|-
|width="130"|'''11.''' [[:Category:616 Temporary Traffic Control|EPG 616]]|| 225696 || width="150"| '''1.''' EPG Main Page||align="right"| 3170836
|}

|valign="top" cellspacinepgg="0" cellpadding="5" style="border: 1px solid #FFA500; background:#ffdead"|
'''[[236.7 Negotiation#236.7.5.4 Acquisition from State of Missouri Agencies|EPG 236.7.5.4 Acquisition from Conservation Commission and the University of Missouri]]'''

6/28/18: Comments about MoDOT acquiring property from the Univ. of MO and Dept. of Conservation were added.

'''[[238.2 Land Surveying#238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review|EPG 238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review]]'''

6/26/18: Guidance was clarified with current business practices.

'''[[751.11 Bearings#ASTM F1554 Grade 105 anchor bolts|Design of Elastomeric Bearings' Anchor Bolts]]'''

6/5/18: ASTM F1554 Grade 105 anchor bolts may be used when Grade 55 is not adequate.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#(B3.2)|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

6/1/18: Note B3.2 was clarified.

'''[[751.10 General Superstructure#751.10.3.1 Type, Alignment and Spacing|EPG 751.10.3 Bridge Deck Drainage - Slab Drains]]'''

5/24/18: Guidance now states the allowed slab drain color coatings.

'''[[106.12 Pre-Acceptance Lists (PAL)#Upon receipt and review|EPG 106.12 PAL Material Arrival Confirmation]]'''

5/22/18: Pre-Acceptance Identification Tag guidance was clarified to allow for identifying PAL material shipped to MoDOT projects.

'''[[:Category:806 Pollution, Erosion and Sediment Control#Design Guidance|EPG 806.7 Temporary Erosion Control Blankets Design Guidance]]'''

5/17/18: The types of erosion control blankets were increased and guidance now includes a matrix for choosing blanket types based on the region, length of slope and the necessary blanket duration.

'''2-loop and 3-loop Concrete Barriers'''

5/17/18: In [[616.19 Quality Standards for Temporary Traffic Control Devices#2- and 3-Loop Type F|EPG 616.19.2.5 Temporary Traffic Barriers]] and [[617.2 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 617#Temporary Concrete Traffic Barrier|EPG 617.2 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 617]], guidance was clarified for anchoring 2-loop and 3-loop concrete barriers on asphalt, composite and concrete pavements in work zones.

'''Design Agreements and Contracts'''

5/14/18: Those who need to review [[153.8 Design#DE43|DE43, DE44 and DE46-49]] prior to contractual execution has been updated.

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#Uniformed Services|Three new Federal Aid Projects Posters]]'''

5/11/18: Three new posters are required to be displayed on Federal-Aid project sites: [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/27_USERRA.pdf Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act (USERRA)],
[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/28e_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (English)] and [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/29s_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (Spanish)].

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2|EPG 110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2]]'''

5/9/18: New guidance agreed to by the DOL is now available about the DOL's PW-2 form.

'''[[231.4 Shoulder Width#A minimum shy distance at least|EPG 231.4 Shoulder Width]]'''

5/9/18: Guidance about guardrail placement from the edge of the shoulder was clarified.

'''[[751.1 Preliminary Design#751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating|EPG 751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating]]'''

5/3/18: New bridge preliminary design guidance for assessing asbestos and lead considerations for structure removal, rehabs and recoatings as well as how to address these considerations on the Bridge Memorandum.

'''[[237.14 Electronic Design Data Delivery#237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction|EPG 237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction]]'''

5/2/18: Guidance about the initial request for the Construction files has been clarified.

'''Outdoor Advertising'''

4/30/18: Guidance in [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.8.5 Vegetation Site Inspection|EPG 236.16.8.5 Vegetation Site Inspection]], [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.4 Cutting of Vegetation|EPG 236.16.15.4 Cutting of Vegetation]], [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.6 Trimming of Trees|EPG 236.16.15.6 Trimming of Trees]] and [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.9 Releasing a Vegetation Permit|EPG 236.16.15.9 Releasing a Vegetation Permit]] have been impacted by Administrative Rule revisions.

'''[[102.2 Contractor Performance Rating System#102.2.7 Performance Discussion|EPG 102.2.7 Performance Discussion]]'''

4/27/18: Guidance for when certified mail is necessary for the Contractor Performance Rating has been updated.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#(E2.27)|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

4/25/18: A new standard detailing note about deviations in galvanized pile penetration is now available.

'''[[903.4 Overhead Sign Mounting#The standard footing for steel and aluminum box truss|EPG 903.4.6 Span, Cantilever and Butterfly Box Trusses]]'''

4/16/18: Guidance about drilled shaft footings has been clarified. MoDOT may be the designer of the footing and if not, others will have to submit signed and sealed drawings.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

4/13/18: In [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#D. Temporary Bridge (Notes for Bridge Standard Drawings)|EPG 751.50 D. Temporary Bridge]], revisions include a new clarifying note D1.5 and replacing an archaic option in D1.21 with the current option. In [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#H9. Thrie Beam and Other Rail Types (Notes for Bridge Standard Drawings)|EPG 751.50 H9. Thrie Beam and Other Rail Types]], revisions include the new H9.29 for two thrie beam standard drawings.

'''[[751.8 LRFD Concrete Box Culverts#751.8.3.4 Wing Walls on Rock|EPG 751.8.3.4 Wing Walls on Rock]]'''

4/11/18: New guidance for culvert wing walls on rock is now available.

'''Inclusion of DOL Wage Rates In Contracts'''

4/10/2018: In [[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#110.1 Wage Rates (Guidance for Sec 110.1)|EPG 110.1 Wage Rates]], guidance about including the correct wage rate order from the Dept. of Labor on MoDOT projects was updated.

'''[[127.29 Storm Water#Special Watersheds where MoDOT|Special Watersheds where MoDOT has been assigned a Wasteload Allocation]]'''

4/9/18: Guidance to go with the MDNR permit agreement has been added.

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#Required Notices and Posters|Project Bulletin Board Inspection Rate]] '''

4/5/18: The bulletin board inspection rate was revised from every two months to every three months.

'''[[:Category:749 Hydrologic Analysis#749.5.3 Time of Concentration|EPG 749.5.3 Time of Concentration]]'''

4/5/18: Time of Concentration guidance was revised by providing an optional combination of Kirby-Hathaway and Kirpich equations and adding the optional low slope factor presented in new research.

'''[[media:747 Bridge Survey Report April 2018.docx|Bridge Survey Report]]'''

4/4/18: The latest version of this form is now available.

Main Page

2018-06-28T18:03:58Z

EPGsysop: EPG 236.7.5.4

[[Image:EPG 2013b.jpg|1030px|center]]

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:0px; border:3px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 100%; background:#E3C87E" width="1030px" align="center"
|-
|rowspan="2" align="right" |'''HELPFUL EPG VIDEOS: || ||align="left"|''' <BIG>'''[[media:Logging into the EPG.wmv|•Logging into the EPG]] ||align="left"|''' <BIG>'''[[media:Help Finding EPG Info.wmv|•Finding Info in the EPG]]'''
|-
| ||align="left" colspan="2"|''' <Big>[[media:Article History and Receiving.wmv|•Article History & How to Receive EMails When Articles are Revised]]
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''___________'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''<Big>Want help on how to update your EPG guidance?  It is available at [[:Help Article#EPG Approval Process|EPG Approval Process]].'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''___________'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''<Big>[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/highwayspecs.htm The Electronic MoDOT Spec Book for Mobile Devices] is now available. You may also [https://www6.modot.mo.gov/eMoDOTWeb/jsp/signon/signon.jsp sign up for E-Update notices]. To receive notices regarding Engineering Policy Revisions, select "Engineering Policy" then mark the appropriate subjects of interest. '''
|}

<div style="padding-bottom: .3em; margin: 0 .5em .5em"></div>
{| cellspacing="3"
|- valign="top" width="100%"
|style="border: 1px solid #696969; color: #000; background-color: #A9A9A9"|<big><center>'''WELCOME'''</center></big>
| valign="top" width="60%" cellspacing="3" cellpadding="3" style="border: 1px solid #FF8C00; background:#FFA500" align="center"|'''<big>RECENT POLICY CHANGES IN THE EPG</big>'''
|-
|valign="top" style="border: 1px solid #A9A9A9; color: #000; background-color: #F8F8FF"|
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 23, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> Employees at the Kansas City District General Services Garage get a demonstration of Jeff, the [http://www.modot.org/kansascity/newrelease/District4Release.shtml?action=displaySSI&newsId=215977 new, agile mini-robot] (lower center), that will be used to conduct some surveys and pipe inspections. The robot will spare workers from dangerous situations such as cave-ins. </center>''']]
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 18, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> The new [http://www.modot.org/northeast/newsandinformation/District3Release.shtml?action=displaySSI&newsId=215953 I-70 interchange at Warrenton] will include three roundabouts. The $8.5 million project is expected to be completed this fall. </center>''']]
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 7, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> [https://paceconstructionstl.com/ Pace Construction] crews work on the final preparations to complete a [http://www.modot.org/stlouis/major_projects/I-44atRoute141DesignBuild.htm new flyover ramp between Rte. 141 and I-44] in Valley Park. The ramp is one portion of a [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=Category:139_Design_-_Build design-build construction project] to be completed by July 15 that reduces congestion and improves traffic flow through and in the vicinity of the interchange. </center>''']]
|}

MoDOT has made great strides to build a good transportation system and increase taxpayers' trust in its ability to deliver what was promised. Innovative concepts, such as [[:Category:143 Practical Design|Practical Design]] and [[:Category:139 Design - Build|design-build]], were used to deliver those commitments and have made MoDOT a leader in the transportation industry.

These forward-thinking, innovative concepts are reflected in the ''ENGINEERING POLICY GUIDE'' (EPG). This document provides a single reference for all engineering and engineering-related guidance by combining the former [http://sharepoint/sites/de/RealEstate/SitePages/Home.aspx Right of Way], [http://sharepoint/sites/de/Pages/default.aspx Design], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/br/pages/default.aspx Bridge], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/cm/Pages/default.aspx Construction], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/tr/Pages/default.aspx Traffic] and [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/mt/default.aspx Maintenance] manuals.

MediaWiki, the engine behind the Wikipedia on the World Wide Web, is the software delivering the EPG. Over 50 million hits on the EPG endorse this format to be easy to navigate and pleasing to read. A small [[:Help:Contents|'''HELP ARTICLE''']] is included to assist with helpful hints on how to use the EPG as well as other points of interest.

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="background-color: #F8F8FF"
|-
|colspan="5" | '''Perhaps you've wondered how many hits the most popular EPG articles have. As of late June, the numbers of hits are:'''
|-
|'''20.''' [[:Category:136 Local Public Agency (LPA) Policy|EPG 136]]|| 171278
|| '''10.''' [[751.5 Standard Details|EPG 751.5]]|| align="right"| 241641
|-
|'''19.''' [[:Category:134 Engineering Professional Services|EPG 134]]|| 180109 || '''9.''' [[616.23 Traffic Control for Field Operations|EPG 616.23]]||align="right"| 276044
|-
|'''18.''' [[136.4 Consultant Selection and Consultant Contract Management|EPG 136.4]]|| 180574 || '''8.''' [[:Category:600 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION|EPG 600]]||align="right"| 285214
|-
|'''17.''' [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40]]|| 180743 || '''7.''' [[:Category:100 GENERAL|EPG 100]]||align="right"| 335130
|-
|'''16.''' [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B)|EPG 620.2]]|| 191789 || '''6.''' [[:Category:700 STRUCTURES AND HYDRAULICS|EPG 700]]||align="right"| 352151
|-
|'''15.''' [[:Category:903 Highway Signing|EPG 903]]|| 200037 || '''5.''' [[:Category:900 TRAFFIC CONTROL|EPG 900]]||align="right"| 370826
|-
|'''14.''' [[:Category:200 GEOMETRICS|EPG 200]]|| 211862 || '''4.''' [[136.12 Figures, Glossary and Other Useful Links|EPG 136.12]] ||align="right"| 393784
|-
|'''13.''' [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50]]|| 214538 || '''3.''' [[:Category:101 Standard Forms|EPG 101]]||align="right"| 396987
|-
|'''12.''' [[136.9 Plans, Specs and Estimates (PSE)|EPG 136.9]]|| 221105 || '''2.''' [[:Category:751 LRFD Bridge Design Guidelines|EPG 751]]||align="right"| 459831
|-
|width="130"|'''11.''' [[:Category:616 Temporary Traffic Control|EPG 616]]|| 225696 || width="150"| '''1.''' EPG Main Page||align="right"| 3170836
|}

|valign="top" cellspacinepgg="0" cellpadding="5" style="border: 1px solid #FFA500; background:#ffdead"|
'''[[236.7 Negotiation#236.7.5.4 Acquisition from State of Missouri Agencies|EPG 236.7.5.4 Acquisition from Conservation Commission and the University of Missouri]]'''

6/28/18: Comments about MoDOT acquiring property from the Univ. of MO and Dept. of Conservation were added.

'''[[238.2 Land Surveying#238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review|EPG 238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review]]'''

6/26/18: Guidance was clarified with current business practices.

'''[[751.11 Bearings#ASTM F1554 Grade 105 anchor bolts|Design of Elastomeric Bearings' Anchor Bolts]]'''

6/5/18: ASTM F1554 Grade 105 anchor bolts may be used when Grade 55 is not adequate.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#(B3.2)|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

6/1/18: Note B3.2 was clarified.

'''[[751.10 General Superstructure#751.10.3.1 Type, Alignment and Spacing|EPG 751.10.3 Bridge Deck Drainage - Slab Drains]]'''

5/24/18: Guidance now states the allowed slab drain color coatings.

'''[[106.12 Pre-Acceptance Lists (PAL)#Upon receipt and review|EPG 106.12 PAL Material Arrival Confirmation]]'''

5/22/18: Pre-Acceptance Identification Tag guidance was clarified to allow for identifying PAL material shipped to MoDOT projects.

'''[[:Category:806 Pollution, Erosion and Sediment Control#Design Guidance|EPG 806.7 Temporary Erosion Control Blankets Design Guidance]]'''

5/17/18: The types of erosion control blankets were increased and guidance now includes a matrix for choosing blanket types based on the region, length of slope and the necessary blanket duration.

'''2-loop and 3-loop Concrete Barriers'''

5/17/18: In [[616.19 Quality Standards for Temporary Traffic Control Devices#2- and 3-Loop Type F|EPG 616.19.2.5 Temporary Traffic Barriers]] and [[617.2 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 617#Temporary Concrete Traffic Barrier|EPG 617.2 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 617]], guidance was clarified for anchoring 2-loop and 3-loop concrete barriers on asphalt, composite and concrete pavements in work zones.

'''Design Agreements and Contracts'''

5/14/18: Those who need to review [[153.8 Design#DE43|DE43, DE44 and DE46-49]] prior to contractual execution has been updated.

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#Uniformed Services|Three new Federal Aid Projects Posters]]'''

5/11/18: Three new posters are required to be displayed on Federal-Aid project sites: [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/27_USERRA.pdf Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act (USERRA)],
[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/28e_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (English)] and [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/29s_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (Spanish)].

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2|EPG 110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2]]'''

5/9/18: New guidance agreed to by the DOL is now available about the DOL's PW-2 form.

'''[[231.4 Shoulder Width#A minimum shy distance at least|EPG 231.4 Shoulder Width]]'''

5/9/18: Guidance about guardrail placement from the edge of the shoulder was clarified.

'''[[751.1 Preliminary Design#751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating|EPG 751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating]]'''

5/3/18: New bridge preliminary design guidance for assessing asbestos and lead considerations for structure removal, rehabs and recoatings as well as how to address these considerations on the Bridge Memorandum.

'''[[237.14 Electronic Design Data Delivery#237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction|EPG 237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction]]'''

5/2/18: Guidance about the initial request for the Construction files has been clarified.

'''Outdoor Advertising'''

4/30/18: Guidance in [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.8.5 Vegetation Site Inspection|EPG 236.16.8.5 Vegetation Site Inspection]], [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.4 Cutting of Vegetation|EPG 236.16.15.4 Cutting of Vegetation]], [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.6 Trimming of Trees|EPG 236.16.15.6 Trimming of Trees]] and [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.9 Releasing a Vegetation Permit|EPG 236.16.15.9 Releasing a Vegetation Permit]] have been impacted by Administrative Rule revisions.

'''[[102.2 Contractor Performance Rating System#102.2.7 Performance Discussion|EPG 102.2.7 Performance Discussion]]'''

4/27/18: Guidance for when certified mail is necessary for the Contractor Performance Rating has been updated.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#(E2.27)|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

4/25/18: A new standard detailing note about deviations in galvanized pile penetration is now available.

'''[[903.4 Overhead Sign Mounting#The standard footing for steel and aluminum box truss|EPG 903.4.6 Span, Cantilever and Butterfly Box Trusses]]'''

4/16/18: Guidance about drilled shaft footings has been clarified. MoDOT may be the designer of the footing and if not, others will have to submit signed and sealed drawings.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

4/13/18: In [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#D. Temporary Bridge (Notes for Bridge Standard Drawings)|EPG 751.50 D. Temporary Bridge]], revisions include a new clarifying note D1.5 and replacing an archaic option in D1.21 with the current option. In [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#H9. Thrie Beam and Other Rail Types (Notes for Bridge Standard Drawings)|EPG 751.50 H9. Thrie Beam and Other Rail Types]], revisions include the new H9.29 for two thrie beam standard drawings.

'''[[751.8 LRFD Concrete Box Culverts#751.8.3.4 Wing Walls on Rock|EPG 751.8.3.4 Wing Walls on Rock]]'''

4/11/18: New guidance for culvert wing walls on rock is now available.

'''Inclusion of DOL Wage Rates In Contracts'''

4/10/2018: In [[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#110.1 Wage Rates (Guidance for Sec 110.1)|EPG 110.1 Wage Rates]], guidance about including the correct wage rate order from the Dept. of Labor on MoDOT projects was updated.

'''[[127.29 Storm Water#Special Watersheds where MoDOT|Special Watersheds where MoDOT has been assigned a Wasteload Allocation]]'''

4/9/18: Guidance to go with the MDNR permit agreement has been added.

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#Required Notices and Posters|Project Bulletin Board Inspection Rate]] '''

4/5/18: The bulletin board inspection rate was revised from every two months to every three months.

'''[[:Category:749 Hydrologic Analysis#749.5.3 Time of Concentration|EPG 749.5.3 Time of Concentration]]'''

4/5/18: Time of Concentration guidance was revised by providing an optional combination of Kirby-Hathaway and Kirpich equations and adding the optional low slope factor presented in new research.

'''[[media:747 Bridge Survey Report April 2018.docx|Bridge Survey Report]]'''

4/4/18: The latest version of this form is now available.

236.7 Negotiation

2018-06-28T17:30:02Z

EPGsysop: /* 236.7.5.4 Acquisition from State of Missouri Agencies */Per RW, clarified when we acquire property from the State of MO, specifically, the Univ. of MO and Dept. of Conservation

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:15px; border: 1px solid #cccccc; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="310px" align="right"
|-
|'''Forms'''
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Administrative%20Settlement%20Justification%20Letter%20Form%207.3%203%201.docx Administrative Settlement Justification Letter (Form 7-3.3.1)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Application%20Employment%20Contract%20Negotiator%20Form%207.8.1.docx Application for Employment as Contract Negotiator (Form 7.8.1)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%206_Appraisal%20and%20Appraisal%20Review/Appraisal%20Review%20and%20Approval%20of%20Just%20Comparison%20Form%206.4.3.docx Appraisal Review and Approval of Just Compensation (Form 6.4.3)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Contract%20Negotiator%20Performance%20Form%207.8.7.docx Contract Negotiator Performance Evaluation (Form 7-8.7)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Disclaimer%20of%20Interest%20in%20Tenant%20Owner%20Form%207.2.5C.docx Disclaimer of Interest in Tenant Owned Improvement (Form 7-2.5C)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Donation%20Letter%20waiver%20of%20Appraisal%20Form%207.2.12.docx Donation Letter & Waiver of Appraisal (Form 7-2.12)]
|-
|[http://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-pdf/fw9.pdf?portlet=3 IRS Form W-9]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Negotiator's%20Report%20Form%207.2.12.doc Negotiator's Report (Form 7-2.13)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20Form%207.6.3.docx Offer Letter (Form 7-6.3)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20prior%20Cond%20Form%207.2.5.D.docx Offer Letter - Combined Fee and Tenant Owners - Use Prior to Condemnation (Form 7.2.5D)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20Owner%20Form7.2.5.A.docx Offer Letter - Fee Owner (Form 7.2.5A)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20Tenant%20Owner%20No%20Declaimer%20Form%207.2.5.B.2.docx Offer Letter - Tenant Owner No Disclaimer (Form 7.2.5B(2))]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20Tenant%20Form7.2.5.B.1.docx Offer Letter - Tenant Owner with Disclaimer (Form 7.2.5B(1))]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Preliminary%20Contract%20Form%207.8.3.docx Preliminary Contract Negotiation Fee Estimate (Form 7-8.3)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Pre-trial%20report%20Exh%205E.1.docx Pre-Trial Report]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Opinion%20Survey%20Form%20236.7.docx Property Owner Opinion Survey]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Prorata%20-%20Owners%20section.docx Prorata Real Estate Tax Claim, Owner's Section (Form 7-2.22C)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Prorata%20-%20MoDOT%20section.docx Prorata Real Estate Tax Claim, MoDOT's Section (Form 7-2.22D)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Real%20Estate%20Reporting%201009.S%20Form%207.7.4.docx Real Estate Reporting for Form 1099-S (Form 7-7.4)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Renewal%20Application%20Contract%20Negotiator%20Form%207.8.1.A.docx Renewal Application for Employment as Contract Negotiator (Form 7-8.1a)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Request%20Allocation%20Gross%20Proceeds%20Form%207.7.3.docx Request for Allocation of Gross Proceeds (Form 7-7.3)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Request%20for%20TIN%20and%20Allocation%20of%20Gross%20Proceeds%20Form%207.7.3.A.docx Request for Taxpayer Identification Number and Allocation of Gross Proceeds - Sample Letter (Form 7-7.3A)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Requirements%20for%20the%20Retention%20Form%207.4.2C.docx Requirements for the Retention of Improvements (Form 7-4.2C)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Roster%20of%20Approved%20Contract%20Negotiators.pdf Roster of Approved Contract Negotiators (Form 7-8.2)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Sample%20Ltr%20Release%20Funds%20Held%20in%20Escrow%20Form%207.1.17.docx Sample Letter - Release of Funds Held in Escrow (Form 7-1.17C)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Sample%20Ltr%20Special%20Benefit%20Offer%20Letter%20Form%207.9.2.docx Sample Letter - Special Benefit Offer Letter (Form 7-9.2)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Sample%20Ltr%20Transmittal%20of%20Check%20to%20Owner%20Form%207.1.17.docx Sample Letter - Transmittal of Check to Owner (Form 7-1.17A)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Sample%20Ltr%20Transmittal%20of%20Checks%20to%20Escrow%20Agent%20Form%207.1.17.B.docx Sample Letter - Transmittal of Checks to Escrow Agent (Form 7-1.17B)]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Settlement%20Trial%20Report%20Exh%205E.2.docx Settlement/Trial Report]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Written%20Notice%20of%20the%20Intended%20Acq%20of%20ODA%20Form%20236.7.2.6.docx Written Notice of the Intended Acquisition for Outdoor Advertising (Form 236.7.2.6)]
|-
|Forms RW2, RW8, RW10, RW15, RW20, RW23, RW25, RW33, RW34 and RW35 are accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements].
|}

==236.7.1 General Provisions==

===236.7.1.1 Authority===

The Missouri Highways and Transportation Commission is empowered by law, [http://www.moga.mo.gov/STATUTES/C227.HTM Chapter 227.120, RSMo.], to purchase, lease or condemn lands in the name of the Missouri Highways and Transportation Commission for purposes deemed necessary for the proper and economical construction and maintenance of state highways. The Commission approves by Certification the detail plans of each project and authorizes the Chief Engineer to acquire all the land, property and rights indicated on said plans by purchase or the Chief Counsel to acquire by condemnation. The Asst. to the State Design Engineer - Right of Way has authority to acquire land, property and rights as indicated on right of way plans through the district right of way offices.

===236.7.1.2 Project Authorization===

Acquisition of property rights cannot commence on any project until the project manager obtains acquisition authority as described in [[236.3 Administration#236.3.4 Right of Way Acquisition Authority and Project Funding|EPG 236.3.4 Right of Way Acquisition Authority and Project Funding]].

===236.7.1.3 Hardship Acquisition Authorization===

Justification for a [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=236.3_Administration#236.3.4.6_Request_for_Hardship_Acquisition hardship acquisition] must be reviewed and approved by the Asst. to the State Design Engineer - Right of Way on a parcel-by-parcel basis.

===236.7.1.4 Protective Buying Authorization===

Justification for a protective purchase to prevent imminent development and increased costs of a parcel, must be reviewed and approved by the Asst. to the State Design Engineer - Right of Way on a parcel-by-parcel basis. Refer to [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=236.3_Administration#236.3.4.7_Contents_of_Request EPG 236.3.4.7] for more information.

===236.7.1.5 Who Conducts Negotiations===

'''Staff Negotiations'''

The term "negotiator" as used here refers to any member of the right of way staff performing negotiations for property or property rights.

By authority of the Missouri Highways and Transportation Commission, negotiations for the acquisition of real property and/or property rights for highway purposes are conducted by qualified right of way personnel. Such personnel must meet the minimum qualifications for the position of right of way specialist as outlined in the Missouri Department of Transportation's Job Specifications Manual. Other right of way personnel not meeting these minimum qualifications can perform negotiations under the direct guidance of the district right of way manager, the chief negotiator, or a qualified senior or certified right of way specialist.

Individuals, who determine values on waiver valuations, may establish just compensation as well as negotiate with the owner for acquisition. An appraiser/negotiator, must fulfill the requirements of owner contact as outlined in [[236.7 Negotiation#236.7.2 Guidelines and Procedures|EPG 236.7.2]].

'''Contract Negotiations'''

Contract negotiators may conduct negotiations under written agreement as described in [[236.7 Negotiation#236.7.8 Contract Negotiation|EPG 236.7.8]]. The amount of the fee shall be established on a parcel basis. The Right of Way Section must approve contract negotiators prior to employment. The Right of Way Section maintains a Roster of Approved Contract Negotiators (Form 7-8.2).

===236.7.1.6 Acquisition of Real Property Interest===

All rights, title, interest of fee hold and subordinate interests in real property are to be acquired as necessary, for the proper and economical construction, operation, protection, support, preservation and maintenance of state highways.

Generally, the use of Partial Deeds of Releases or Subordinations, on mortgages and deeds of trust are '''not''' necessary when:

:*The approved compensation is based on the use of a waiver valuation.
:*Only a partial acquisition is involved and the property remaining has adequate value to secure the existing mortgage or deed of trust.
:*Access rights are '''not''' being acquired.
:*The property is '''not''' being condemned.

This list is a general guide and is not intended to be all-inclusive. The district right of way manager should be aware of all situations waiving partial releases and subordinations.

The Right of Way Section, with concurrence from Chief Counsel's Office, approves exceptions to the acquisition of other property rights on an individual case or project basis. Exceptions may be, but are not limited to, the reservation of subsurface mineral rights, gas storage rights or a limitation on vertical dimension for multiple uses.

===236.7.1.7 Public Information Brochure===

A brochure entitled '''[http://www.modot.mo.gov/central/documents/PathwaysforProgress_Final.pdf Pathways for Progress]''' is available to the general public and for distribution at all public hearings for highway projects. It briefly describes the department's general procedures in the phases of appraisal, negotiation, settlement, closing, mediation and eminent domain.

===236.7.1.8 Pre-Negotiation Public Relations Contact===

Acquisition personnel may be assigned, commensurate with anticipated problems, to make calls upon property owners and discuss acquisition procedures and provide general information concerning the proposed highway project. An employee, who may later be involved with the appraisal, negotiation, or relocation for the project, may make such calls. Care should be taken to avoid discussing assumptions, possible offers, possible damage, or value conclusions. This initial call should be brief and is only intended to provide project information, and promote the public relations.

===236.7.1.9 Negotiating Through a Third Party===

Negotiations shall not be conducted through a third party unless the property owner has provided written authorization, or the third party is a legally appointed representative for the owner. If an attorney has been retained, and the owner has provided a written authority, all negotiations must be conducted with the attorney unless a written waiver of negotiations is received from the attorney.

===236.7.1.10 Initiation of Negotiations===

The term "Initiation of Negotiations" relates to the date on which the department presents the owner of the subject parcel, or his designated representative, a written offer for the property or rights to be acquired. When non-resident owners are involved who cannot be contacted in person, initiation of negotiations for the parcel shall be the date such owner or his designated representative received the first communication by mail or telephone from the department in which a monetary offer to purchase is made. (Certified mail with return receipt requested must be used when the above contact is made by mail to establish and document the date that the written offer is received by the relocatee or by his representative.)

===236.7.1.11 Relocation Assistance Information===

Residential owner occupants being displaced are to be provided an explanation of the relocation benefits for which they are eligible. Offers to acquire property and/or property rights are not to be made to displaced owner occupants until the owner can be provided with the required relocation information.

===236.7.1.12 Relocation Section Notices===

[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%208_Relocation/Initiation%20of%20Negotiations%20Statement%20From%20236.8.6.5.docx "Initiation of Negotiations Statement"] (RA Form 8-6.5)

This form is to be submitted to the district relocation section immediately after the first initiation of negotiation on a project, and immediately after initiation of negotiations for each individual parcel, affected by the relocation program. This form is not applicable to parcels not affected by the relocation program.

[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%208_Relocation/236.8.6.8(b)%20Acquisition%20Statement.docx "Acquisition Statement"] (RA Form 8-6.8(b))

This form is to be completed by the negotiator and submitted to the relocation section immediately after all interest in the parcel is acquired when the relocation program affects the parcel.

===236.7.1.13 Pre-Negotiation Preparation===

The accumulation of materials and information necessary to conduct and complete negotiations for the orderly and efficient acquisition of the proposed property and property rights is the logical first step in negotiation. At a minimum, the negotiator should be supplied with the following information:

:*Title reports of all recorded interests
:*Documents necessary to acquire all interests
:*Right of way plans
:*Appraisal reports
:*Offer letter

In order to make an informed explanation of the proposed acquisition to an owner, the negotiator should make a comprehensive study of the plans, title report, documents and appraisal report.

===236.7.1.14 Delivery of Payments===

'''Owners and Tenants'''

At the discretion of the district right of way manager any full-time right of way employee may deliver payment checks for acquisition of property interests.

Upon personal delivery of each check the responsible right of way employee is to obtain the signature of the recipient acknowledging receipt of the payment.

Payments mailed to owners shall be by certified mail with return receipt requested. A [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Sample%20Ltr%20Transmittal%20of%20Check%20to%20Owner%20Form%207.1.17.docx sample letter] (Form 7-1.17A) is available for sending checks to owners/tenants.

'''Escrow Agents'''

Payments to escrow agents may be delivered by any person or by certified mail with return receipt requested. Submission of payments to escrow agents shall be [[media:236.7 Form 7-1.17B.doc|by letter]] (Form 7-1.17B). Owners are to be notified in writing of the date their payment is delivered to escrow agent.

'''Release of Funds in Escrow'''

To release funds retained in escrow for removal of improvements, etc., the escrow agent shall be notified by [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Sample%20Ltr%20Release%20Funds%20Held%20in%20Escrow%20Form%207.1.17.docx written notice] (Form 7-2.17C) with a copy mailed to owner involved. Escrow agents shall furnish proof of disbursement of all funds for parcel files.

===236.7.1.15 Recording of Documents===

All documents conveying land, easements, realty rights, mortgage releases and restrictive easements to the Commission, regardless of the consideration recited therein, shall be recorded in the appropriate recorder of deeds office.

It is not required to record disclaimers, rights of entry, releases of outdoor advertising rights and signs acquired, releases for LP tanks, or other documents that do not convey an interest in land being acquired. If tenants have a recorded lease, it may be necessary to record any of the above documents that may impact lease provisions.

Special agreements prepared by the Chief Counsel that convey, alter or qualify property rights between the parties will be recorded unless otherwise indicated by the Chief Counsel's office.

==236.7.2 Guidelines and Procedures==

===236.7.2.1 Purpose===

This information establishes guidelines and procedures related to the acquisition function in negotiations for land, property and rights needed for the proper and economical construction and maintenance of state highways. The intent and purpose is to assure uniform acquisition practices, which will provide consistent and equitable treatment for owners and tenants of real property acquired.

===236.7.2.2 General Procedure===

All negotiations shall be expeditious and result in the property owner receiving just compensation; the settlement being just and fair to the owner and the public; every courtesy, consideration and patience being extended to the property owner; and create trust in the Missouri Department of Transportation Department and its employees.

All offers shall represent the approved amount of Just Compensation as determined through the department's valuation procedures. The negotiator shall make a reasonable effort to demonstrate and promote confidence in the Approved Just Compensation offer.

If the negotiator discovers facts, which were not recognized in the Just Compensation, the information shall be made available to the district right of way manager. Full consideration to and evaluation of these items will be made prior to continuation of negotiations.

Negotiators must demonstrate that they represent the interests of the property owner as well as those of the public. Care should be exercised at all times to protect the interests of owners who may be unfamiliar or inexperienced in real estate transactions.

Negotiators are required to maintain a written Record of Negotiations, documenting that all elements of the transaction were given adequate consideration and that there was a mutual understanding between the negotiator and the property owner.

===236.7.2.3 Prompt Offer of Just Compensation===

All offers of Approved Just Compensation shall be promptly presented to property owners or their designated representatives. A minimum offer of $500 shall be made to a property owner when the appraised value is determined to be less than $500. District management should determine the appropriate timing for delivery of offers within the scope of good negotiating practices. An offer letter must be presented to the owner at least 30 days prior to filing a condemnation petition, as further described in [[236.10 Right Of Way Condemnation|EPG 236.10]].

===236.7.2.4 Offer Letter and Supporting Documentation===

Use [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20Owner%20Form7.2.5.A.docx Form 7.2.5A], [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20Tenant%20Form7.2.5.B.1.docx 7.2.5B(1)], or [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20Tenant%20Owner%20No%20Declaimer%20Form%207.2.5.B.2.docx 7.2.5B(2)]. Delete unused phrases and instructions. Use the date the offer letter is delivered or mailed to the owner.

'''A. Delivery of Offer Letter'''

Offer Letters must be hand delivered or sent by certified mail. A cover letter providing an explanation of the proposed acquisition and the supporting documents described in EPG 236.7.2.4C should be included if the offer is delivered by mail. If an offer must be made by phone, it must be followed with an offer letter and all required attachments sent by certified mail.

When an owner has authorized a designated representative and so notified MoDOT in writing, or there is a court-appointed representative, the Offer Letter need only by delivered to the representative.

'''B. Initiations of Negotiations'''

Delivery of an Offer Letter establishes the Initiation of Negotiation date for a parcel. Initiation of negotiations is established by the delivery of an offer letter to one owner of a multiple ownership, but all owners are to be furnished all relevant offer items described in EPG 236.7.2.4C.

'''C. Supporting Documents'''

Upon initiation of negotiations for the acquisition of property or property rights from a property, each owner or representative will be provided with the following:

:*Offer letter
:*Appraisal or waiver valuation
:*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Pathways%20for%20Progress.pdf Pathways for Progress brochure]
:*Conveyance documents
:*Blank Escrow Agreement, if applicable
:*Pro Rata Real Estate Tax Claim form
:*Plan sheet, portion of plan sheet or plat illustrating the acquisition and the remainder
:*When applicable and appropriate, provide [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Request%20Allocation%20Gross%20Proceeds%20Form%207.7.3.docx Request for Allocation of Gross Proceeds], (Form 7-7.3,or [http://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-pdf/fw9.pdf?portlet=3 IRS Form W-9]).

'''D. Donation'''

An offer letter is not required when requesting donated property and property rights. Refer to [[#236.7.2.11 Donation of Real Property|EPG 236.7.2.11 Donation of Real Property]].

===236.7.2.5 Offer Letter Formats===

'''A. Fee Owners'''

Applicable portions of the[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20Owner%20Form7.2.5.A.docx Offer Letter - Fee Owner] (Form 7.2.5A), along with the appraisal or waiver valuation, are to be delivered to the fee owner or a designated representative.

'''B. Tenant Owners'''

:1. Offer Letter - Fee Interest Acquired or Disclaimed

:[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20Tenant%20Form7.2.5.B.1.docx Offer Letter-Tenant Owner] (Form 7.2.5B(1)) is to be used for offers to owners of tenant-owned improvements when the owners of the land have conveyed their interest, or when the landowners have disclaimed all interest in the tenant-owned improvements.

:2. Offer Letter - Fee Interest '''Not''' Acquired or Disclaimed

:When the land owners have not conveyed or disclaimed their interests in the tenant-owned improvements, the offer to tenant-owners will be made by use of a letter designated as [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20Tenant%20Owner%20No%20Declaimer%20Form%207.2.5.B.2.docx Offer Letter - Tenant Owner No Disclaimer], (Form 7.2.5B(2)) with a [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Disclaimer%20of%20Interest%20in%20Tenant%20Owner%20Form%207.2.5C.docx Disclaimer] (Form 7.2.5C) attached.

:The tenant offer will be conditioned upon the tenant obtaining execution of the necessary disclaimers. Completion of the transaction including Release of Structures and Leasehold, (CCO RW15) (Form RW15 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements]) and payment shall not be made unless the landowners convey their interest by deed or provide a disclaimer.

'''C. Disclaimer by Owner in Tenant Owned Improvements'''

When a separate amount of just compensation is approved for an improvement owned by a party other than the owner of the land, payment for such improvement shall not be made unless the owner of the land disclaims all interest in the tenant-owned improvement. The fee owner may disclaim interest in such improvement by execution of either a deed of conveyance of right, title and interest or a [[media:236.7 Form 7-2.5C.docx|Disclaimer]] (Form 7.2.5(C)).

When the fee owner does not execute a deed or a disclaimer, the offer of just compensation for the improvement and the disclaimer will be presented to the tenant owner with the condition that settlement will be made provided that the tenant is successful in obtaining execution of the necessary disclaimers.

'''D. Combined Fee-Owner and Tenant-Owner Offer Letter for Condemnation Purposes'''

Immediately prior to condemnation proceedings for a parcel where tenant-owned structures are involved, a letter designated [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20prior%20Cond%20Form%207.2.5.D.docx Offer Letter - Combined Fee and Tenant Owners], (Form 7.2.5D), is to be presented to all fee owners of record or their designated representative with a copy of the letter to all tenant owners.

This offer will be the total of the amounts of just compensation approved for fee and tenant owners. The brochure, deed and valuation document are not required with this letter.

'''E. Revised Offers'''

When the approved just compensation has been presented to the owner and it is revised through the appraisal process, it is necessary to provide such owners with an offer letter reflecting the revised figure and reason for the revision.

:'''1'''. Fee Owners

:The first paragraph of [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20Owner%20Form7.2.5.A.docx Offer Letter - Fee Owner] (Form 7.2.5A) will be omitted and replaced with the
following paragraph for revised offers.

::"In a previous letter you were offered the sum of $____________ for certain real property and rights needed for improvement of the above highway project. It is necessary to revise that offer previously made to you because ____________."

:Use the remaining paragraphs from the original letter, and the following, if appropriate. “Also attached is a revised valuation document”.

:'''2'''. Tenant Owners

:The first paragraph of Offer Letter - Tenant Owner, Forms [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20Tenant%20Form7.2.5.B.1.docx 7.2.5B(1)] and [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Offer%20Letter%20Tenant%20Owner%20No%20Declaimer%20Form%207.2.5.B.2.docx 7.2.5B(2)], will be omitted and replaced with the following paragraph for revised offers.

::"In a previous letter you were offered the sum of $____________ for certain structures located on property needed for improvement of the above highway project. It is necessary to revise that offer previously made to you because _____________________."

:Use the remaining paragraphs from the original letter, and the following, if appropriate.

'''F. Rescinded Offers'''

In certain situations, it may be necessary to rescind an offer due to a plan change, delay in funding, etc., that eliminates the need to acquire any property and property rights. When this occurs, a written notice rescinding the offer shall be sent to the property owner by certified mail. The notice should include the reason an acquisition from the property is no longer needed.

===236.7.2.6 Improvements Acquired or Damaged===

'''A. Interest in Improvements Acquired'''

An equal interest shall be acquired in all buildings, structures or other improvements determined to be a part of the real property when such improvements are to be removed from the land acquired.

'''B. Improvements Located Partially Within the Acquisition Area'''

Improvements located partially within the acquisition area that are designated for removal as indicated by temporary easements shall be totally removed, unless the owner retains the improvement and cuts it at the new boundary line.

The decision to allow an owner to retain and cut an improvement at the new boundary line, must be made during negotiations. In making this decision the owner is to understand that the Department will have to reevaluate its offer through the appraisal process. If a revised offer is unacceptable to the owner, the original offer and plan for total removal of the improvement will apply and if necessary condemned as originally designed.

'''C. Fee-Owned Improvements'''

Owners will be compensated for any loss in fair market value of improvements that are not required to be removed but are adversely affected as a result of the acquisition, as determined by appraisal.

'''D. Tenant-Owned Improvements'''

Tenant-owned improvements will be acquired by Release of Structures and Leasehold, (Form 7-2.7D (CCO RW15)). (Form RW15 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements].)

:'''1'''. Improvements Acquired or Damaged - Release of Structures and Leasehold

:Tenants who have the right or obligation to remove real property improvements that contribute to the real estate value, as determined in the appraisal process, have a compensable interest in those improvements. Compensation may include one or more of the following:

::*The contributory fair market value for the improvement being acquired, or the value for removal purposes which ever is greater
::*Damages the improvement suffers as a result of the acquisition
::*The value of any leasehold interest

:'''2'''. No Payment to Tenant Before Fee Interest Acquired or Disclaimed

:No payment shall be made to a tenant for an improvement unless the landowner involved conveys or disclaims all interest in the improvement.

:'''3'''. Condemnation of Tenant-owned Improvements

:Eminent Domain Law provides the same rights and protections to tenants and fee owners. Any tenant has the right to reject payment for improvements as outlined above and obtain payment for such property interests through eminent domain proceedings applicable to Missouri law. In these situations it will be necessary to condemn all interest in the property including the fee owner.
<div id="E. Acquisition of Outdoor Advertising Billboards"></div>

'''E. Acquisition of Outdoor Advertising Billboards'''

Outdoor advertising structures are defined as all signs, billboards, drawings or paintings which advertise activities conducted elsewhere or services and/or products provided other than at the subject property. They should not be confused with on-premise signs, which advertise activities conducted on the premises or services and/or products provided on the property.

It has been determined that owners of outdoor advertising signs have the right or obligation to remove such structures at the termination of the lease or agreement. Therefore, such structures are generally acquired like other tenant-owned improvements, as addressed above, with the following exceptions.

:'''1'''. Outdoor Advertising Structures Considered Real Estate

:All outdoor advertising structures shall be valued as real estate and an offer made for just compensation. In the event a sign is categorized as Conforming out of Standard by the Outdoor Advertising staff, the right of way staff will follow the Sign Agreement Reset Program procedures.

:'''2'''. Salvage of Outdoor Advertising Billboards

:Retention and salvage of outdoor advertising structures is permitted, provided the offer is reduced by the salvage value established in the valuation process. The salvage value may be waived or reducted during negotiations to reach an administrative settlement.

:As a means to facilitate negotiations, district right of way may agree to leave the sign in place for a specified period of time by use of an Extension of Possession Agreement (CCO RW12). The agreement must state a maximum time period for the sign to be left in place, and a physical possession date must be agreed to by the parties. The physical possession date shall be specific, and not merely include phrases like, “until construction of the project,” “until needed for construction,” etc. For more information on removal procedures, refer to [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=236.5_Property_Management#236.5.26_Acquired_Improvements EPG 236.5.26].

:Outdoor advertising structures located partially within the acquisition area shall be totally removed unless the owner of the sign retains the structure and modifies it to completely avoid Commission owned property. Contact your local outdoor advertising permit specialist for specific requirements related to modifying existing outdoor advertising structures. See [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising|EPG 236.16]] for additional information pertaining to outdoor advertising.

The Outdoor Advertising Profile Report, which is generated by the outdoor advertising permit specialist, shall be completed by district right of way and returned to the outdoor advertising permit specialist once the acquisition of the billboard is complete.

'''Sign Agreement Reset Program – Partial Waiver and Reset Agreement'''

Legislation from 2012, HB1402, allows sign owners who meet the conforming out of standard sign criteria the option to accept just compensation or waive a portion of their right to just compensation and reset a qualifying sign. Sign owners that choose to accept just compensation are eligible to salvage the sign, however the sign permit will be cancelled by the Outdoor Advertising Specialist.

Conforming out of standard signs are categorized as signs that fail to meet the current statutory and administrative rule requirements but comply with the terms of the federal state agreement and meet the statutory requirements of 1999. (See [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.7.3 Conforming Out of Standard|EPG 236.16.7.3 Conforming Out of Standard]].)

Displaced signs will be reviewed by outdoor advertising staff to determine the sign qualifications. If the qualifying sign meets the reset requirements as determined by the Outdoor Advertising Profile Report (refer to [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.19 Sign Structures Affected by Highway Projects|EPG 236.16.19 Sign Structures Affected by Highway Projects]]), Right of Way staff will offer just compensation to the sign owner for the purchase of the sign. The sign owner will also be offered the sign reset option that allows them to move the sign elsewhere within the same property or on an adjoining property. It is the sign owners choice to accept either just compensation or the reset option.

Guidelines for the Conforming Out of Standard Sign Acquisition:

* Right of Way staff will notify outdoor advertising staff of an affected sign. Affected sign includes billboards located within the project limits.

* Outdoor Advertising staff will complete the Outdoor Advertising Profile Report (EPG 236.16.19) to determine qualification of the affected sign and provide a copy to the Right of Way Manager.

* If the sign is classified as Conforming Out of Standard, the right of way staff will provide the sign owner the [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Written%20Notice%20of%20the%20Intended%20Acq%20of%20ODA%20Form%20236.7.2.6.docx Written Notice of the Intended Acquisition for Outdoor Advertising (Form 236.7.2.6)].

* Right of Way staff will appraise the affected sign for just compensation and appraise the [[236.6 Appraisal and Appraisal Review#Reset Option|reset option compensation]] as described in the appraisal guidance.

* Right of Way staff will obtain the disclaimer from the property owner. (Refer to [[#236.7.2.5 Offer Letter Formats|EPG 236.7.2.5 Offer Letter Formats]].)

* Right of Way staff will prepare the offer letter for just compensation.

* Right of Way staff will prepare the Partial Waiver and Reset Agreement with the assistance from the Outdoor Advertising Specialist and provide the Outdoor Advertising Specialist a copy. The reset compensation is a solitary payment and will not be supplemented by any other payment type.

* The Right of Way staff will present the offer letter and explain the reset option to the sign owner who will choose their preferred option of compensation. It may be beneficial for the Outdoor Advertising Specialist to accompany the right of way staff at this meeting.

* If the sign owner chooses the reset option, the sign owner will obtain the necessary support documents outlined within the Partial Waiver and Reset Agreement, execute the Agreement, and return it to the Right of Way Specialist. The Right of Way Specialist will provide a copy of the Agreement to the Outdoor Advertising Specialist who will amend the sign permit.

* The Right of Way Specialist will process the payment outlined within the Partial Waiver and Reset Agreement and retain a portion of the reset payment within an escrow account. The retained portion should equal the cost of the sign removal in the event the sign owner does not remove the existing sign.

* The Outdoor Advertising Specialist will conduct a final inspection to determine if the sign has been removed from the construction limits within the allotted time frame. (Refer to [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.19 Sign Structures Affected by Highway Projects|EPG 236.16.19 Sign Structures Affected by Highway Projects]].)

* The Outdoor Advertising Specialist will notify Right of Way that the sign has been removed from the construction limits. Right of Way will notify the Escrow Agent to release the funds in escrow to the sign owner.

If the sign owner does not remove the sign from the project limits, Right of Way will notify the Project Manager to include the demolition in the construction contract.

In the event the sign owner refuses just compensation and the reset option, the sign will be condemned as outlined in [[236.10 Right Of Way Condemnation#236.10.1 Introduction|EPG 236.10.1 Introduction]].

'''F. On-premise Signs'''

On-premise signs are those that advertise activities conducted on the premises or services and/or products provided on the property. All on-premise signs, including trademark and logo signs, shall be treated as personal property under the Relocation Assistance Program. The only exception would involve a situation in which the subject business facility is being acquired or there is insufficient remaining land on which to relocate the sign. Only these circumstances would necessitate that a sign be valued and acquired as real estate.

'''G. Existing Private Utility Easements'''

On projects where an existing utility is located on a private easement, and the limits of the new land acquired for the project will encompass the existing private utility easement, the district shall secure said easement rights by quitclaim deed (CCO RW2). The district utility engineer will work directly with the utility owners to obtain said quitclaim deeds. For information related to how to prepare the description to be included in the quitclaim deed, see [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=236.4_Description_Writing_and_Titles#236.4.6.6_Preparing_Quitclaim_Deeds_for_Execution_by_Utility_Companies_.28See_EPG_236.7.29 EPG 236.4.6.6].

'''H. Acquisition of Mobile Homes'''

Mobile home acquisitions must be accompanied by a Certificate of Title from the seller or, if originally purchased prior to August 28, 1989, and assessed as real estate, a statement from the County Assessor attesting to this fact, along with a notarized descriptive bill of sale from the seller.

The Certificate of Title or statements must be submitted to the Department of Revenue within 30 days for transfer of title to the MHTC. There will be a penalty fee if renewal is more than 30 days after acquisition. For additional information, refer to [[236.6 Appraisal and Appraisal Review#Manufactured Homes|EPG 236.6.3.1.19.D.9]] and RSMo. 700.

===236.7.2.7 Valuation by a Negotiator – Separation of Functions===

For acquisitions where Just Compensation was determined by a Value Finding or Standard appraisal format, the valuation and approval of Just Compensation must be prepared by an individual other than the individual that will present the offer letter and negotiate for the acquisition. On a simple valuation/acquisition situation, in which the valuation will be by waiver valuation, the same individual may estimate the Just Compensation and negotiate the acquisition. If the same individual performs both functions, the appraiser/negotiator must do the following:

:*contact the owner
:*deliver or mail the Pathways for Progress brochure
:*advise the owner that the property will be inspected (invitation to accompany inspection is not required on waiver valuations)
:*prepare a waiver valuation
:*secure co-signature of the waiver valuation
:*prepare an offer letter based on the waiver valuation
:*deliver the offer letter to the owner, with all the supporting documents set out earlier in this section.

===236.7.2.8 Negotiation Contacts===

'''A. Personal Contact'''

Every reasonable effort shall be made to personally contact owners of real property or a designated representative who resides within the state. The negotiator shall explain the proposed acquisition and provide the owner or representative with those documents identified earlier in this section.

'''B. In-State Owner Resides in Another MoDOT District'''

If a property owner resides within the state, but outside the district where the property is located, and it is not practical for a local negotiator to make a personal contact, the owner may be contacted in person by a negotiator from another district. Requests to other districts for such assistance shall include all necessary documents and information essential to the negotiation assignment.

When a personal contact is not practical, the owner may be contacted by certified mail, return receipt requested.

'''C. Out-of-State Owner'''

An out-of-state owner may be personally contacted, if practical, or contacted by telephone and certified mail, return receipt requested. When an owner is contacted by mail, provide the required written information identified earlier in this section, and an explanation of the proposed acquisition.

===236.7.2.9 Negotiation Procedures===

The following is a general guide as to the number and content of negotiation contacts. Normally three contacts are needed to assure the owner’s understanding and confidence.

During the first contact the negotiator is to:

:*Provide brochure, [http://wwwi.dot.missouri/intranet/d2/rw/documents/PathwaysforProgressbrochure.pdf Pathways for Progress]
:*Review title information
:*Explain the right of way plans and provide plan sheet, portion of plan sheet, or plat illustrating the acquisition and the remainder
:*Explain the acquisition procedures and provide blank [http://sharepoint/support/CC/CCO%20Contracts/RW_-_Right_of_Way/Sales%20and%20Purchase%20Forms/RW08_Escrow_Agreement_742A.doc Escrow Agreement], (Form 7-4.2 (CCO RW8)) if applicable
:*Explain Proration of Taxes and provide [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Prorata%20-%20Owners%20section.docx Prorata Real Estate Tax Claim, Owner's Section], (Form 7-2.22C)
:*Provide the written Offer Letter
:*Provide the appraisal or waiver valuation
:*Provide conveyance documents
:*Provide or agree to obtain answers to the owner’s questions
:*When applicable and appropriate, explain the IRS requirements on 1099S and provide a [http://oa.mo.gov/sites/default/files/vendor_input_ach_eftd.pdf Vendor Input Form MO 300-1489] or [http://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-pdf/fw9.pdf?portlet=3 IRS Form W-9] for completion.

During the second contact the negotiator should review the items discussed during the first contact. The negotiator should give special attention to making sure the property owner understands the plans and the effect on the remaining property. Any additional questions the owner has should be answered.

During the third contact the negotiator should attempt to get the owner to accept or reject the offer. If the owner fails to accept or reject the offer, or does reject the offer, the mediation and condemnation process are to be explained. The owner is to be advised that negotiations can continue until such time as the condemnation commissioners' report is filed.

When applicable and appropriate, obtain a taxpayer identification number (TIN) using an [http://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-pdf/fw9.pdf?portlet=3 IRS Form W-9] or [http://oa.mo.gov/sites/default/files/vendor_input_ach_eftd.pdf Vendor Input Form MO 300-1489] as shown in [[236.7 Negotiation#236.7.7 1099-S Reporting of Acquisitions|EPG 236.7.7]]. If a husband and wife own the property, either one can provide their TIN. Partnerships and trusts should have their own TIN that should be used for reporting real estate transactions. If there is more than one owner, other than a husband and wife, partnership or trust, each owner that is expected to receive an allocation of the proceeds shall be given a form on which to provide their TIN.

During negotiations, the negotiator’s objective is to promote understanding of the design and reasonableness of the offer. If the owner disagrees with the offer, the negotiator should attempt to determine the reasoning of the owner’s opinion of value or their objections to design considerations. The owner’s opinion of value, reasoning, counteroffers and objections are to be documented in the negotiator’s report and discussed with the chief negotiator or district right of way manager. If the negotiator is unable to acquire the property for the approved offer, an administrative settlement may be considered as described in [[236.7 Negotiation#236.7.3 Administrative and Legal Settlements|EPG 236.7.3]].

If at any stage of negotiations it is determined that a design change is appropriate and can facilitate successful negotiations, the district right of way manager and project manager will be consulted on the proposed change, and a decision made. The property owner is to be advised accordingly.

'''A. Time to Consider Offer'''

The property owner shall be allowed a reasonable period of time to consider the offer of just compensation and the opportunity to obtain professional advice or assistance if so desired.

===236.7.2.10 Uneconomic Remnants and Future Excess Property===

'''A. Definition of Uneconomic Remnant'''

"A parcel of real property in which the owner is left with an interest after the partial acquisition of the owner's property, and in which the acquiring agency has determined has little or no value or utility to the owner." ([http://ecfr.gpoaccess.gov/cgi/t/text/text-idx?sid=afc38d549bf05a1e3ca04485119e6131&c=ecfr&tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title49/49tab_02.tpl 49 CFR 24.2 (w)], 10/1/93)

'''B. Offer to Purchase Uneconomic Remnants'''

An offer to purchase each uneconomic remnant shall be made to the owner simultaneously with the offer of just compensation for the acquisition of the needed realty and realty rights. Situations revealed during negotiations or administrative decisions to consider all or part of remainders as uneconomic remnants, may necessitate a revised offer reflecting the value of the uneconomic remnant.

Multiple uneconomic remnants shall be individually identified and individual values set out in the offer letter.

The Commission will not condemn for the acquisition of an uneconomic remnant.

'''C. Outright Sale of Uneconomic Remnants'''

The district is authorized to sell any uneconomic remnant not exchanged during negotiations as described in [[236.5 Property Management#236.5.12 Excess Land Conveyances & Relinquishments – Regulated Utilities|EPG 236.5.12 Excess Land Conveyances & Relinquishments – Regulated Utilities]].

'''D. Definition of Future Excess Property'''

Any area of existing property that is to be conveyed to adjacent property owners as established in the [[236.14 Change in Route Status Report|change in route status documents]] for the project.

'''E. Exchange of Remnants or Future Excess Property for New Property'''

The district is authorized to exchange uneconomic remnants, or future excess property for real property or rights acquired when the exchange is for equal value based on the purchase price of the remnant or appraised value of the future excess, and the remnant or excess adjoins the owner's remaining property. Such an exchange is to be handled like an Administrative Settlement, under the approval of the district right of way manager.

When remnants or future excess property are exchanged for new property, the amount of just compensation to the owner shall be reduced by the value of the remnant or excess and the warranty deed from the owner shall recite the reduced monetary amount, along with the phrase, "and exchange for other land".

Since the future excess property will still be needed until the project is complete, the following paragraph will be included in all quitclaim deeds conveying the future excess to the abutting property owner:

:"The Missouri Highways and Transportation Commission retains full, free, and uninterrupted use and possession of the land herein conveyed until completion of construction and acceptance of the project for the construction of relocated _____________________ by the Commission’s District Engineer."

When this paragraph is included in the quitclaim deed a cloud is placed on the title. To remove this cloud, the district, upon request of the owner, can provide an affidavit as to completion and acceptance of the project.

Remnants or excess property exchanged for new property will be conveyed by quitclaim deed for the consideration of "One Dollar and Exchange for Other Land." Should the owner refuse to accept a quitclaim deed, contact the Right of Way Section for authorization to use a warranty deed where the Commission owns fee title to the property being exchanged.

All conveyances of remnants or future excess property by the Commission shall provide for utilities as described in [[236.5 Property Management#236.5.12 Excess Land Conveyances & Relinquishments – Regulated Utilities|EPG 236.5.12 Excess Land Conveyances & Relinquishments – Regulated Utilities]].

===236.7.2.11 Donation of Real Property===

In some instances property owners affected by small, uncomplicated acquisitions of realty and/or realty rights may be willing to donate the property that is needed for the project, especially when the project improvements provide a benefit to the property and community.

The Missouri Highways and Transportation Commission will accept a donation of property. An appraisal and offer letter are not required when property is being donated, however, some documentation is necessary.

'''A. Coercion to Donate'''

It would be inappropriate for an acquiring agency during negotiations to inform the property owner that the needed realty and/or realty rights would have to be donated in order for the roadway project to be completed. The only acceptable circumstance would involve a project that would be terminated unless all owners agreed to donate.

'''B. Donation/Waiver of Appraisal Letter'''

Prior to acceptance of such donation, the negotiator must inform the owner of the right to receive just compensation for the property. The negotiator must obtain a signed [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Donation%20Letter%20waiver%20of%20Appraisal%20Form%207.2.12.docx Donation/Waiver Letter], (Form 7-2.12), which acknowledges the owner’s right to receive just compensation as determined by an appraisal. Should the owner refuse to sign the statement yet still wants to donate the property, the [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Negotiator's%20Report%20Form%207.2.12.doc Negotiator's Report] shall be fully documented as to the owner being advised of their rights and any reason for refusing to sign the letter.

'''C. Donation of Temporary Easement Without Waiver Letter'''

When temporary easements cause no compensable damage to the adjacent property, a donation can be obtained without advising the owner of the right to just compensation. In such situations the plans should be explained to the owner and a request made for the donation. In this case, the executed easement document is all that is necessary. A Donation/Waiver Letter is not required. However, the file shall be documented regarding the determination that the acquisition of the temporary easement causes no compensable damage to the adjacent property.

'''D. Waiver of Releases on Donated Property'''

When non-complex property or property rights are donated, the district right of way manager may waive acquisition of additional property interests (like partial mortgage releases, easement owners, tenant interests, etc.), but a memo outlining the waiver to acquire additional property interests should be included in the file.

'''E. Donations by Government Agencies'''

Donations by government agencies do not require the use of a Donation/Waiver Letter. For acquisition from government agencies, see [[236.7 Negotiation#236.7.5 Railroad, State and Federal Acquisitions|EPG 236.7.5]].

===236.7.2.12 Negotiator’s Report and Contact Log===

A [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Negotiator's%20Report%20Form%207.2.12.doc Negotiator’s Report], (Form 7-2.13), shall be completed with attachments and signed by the negotiator upon termination of or completion of negotiations for each parcel. A log of all contacts with the owner or representative shall be completed and attached to the Negotiator’s Report. The information for each contact should include the date and place of each contact, parties contacted, offers made, counteroffers, issues raised by the owner, reasons settlement could not be reached, and any other pertinent data. Each contact entry shall include the name or initials of the person who prepared the entry.

When negotiations are unsuccessful, and the negotiator considers further attempts to negotiate to be futile, recommendations for action should be recorded.

===236.7.2.13 Payment Prior to Possession===

No owner will be required to surrender possession of real property acquired for highway purposes prior to payment of the agreed purchase price or payment of the Commissioners' Award into court for property acquired by condemnation proceedings.

===236.7.2.14 Title Update Prior to Payment===

Prior to payment to an owner for property and/or property rights, the public records must be searched to determine that no transactions have occurred on the property being acquired subsequent to the latest title search. This must be done on each parcel except when a title insurance company or abstractor is employed by written agreement to act as escrow agent to make distribution of funds. When a bank or other parties act as escrow agents, the title update shall be made prior to delivery of checks to such escrow agents.

===236.7.2.15 Possession and Vacancy Notices===

Owner and tenant occupants of buildings acquired for highway purposes shall not be required to move from a dwelling or to move a business, nonprofit organization or farm operation without at least 90 days' written notice of the date by which such move is required.

Possession policies and procedures for sending notices to vacate are contained in [[236.8 Relocation Assistance Program#236.8.15 Relocation Assistance Program - Possession Policies and Vacancy Notices|EPG 236.8.15 Relocation Assistance Program – Possession Policies and Vacancy Notices]].

===236.7.2.16 Extension of Possession and Fair Rental Value===

When the proposed letting schedule permits, an owner or tenant may be authorized an extension of possession based on a monthly rental rate, as described in [[236.5 Property Management#236.5.26 Acquired Improvements|EPG 236.5.26 Acquired Improvements]]. An Extension of Possession Agreement, (Form 5-6.4 (CCO RW12)), (Form RW12 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements]) shall be used when the original occupant is allowed to extend possession up to one year. If it is necessary to extend possession beyond the one year time period, the Extension of Possession Agreement shall be canceled and replaced with a Lease of Premises Agreement, (Form 5-5.5 (CCO RW14)). (Form RW14 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements].) An extension of possession that is expected to last beyond one year is to be written on a Lease of Premises Agreement rather than an Extension of Possession Agreement.

When an owner or tenant is granted an extension of possession, a monthly rental rate shall be established and should be collected in advance for each monthly period of extension. The rental value for owner-occupied and tenant-occupied property will be determined by the method established in [[236.5 Property Management#236.5.26 Acquired Improvements|EPG 236.5.26 Acquired Improvements]].

===236.7.2.17 Coercion===

The Uniform Act forbids an acquiring agency from taking any coercive action in order to compel an owner to agree on a price for his property. All negotiations shall be conducted in such a manner as to avoid coercing an owner to reach agreement. Condemnation shall not be used as a threat. The property owner shall be given a reasonable amount of time to consider the offer and to obtain professional advice or assistance if they so desire. The agency shall not advance the time of condemnation, or defer negotiations or condemnation or the deposit of funds with the court, in order to induce an agreement on the compensation to be paid for the property.

===236.7.2.18 Non-Discrimination===

The real estate acquisition function shall be conducted in such a way and manner as to assure that no person shall on the ground of race, color, religion, creed, national origin, sex, age, ancestry, or physical ability be denied the benefits to which the person is entitled or be otherwise subjected to discrimination.

===236.7.2.19 Acquisition by Mediation===

Mediation is an option offered by MoDOT that can be described as a process in which a neutral and impartial third party assists parties in disagreement to negotiate an acceptable settlement. Complete policies and procedures regarding mediation are described in [[236.11 Mediation|EPG 236.11 Mediation]].

Mediation is not intended to replace or reduce the importance of the negotiation process for the acquisition of property and/or property rights nor does it preclude the use of administrative settlements.

Should the mediation process not be successful with the parties failing to reach agreement, the needed property and property rights will then be acquired by the normal condemnation process.

Mediation shall be offered, in writing, to all property owners (who have not settled) prior to filing a condemnation petition, unless approval is received from the Asst. to the State Design Engineer - Right of Way and the [http://wwwi/intranet/cc/modot.asp?nav= Chief Counsel’s Office].

===236.7.2.20 Acquisition by Condemnation===

'''A. When Condemnation Procedure Initiated'''

Complete policies and procedures regarding eminent domain procedures are described in [[236.10 Right Of Way Condemnation|EPG 236.10 Condemnation Procedures]]. An appropriate time to consider condemnation is when it is determined that the property and property rights cannot be acquired through negotiations or mediation. Mediation must have at least been offered to the property owner before proceeding with condemnation.

'''B. Transfer of Responsibility From Right of Way to District Counsel'''

When it is determined that a property cannot be acquired through negotiation or mediation, the responsibility of acquisition is transferred to the district counsel. Negotiation to acquire the property can continue by either the negotiator or attorney assigned to the tract, until the commissioner’s award has been filed.

'''C. Information Packet Required by District Counsel'''

The information needed by the district counsel’s office includes but is not limited to the following:

:*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Negotiator's%20Report%20Form%207.2.12.doc Negotiator’s Report], (Form 7-2.13) and typed Negotiator’s Log detailing counteroffers and settlement offers, requests for design changes, etc.
:*Latest title report
:*Two copies of appraisal with [[media:236.6.4.3 Appraisal Review and Approval of Just Comparison (Form 6.4.3).doc|Approval of Just Compensation]], (Form 6.4.3)
:*List of parties to be named as defendants and served notice
:*Copy of pertinent documents (i.e. easements impacting the acquisition area, trust agreements, etc).
:*Copy of pertinent correspondence
:*Copies of property descriptions to be used in the Condemnation Petition.
:*Copies of the [http://sharepoint/sites/de/epg/Lists/EPGResponse/Attachments/825/Surveyor%20Legal%20Description%20Cover%20Sheet%20(2).doc Legal Description, Exhibit A] for each property description submitted.

'''D. Owner’s Expenses in Condemnation Are Not Reimbursable'''

When MoDOT institutes and concludes a condemnation action to acquire real property, the owner of the property is not entitled to reimbursement for their expenses, including attorney, appraisal and engineering fees actually incurred because of the condemnation proceedings.

===236.7.2.21 Reimbursement of Owner’s Expenses===

'''A. Reimbursement of Property Transfer Expense'''

The owner of property acquired will be reimbursed for recording fees, transfer taxes and similar expenses incidental to conveying the property. These expenses are normally paid directly by the department.

'''B. Reimbursement of Mortgage Prepayment Penalty'''

Owners will be reimbursed for actual penalty costs for prepayment of a preexisting mortgage entered into in good faith and filed of record prior to the initiation of negotiations. These costs will be reimbursed when the property is acquired in its entirety or the acquisition is of such magnitude that the remainder will not provide collateral for the mortgage and/or the mortgagee legally requires penalty costs for prepayment of the mortgage. The owner is responsible for submission of paid receipts of penalty costs and request for reimbursement to the district office.

'''C. Reimbursement of Real Estate Tax'''

Information pertaining to the reimbursement of taxes is contained in the offer letter and the [http://wwwi.dot.missouri/intranet/d2/rw/documents/PathwaysforProgressbrochure.pdf Pathways for Progress brochure]. During negotiations, the owner will be provided with the [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Prorata%20-%20Owners%20section.docx Prorata Real Estate Tax Claim, Owner's Section] (Form 7-2.22C).

Owners will be reimbursed for a pro rata portion of the state, county and city real estate taxes paid for the current taxable year on property purchased by the Commission. The pro rata portion of taxes will cover the full number of months remaining in the calendar year after payment is received by the owner or escrow agent for the property. Claims for reimbursement must be made within six months after the city or county tax delinquent date. Delinquent tax payments are not reimbursable. The owner is responsible for submission of paid tax receipts and Form 7-2.22C to the district office for reimbursement.

:'''1'''. Pro-ration of Real Estate Taxes

:The following procedures will be followed for computing the pro-ration of real estate taxes, for all contiguous holdings under the same ownership normally considered in a before and after appraisal. The [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Prorata%20-%20Owners%20section.docx Prorata Real Estate Tax Claim] (Form 7-2.22C) is self-explanatory.

::'''a'''. Total Acquisition of Property

::Divide the annual taxes by 12 and multiply by the number of full months remaining in the taxable year after payment is delivered to the owner or escrow agent or the condemnation award is paid into court.

::'''b'''. Partial Acquisition of Property:

::Divide the approved compensation, payable to fee holder for land, improvements, property rights and/or damage to remainder, by the value of the entirety as indicated on line E, (1) of right of way [[media:236.6.4.3 Appraisal Review and Approval of Just Comparison (Form 6.4.3).doc|Form 6.4.3]], then multiply computed percentage by the amount on the tax bill. Divide the resulting figure by 12 and multiply by the number of full months remaining in the taxable year after payment for the realty rights is delivered.

::'''c'''. Impact of Waiver Valuation on Proration of Taxes

::If the compensation for realty rights is established by the use of a waiver valuation, the property value established by the County Assessor can be used in the calculation.

::'''d'''. Impact of Administrative Settlements and Condemnation on Proration of Taxes

::The amount of an administrative settlement or condemnation award is not a factor in computing tax reimbursement. Computations will be done in the exact same manner as when property is acquired at the approved offer.

::'''e'''. Impact of Exchange of Land on Proration of Taxes

::When land owned by the state is traded for land acquired, the owner is eligible for reimbursement of taxes. In most instances when a trade occurs there will be an appraisal of both the land to be traded and the land acquired; therefore, when tax reimbursement is determined, the trade will be given the same consideration as though a cash transaction had transpired.

::'''f'''. Impact of Donation on Proration of Taxes

::When land is donated, the owner is eligible for reimbursement of taxes. Value of the land donated and value of entirety can be determined by utilizing data from the County Assessor's office.

::'''g'''. Impact of Damage-Only Offers on Proration of Taxes

::Should the acquisition consist solely of damages caused by the imposition of temporary easements and no permanent reduction in value is evident in the after situation, proration of taxes will not be needed. In this case, the assessed value for tax purposes would not be affected by the acquisition.

'''D. Appeal for Expense Eligibility'''

Property owners may file a written appeal with the agency if they believe that the agency has failed to properly consider their application for reimbursement of expenses incidental to the transfer of title. The time limit for filing an appeal is 60 days after they receive written notification of the agency’s determination on their claim. The appeal procedure follows that of [[236.8 Relocation Assistance Program|EPG 236.8 Relocation Program]].

===236.7.2.22 Cost of Moving Utilities===

Current [[643.3 Policy, Standards and Regulations|Commission policy]] provides that the cost of relocation and re-connection of privately owned service lines of a public utility is to be included with the other necessary utility work of the project, at MoDOT’s expense. Such costs should not have been considered in the appraisal process.

Most utility companies reconnect the private service lines at no cost to the property owner, but some do not. The cost to move and reconnect service lines that lie on or in existing Commission owned property is a noncompensable item. The cost to the owner to reconnect these services cannot be included in the appraised compensation.

Providing for the adjustment of utilities for a project is the responsibility of district design. There are situations, however, in which right of way personnel will have involvement. Owners of utility lines on existing Commission owned property are responsible for costs of adjustments. Therefore, the property owner may have responsibility for adjustment costs in cases where the utility company only owns the main. The department will pay for the cost of the adjustment between the old and new boundary lines.

All owners shall be advised that they are responsible for adjustment costs for their service lines on existing Commission owned property and that the department will provide compensation for any part of the adjustment on new property being acquired.

If property is secured from a property owner who owns a service line that requires adjustment, the cost of the adjustment and any compensation due the property owner will be made during the construction of the project. The method of adjustment is to be handled as follows:

Service line adjustments are included in our roadway contracts. Bid items are provided for the different types of anticipated adjustments. If the property owner elects to have the Commissions' contractor do the work, the portion of cost of adjustment on the new property acquired is provided by the Commission and no further obligation to the owner is necessary. Construction personnel will compute the cost for the adjustment that was on existing Commission owned property and the property owner will be billed for that part only. If the service line adjustment is done by the property owner's plumber and property is secured for the project, the property owner will be compensated for the actual cost of adjustment on the new property acquired. The property owner will not be compensated for more than the cost determined by the amount based on the roadway contractor's bid items.

===236.7.2.23 Condemnation of Temporary Driveway Connection Easements===

Parcels are not generally condemned when the only acquisition is for a temporary easement for the purpose of reconnecting a driveway. If the owner is not agreeable to accept the offer or settlement, and district design determines the driveway can be constructed on existing Commission owned property, the easement should be removed from the plans, a corrected plan sheet sent to the owner and the parcel voided. A letter accompanying the plan sheet should describe, in as much detail as possible, what the physical features of the proposed construction will be, and outline problems the design may cause the owner in their own reconnection of the driveway.

==236.7.3 Administrative and Legal Settlements==

===236.7.3.1 Administrative Settlements===

'''A. Purpose'''

Administrative settlements are made for the purpose of concluding negotiations for amounts considered reasonable, prudent and in the public interest, after reasonable efforts to negotiate agreements at the approved offers have failed.

Administrative settlements are not to be used for the purpose of correcting errors or omissions in an appraisal. Correcting the appraisal and making a revised offer is the method used to correct such errors and omissions.

'''B. Definition'''

An administrative settlement is any settlement authorized by the district right of way manager for a monetary consideration that differs from the approved estimate of just compensation. All settlements above the approved just compensation require written justification (Form 7-3.3.1).

:'''1'''. Administrative Settlement in Negotiations and Mediation

:Negotiation and mediation administrative settlements are those made by right of way personnel, prior to filing of a condemnation commissioners' award with the circuit court.

:Reduction of approved salvage value is considered an administrative settlement. Settlements made in the mediation process are considered administrative settlements. Homestead and heritage payments are also considered administrative settlements. All administrative settlements require documentation in the tract file (Form 7-3.3.1).

:It is important that district right of way and regional counsel concur in settlements made during the condemnation process. Regional counsel should be advised of all settlements attempted or concluded after a project has been turned over to counsel for condemnation, so that a consensus is reached for the settlement, and that a motion to dismiss the parcel from the petition can be filed.

:'''2'''. Legal Administrative Settlement

:Legal administrative settlements are those made by regional counsel personnel after the condemnation commissioners have reported their award to the circuit court and before exceptions are filed. Settlements after exceptions are filed are referred to as Stipulated Settlements (approved by the circuit court) and are referred to by counsel merely as "settlements".

:All settlements by regional counsel require the concurrence of right of way.

:Regional counsel may approve settlements less than $250,000 with the concurrence of the district right of way manager.

:Settlements less than $250,000, in which the district right of way manager does not concur must be approved by the Assistant Chief Counsel - Litigation and the Asst. to the State Design Engineer - Right of Way.

:The Assistant Chief Counsel - Litigation and the Asst. to the State Design Engineer - Right of Way must approve settlements greater than $250,000.

===236.7.3.2 Administrative Settlements Considerations===

After a diligent effort has been made to consummate settlements for the approved amounts of just compensation, the district right of way manager should review each parcel not acquired by negotiation and determine whether to make administrative settlements, pursue mediation, or acquire by condemnation.

The district right of way manager should review all pertinent information relevant to consideration of a settlement, such as:

:*Approved appraisal reflects current market conditions
:*Consideration in the appraisal of subjective elements of damage
:*Other appraisals of subject
:*The Negotiator's Report regarding damage factors claimed by the owner
:*Counteroffers made by the owner
:*The range of probable testimony
:*Recent jury verdicts for similar type properties
:*Estimated court costs
:*Opinion of legal counsel regarding probable result of proceeding with condemnation.

'''Note''': Administrative settlements are not to be used to correct errors or omissions of the appraisal. Correcting the appraisal and making a revised offer is the method used to correct such errors and omissions.

'''Revised Offer Based on Revised Appraisal'''

If it appears that the approved amount of just compensation does not reflect current market conditions or does not consider all compensable elements of just compensation, an updated appraisal should be secured. A revised offer letter and revised valuation shall be promptly given to the owner. This is not considered an administrative settlement.

===236.7.3.3 Making Administrative Settlements===

Having determined that it is in the public interest to make an administrative settlement, the district right of way manager establishes an equitable amount for the settlement. The amount and other terms of the settlement are then relayed to the owner either verbally or in writing. Should the owner accept the proposal, the necessary conveyance documents are executed, showing the final settlement amount.

'''Administrative Settlement Justification Letter'''

At the conclusion of an administrative settlement, the district shall prepare a letter of justification (Form 7-3.3.1) that sets out the terms of the settlement and the factors upon which it was based. A copy of this letter is to be sent to the Right of Way Section when the parcel is submitted for payroll.

Administrative settlement justification is not to be based on perceived inadequacies of the appraisal process. If the appraisal, on which the offer was based, is subsequently believed to be deficient, a new or revised appraisal should be secured.

===236.7.3.4 Approving and Processing Legal Settlements (Stipulated Settlements)===

As previously stated, stipulated settlements are those made after a commissioners' award has been filed with the circuit court. Settlements less than $250,000 will be submitted to the circuit court for approval after the concurrence of the district right of way manager. Settlements greater than $250,000, or which the district right of way manager does not concur, require the concurrence of the Asst. to the State Design Engineer - Right of Way and the Assistant Chief Counsel - Litigation.

To accomplish these settlements, regional counsel or assistant regional counsel prepares a [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Pre-trial%20report%20Exh%205E.1.docx Pre-Trial Report]. The comments of the district right of way manager and the Asst. to the State Design Engineer - Right of Way should be considered by the Assistant Chief Counsel - Litigation, prior to final approval of the settlement.

==236.7.4 Escrow Agreements, Deeds of Release and Purchase Agreement==

===236.7.4.1 Purpose===

This information establishes MoDOT’s procedures for using escrow agreements, subordination of mortgage liens, deeds of release and purchase agreements in the acquisition of land and easements.

===236.7.4.2 Escrow Agreements===

An Escrow Agreement (fee owner) (Form 7-4.2A (CCO RW8)) or a Tenant Escrow Agreement (Form 7-4.2B (CCO RW10)), is used when an escrow agent is used (see [[236.4 Description Writing and Titles#236.4.4.6 Escrow Services|EPG 236.4.4.6]]). (Forms RW8 and RW10 are accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements].)

The use of an Escrow Agreement is not required when obtaining property or property rights from another government agency.

When the acquisition involves only a temporary easement, it is not required to escrow the payment unless circumstances warrant it.

'''A. Escrow Agreement (Fee Owner)'''

:'''1'''. When the Escrow Agreement is used

:The escrow agreement shall be used to establish possession of occupied buildings, removal of buildings or equipment if retained by the owner, and provide for payment of taxes, liens, mortgages, or other encumbrances.

:'''2'''. Contaminated Property Provision

:Certain required paragraphs of the escrow agreement provide for owner disclosure of contamination, testing for contamination and termination of the acquisition under certain conditions of contamination. If there is an indication that the property being acquired is contaminated and is to be tested, the check for the real estate payment should not be delivered to the escrow agent until it is determined that the department will proceed with the acquisition, without further attention to the contamination.

'''B. Tenant Escrow Agreement'''

:'''1'''. When Tenant Escrow Agreement is used

:The Tenant Escrow Agreement (Form 7-4.2B, RW10) (Form RW10 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements]) is used when necessary to ensure removal or possession of tenant-owned improvements or equipment retained by the tenant owner.

:The Tenant Escrow Agreement may be used to acquire tenant interests prior to conveyance or condemnation of fee holder interests, only if a Release of Structures and Leasehold (Form 7-2.7D (CCO RW15)) (Form RW15 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements]), is executed by the fee owner and attached to the Tenant Escrow Agreement.

:'''2'''. Phrases for Release of Structures and Leasehold if Tenant Escrow Agreement is not used

:In cases where it is deemed unnecessary to use the Tenant Escrow Agreement, one of the following paragraphs, as applicable, should be included in the Release of Structures and Leasehold.

::"Party of the First Part hereby agrees to vacate and give peaceable possession of said above described property to Commission within ______ days after payment of the consideration. At the conclusion of this possession period all of the improvements being conveyed herein shall become the property of the Commission to dispose of in anyway it deems necessary."

::"Party of the First Part hereby retains the right to salvage (describe structure) and hereby agrees to remove said structure within _______ days after payment of the consideration. Commission may, after said date and without repercussion from Party of the First Part, dispose of said structure in anyway it deems necessary."

::"Party of the First Part hereby retains the right to salvage (describe structure) and hereby agrees to remove said structure by the _____ day of ________, 20___. Commission may after said date and without repercussion from Party of the First Part, dispose of said structure in anyway it deems necessary."

'''Requirements for the Retention of Improvements'''

Requirements for the [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Requirements%20for%20the%20Retention%20Form%207.4.2C.docx Retention of Improvements] (Form 7-4.2C,) must be incorporated with any Escrow Agreement or Agreement for Purchase of Real Estate. The form sets out the requirements of an owner or tenant that elects to retain improvements or equipment for removal from the acquired land.

===236.7.4.3 Deed of Release and Partial Deed of Release===

Obtaining Deeds of Release and Partial Deeds of Release] (Form 7-4.3, RW25) (Form RW25 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements]) is the responsibility of the escrow agent. When obtaining a release from a corporation, a corporation release form is normally used. For individuals or partners, a non-corporation release form is to be used. Most title companies, banks, and other lending institutions carry appropriate forms as part of their routine business. The escrow agent is to either prepare the release for execution by the lien holder or provide the lien holder with the property description for inclusion in the release.

===236.7.4.4 Agreement for Purchase of Real Estate===

'''A. When Agreement for Purchase of Real Estate is used'''

The Agreement for Purchase of Real Estate, Form 7-4.4 (CCO RW7) (Form RW7 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements]) is used when purchasing property or property rights and an escrow agreement is not being used as discussed in [[236.4 Description Writing and Titles#236.4.4.6 Escrow Services|EPG 236.4.4.6 Escrow Services]].

The use of this agreement is not required when obtaining property or property rights from another governmental agency.

The use of this agreement is not required when only temporary rights are being acquired via a temporary easement unless circumstances warrant it.

'''B. Contaminated Property Provision'''

If there is an indication that the property being acquired is contaminated and is to be tested, the check for payment of the real estate should not be delivered to the owner until such time that it has been determined that the department will proceed with the acquisition.

===236.7.4.5 Subordination of Mortgage Liens===

The Partial Deed of Release, RW25, is the most commonly used, and preferred, document when obtaining a partial acquisition from a mortgaged property.

Please note that this document serves as a partial release of a mortgage but merely subordinate the lender’s interest in the acquired property to the rights of the Commission. This document is usually signed prior to payrolling the acquisition and then held in escrow along with the conveyance documents until payment is made to the escrow agent.

==236.7.5 Railroad, State and Federal Acquisitions==

===236.7.5.1 Purpose===

This information establishes MoDOT’s procedures for acquiring railroad land and railroad right of way, federal land and land owned by the State of Missouri.

===236.7.5.2 Railroads===

'''A. General'''

The acquisition of land owned by railroad companies is a dual responsibility of district right of way and the Multimodal Operations Division (for additional information see [[643.4 Railroads|EPG 643.4 Railroads]]).

Plans approved for acquisition purposes will indicate a separate parcel number for the operating railroad right of way and to each parcel of non-operating railroad property owned by a railroad.

District right of way is responsible for the acquisition of non-operating railroad property. The Multimodal Operations Division will acquire non-operating land only when they are also acquiring operating right of way from the same railroad.

The Railroad Projects Manager is responsible for acquisitions, agreements and/or documents related to operating railroad right of way. If both operating right of way and non-operating land are required from the same railroad, all necessary information will be provided to the Multimodal Operations Division.

'''B. Acquisition Procedures - Non-operating Railroad Land'''

The Multimodal Operations Division will acquire non-operating land if operating right of way is also being acquired from the same railroad.

:*Obtain title information for each parcel. The conveyance of the property to the railroad is sufficient unless the land involved is a recent purchase.
:*Appraise each parcel in accordance with current appraisal procedures.
:*Prepare a deed with metes and bounds description. A Warranty Deed (Form 4-7.1A (CCO RW3)) or Quit Claim Deed (Form 4-7.2 (CCO RW2)) is desirable and have been accepted by railroads in some situations, or use an Easement for Highway Purposes, or 4-7.5 (CCO RW23). (Forms RW2, RW3 and RW23 are accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements].)

When only non-operating railroad land is involved, negotiate in accordance with current acquisition procedures. The name of the railroad's authorized representative may be obtained from the Multimodal Operations Division Railroad Projects Manager.

'''C. Acquisition Procedures - Operating Railroad Right of Way'''

:*Obtain title information for each parcel.
:*Appraise each parcel in accordance with current appraisal procedures.
:*Prepare a metes and bounds legal description for the easement area and provide to the Multimodal Operations Division to include in an easement or grade separation agreement.
:*Prepare and transmit to the Multimodal Operations Division an undated offer letter reflecting the approved just compensation. Tax proration phrases should not be included in the offer letter.
:*Transmit to the Multimodal Operations Division an appraisal or waiver valuation and three plan sheets.

'''D. Controlled Access from Railroads and Abutting Owners'''

When a proposed controlled access boundary line intersects or coincides with a railroad right of way line, all easements should include a controlled access clause for access rights from the railroad and adjoining owners of underlying rights.

Also, when the proposed controlled access boundary line and the railroad right of way line coincide, it is necessary to acquire abutters' rights of direct access from owners of land and property rights adjoining the opposite side of the railroad right of way.

'''E. Acquiring Underlying Fee in Railroad Land and Right of Way'''

It is advisable to acquire the underlying fee rights of current adjoining successors in title, when acquiring non-operating railroad land.

When a proposed highway boundary line crosses or intersects the right of way of an operating railroad, it may be necessary to acquire the underlying fee within the limits of the railroad right of way from adjacent owners who have reversionary rights. It is the discretion of the district right of way manager as to whether or not the underlying fee should be acquired. The necessity increases, as the likelihood of future railroad abandonment increases.

The description on deeds for each underlying fee owner will extend to the center of the railroad right of way or include the entire railroad right of way, when applicable, and will contain the wording "subject to railroad right of way."

'''F. Condemnation of Railroads'''

The Railroad Projects Manager is to be notified of the anticipated date of condemnation when the Multimodal Operations Division is acquiring railroad property.

District right of way will be responsible for including in condemnation both operating and non-operating railroad property that are not acquired by negotiation. Prior to preparation of a condemnation petition, determine from the Multimodal Operations Division the status of negotiations and a recommendation to include or exclude railroad property in condemnation. Railroad property is not to be included in the condemnation petition unless the Multimodal Operations Division has received proper authorization from the Department of Economic Development, Division of Motor Carrier and Railroad Safety.

===236.7.5.3 Acquisition from Federal Agencies===

When land or property rights are to be acquired from the United States Army, Air Force, Navy, Veterans Administration, or the Bureau of Indian Affairs, district right of way is authorized to negotiate directly with the agency. For acquisitions from all other federal agencies, application must be made through the Federal Highway Administration. District right of way is to prepare all required documents and transmit them to the Right of Way Section for handling with Federal Highway Administration.

===236.7.5.4 Acquisition from State of Missouri Agencies===

'''A. Acquisition from Conservation Commission and the University of Missouri'''

Other than the MHTC, the Conservation Commission and the University of Missouri are the only Missouri state agencies that have authority to convey real property. When the MHTC acquires land or property rights from one of these two agencies, district right of way shall negotiate directly with the agency.

The curators of the University of Missouri are vested with the power to convey property owned by the University in § 172.020, RSMo. This section reads, in part, “The Curators of the University of Missouri…shall have perpetual…power…to take, purchase and to sell, convey and otherwise dispose of lands and chattels…”. This is consistent with § 37.005.9, RSMo which specifically excepts property owned by the university from other state property which vests in the governor and requires authorization from the general assembly before it can be conveyed.

It is not as clear whether the Department of Conversation/Conservation Commission has the power to convey the property it owns. However, Art. IV, § 40(a) of the Missouri Constitution gives the Conservation Commission the control, power and management over all property owned, acquired or used for conservation purposes. While this constitutional provision does not specifically state that the Conservation Commission has the power to convey property, a reasonable interpretation of this section, read in conjunction with § 37.005.9, RSMo., is that the Conservation Commission has the power to convey property.

'''B. Acquisition from All Other State Agencies'''

State agencies, other than those identified above, are required, by statute, to obtain authority to convey real property by an act of the General Assembly. The Governor may execute conveyances of easement rights only without authorizing legislation.

:'''1'''. Land Acquisition

:For all agencies other than those identified above state statute provides for the conveyance of fee simple interest in real property, by a specific act of the General Assembly that will be arranged by the Right of Way Section. The legislative act authorizes the Governor to execute the conveyance document, after it has been approved as to form by the Attorney General’s office.

:'''2'''. Easement Acquisition

:When only easement rights are to be acquired, the statute permits the Governor to convey an easement without legislative action, after the document is approved as to form by the Attorney General's Office.

:The document CCO RW24 may be used for these acquisitions, with a suggested heading change to EASEMENT(S) ON STATE PROPERTY FOR HIGHWAY PURPOSES. (Form RW24 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements].) This heading change does not require approval by Chief Counsel Office.

:'''3'''. Acquisition Procedure

:District right of way shall:

::*contact the local agency representative
::*explain the acquisition
::*obtain permission to inspect
::*appraise the property or secure donation
::*review and approve Just Compensation
::*prepare offer letter
::*prepare [http://sharepoint/support/CC/CCO%20Contracts/RW_-_Right_of_Way/Deed%20Forms/RW02_Quitclaim_Deed_(_MHTC_Grantee_).doc Quit Claim Deed]

:Forward appraisal, offer letter, Quitclaim Deed, and plan sheets to the Right of Way Section. The Right of Way Section will:

::*negotiate directly with the agency
::*secure executed deed
::*process payroll
::*deliver check to the agency
::*transmit executed deed to the district for recording
::*transmit to district negotiator’s report and contact log
::*prepare and transmit to district an administrative settlement letter, if necessary

==236.7.6 Acquisitions of Maintenance Sites and Other Capital Improvement Sites==

===236.7.6.1 Purpose===

This information describes MoDOT’s procedures for acquiring maintenance sitesand other capital improvement sites.

===236.7.6.2 Site Selection and Approval===

Site selection, including environmental studies of proposed sites, is the responsibility of the district subject to approval of the General Services Director.

Once the location for a new site is chosen or the decision is made to expand a facility, the General Services Division will request district right of way to determine the market value of the property.

All property to be acquired for capital improvement purposes shall be appraised in accordance with [[236.6 Appraisal and Appraisal Review#236.6.3.8 Maintenance Lot and Capital Improvement Valuation|EPG 236.6 Appraisal and Appraisal Review]]. In those instances where only a portion of the total property is to be acquired, the appraiser shall determine if the acquisition will damage the remaining property. If in his/her opinion the remaining property is damaged, the appraiser shall prepare a before and after appraisal of the property setting forth such damages. If in his/her opinion there is no damage to the remainder, the appraiser is to make a statement to that effect in the appraisal report and appraise the part to be acquired as a total tract.

Upon completion of the appraisal, it is to be reviewed in the district in accordance with [[236.3 Administration|EPG 236.3]]. A copy of the approved appraisal shall be forwarded by the district to the General Services Division for funding allocations.

===236.7.6.3 Acquisition Procedure===

Upon receipt of concurrence, the General Services Division will advise district right of way to initiate negotiations for acquisition of the property. A [[media:236.7 Offer Letter (7-6.3).pdf|letter of offer on capital improvement facilities]] (Exhibit 7-6.3), is to be used in making offers to property owners. District right of way should follow acquisition procedures outlined in the areas of [[236.3 Administration#236.3.5 Right of Way Expenditures|payrolling]], [[236.4 Description Writing and Titles#236.4.4.8 Obtaining Title Insurance and Title Commitments|abstract or title insurance]], and the use of [[236.4 Description Writing and Titles#236.4.4.6 Escrow Services|Escrow Agents]].

All capital improvement sites and additions shall be acquired in fee simple title. The deed for conveyance shall be based on an accurate survey of the property. A professional land surveyor shall complete the survey.

Negotiations for all new or additions to capital improvement facilities shall be based on approximate boundaries. If the owner is agreeable to selling the property for the approved amount, said survey will be made for preparation of the deed.

Appropriate efforts to acquire the property for the approved amount should be made; however, if the owner refuses the offer but through either a counteroffer or other means it is determined that the property can be purchased for an amount above the approved offer, so advise the General Services Division with a recommendation. The General Services Division will advise the district whether or not to proceed at the higher price.

Upon successful negotiations for the capital improvement site or addition, the payroll shall be completed in the same manner as other payrolls for land acquisitions and submitted to the Right of Way Section. Upon receipt of the check by district right of way, the deed and survey plat will be recorded. Copies of the recorded deed and survey shall be submitted to the General Services Division and the State Maintenance Engineer.

Condemnation proceedings shall not be initiated for a capital improvement location unless specifically instructed to do so by the Right of Way Section.

The cost of appraisals, survey expenses, title work and other miscellaneous right of way items as well as the cost of the site itself shall be charged to the appropriate project number established by the General Services Division.

==236.7.7 1099-S Reporting of Acquisitions==

===236.7.7.1 Purpose===

This information establishes MoDOT’s guidelines and procedures for reporting the acquisition of real estate or real property rights to the Internal Revenue Service (IRS).

===236.7.7.2 1099-S Reporting Procedure===

'''A. Transactions Reported'''

The Commission is responsible for reporting to the IRS real estate acquisitions in excess of $599. This reporting includes all acquisitions by either negotiated settlement or by condemnation. Specifically the following must be reported:

:*Real Estate acquired for Commission or Department use.
:*Land or permanent easement acquired either by purchase or condemnation.
:*Temporary easements if the easement is to last 30 years or is purchased in combination with land or a permanent easement.
:*Damages to remainders included with the amount paid for the acquisition of land or a permanent easement.

'''B. Transactions Not Reported'''

The following are exceptions to the requirements for reporting acquisitions to the IRS:

:*Purchases from corporations and governmental agencies.
:*Transactions where total compensation is less than $600.
:*Amounts paid for temporary easements when the duration of the easement is less than 30 years.

'''C. Determining Year of Reporting'''

Under IRS rules an acquisition has to be reported in the year the transaction is closed. For purchases this is the date the check is received by the escrow agent or the property owner. For condemned property it is the date the Commissioners’ award is deposited with the court. The withdrawal of the award from the court is not considered in determining the date of closing nor the need to report the acquisition.

'''D. Reporting More Than One Owner'''

Transactions should be reported shortly after they are closed or condemned. In the case of condemned property it will be necessary to base the report on the award. When more than one property owner (other than husband and wife or partnerships) is involved in receiving proceeds from the acquisition, IRS regulations require that an allocation of the gross proceeds be requested by MoDOT. The request must be made at or before the time of closing or at the time the Commissioners’ award is paid into court. This request should be made by certified mail with a copy to each taxpayer.

If the distribution cannot be determined or if an award is not drawn down from court, it will be necessary to report the entire amount to the IRS for each individual taxpayer. Those individuals whose property is acquired by negotiation yet still refuse to provide a distribution of funds should also receive a request by certified mail. The request should advise taxpayers that if an allocation of funds is not provided the entire amount will be reported as if paid to each taxpayer.

===236.7.7.3 Taxpayer Identification Numbers===

It is required that MoDOT request a taxpayer identification number (TIN) from all taxpayers at or before the time of closing. A husband and wife are treated as one taxpayer and only one TIN needs to be supplied. Partnerships and trusts should have a TIN that is to be used instead of social security numbers of the individual partners or the beneficiaries of a trust.

Under IRS regulations, any person whose TIN is requested must furnish such TIN and certify that the TIN is correct. The solicitation shall be made by providing a written statement to the taxpayer that they are required by law to furnish a correct TIN, and that they may be subject to civil or criminal penalties for failing to furnish a correct TIN.

The procedures described in [[236.7 Negotiation#236.7.2 Guidelines and Procedures|EPG 236.7.2]] shall be followed in soliciting TINs from taxpayers during negotiations. The paragraph in the offer letter pertaining to TINs will satisfy the above requirement. Either a [http://oa.mo.gov/sites/default/files/vendor_input_ach_eftd.pdf Vendor Input Form MO 300-1489] or [http://www.irs.gov/pub/irs-pdf/fw9.pdf?portlet=3 IRS Form W-9] can be used with the request.

When dealing with a representative of the owner(s), it is permissible to request that the representative obtain the TIN from the taxpayer(s); however, if they fail to supply it, a request must be sent to the taxpayer(s) by certified mail.

A completed Form 7-7.3 will be retained in the parcel file and provided to the escrow agent. A completed Vendor Input Form MO 300-1489 is to be submitted to district business and benefits.

A. Instructions for Preparing Request for Taxpayer Identification Number and Request for Allocation of Gross Proceeds

The [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Request%20Allocation%20Gross%20Proceeds%20Form%207.7.3.docx Request for Allocation of Gross Proceeds] (Form 7-7.3) and [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Request%20for%20TIN%20and%20Allocation%20of%20Gross%20Proceeds%20Form%207.7.3.A.docx Request for Taxpayer Identification Number and Allocation of Gross Proceeds - Sample Letter] (Form 7-7.3A), has been prepared as a style sheet. Five fields; County, Route, Job, Parcel and Total Amount to be Allocated are to be completed by district right of way before giving the form to the property owner.

A [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Request%20for%20TIN%20and%20Allocation%20of%20Gross%20Proceeds%20Form%207.7.3.A.docx sample letter] (Form 7-7.3A) to accompany the request form is available.

===236.7.7.4 Methods for Reporting to the IRS===

Reporting of real estate transactions to the IRS will be done by one of the following four methods:

:*If the property is purchased and the transaction is closed by an escrow agent, the escrow agent is to handle the reporting to the IRS. The agreement for title and escrow services as described in [[236.4 Description Writing and Titles#236.4.4.6 Escrow Services|EPG 236.4.4.6 Escrow Services]] provides for this requirement. If a bank or other source is used as an escrow agent, the letter of understanding with the escrow agent should spell out this duty along with the other duties.
:*If the property is purchased and the transaction is not closed by an escrow agent, district right of way is responsible for creating a 1099S form in the Right of Way Parcel Acquisition application. The “Property Transfer Settlement” field shall be filled in with “Yes” if part of the consideration for a reportable acquisition transaction consisted of realty. The most current address shall be verified and used on the form.
:*If the property is condemned, it should be determined if the County Clerk is reporting the transaction to the IRS. If they are making the report, MoDOT will not duplicate it. If the County Clerk is not reporting the transactions, district right of way is responsible for creating a 1099S form in the Right of Way Parcel Acquisition application.
:*The taxpayer should be given at least ten days after the written solicitation or at least ten days after the transaction has been closed to supply their TIN. If after that period of time they have still not provided the TIN, district right of way shall create a 1099S form in the Right of Way Parcel Acquisition application.

If the owner will not provide a TIN, it will be replaced with a nine-digit code. The first eight digits will indicate the number of 1099S’s completed for the calendar year for which no TIN could be obtained. The ninth digit indicates the district submitting the 1099S. For example the fifth 1099S in which no TIN was supplied in District 8, would be coded as follows: 000000058.

===236.7.7.5 Corrected 1099S's===

If a trial or legal settlement occurs during the same tax year that the Commissioners’ Award was reported, district right of way shall correct the 1099S in the Right of Way Parcel Acquisition application to show the new amount. The 1099S shall be corrected if the final amount is either more or less than the amount previously reported.

===236.7.7.6 Reporting on Condemned Acquisitions===

'''A. Reporting Jury Verdicts or Settlements in Subsequent Tax Years'''

If a jury verdict or settlement occurs in a subsequent tax year and the amount of the verdict or settlement is greater than the award, a normal 1099S for the difference between the verdict or settlement (not including interest) and the previously reported amount shall be created in the Right of Way Parcel Acquisition application by district right of way.

If a jury verdict or settlement in a subsequent year is for an amount less than the award, no reporting is necessary.

If the jury verdict or settlement is on a parcel that was condemned in a year in which the department was not required to report transactions, a 1099S shall be submitted for the difference in the verdict or settlement (not including interest) and the original award. Do not include the original award in this submission, even though MoDOT never reported the original award.

'''B. Reporting Payment of Interest'''

When a jury verdict or a legal settlement results in $600 or more of interest being due the property owner, the payment of interest is to be reported to the Internal Revenue Service. In these cases, district right of way shall create a 1099INT in the Right of Way Parcel Acquisition application.

When more than one property owner (other than husband and wife or partnerships) is involved in receiving proceeds from the acquisition, the reporting of interest is to be broken down by the same ratio as the allocation of the gross proceeds among the taxpayers.

==236.7.8 Contract Negotiation==

===236.7.8.1 Application for Employment as Contract Negotiator===

All contracts for negotiation services shall comply with statutory, MODOT and E-Verify requirements when applicable. Please refer to [[236.3 Administration#236.3.11 Contracting with MoDOT and E-Verify Requirements|EPG 236.3.11 Contracting with MoDOT and E-Verify Requirements]] for more information.

Right of Way negotiators employed under agreement by the MHTC must enjoy a good professional reputation and be able to provide evidence of significant experience in Federal-Aid projects and negotiating for [[236.10 Right Of Way Condemnation#236.10.7 Eminent Domain Guidelines|eminent domain]] acquisitions. Additional experience obtained through classes relating to the uniform act and negotiations is considered but not required.

All fee negotiators who desire to work for MHTC on a contract basis must submit an [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Application%20Employment%20Contract%20Negotiator%20Form%207.8.1.docx Application for Employment as a Contract Negotiator] (Form 7.8.1), to a district right of way office. When the application is received at the district office, a member of the right of way staff shall conduct an investigation to determine the qualifications of the applicant. This investigation shall be to the extent necessary to determine the abilities of the applicant and his/her general reputation within the profession. All clients shown on the application shall be contacted in person or by telephone. All applicants must be recommended by at least two clients.

After the investigation is completed and district right of way is satisfied with the applicant's qualifications, the district shall transmit to the Right of Way Section its recommendation together with one copy of the application and such other exhibits considered pertinent to the approval process. The Right of Way Section will review the application material to determine the applicant's qualifications and will advise the district office, in writing, of the approval or disapproval of the applicant.

'''Duration of Approval of Fee Negotiators on the Roster of Approved Negotiators'''

Duration of approval on the Roster of Approved Fee Negotiators is 3 years. A renewal application will be sent to each fee negotiator 2 months prior to their 3 year expiration date as contained in MoDOT’s database. The renewal application will seek to determine the applicants desire to remain on the list and also to capture updated information including address, phone numbers, email addresses and areas of the state the applicant is interested in performing work. Renewal dates are contained in the [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Roster%20of%20Approved%20Contract%20Negotiators.pdf Roster of Approved Contract Negotiators (Form 7-8.2)]. If you have any questions you can contact the Right of Way Section of MoDOT's Design Division.

===236.7.8.2 Roster of Approved Contract Negotiators===

The Right of Way Section will maintain a Roster of Approved Contract Negotiators (Form 7-8.2), listing all approved contract negotiators. The roster indicates the districts in which the individual is primarily available to work. However, approved negotiators may work in all areas of the state.

===236.7.8.3 Preliminary Contract Negotiation Fee Estimate===

Although not required, it may be advisable in some circumstances to prepare a preliminary contract negotiation fee estimate. This will document that consideration was given to the negotiation problems that are anticipated and provide a basis for evaluating the reasonableness of proposed fees.

===236.7.8.4 Proposal for Contract Negotiations===

The availability of qualified contract negotiators varies from one location to another and/or from one time period to another, depending upon current economic conditions. Departmental guidelines provides for both the solicitation of competitive proposals and for non-competitive contracting. The availability of qualified contract negotiators and project time constraints may determine the bid process that will be followed.

Every effort shall be made to select the most qualified negotiators available for the particular assignments involved. Consideration should be given to anticipated negotiation problems, the talents and skills of the prospective negotiators, past performance, and present commitments. The negotiator must have experience working on federal-aid projects and provide a list of those projects within the application. The district shall contact by letter, telephone, or in person each of the selected negotiators to determine their interest in submitting proposals for the required work.

Each prospective negotiator must familiarize themselves with all aspects of the proposed negotiations assignment. A member of the district right of way staff shall be available to accompany prospective negotiators during a field review of each parcel if requested, in order to acquaint them with project plans, rights being acquired, and any unique problems that may be encountered.

A proposal packet shall be prepared for each selected negotiator, whether distributing competitive proposals or non-competitive proposals. Each proposal packet should contain the following:

:* Proposal for Contract Negotiations (Form 7-8.4 (CCO RW33) (Form RW33 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements]), with parcel number, owner, and realty appraisal format completed on the price page).
:* Blank copy of Negotiator Services Agreement (Form 7-8.5 (CCO RW34)). (Form RW34 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements])
:*Right of Way Plans.
:*Copies of appropriate negotiations forms and form letters.
:*Envelope to district office with '''"Proposed Negotiation Fees - Do Not Open,"''' if requesting competitive proposals.

'''A. Competitive Proposals for Contract Negotiations'''

When the competitive proposal process for contracting negotiations is used, the district shall make a reasonable effort to secure proposals from those approved negotiators who have demonstrated expertise to accomplish the proposed negotiation assignments. The request for proposals shall be in writing and is to be mailed simultaneously to negotiators on the "approved" list.

It should be noted that negotiation agreements are to be awarded to the lowest and best bid. The term "lowest" pertains strictly to the dollar amount of the proposal. The term "best" takes into consideration the issue of timeliness, or delivery date, the comparative level of experience of the bidders, and also the past records of individuals with respect to quality of work product and adherence to agreement requirements and deadlines. In other words, though important, mere submission of the lowest cost proposal will not, in and of itself, assure that bidder of being awarded a particular agreement.

An envelope directed to District Office shall be provided with a notation prominently displayed '''"Proposed Negotiation Fees - Do Not Open."''' A proposal packet shall be provided to each negotiator. Every negotiator should be warned not to add or delete any terms or conditions or amend the proposal in any way. Altered or amended proposals will be rejected at the time of opening.

'''Electronic submissions or faxed submissions of proposals will not be accepted because confidentiality cannot be maintained'''.

A designated district staff member shall retain all competitive proposals received until time of opening.

:'''1'''. Opening of Proposals

:District staff members shall open all proposals at the prescribed time. Personnel supervising the opening shall publicly announce to all in attendance the amounts recited in each proposal.

:'''2'''. Selection of Successful Proposal

: The lowest and best proposal is to be selected and the district will prepare a Negotiation Services Agreement (CCO RW34) for execution by the successful bidder. Agreements must contain the same provisions as the proposal.

'''B. Non-Competitive Proposals for Contract Negotiations'''

When staff workload or project completion considerations warrant, negotiations agreements may be awarded without competitive proposals, the district may proceed as follows:

District shall select negotiators from the current Roster of Approved Contract Negotiators (Form 7-8.2). Every effort shall be made to select the most qualified negotiator available for the particular job. Consideration should be given to anticipated negotiation problems, negotiator’s experience, negotiator's past performance, pending assignments, etc. District personnel determine the selected negotiator’s availability to complete the work within a specified time.

After the negotiator has been made aware of all facts regarding the prospective negotiations assignment, the district shall request a Proposal for Contract Negotiations (Form 7-8.4, RW33) (Form RW33 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements]), setting forth a fee for each parcel. Since competitive proposals are not involved, the Competitive Proposal paragraph may be deleted or marked "not applicable." The proposal must be dated, signed, and submitted to the district office by the prospective negotiator.

Should it be determined that the proposed fees appear excessive, the district right of way manager or a designee shall negotiate with the negotiator in an effort to achieve acceptable fees. In the event negotiations fail to produce acceptable fees, the district has the option to negotiate with another contractor or initiate the competitive bid process. Once acceptable fees are agreed upon, the district shall secure a Negotiator Services Agreement (CCO RW34).

===236.7.8.5 Negotiator Services Agreement===

All Fee Negotiators performing negotiation work for the Missouri Highways and Transportation Commission shall do so by a fully completed and executed Negotiator Services Agreement (Form 7-8.5 (CCO RW34)) (Form RW34 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements]). Negotiator Services Agreements with individuals or companies shall designate the individual(s) who shall perform the negotiation services. An officer shall execute all agreements with companies. Each agreement shall include a copy of the negotiator’s proposal (Form 7-8.4, RW33). (Form RW33 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements].)

Three copies of the Negotiator Services Agreement shall be executed by appropriate MoDOT staff in accordance with the Commission’s Execution of Documents Policy.

'''A. Distribution of Fully Executed Negotiations Agreements'''

One fully executed copy shall be returned to the contractor, one copy shall be retained by district right of way and one shall be submitted to the Controller’s Division.

'''B. Notice to Proceed'''

The agreement requires a written notice to proceed, with which the negotiator should be provided a current set of highway plans and other data necessary to accomplish the assignment.

===236.7.8.6 Supplemental Negotiator Services Agreements===

Subsequent to the execution of the initial agreement, it sometimes becomes necessary, due to plan changes or other considerations, to request additional negotiations services. If such services are required, they are to be secured by processing a supplemental negotiations agreement.

Supplemental Negotiator Services Agreement (Form 7-8.6, (CCO RW35)) (Form RW35 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements]) is designed to minimize administrative efforts when it becomes necessary to add parcels to the original agreement, or change the scope of the required services.

The Supplemental Negotiator Services Agreement refers to specifications as recited in original agreement, so it becomes imperative that such requirements and specifications are effective at the date "new" parcels or required services are added to the original contract. New parcels shall be construed to mean tracts not previously included or where the plan or ownership revisions are so acute as to require additional services. Also a calendar period or time frame in which the work is to be completed must be specified.

Three copies of the Supplemental Negotiator Services Agreementshall be executed in accordance with the Commission’s Execution of Documents Policy. One fully executed copy shall be returned to the contractor, one copy shall be retained by district right of way and one shall be submitted to the Controller’s Division.

===236.7.8.7 Contract Negotiator Performance Evaluation===

The last paragraph of Proposal for Contract Negotiation (Form 7-8.4, RW33) (Form RW33 is accessible in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements]), advises the contractor that his/her overall performance will be carefully evaluated and that failure to perform at an acceptable level can result in their removal from MoDOT’s Roster of Approved Contract Negotiators (Form 7-8.2).

Consistent with the statements of the proposal, the district shall evaluate the performance of the contract negotiator after completion of all negotiations assignments in a given assignment. The [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Contract%20Negotiator%20Performance%20Form%207.8.7.docx performance shall be rated] (Form 7-8.7). It is essential that this report be fully completed.

For the evaluation process to be meaningful all answers must accurately reflect the conclusions of the person completing the form, based on a thorough analysis of the contractor’s performance on that specific agreement. Some questions may require more than a simple yes or no answer. If that is the case the comments should be written on a separate page and attached to the evaluation report.

Properly used the Performance Evaluation can be of considerable value to MoDOT in effectively managing contract negotiations work. It is intended to serve as the documentary basis for the retention or dismissal of contract negotiators. If a contractor is to be removed from the Roster of Approved Contract Negotiators based on poor performance he/she must be notified in writing.

'''A. Distribution of Evaluation Form'''

Upon completion of the district section of the [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Contract%20Negotiator%20Performance%20Form%207.8.7.docx Performance Evaluation], it is to be signed by the preparer, a copy retained by the district, and one copy submitted to the Right of Way Section. A copy shall also be given to the contract negotiator.

'''B. Notification to Contract Negotiator of Removal from Roster of Approved Contract Negotiators (Form 7-8.2)'''

If after one or more examples of unsatisfactory performance, which results in a recommendation to remove from the Roster of Approved Contract Negotiators, a letter signed by the Asst. to the State Design Engineer - Right of Way shall be mailed to the contract negotiator advising that they have been removed from the Roster of Approved Contract Negotiators.

==236.7.9 Special Benefit Acquisitions==

===236.7.9.1 Purpose===

This information establishes MoDOT’s procedures for partial acquisitions from properties that result in Special Benefits to the remainder.

===236.7.9.2 Special Benefit Acquisitions===

[http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Sample%20Ltr%20Special%20Benefit%20Offer%20Letter%20Form%207.9.2.docx Special Benefits] are those benefits accruing to the land adjacent to the public improvements that do not accrue to the public at large. When an appraisal reveals an enhancement in the value of an owner's remaining property the enhanced value may merely be reflected in a lowered estimate of Just Compensation, or it may result in a zero indication of Just Compensation. Both situations are to be considered Special Benefit cases.

Special benefits reflected in an appraisal must be supported with concurrence from district counsel and written documentation attached to the appraisal.

Dual compensation amounts will be offered to owners of residentially improved properties, to reflect the acquisition area with special benefits to the remainder, and the acquisition of the entire property at its before value.

Dual offers for residentially improved properties are implemented at the discretion of the Asst. to the State Design Engineer - Right of Way. It will be solely the discretion of the Asst. to the State Design Engineer - Right of Way to apply this policy to other than residential property. The size and value of a remainder may dictate the MHTC’s ability to acquire entire large, higher valued properties.

'''A. Dual [http://epg.modot.org/forms/RW/Chapter%207_Negotiation/Sample%20Ltr%20Special%20Benefit%20Offer%20Letter%20Form%207.9.2.docx Offers for Special Benefits] on Residentially Improved Properties'''

Dual offers are to be extended at the initiation of negotiations for properties where residential improvements are affected.

No single-family dwelling that has contributory value, whether occupied or unoccupied at the effective date of appraisal or date of acquisition, shall be compensated at less than its contributory value due to the assessment of special benefits. Further, an occupied dwelling must be compensated for on the basis of its value as a residential use.

'''First Offer'''

If the acquired dwelling is occupied or unoccupied, and contributes to the before value, the first offer would reflect at least the value of the dwelling and supporting land and improvements.

If the acquired dwelling is unoccupied and has no contributory value before the acquisition, the first offer will be the reduced or zero offer.

'''Second Offer'''

In every case, the second offer will reflect the total before property value, based on its highest and best use before the acquisition.

'''B. Acquisition of Residential Dwelling With Contributory Value – Whether Occupied or Unoccupied'''

(Occurs when the highest and best use before acquisition is residential, and the highest and best use after acquisition is a higher, more valuable use.)

If there are special benefits to a remainder, and an occupied or unoccupied dwelling which has value in the before situation is to be acquired, a dual offer will be prepared and extended to the owner at the initiation of negotiations. Offers to acquire an occupied or unoccupied dwelling will include compensation based on the contributory value of the dwelling, residential outbuildings, and supporting land, plus any additional contributory value of other land area in the acquisition, which will have been set out in the appraisal review. The second offer will be the entire before value as set out in the appraisal review.

'''C. Acquisition of an Occupied Dwelling With No Contributory Value to the Current Highest and Best Use'''

(Occurs when the highest and best use of the land, before the acquisition, is greater than residential.).

If there are special benefits to a remainder, and an occupied dwelling which has no contributory value in the before situation is to be acquired, a dual offer will be prepared and extended to the owner at the initiation of negotiations. The first offer will be at least the value of the dwelling, residential outbuildings, and supporting land, approved in the appraisal review. The second offer will be the entire before value as set out in the appraisal review.

'''D. Acquisition of Unoccupied Dwelling That Has No Contributory Value to the Current Highest and Best Use'''

If there are special benefits to a remainder and an unoccupied dwelling, which has no contributory value in the before situation is to be acquired, the property shall be appraised for its highest and best use in both the before and after situation with no special consideration being given the improvements.

No dual offer would be necessary in this situation.

[[category:236 Right of Way|236.07]]

238.2 Land Surveying

2018-06-27T20:08:09Z

EPGsysop: /* 238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review */Per RW, further clarified guidance

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:15px; border:1px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="260px" align="right"
|-
|'''Figures'''
|-
|[[media:238.2 1 Traffic Safety-Equipment.pdf|Traffic Safety-Equipment and Procedures]]
|-
|[[Media:238.2 RW Markers.pdf|Types of RW Markers]]
|-
|[[Media:238.2.6 RW Monument Cap.pdf|R/W Monument Cap and Stamping]]
|-
|[[Media:238.2.7 RW Witness Post Decal.pdf|RW Witness Post Decal]]
|-
|'''Forms'''
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/238.2_Sample_Letter_Notifying_Property_Owner_of_Survey.doc Sample Letter Notifying Property Owner of Survey Work]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/RW/238.2_Form_A-472.pdf Property Damage Release Form A-472]
|-
|[http://wwwi/intranet/cc/contracts/RW/RW11%20Crop%20Damage%20Compensation%20Agreement%20and%20Release.doc Crop Damage Compensation Agreement and Release (RW11)]
|-
|[http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/MoDOT_2006_Survey_Code_Sheet.pdf Survey Coding Sheet]
|-
|[http://spexternalsignin/sites/de/BlogUploads/05-10-2018_Exhibit-A_LegalDescription.docx Legal Description, Exhibit A]
|-
|[http://spexternalsignin/sites/de/BlogUploads/05-10-2018_SurveyPlatCheckList_DE.docx Form 238.2.18.2 Plat Review Checklist]
|}

==238.2.1 Location Surveys and Definitions==

Surveys that are the responsibility of a project surveyor (Registered Survey Party Chief) are generally described as Location Surveys. They are used to locate the right of way corridor, used to locate public and private lands, used to locate tracts described by metes and bounds, or used to locate any property associated to a right or interest. Location Surveys performed by MoDOT project surveyors fall into four basic categories;

# Right of way surveys,
# Right of way resurveys,
# Department parcel surveys, and
# Public land surveys.

To ensure proper accounting for each of the various surveying tasks involved with land surveys, the [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/MoDOT_2006_Survey_Code_Sheet.pdf correct coding] must always be used.

==238.2.2 Right of Way surveys==

Right of way surveys are performed for the purpose of locating, monumenting and describing newly acquired lands to be used for development of a highway corridor, creating a new parcel defined by the right of way limits. A right of way survey is an original survey of the corridor parcel made at the time the parcel is created. The right of way survey is not made to ascertain existing boundaries. It is made to create the new right of way. Right of way surveys are conducted as part of the larger highway project. The right of way survey will occur as part of the design stage of the project. In general terms, right of way procedures will be performed during the preliminary design phase and the final design phase.

==238.2.3 Right of Way Resurveys==

Right of way resurveys are performed for the purpose of remarking, reestablishing, restoring or delineating the right of way line or breaks of a previously created corridor. These surveys are to restore the original right of way lines in the same position as they were originally marked. They are called for in instances of right of way encroachment, location disputes, excess right of way, etc.

==238.2.4 Parcel Surveys==

Department parcel surveys are standard boundary surveys performed for the locating, monumenting and describing of parcels that are acquired by the department for the purpose of facilities management. These surveys, not associated to any right of way, create a new parcel out of a larger parent tract, for the purpose of conveying the new parcel.

==238.2.5 Public land surveys==

Public land surveys are performed for the resurvey of the lands of the United States Public Land Survey System. These surveys will be performed during the conduct of all location surveys. Ties to the public land survey system are necessary for locating rights of way and parcels. Public land surveys will also be performed for the purpose of perpetuating the public corners that are affected by corridor development and highway construction.

==238.2.6 Survey Supervision==

The district land survey manager, land survey supervisior, or land surveyor is required to provide "immediate personal supervision" of the following activities:
:*the location survey,
:*the location survey plan preparation,
:*writing of the land descriptions,
:*and the marking of all MoDOT's land boundaries or rights in real property.

These duties shall be completed by or under the direction of the professional land surveyor (PLS). "Immediate personal supervision" is defined as complete oversight and reponsibility of the work products defined in this article and not necessarily management supervision of the individuals performing the work.

'''Supervision of the survey will entail:'''

:1. Acquisition of all necessary records and data.

:2. Investigation of the selection of the ground control (such as section corners, block corners, survey corners or other corners or monuments found) as a result of the field survey to be used to position the survey on the ground.

:3. Reviewing the execution of the survey, the survey computations and the preparation of the drawing.

'''Supervision of the location survey plan and land description:'''

:1. Supervise each step of the preparation of the plats, maps, survey plans, drawings, reports, description, surveys or other documents and have input into their preparation prior to their completion.

:2. Review the final plats, maps, survey plans, drawings, reports, descriptions, surveys or other documents and makes necessary and appropriate changes.

'''Supervision of setting and reestablishing right of way:'''

:1. During design and construction activities, the need to locate right of way can occur at any time throughout our process. Best management practice establishes all of the right of way monuments before construction. This addresses most, if not all, construction marking issues. This approach may require resource reallocation to allow for adequate PLS involvement prior to the project award. These duties can be completed by or under the direction (oversight and responsibility) of the PLS.

:2. During utility construction activities, the construction surveyor can mark utility locations or utility corridors anywhere within MoDOT’s marked property boundaries. Should the right of way boundary need to be marked, the work can be completed by or under the direction (oversight and responsibility) of the PLS.

:3. When granting a permit for a driveway, the improvement is intended to extend to MoDOT’s right of way line. If monuments are in place, they may be used to detect the location of MoDOT’s right of way at the permit location. If there are no monuments in place, the work can be completed by or under the direction (oversight and responsibility) of the PLS.

:4. The practice of showing landowners where to build a fence has always been a common activity for MoDOT personnel. If there are no existing right of way markers, the landowner can choose to have a survey done by a private surveyor or MoDOT surveyors could complete the necessary survey for the landowner depending on the availability of resources and the anticipated completion date.

==238.2.7 Contacts with property owners==

Prior to a request for a survey the designer sends a [http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/238.2_Sample_Letter_Notifying_Property_Owner_of_Survey.doc letter to property owners] located along the proposed roadway improvement. The district Right of Way office will supply the designer with a list of property owners and their addresses. The survey party chief will contact property owners and/or occupants, if conveniently possible, prior to entering a property as a matter of respect and to promote good public relations. The survey party chief explains in general the proposed improvement, explains in layman terms how the survey will proceed, and requests the consent of the owner and/or occupant to proceed with the survey. Should the owner and/or occupant refuse to allow the survey party chief to enter the property the project development engineer is immediately advised of the situation. They will handle the case beyond this point. The survey party will not enter any property when consent to enter has been refused until further advised by the project development engineer. The survey party chief will advise the owner and/or occupant that the survey is made a step at a time and the party will be passing through the property several times to complete the work. These numerous visits are not an indication that mistakes have been made. If the survey is a photogrammetric survey the owner and/or occupant must understand the placement and purpose of ground control targets. The public is never given questionable information by the survey party. It is much better to say, "I do not know" than to impart false information. A letter may be sent to property owners in lieu of other means of contact

==238.2.8 Survey Property Damage==

During the process of making surveys, it may become necessary to trim crops or trees; or be involved in other circumstances that may involve property damage related to obtaining survey information. When property damage does result, it is the responsibility of the survey party chief to complete the [http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/RW/238.2_Form_A-472.pdf Property Damage Release and Report Form A-472], and obtain the necessary signature if possible. If circumstances of the property damage are questionable, a letter of explanation will be sent to the Design Division prior to submitting the property damage release and report form to fiscal services. The property owner must be contacted prior to the cutting of crops or trees. The survey party chief must inform the property owner of the need for, and the extent of, the required damage.

==238.2.9 Traffic safety==

Survey parties are to utilize the equipment and procedures available to provide the maximum level of safety for their personnel and the traveling public. When working on the road, [[media:238.2 1 Traffic Safety-Equipment.pdf|appropriate signing]] is used as a minimum guide for traffic safety. When working on the outside shoulder one "Survey Crew" sign is placed on that shoulder, preceding the work by 200 ft. in urban areas and 500 ft. in rural areas. When working in the median, "Survey Crew" signs are used facing both directions. When working outside the outside shoulder line signing is not normally used. The major factors bearing on the protection to be used in each situation are:
* Speed
* Volume of traffic
* Highway geometrics
* Duration of operation
* Exposure to hazards
* Weather (or road conditions)

[[media:238.2 1 Traffic Safety-Equipment.pdf|Warning signs]] are placed at appropriate minimum distances. Field conditions will control the actual placement of signs and channelizers. The individual in charge of the survey party has the responsibility to see that the necessary safety precautions are taken. Safety vests are to be worn by all members of the survey party while working on the right of way. Where signs are used they are to be placed prior to beginning work and at locations having adequate approach visibility. Channelizers are to be used as needed. Personnel using stop-slow paddles are positioned as needed to provide the best direction of traffic and safety for working personnel. Personnel must be instructed concerning the importance of staying alert, being courteous to motorists, and the fact that the responsibility for the lives of the party and traveling public are in their hands. The department publication ''Safety Rules and Regulations'' gives additional traffic control information. Trucks with top mounted flashers may be used to provide additional protection for personnel by blocking the lane or parking on the shoulder. Two-way radios may be used to handle traffic where two-way operation over a single lane is maintained without visible contact between personnel.

==238.2.10 Tolerances==

The required degree of accuracy for conventional surveys is shown in the following table. The survey party is responsible for obtaining at least this degree of accuracy, through the proper adjustment and care of instruments and equipment and the method of making measurements.

{|border="1" style="text-align:center" cellpadding="3" align="center"
|-
! style="background:#6B8E23" colspan="2"|SURVEY ACCURACY
|-style="background:#6B8E23"
|'''MEASUREMENT'''||'''ALLOWABLE ERROR'''
|-style="background:#cccccc"
|Distance||1:20,000
|-style="background:#cccccc"
|Angular||6 Seconds
|-style="background:#cccccc"
|Levels||0.05 ft. x Sq. Root Dist.(miles)
|}

==238.2.11 Recording accuracy==

Single measurements are recorded to the accuracy shown in the following table.

{|border="1" style="text-align:center" cellpadding="3" align="center"
|-
!colspan="2" style="background:#CD853F"|SURVEY RECORDING ACCURACY
|-style="background:#CD853F"
|'''MEASUREMENT'''||'''ACCURACY'''
|-style="background:#cccccc"
|Distance||0.01 ft.
|-style="background:#cccccc"
|Angular||5 Seconds
|-style="background:#cccccc"
|Levels||0.01 ft. Bench Levels, Turns, etc. 0.01 ft. on Concrete 0.1ft. All Others
|}

==238.2.12 Subdivision or lot ties==

The survey includes ties between the survey tangent line, and the legal land survey corner monuments that may be recorded subdivision or lot corner monuments. At least two ties are required in each subdivision or lot. The best ties are to the subdivision corner monuments nearest the highway survey line. The ties are measured and recorded in bound notebooks, similar to the requirements for land survey corner monuments. The ties include a complete and definite description of the monument being tied. The project development engineer is advised early in the survey concerning the corner monuments that need to be re-established or witnessed, so that this work can be completed and the information added to the plans prior to submittal of the plans to [http://wwwi/intranet/rw/ Right of Way].

==238.2.13 Reestablishing corner monuments==

The county surveyor or a registered land surveyor may witness or reestablish survey corner monuments. Establishment of reference monuments for corners that MoDOT might destroy will require the submittal of “temporary” corner forms to the Department of Natural Resources. These monuments are considered a reference monument set for the purpose of reestablishment of a permanent monument in the previous corner position when the project is complete. Corners that are in or near roadways or in other unsafe areas like medians will require establishment of permanent reference monuments in a suitable area on the right of way between the ditch slope and the utility easement. Standard monuments for replacing corners are to be used.

===238.2.13.1 Preservation of Existing Recorded Boundary Marker===

In the event that corners of the United State Public Land Survey System, property boundary markers of record, or vertical and horizontal control stations are in jeopardy of being disturbed by a MoDOT project, it shall be the responsibility of the project Professional Land Surveyor to preserve the positional location of these monuments following the guidelines below:

:1. Monuments shall be referenced to the 1983 Missouri State Plane Coordinate System.

:2. Documentation, preservation and relocation of these findings shall be prepared either using an approved agency form if applicable or by recording a Boundary Resurvey plat with the County Recorder of Deeds in which the project resides.

===238.2.13.2 Temporary Easements===

When MoDOT is acquiring a Temporary Easement for construction, the project surveyor shall research the records, conduct a field survey to locate all existing recorded boundary markers that are on or near the Commission’s boundary, and re-monument all boundary markers of record disturbed by construction. All other evidence not of record or its origin cannot be determined, must be listed in a recovery table using state plane coordinates, and shown on the Boundary Resurvey plat of the existing Missouri Highways and Transportation Commission (MHTC) boundaries. This shall be executed in compliance with applicable rules for surveys administered by the Missouri Board for Architects, Professional Engineers and Professional Land Surveyors defined in [http://www.sos.mo.gov/adrules/csr/current/20csr/20c2030-16.pdf 20 CSR 2030-16] and pertinent laws from [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText060.html Missouri Revised Statutes Chapter 60], [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText226.html Chapter 226] and [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText327.html Chapter 327].

The intent of EPG 238.2.13.2 is to preserve the location of all existing recorded evidence potentially in jeopardy of being disturbed by a construction project along the Commission’s boundary and since original boundaries are not being altered by these actions, a complete survey of any adjoining properties will not be required.

==238.2.14 Monumenting Right of Way==

To reduce the need for multiple staking of the right of way line, permanent markers will normally be set by the design survey party prior to or at the time of condemnation for conventional surveys. [[media:238.2 RW Markers.pdf|Specific types of marker]] and markings are used for conventional surveys. In location surveys, monuments must be set according to the following guidelines and the Missouri Minimum Standards for Land Surveys.

Permanent monuments are set prior to the recording of the location survey plan if they will not be moved or destroyed by construction activities within six months of their installation. Until the right of way acquisition is completed, semi permanent monuments may be used. If the required permanent monuments will be disturbed by utility adjustment or construction activity, semi permanent monuments can remain until 12 months after the location survey plan is recorded. In any event, permanent monuments must be installed within 12 months after the plan has been recorded.

The monumentation of right of way can only be performed under the supervision of a department project surveyor or consultant land surveyor, and only as part of a survey. Right of way monumentation by unauthorized department personal is not allowed. This not only applies to compliant monumentation, but also to any marking placed along the highway corridor near or on the right of way lines with the intention of representing either the precise or approximate location of right of way.

===238.2.14.1 Monuments to be set on Highway Corridors===

Highway corridors will be monumented with devices complying with criteria set forth in state statutes. The devices are set at the location of right of way breaks, which represent the “called to” locations of the land description of the highway corridor.

While variation may be necessary due to terrain, the setting of the monument must comply with permanent monument standards. The standard department monument consists of a 5/8 in. steel rod 24 in. long. This rod will have a permanently attached 2 in. diameter aluminum cap. The name of the department, as well as the license number of the project surveyor will be [[media:238.2.6 RW Monument Cap.pdf|stamped on the cap]]. Cap installation details are shown on [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/60200.pdf Standard Plan 602.00].

The monument must be accompanied by a witness post offset from the monument itself by 1 ft. along the right of way line. The [[media:238.2.7 RW Witness Post Decal.pdf|witness post]] is a white carsonite post 6 ft. long. A department informational decal is attached to the “highway” side of the post. Post installation details are shown on [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/60200.pdf Standard Plan 602.00].

===238.2.14.2 Monuments to be set on Permanent Easements===

Permanent easements will be monumented with devices complying with criteria set forth in state statutes. The standard department monument for permanent easements consist of a steel or aluminum rod marker not less than one-half inch (1/2") in diameter and not less than eighteen inches (18") in length and having a plastic or aluminum cap.

===238.2.14.3 Monumenting Landowner's Property Lines When Requested===

MoDOT project surveyors, when requested by Right of Way and provided with a existing survey of the property owners land, will monument the Land owners new property pins at the intersection of the new MoDOT boundary line and the owners side lines in compliance with applicable rules for surveys administered by the Missouri Board for Architects, Professional Engineers and Professional Land Surveyors defined in [http://www.sos.mo.gov/adrules/csr/current/20csr/20csr.asp#20-2030 20 CSR 2030] and pertinent laws from Missouri Revised Statutes [http://www.moga.mo.gov/statutes/C060.HTM Chapter 60], [http://www.moga.mo.gov/statutes/C226.HTM Chapter 226] and [http://www.moga.mo.gov/statutes/C327.HTM Chapter 327].

==238.2.15 Right of Way Description==

The right of way description must be written to describe and locate the right of way corridor as a unique parcel of land (for additional information, refer to [[236.4 Description Writing and Titles#236.4.6 The Description|236.4 Description Writing and Titles]]). This description will:
* Be based on the location survey
* Be concise
* Contain title identity
* Contain measured dimensions and highway stationing in ground units
* Contain measurement data that describes the geometric area of the corridor and closes mathematically
* Contains information that does not lend to alternate interpretations and
* Be written to facilitate the relocation of the corridor by a professional land surveyor.
The right of way description will be by referral, making calls to the location survey plan. The description must also contain calls to the right of way monuments and their station values. Written to locate the highway centerline relative to nearby, measured corners of the public survey system, the description will follow the form of a strip conveyance, metes and bounds or a combination of the two.

==238.2.16 Location surveys==

Location surveys are performed to provide the department a clear and accurate record and marking of the highway corridor right of way lines and breaks. Location surveys include the execution of a survey compliant with the Missouri Minimum Standards for Property Boundary Surveys ([http://sos.mo.gov/adrules/csr/current/20csr/20c2030-16.pdf 20 CSR 2030-16.010 through 20 CSR 2030-16.110]) and the development of a [[238.2_Land_Surveying#238.2.1.18 Location Survey Plan|Location Survey Plan]] that serves as the recordable survey plat. Associated to the survey and plan is a land description of the highway right of way containing two basic elements

* Description of the interest being conveyed
* Description of the land itself.

The description will be in the manner of a description by referral, making reference calls to the right of way survey plan, as well as calls to the survey and all right of way monumentation.

==238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review==

Legal descriptions attached to a recordable document for both the acquisition of property rights (negotiated and condemned) and the conveyance of property rights, which affect the location of the properties boundary lines are required to have a Professional Land Surveyors (PLS) signature and seal.

The PLS assigned to a project will verify that the property descriptions written for acquisition of property rights (negotiated and condemned) and conveyance of property rights, are based on a legal survey tied to the PLS system. In the event the district PLS prepares the description, the review may be skipped as outlined in the EPG.

Prior to any right of way being negotiated, the PLS will review all descriptions if written by others to ensure these descriptions meet the following criteria:

:1) A Professional Land Surveyor surveyed any description of property ties to the Public Land Survey System (PLSS) used in deeds. This would include the description of the centerline if used to tie the property to the PLSS or direct traverse ties to monuments in the PLSS.

:2) Descriptions written follow guidance as described in the Engineering Policy Guide.

:3) Leased property descriptions must be reviewed and approved by the district PLS.

Once satisfied with the review, the PLS will sign and affix the PLS's seal to the property description attached to the recordable document. This includes the PLS review and approval of legal descriptions included in deeds conveying property exactly as it was acquired. The review and approval of the PLS must be documented, such as an email.

In situations where multiple recordable documents are prepared to release all outstanding interest in properties being acquired, it is not necessary to obtain multiple original exhibits. A copy of the property description signed and sealed by a PLS may be attached to the recordable document.

The signature and seal of the PLS on legal descriptions is not required in the following situations because the locations of the boundary lines are not affected:

:* When the only property right being acquired or conveyed is access rights.
:* When the only property right being acquired is a temporary or permanent easement.
:* When the entire property is being acquired, and the legal description is being copied from the last deed of record.
:* When an excess parcel is being conveyed exactly as it was acquired.

==238.2.18 Location Survey Plan==

Location surveys are planned and performed according to the following procedures as well as in compliance with applicable rules for surveys administered by the Missouri Board for Architects, Professional Engineers and Professional Land Surveyors defined in [http://sos.mo.gov/adrules/csr/current/20csr/20csr.asp#20-2030 20 CSR 2030] and pertinent laws from Missouri Revised Statutes chapters [http://www.moga.mo.gov/STATUTES/C060.HTM 60], [http://www.moga.mo.gov/STATUTES/C226.HTM 226] and [http://www.moga.mo.gov/STATUTES/C327.HTM 327]. All survey work will be done in English units. There may be special circumstances where the project surveyor cannot comply with some provisions of the minimum standards. If the survey deviates from these minimum standards, it should be documented, justified and archived by the project surveyor. Minimum standards require that such deviation be shown, described, and justified on the right of way survey plan. Where conditions require the use of procedures not covered in the minimum standards, the Design Division may be consulted to establish criteria and procedures for those conditions.

===238.2.18.1 Criteria===

The essential purpose of the location survey plan is to:

:*represent the correct size and shape of the corridor to scale,
:*to define by dimension this size and shape,
:*to locate the right of way corridor within the United States Public Land Survey System,
:*to specify locative points such as physical monuments, planimetric features, accessories, etc.,
:*show title identity and
:*show data that lends authority to the plan, including date, surveyor’s name, certificate of accuracy and surveyor’s stamp and signature.

The right of way survey plan should be developed on nominal size (22 in. x34 in.) sheets. [[Media:238.2 Location Survey Plan Example.pdf|An example]] location survey plan sheet is available. The specifications for the location survey plan should conform to all of the following provisions, where applicable:

:*The location survey plan should be a drawing made to a convenient scale on the type of material consistent with the purpose and permanency required. The project surveyor will also archive the plan in digital format. The project surveyor will sign and seal the location survey plan. The plan should be the official plat and should take precedence over the digital data.
:*The location plan should show the department’s name and the date of certification.
:*The plan should bear the signature and seal of the project surveyor in responsible charge. Whenever more than one (1) sheet must be used to accurately portray the survey, each sheet should bear the signature and seal of the project surveyor.
:*Lettering on the location survey plan presented to the recorder should be no smaller than eight-hundredths in. (0.08 in.) tall. All characters should be open, well-rounded and of uniform width.
:*The direction of boundary lines on the plan should be shown by direct angles between established lines or by azimuths or bearings based upon the Missouri Coordinate System of 1983. The direction reference system should be clearly described on the plat and must be retraceable for future surveys.
:*A prominent north arrow should be drawn on every sheet.
:*Complete dimensions (distances, directions, and curve data) of the right of way corridor.
:*All dimensions should be shown in feet and decimal parts thereof. All plan dimensions or highway stations should be given as horizontal distances at the ground surface. A written scale should be noted on all plans.
:*All vertical dimensions should be shown by elevations above an established or assumed datum.
:*Measurements and calculated areas will be shown on the plan to a number of significant figures representative of the actual precision of the measurements.
:*Curved lines should show at least two (2) elements of the curve and preferably these three (3): radius, central angle and length of arc. When not tangent to the preceding and or succeeding course, the bearing or angle of either the initial tangent, radial line or long chord should be shown. Pertinent information on compound curves should be shown.
:*The survey should show sufficient data (distances and directions) to positively locate the right-of-way surveyed within the United States Public Land Survey. If the survey cannot be located by either of the previously mentioned provisions, it must be referenced to other lines and points sufficiently established by record.
:*All controlling corners accepted or restored should be shown or noted on the plat.
:*All controlling corner physical monuments either found or set should be shown and described on the plan. A note or symbol should show which were found and which were set.
:*The class of property should be noted on the plan.
:*Any material variation between measured and record dimensions should be noted on the plan.

===238.2.18.2 Standardization===

Surveys, plans and descriptions should be standardized to the greatest extent throughout the department to promote efficiency, uniformity and ease of data analysis. Standardization includes the use of standard sheets, forms, procedures, monuments, archiving and procedures. A checklist for review of survey plats for compliance with Missouri Minimum Standards for property boundary surveys should be completed for every Location Survey Plat made for the department. A sample generic checklist for plat review, provided by the State Land Surveyor’s office, is shown in [http://spexternalsignin/sites/de/BlogUploads/05-10-2018_SurveyPlatCheckList_DE.docx Form 238.2.18.2 Plat Review Checklist].

===238.2.18.3 Project Responsibility===

When a location survey is needed, the district design engineer will appoint a project surveyor and assign a survey party and design technicians to the project for execution of the survey and the preparation of plans. The district right of way manager will assign specialists from that division to the survey project for the purpose of research and description writing. The project surveyor will supervise members of the project team. In the case of a right of way survey that is called for as part of a larger highway project, the project surveyor is an active participant on the project development team and works in partnership with the project manager to provide direction. The project surveyor is responsible for and in charge of all phases of the survey, the plan preparation, and description writing. Project phases fall in the general order of:

:* title evidence research consisting of the written evidence found in deeds, abstracts, title policies and plats,
:* evidence research of county records of surveys, field books, notes, maps, General Land Office (GLO) survey records, county surveyor records, records from the State Land Surveyor’s office,
:* inspect the parcels and search for existing monuments,
:* take and evaluate testimony evidence, particularly that associated to existing monuments,
:* make measurements to existing monuments and public corners,
:* perform calculations and analyze the results,
:* make conclusions in accordance with the priorities of evidence,
:* make measurements to set new monuments based on conclusions,
:* prepare survey plans and write descriptions and
:* ensure Location Survey Plans are recorded at the county courthouse.

===238.2.18.4 Project Chronology===

While each survey project is unique and may pose its own particular adjustments to procedures, the following is provided as a general guideline for orderly project conduct and execution.

'''Evidence Gathering'''

Collecting and compiling available records containing pertinent information associated to the lands of the survey project area.

:*Compile copies of assessor’s maps and aerial photomaps.
:*Acquire names and addresses of possible affected parties.
:*Acquire deeds and plats for affected properties.
:*Acquire title records and abstracts (may include deeds of record, title certification, etc.).
:*Compile evidence from recorded surveys.
:*Gather highway plans in the affected area.
:*Field books from previous surveys in the area.
:*Gather right of way deeds.
:*Search records for available survey control.
:*Attain copies of USGS quad maps for the project area.
:*Acquire copies of aerial photography for the area.
:*Attain corner certification records.
:*Acquire descriptions, plats and notes from original government surveys.
:*Attain copies of survey plats and notes that have been made by county surveyors and private surveyors over the time frame from the original surveys to current date.
:*Acquire geodetic control data for the project area. Evidence may have to be expanded to include other resources and other data such as unrecorded devices that may be provided from affected parties, private surveys that have been performed in the area, title policies for affected lands, limits of incorporation, etc.

'''Preliminary Field Survey'''

The field survey work to inspect the project location and affected parcels. Physical evidence may be recovered as well as initial measurements made.

:*Prior to the preliminary field survey, contact letters are to be sent to all possible affected parties.
:*During field reconnaissance and contacts with affected parties, witness evidence may be taken and locations of existing monuments and evidence of possession may be recovered.
:*Search and recover monuments called for in written conveyances acquired from title research. Locate accessories where monument evidence may not be found.
:*Locate cultural features and activities that may serve as evidence of possession.
:*Search for and recover public land corners.
:*Perform control survey throughout the project area. Establish control stations within the project that will facilitate accurate measurements to recovered evidence and public corners.
:*Make measurements and records of recovered evidence and public corners.

'''Evidence and Survey Analysis'''

The compilation and analysis of gathered evidence and results of field measurements includes the following:

:*Perform mathematical checks of control survey traverses. Check all measurement and observation data.
:*Execute appropriate data adjustments. Perform additional measurements if necessary.
:*Confirm compliance with the survey tolerances found in minimum standards.
:*Perform computations for any necessary public land corner reestablishment.
:*Prepare public corner certification documents.
:*Execute field survey needed for any public corner reestablishment.
:*File the certification documents with the State Land Surveyor.

'''Final Field Survey'''

The measuring and placing of the right of way monuments and the development of the location survey plan includes the folowing.

:*Check layout computations for point locations of right of way corridor breaks.
:*Review prior documents, measurements and check computations. Prepare the location survey plan and record.
:*Perform a staking survey prior to acquisition in the area of each parcel. Staking survey should include placing permanent monuments at locations of right of way breaks and permanent easements as well as temporary monuments at the corners of temporary easements.
:*Place a [[Media:238.2.7 RW Witness Post Decal.pdf|witness post]] at Location Survey monument locations on right of way. It is not necessary to place witness posts on any easement point unless it is at a Location Survey monument.
:*Confirm land descriptions are written by referral, with calls to the right of way survey plan, the monuments and the survey.

===238.2.18.5 Use of the Project Surveyor’s Seal===

Department project surveyors should certify location surveys they perform. Certification of the survey is by their signature and application of seal to the right of way survey plan or department parcel plats. Application of the certification must conform to the rules for use of the seal, with particular attention given to the following rule: "The signing and sealing of plats, surveys, drawings, documents, specifications, estimates, reports and other documents or instruments not prepared by the registered land surveyor or under his/her immediate personal supervision is prohibited." Survey project assignments must be organized in such manner the project surveyor is placed in a position of responsibility and authority of the work to which the surveyor signs and seals. To file or record any map, plat, or survey, requires the personal seal and signature of the professional land surveyor by whom or under whose authority and supervision the map, plat or survey was prepared.

===238.2.18.6 Recording the Location Survey Plan===

It is the district's responsibility to ensure the final survey is completed (all permanent markers set) and the location survey plan is recorded as soon as possible after a project has advanced to the point that the permanent monuments will not obstruct construction activities. As the project progresses, the District Land Survey Manager should contact the Resident Engineer to determine the earliest possible time the final survey can be performed without risk of the contractor disturbing any of the permanent markers. In most cases, the final survey can begin, and perhaps even be completed, prior to completion of the project. A SiteManager[[image:bulldozer.jpg|20px]] pop-up message to the RE will occur when the project is approximately 80% complete to remind the RE to contact the DDE and District Land Survey Manager to schedule the final survey work if the survey has not already begun.

Once the Location Survey Plan is completed and sealed by the project surveyor, it should be delivered promptly to the District Right of Way Manager for filing with the county recorder’s office.

[[category:238 Surveying Activities|238.02]]

751.1 Preliminary Design

2018-06-27T15:10:47Z

EPGsysop: Per BR, clarified Request for Soil Properties Form A in "Request for Final Soundings for Structures" Form

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:15px; border:1px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
|-
|'''Forms'''
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Copy%20of%20751.1.3.5_Structural_Rehabilitation_Checklist.xlsm Structural Rehabilitation Checklist]
|}

==751.1.1 Overview==
===751.1.1.1 Introduction===

The Preliminary Design of a structure begins with the district submitting a Bridge Survey indicating their need for a structure, and ends with the completion of the Substructure Layout or TS&L submittal (type, size and location). This article is intended to be a guide for those individuals assigned the task of performing the Preliminary Design or “laying out” of a structure.

The types of structures can be broken into five categories:
:1.) Bridge over Water
:2.) Bridge over Roadway or Railroad
:3.) Box Culvert over Water
:4.) Retaining Wall (CIP walls taller than 5 ft., MSE walls adjacent to bridge end bents)
:5.) Rehabilitation or Modification of Existing Structure

In addition to the following information, the Preliminary Design shall consider hydraulic issues where applicable.

===751.1.1.2 Bridge Survey Processing and Bridge Numbering===

The Preliminary Design process starts with the receipt of the Bridge Survey. The following is a list of steps that are taken by the Bridge Survey Processor.

'''Assign a Bridge Number to the Structure'''

The Bridge Division assigns bridge numbers in Bloodhound to all new, rehabilitated or modified structures (i.e., bridges, box culverts (see [[750.7 Non-Hydraulic Considerations#750.7.4.3 Summary of Responsibilities|EPG 750.7.4.3 Summary of Responsibilities]]), CIP retaining walls over 5 ft. tall and MSE walls adjacent to bridge end bents).

Enter the Bridge Number, survey received date and feature crossed in the Bloodhound database.

'''New Structures:'''

:New structures are numbered in ascending order using the next available bridge number. Numbering for new structures (except timber structures) start at A0001 thru A9999 and will be followed by B1000 thru B9999. (Note: B0001 thru B0581 were used for the Safe and Sound Bridge Replacement Program.)
:New timber bridges are numbered in the same manner using the letter “T” instead of the letter “A”.

'''Temporary Structures:'''

:Temporary bridges use the same number as the new bridge with the letter “T” added to the end (i.e., the temporary bridge for A8650 would be A8650T).

'''Rehabilitated or Modified Structures''' (Except when rehabilitation is only for structural steel coating):

:'''Single Structures (Includes twin structures with individual bridge numbers): '''

::Structures without a suffix letter on the existing bridge number will be numbered using the existing bridge number and a suffix number added that corresponds to the number of rehabilitations or modifications to the structure (i.e., bridge number A0455 becomes A04551 upon its first rehabilitation or modification and A04552 upon its second).

:'''Single Structures with the Suffix “R”:'''
::Structures that have the suffix “R” on the bridge number are usually bridges that have been rehabilitated or modified in the past, but in some cases bridges were given the suffix “R” to denote it as a replacement for a bridge with the same number. Review the existing bridge plans to determine if the “R” was for a rehabilitation or replacement. Structures that have been previously rehabilitated should replace the “R” with a suffix number corresponding to the total number of rehabilitations to the structure (i.e., bridge number A0444R would become A04442 (second rehab. or mod.), bridge number A0055R2 would become A00553 (third rehab. or mod.), etc.). For structures where the “R” denotes it as a replacement, the suffix number corresponds to the number of rehabilitations or modifications and the “R” is dropped (i.e., bridge number L0428R becomes L04281 for the first rehabilitation). If the “R” suffix was removed in a previous rehabilitation, the next suffix number is used regardless if the original structure was a rehabilitation or replacement.

:'''Twin Structures with the Same Bridge Number:'''
::Twin structures with the same bridge number will use a different suffix number for each structure. The numbering is similar to a single structure with the lower suffix number being used on the eastbound or southbound structure and the next suffix number being used on the westbound or northbound structure (i.e., bridge number A0144 would become A01441 for the eastbound bridge and A01442 for the westbound bridge. A future rehabilitation would become A01443 for the eastbound bridge and A01444 for the westbound bridge). Twin bridges with an “R” suffix on the bridge number would receive the suffix numbers using the same rules, but with the same consideration given to the “R” as it is for a single structure.

'''Structural Steel Coating (Use when all bridge pay items are related to structural steel coatings):'''

:Rehabilitations that consist only of structural steel coatings use the existing bridge number plus the suffix “-Paint” (i.e., bridge number A2100 would become A2100-Paint and bridge number A150010 (multiple rehabilitations) would become A150010-Paint). A future rehabilitation consisting of only structural steel coatings would use the suffix “-Paint2” only if no other rehabilitations have been completed since the previous coating rehabilitation.

'''Removal of Existing Bridge Structures:'''

:When a bridge structure is removed and not replaced by a new bridge structure or is removed under a separate contract, the suffix “-Remove” should be added to the latest bridge number (i.e., bridge number T0415 would become T0415-Remove and bridge number K01651 would become K01651-Remove).

'''Re-using Bridge Numbers:'''

:Bridge numbers that were assigned to new structures that were never built are only reused if the proposed structure is at the same crossing location that the bridge number was originally assigned to.

:Bridge numbers that were assigned to rehabilitate or modify structures where the work was not completed may reuse the previous bridge number by adding the suffix “-#2” to the bridge number (i.e., bridge number A6545 had plans developed for deck repairs and was assigned the bridge number A65451, but the work was never completed. At a later date, bridge A6545 is set up to be redecked; the bridge number assigned to the redeck would be A65451-#2). This suffix is only recorded in Bloodhound for tracking purposes and is not shown as part of the bridge number on file folders or final plans.

'''Create Job Folders'''

Check to see if a Correspondence File has been created. If the Correspondence File has been created, record the Bridge Number(s) in Bloodhound and make a Preliminary Design File for each structure received. If the Correspondence File has not been created, make a Correspondence File, an outer folder and a Preliminary Design File for each structure received. Here is the information for each type of folder/file:
<center>
{|
|-
|style="border-bottom:2px solid black;" width="125px"|Folder Type|| ||style="border-bottom:2px solid black;"|Required Information on Folder
|-
|Outer (pink label)|| ||County, Route and Job No.
|-
|Correspondence|| ||County, Route and Job No.
|-
|Preliminary Design|| ||County, Route, Bridge No., Location and Job No.
|}
</center>
Also, be sure to notify by email the Structural Resource Manager and the appropriate Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer, if known, when a new Correspondence File is created. The email subject line should include the Job No., County, Route and Bridge No. Include the name of the Bridge Division contact in the email, either the Structural Project Manager or the Structural Liaison Engineer.

'''Calculate Drainage Information'''

For structures over streams or waterways, calculate the drainage area and length of stream. Generate a drainage summary and include this information along with a map showing the drainage area for the structure and the area surrounding it in the Preliminary Design folder. If the drainage area is less than 1.5 sq. miles, consult the Structural Resource Manager to determine if preliminary design by the Bridge Division is necessary. The accuracy of the drainage area should be to the nearest 0.1 sq. mile for drainage areas less than 10 sq. miles and to the nearest 1 sq. mile for drainage areas greater than or equal to 10 sq. miles. When another stream intersects the subject stream near the downstream side of the proposed structure, create a separate drainage summary for the intersecting stream and include it in the Preliminary Design folder.

'''Process Electronic Files'''

When the electronic files listed in [[:Category:747 Bridge Reports and Layouts#747.1.2 Bridge Survey Submittals|EPG 747.1.2 Bridge Survey Submittals]] are received, verify that the drawing scales are correct and that the necessary reference files are included. Also, review all Bridge Survey Sheets and the Bridge Survey Checklist for accuracy and completeness. The Bridge Survey Processor may have to work with the district to correct any discrepancies and/or omissions.

Add the newly assigned bridge number to the files and place a hard copy in the layout folder.

'''Final Step for Bridge Survey Processor'''

Once all of these steps are completed, the Bridge Survey Processor should deliver the Correspondence File, outer folder and the Preliminary Design Folder(s) to the Structural Resource Manager. An acknowledgement email is sent to the district contact(s) informing them that the Bridge Division has received the Bridge Survey. The email subject line should include the Job No., County and Route. Include the Bridge No(s). and the name of the Bridge Division contact in the email.

Once the survey is found to be complete and accurate, the Survey Complete date should be entered into Bloodhound. This date should match the Surv Rec date if no changes were made. If the survey is not complete or contains inaccuracies as submitted, we need to work with the district to fill in the blanks. If the omissions affect the timeline for completing the preliminary design, the Survey Complete date should reflect the date when we have all the information needed for the preliminary design to move forward without delay. If there is a delay in the bridge division review of the survey, this time should not count against the district in the survey complete date. The Bridge Survey Processor should work closely with the preliminary designer and SPM to determine the proper Survey Complete date in this case. For example, a bridge survey is received on 9/16/2016. Initial review by the bridge survey processor shows a complete survey. The job sits for five weeks while a preliminary resource comes available. Review by the preliminary designer shows a profile grade that is unusable and the preliminary design cannot progress until the grade situation is corrected. It takes four weeks for the grade to get worked out. The Survey Complete date should be four weeks after the Surv Rec date (10/14/2016). The district would not be penalized for our five week delay in reviewing the survey. This date is important because it will help us track when bridge surveys are turned in relative to when they are complete and when the project is due to Design.

===751.1.1.3 Beginning Preliminary Design===

The Preliminary Designer should meet with the Structural Project Manager to go over the Correspondence and Preliminary Design files to see if anything out of the ordinary has come up at Core Team Meetings prior to that date. It is important to include any correspondence or calculations used in the laying out of the structure in the bound portion of the Preliminary Design Folder.

The Preliminary Designer should then examine the Bridge Survey closely for any errors or omissions. Consult [[:Category:747 Bridge Reports and Layouts|EPG 747 Bridge Reports and Layouts]]. Pay special attention to the scales used. Make sure the district's submittal includes photographs and details of staging and/or bypasses, if applicable. Verify that the proposed roadway width meets the NBI criteria for minimum bridge roadway width to avoid building a deficient bridge. Contact the district to resolve any discrepancies or questions.

A visit to the bridge site by the Preliminary Designer may be warranted to help determine Manning’s “n” values, examine adjacent properties, etc. If you decide to make this trip, advise the Structural Project Manager and the district contact since they may also want to attend.

'''Vertical Alignment and Bridge Deck Drainage'''

Laying out a bridge should consider deck drainage concerns for bridges on flat grades and sagging vertical curves and other vertical alignment issues as given in [[230.2 Vertical Alignment|EPG 230.2 Vertical Alignment]] and [[230.2 Vertical Alignment#230.2.10 Bridge Considerations|EPG 230.2.10 Bridge Considerations]].

===751.1.1.4 Coordination, Permits, and Approvals===

The interests of other agencies must be considered in the evaluation of a proposed stream-crossing system; cooperation and coordination with these agencies must be undertaken. Coordination with the State Emergency Management Agency (SEMA), the U.S. Coast Guard, the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, and the Department of Natural Resources is required.

Required permits include:
*U.S. Coast Guard permits for construction of bridges over navigable waterways.
*Section 404 permits for fills within waterways of the United States from the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers.
*Section 401 Water Quality Certification permits from the Missouri Department of Natural Resources.
*[[748.9 National Flood Insurance Program (NFIP)|Floodplain development permits]] for work in special flood hazard areas from the State Emergency Management Agency (SEMA).

Section 404 and Section 401 permits are obtained by the Design Division. U.S. Coast Guard permits are obtained by the Bridge Division. The Bridge Division will obtain floodplain development permits for projects that include structures in a regulated floodplain. The Design Division will obtain floodplain development permits for other projects involving roadway fill in a regulated floodplain.

Copies of approved U.S. Coast Guard permits and floodplain development permit/applications are sent to the district, with a copy to the Design Division.

See [[:Category:127 MoDOT and the Environment|MoDOT and the Environment]] for more information on the required permits.

===751.1.1.5 New Regular Bridge Design Schedule (Nonseismic) (Nonrailway Crossing)===

[[image:751.1.1.5 Sept 28 2016.jpg|center|975px]]

==751.1.2 Bridges/Boxes==
===751.1.2.1 End Slopes/Spill Fills===

The end slopes are determined by the Construction and Materials Division and are supplied to the Bridge Division by way of the Preliminary Geotechnical Report. If this report is not in the Correspondence file, contact the district to get a copy of it. The Bridge Division has made a commitment to the districts that we will have the bridge plans, specials and estimate completed 12 months after the date the Bridge Survey and Preliminary Geotechnical Report are received. The "12 month clock" does not start ticking until both the Bridge Survey and the Preliminary Geotechnical Report are in the Bridge Division.

When laying out a skewed structure, adjust the end slope for the skew angle. On higher skews, this will have a significant effect on the lengths of the spans. Often the slope of the spill fills will be steeper than the roadway side slopes. On a skewed structure, this makes it necessary to "warp" the slopes.

Whenever there will be a berm under any of the spans, its elevation should be such that there is a minimum of 4 feet clear between the ground line and the bottom of the girder as shown below.

<center>[[Image:751.1_Prelim_Design_Berm_Elevation.gif]]</center>

<center>(*) Specify berm elevation or 4'-0" minimum clearance.</center>

<center>'''BERM ELEVATION</center>

If a rock cut is encountered in the spill slope, a slope of 1:1 may be used to the top of the rock.

===751.1.2.2 Wing Lengths===
The purpose of wings is to contain and stabilize the abutment fill as the roadway transitions to the bridge. For stream crossings in particular, the wings also protect the abutment during extreme hydraulic events.

The lengths of the wings at the end bents are to be determined prior to the issuance of the Bridge Memorandum. There are two reasons for this. First, the district will use these lengths to determine the placement of their guardrail (bridge anchor section). Second, if the lengths of the wings exceed 22 ft., they will have to be broken into a stub wing and a detached wing wall. If this happens, then you will need to include this extra cost in your Preliminary Cost Estimate and request soundings for the wall. The request for soundings for the wall should include a request for the determination of the allowable bearing of the soil (if in cut - assume piling if it is in fill) and the angle of internal friction for the material retained by the detached wing wall. Also include the bottom of wing footing elevation.

'''Unequal Wing Lengths'''

Wing lengths at each end of a bridge could be unequal because of several factors: grade of roadway under, superelevation of bridge, skew of the bridge, and/or other ramps/roads/slopes adjacent to the bridge structure, e.g., stream access roads or unusual geomorphic conditions.

Set/determine the wing lengths using the control points, as shown in [[Media:611.1 Embankment at Bridge Ends.pdf|Embankment at Bridge Ends]], which may be used for both grade separations and stream crossings. This is done after the end bent location is determined. If estimated wing lengths are within 3 ft., they should be made equal and based on the longer wing length. Make sure no slope is steeper than that recommended in the geotechnical preliminary report. Slightly flatter slopes are acceptable. The contractor will warp the slopes to fit the wing tip locations.

Equal wing lengths are preferable at stream crossings to mitigate scour, improve erosion control and improve/mitigate parallel water flow along wing and side embankment. Also, since wing lengths are reported to districts for use in estimating rock slope protection limits, unequal lengths (especially on the upstream side) could mistakenly lead to the unfavorable condition of allowing for less than adequate rock side slope protection.

Judgement is required since no two estimated wing lengths at a bridge end will be exactly equal. More often equal wing lengths are used.

On divided highway bridges with high skews and shallow end slopes, the wing lengths on the median side of the bridge may be less than the other side due to the difference in sideslope between the median and the outside.

===751.1.2.3 Live Load Determination===

The live load requirements for a structure shall be HL-93

On box culverts, the actual live load applied to the structure is dependent upon the amount of fill on top of the box; however, see Structural Project Manager for the live load that goes on the Bridge Memorandum.

===751.1.2.4 Skew Angle===

Determining the most appropriate skew angle for the structure involves some judgement. On bridges over streams, pick the angle that will allow floodwater to pass through the bridge opening with the least amount of interference from intermediate bent columns. Another consideration on meandering streams is to avoid a skew which will cause the spill fill – side slope transition from blocking the stream. Often a trip to the field may be justified just for determining the angle (you can even ask the district to stake some different skews for you to observe in the field).

On stream crossings, avoid skews between zero and five degrees and try to use five degree increments. On grade separations, often the skew must be accurate to the nearest second to maintain minimum horizontal clearances.

Keep all bents on a bridge parallel whenever possible and avoid skews over 55 degrees. Also keep in mind that the higher the skew, the higher the Preliminary Cost Estimate due to the beam caps and wings being longer.

===751.1.2.5 Bridge Width ===

For bridge width requirements, see [[231.8 Bridge Width|EPG 231.8 Bridge Width]].

===751.1.2.6 Vertical and Horizontal Clearances===

====751.1.2.6.1 Grade Separations====

{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="3"|Minimum Design Clearances for New Bridges
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Facility Under Bridge!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Vertical Clearance under Superstructure1!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Horizontal Clearance
|-
|Interstate and Principal Arterial Routes|| 16’-6” over roadway including auxiliary lanes and shoulders||rowspan="4" width="475"|Clear zone clearances from the edge of the traveled way (includes shoulders and auxiliary lanes) are obtained from the District Design Division. The vertical clearance is required for the full width of the clear zone. Barrier is required if unable to locate obstacles outside clear zone (columns, beams, walls, coping, 3:1 [1V:3H] slopes or steeper). If a barrier is required the minimum distance to the barrier shall be specified on the Bridge Memorandum as the horizontal clearance otherwise the clear zone clearance shall be used.
|-
|Other State Routes with Volumes ≥ 1700 vpd ||16’-6” over roadway including auxiliary lanes and shoulders
|-
|Other State Routes with Volumes < 1700 vpd ||15’-6” over the roadway including auxiliary lanes and shoulders'''2'''
|-
|Other Streets and Roads ||14’-6” (15’-6” commercial zones) over the roadway including auxiliary lanes and shoulders'''2'''
|-
|Railroads ||23’-0” inside 18’-0” opening or as required by railroad (23’-4” for UPRR, 23’-6” for BNSF)'''3'''||14’-0” and 22’-0” from centerline'''4,5''' (25’-0” eliminates collision walls)
|-
|colspan="3"|'''1''' Roadway vertical clearances are based upon AASHTO minimums with an additional 6 inches to accommodate future resurfacing of the roadway. An additional 1 ft. is required for pedestrian overpass facilities over roadways. Vertical clearances shown are also applicable when the facility under the bridge is being carried by a bridge. '''2''' To provide continuity of travel for taller vehicles exceptions can be made both rural and urban for any routes connecting to the systems where taller vehicles are allowed but not to exceed 16.5 feet. '''3''' Clearance is measured from the top of rails (from top of high rail on superelevated track). The required 18-ft. opening centered on the track shall be increased on each side of centerline 1.5 inches per each degree of curvature for any track crossed. '''4''' Fourteen feet is a preferred minimum. The absolute minimum is 9 ft. from the centerline plus 1.5 inches per each degree of any track curvature. '''5''' The minimum clearance of 22 ft. to be provided on one side of the track(s) is for off-track maintenance. If it is not obvious on which side of the track(s) this clearance is provided, a decision should be obtained from railroad's local representative. Assistance from Multimodal Operations may be required in some situations.
|}

{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Clearance over Traffic During Construction (New and Existing Structures)
|-
|'''Roadways:''' Consult with the structural project manager or the structural liaison engineer and the district contact for minimum allowable vertical and horizontal clearance. Vertically this is usually 12 to 18 inches below the final minimum vertical clearance. Horizontally this is usually a minimum number of lanes or minimum size of opening required during the project while specifying the locality of the opening (e.g. centered on existing lanes, two 12-ft. lanes minimum in each direction, etc.). These clearances shall be specified on the Bridge Memorandum to be used in the note required on the final plans. For note see [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#A3. All Structures|EPG 751.50 A3. All Structures]].
|-
|'''Railroads:''' If feasible, 15 ft. horizontally from centerline of track and 21.5 ft. vertically from tops of tracks (from top of high rail on superelevated track). If either of these clearances is not feasible then obtain acceptable clearances from the railroad projects manager. For the detail required on the final plans showing minimum clearances during construction over railroads, see [[751.5 Structural Detailing Guidelines#751.5.2.1.2.7 Features Crossed|EPG 751.5.2.1.2.7 Features Crossed]].
|}

{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Deficient Vertical Clearances on Interstates
|-
|Refer to [[131.1 Design Exception Process#131.1.7 Deficient Vertical Clearances on Interstates|EPG 131.1.7 Deficient Vertical Clearances on Interstates]] for information about coordinating minimum vertical clearance for grade separation structures with the Defense Department.
|}

====751.1.2.6.2 Stream Crossings====
For vertical clearance on stream crossings, see [[748.3 Freeboard|EPG 748.3 Freeboard]].

===751.1.2.7 Structure Type Selection===

As the size of the creek/river increases, here is a rough approximation of structure type selection:

:Box Culvert (single, double or triple)
:Prestressed I-Girder (type 2, 3, 4 or 6)
:Prestressed Bulb-Tee Girder (63.5” or 72.5")
:Plate Girder

Sometimes a Solid Slab, Voided Slab, Prestressed Box Girders, Prestressed Voided Slab Beams or NU Girder bridge will need to be used instead of a Prestressed I-Girder due to limited vertical clearance or freeboard. Other times a Plate Girder or Wide Flange may need to be used instead of a Prestressed I-Girder for the same reason. Higher strength concrete girders may allow you to span further with shallower girders.

Higher strength concrete prestressed I-girders should also be considered as a means to save money by eliminating girder lines.

Prestressed concrete double-tee girders should be avoided if possible due to the redecking concerns for future maintenance.

On grade separations with high skews, you may want to consider using a 4 span bridge with integral end bents rather than a 2 span bridge with semi-deep abutments. This should be considered if the semi-deep slab length exceeds 30’.

On Prestressed I-Girder bridges, it is usually more cost effective to shorten the end spans of a 3 span Prestressed I-Girder bridge rather than having all spans the same length. The optimum span ratio is 1.1 to 1.0. For example, a span layout of (67’ - 76’ - 67’) is structurally more efficient than (70’-70’-70’).

===751.1.2.8 Box Culverts===
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:15px; border:1px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#ffddcc" width="210px" align="right"
|-
|'''Concrete Box Culvert, GFRP'''
|-
|[http://library.modot.mo.gov/RDT/reports/RI99028/RDT01016a.pdf Report 2001]
|-
|'''See also:''' [http://www.modot.gov/services/OR/byDate.htm Innovation Library]
|}
Most districts prefer a box culvert to a bridge because of the lower maintenance costs; however, if a stream crossing is on the borderline between a box culvert and a bridge, each option should be explored and presented to the district. The presentation to the district should include the cost estimate for each option as well as a recommendation as to which option is preferred by the Bridge Division. Keep in mind that box culverts should be avoided on streams with medium to heavy drift. If the stream being crossed is a drainage ditch it is advisable to have the district to contact the drainage district to see if they have any specific objections (i.e. drift etc.) to using a culvert at the proposed location. Approval of proposed structure layout by the drainage district may be required, see [[:Category:747 Bridge Reports and Layouts#747.3.4 Bridge Permits or Approvals by Other Agencies|EPG 747.3.4 Bridge Permits or Approvals by Other Agencies]].

====751.1.2.8.1 Hydraulic Design====
A general rule of thumb for whether or not a culvert may be used in place of a bridge is... The most a culvert can handle is about 1,000 cfs per cell with 3 cells being the usual maximum. This can vary if the slope of the streambed is unusually flat or steep. Another rule of thumb is that the water from a drainage area of less than 5 square miles can usually be handled by a concrete box culvert. Curves or bends should be avoided when possible. See [[750.2 Culverts#750.2.3.2.2 Head Loss Due to Bends|EPG 750.2.3.2.2 Head Loss Due to Bends]] when curves or bends will be used.

For details of hydraulic design, see [[750.2 Culverts|EPG 750.2 Culverts]].

Hydraulic designs and plans for some small box culverts are handled by the district. See [[750.7 Non-Hydraulic Considerations#750.7.4.3 Summary of Responsibilities|EPG 750.7.4.3 Summary of Responsibilities]] for responsibility for analysis, design and final plans preparation.

====751.1.2.8.2 Environmental Requirements====

See [[750.7 Non-Hydraulic Considerations#750.7.3 Environmental Requirements|EPG 750.7.3 Environmental Requirements]] for details of embedment, velocity and conveyance requirements.

====751.1.2.8.3 Layout====

=====751.1.2.8.3.1 Size=====
When sizing the proposed concrete box culvert, use Standard Box Culvert Sizes whenever possible. For information on standard box culverts sizes, see [[750.7 Non-Hydraulic Considerations#750.7.4.1 Standard Plans|EPG 750.7.4.1 Standard Plans]]. For additional information on culvert size, see [[750.7 Non-Hydraulic Considerations#750.7.4.4 Size|EPG 750.7.4.4 Size]].

=====751.1.2.8.3.2 Length=====

The inside face of the headwall is located at the intersection of the roadway fill slope and the top of the top slab of culvert. Typically, the longest barrel is produced considering this intersection point upgrade. Flared inlets, varying roadway widths, clear zones and guardrail placement are possible exceptions to this rule.

When [[231.2 Clear Zones|clear zones]] are provided, locate the inside face of the headwalls of the culvert at or beyond the edge of the roadway clear zone. In situations of very low fill, contact the district to determine if the use of guardrail is preferred to placing the headwalls beyond the edge of the clear zone. When clear zones are not provided the district will determine the need for guardrail on a case by case basis. Typically when guardrail is to be used over a culvert the typical section will show a 3’ 5” shoulder widening as shown in [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/documents/60600.pdf Standard Plan 606.00]. Consult the district if it is unclear whether adequate clear zones are provided or if guardrail is to be used over a box culvert. If the fill over the culvert is shallow, [[750.7 Non-Hydraulic Considerations#750.7.4.5 Guardrail Attachment|guardrail attachment]] may need to be provided. It may be advisable to lengthen culverts with shallow fill slightly to provide room for future guardrail attachments if guardrail over the box culvert is not provided.

=====751.1.2.8.3.3 Roadway Fill=====
Minimum roadway fill height is determined at the outside shoulder line and is the greater of 1 ft. or the thickness of the pavement and base material specified in [[750.7 Non-Hydraulic Considerations#750.7.11.1 Minimum Fill Heights|EPG 750.7.11.1 Minimum Fill Heights]]. Pavement and shoulder widths and thicknesses are determined on a project by project basis. Pavement and shoulder details (i.e., width, thickness, alternate pavement options) can be obtained from the district if needed, but based on maximum pavement thicknesses and minimum shoulder widths, fill heights at the outside of the shoulder of 20 ½” or greater on major routes or 14 ½” or greater on minor routes will not require pavement or shoulder details. For more information on pavement and shoulder widths and thicknesses see [[Other Aspects of Pavement Design|Other Aspects of Pavement Design]] and [[:Category:231 Typical Section Elements for Roadways|EPG 231 Typical Section Elements of Roadways]].

Roadway fill outside of the shoulders shall be warped (in the past this was referred to as the fill being “rolled up and over”) to provide a minimum of 12 in. of cover where the top of the culvert could be exposed. A standard note should be shown on the [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=751.1_Preliminary_Design#751.1.2.18_Bridge_Memorandums Bridge Memorandums] (Memos) regarding warping the roadway fill. [http://epg.modot.org/files/7/78/751.1.2.7_box_culverts.pdf Cases where this could occur] are:

:1. Culvert ends with shallow fill and headwalls located outside of the clear zone.
:2. Median of a divided highway with shallow fill.
:3. Flared Inlets
:4. Auxiliary lane or outer road with skews different than that of the mainline
:5. Steep grade with a wide or skewed culvert.

For additional information of roadway fill, see [[750.7 Non-Hydraulic Considerations#750.7.11 Overfill Heights|EPG 750.7.11 Overfill Heights]].

=====751.1.2.8.3.4 Fill Settlement=====
Check the Preliminary Geotechnical Report for recommendations concerning [[750.7 Non-Hydraulic Considerations#750.7.8 Fill Settlements|fill settlements]] and the use of [[751.8 LRFD Concrete Box Culverts#Collar Beams|collar beams]] on longer box culverts. Cambering of the culvert should also be considered when fill settlements are appreciable. For more information, see [[750.7 Non-Hydraulic Considerations#750.7.9 Camber in Culverts|EPG 750.7.9 Camber in Culverts]].

====751.1.2.8.4 Precast Box Culvert Sections====
If the use of precast box culvert sections will not be allowed to be substituted for cast-in-place construction or if precasting is required it should be noted on the bridge memorandum and on the bridge plans.

Precast option for box culvert extensions will be permitted using a cast-in-place connection where the centerline of new cells is not laterally displaced more than 15° (maximum) from the centerline of existing cells for each cell extension.

====751.1.2.8.5 Abrasion====
If a culvert requires design for abrasion it should be noted on the bridge memorandum. For more information see [[750.7 Non-Hydraulic Considerations#750.7.4.2 Abrasion of Interior Surfaces|EPG 750.7.4.2 Abrasion of Interior Surfaces]].

===751.1.2.9 Girder Type Selection===

Once you have determined that your structure will have girders, you must decide what types of girders to use. For checking your vertical clearance or freeboard, you will need to know the maximum span length of each type of girder. See [[751.22_P/S_Concrete_I_Girders#751.22.1.3_Typical_Span_Ranges|EPG 751.22 P/S Concrete I Girders]] or [[751.14_Steel_Superstructure#751.14.1.2_Girder_Limits_and_Preferences|EPG 751.14 Steel Superstructure]]. You will need to make adjustments if the span ratios get over 1.25.

Notify the district contact as soon as you know that the profile grade will need to be raised or lowered to meet the minimum vertical clearance or freeboard requirements. If the district says the profile grade can’t be raised, consider using more girder lines, using higher strength concrete if Prestressed MoDOT Girders or NU Girders are being used, or switching to a prestressed voided slab or prestressed box beam bridge. As a last resort, request a [[131.1 Design Exception Process|design exception]] for the substandard item.

Prestressed girder selection should use the following order for trial sizing and spanning:

::MoDOT Standard Prestressed Girders Type 2, 3, 4 and 6
::NU Standard Prestressed Girders Type 35, 43, 53, 63 and 70
::MoDOT Bulb-Tees Type 7 and 8

If you decide to go with a Prestressed Bulb-Tee Girder, try to limit the maximum span to 125 feet. We have gone as far as 133 ft. but the strands had to be at 1 1/2 in. centers. Also keep in mind that these types of girders are very heavy and will often require two or three cranes to set them and may be difficult to transport to the site.

If you decide to use Plate Girders or wide flange beams, then you have to decide if the girders or beams should be painted or not. If site-specific conditions allow, the use of unpainted weathering steel (ASTM A709 Grades 50W and HPS70W) should be considered and is MoDOT’s preferred system for routine steel I-girder type bridges due to its performance, economic and environmental benefits. Cost savings are realized because of the elimination of the initial paint system as well as the need for periodic renewal of the paint system over the life of the structure. The potential for cost savings over the service life of the structure is estimated to be in the neighborhood of 30%.

Weathering steels provide significant environmental and worker safety benefits as well. Since they do not require initial and periodic repainting of the whole bridge, emissions of volatile organic compounds (VOC) are reduced. Also, they generally do not require coating removal or disposal of contaminated blast debris over the service life of the structure. By eliminating the need for periodic repainting, the closing of traffic lanes can be prevented as well as the associated hazards to painters, maintenance workers, and the travelling public.

Partial coating of weathering steel is required near expansion joints. See [[751.14 Steel Superstructure#751.14.5.8 Protective Coating Requirements|EPG 751.14.5.8]]. Periodic recoating or overcoating will be required, however, on a much smaller scale than the whole bridge with the effect that lane closures and associated hazards are greatly reduced compared to painted steel.

Although weathering steel is MoDOT’s preferred system for routine I-girder bridges with proper detailing, it should not be used for box girders, trusses or other structure types where details may tend to trap moisture or debris. There are also some situations where the use of weathering steel may not be advisable due to unique environmental circumstances of the site. Generally, these types of structures would receive high deposits of salt along with humidity, or long term wet conditions and individually each circumstance could be considered critical.

The FHWA Technical Advisory T5140.22 October 1989 should be used as guidance when determining the acceptability of weathering steel. Due to the large amounts of deicing salts used on our highways which ultimately causes salt spray on bridge girders, the flowchart below should be used as guidance for grade separations. The flowchart, Fig. 751.1.2.8, below, is general guidance but is not all inclusive. There may be cases based on the circumstances of the bridge site where the use of weathering steel is acceptable even though the flowchart may indicate otherwise. In these cases, follow MoDOT’s [[131.1 Design Exception Process|design exception process]].

[[image:751.1.2.7 weathering steel Nov 2010.jpg|center|700px|thumb|<center>'''Fig. 751.1.2.8 Guidance on the Use of Weathering Steel for Grade Separations'''</center>
'''*''' For multi-lane divided or undivided highways, consider the AADT and AADTT in one direction only.]]

Additional documents that can be referenced to aid in identifying the site-specific locations and details that should be avoided when the use of weathering steel is being considered include:

:1. Transporation Research Board. (1989). ''Guidelines for the use of Weathering Steel in Bridges'', (NCHRP Report 314). Washington, DC: Albrecht, et al.

:2. American Iron and Steel Institute. (1995). ''Performance of Weathering Steel in Highway Bridges, Third Phase Report''. Nickerson, R.L.

:3. American Institute of Steel Construction. (1993). ''Highway Structures Design Handbook'' (Vol. I, Chapter 9. Uncoated Weathering Steel Bridges). Pittsburgh, PA: Mathay, W.

:4. MoDOT. (1996). ''Missouri Highway and Transportation Department Task Force Report on Weathering Steel for Bridges''. Jefferson City, MO: Porter, P., et al.

The final brown rust appearance could be an aesthetic concern. When deteriming the use of weathering steel, aesthetics and other concerns should be discussed by the Core Team members, with input from [http://wwwi/intranet/br/default.htm Bridge Division] and [http://wwwi/intranet/mt/default.htm Maintenance Division].

If weathering steel cannot be used, the girders should be painted gray (Federal Standard #26373). If the district doesn’t want gray, they can choose brown (Federal Standard #30045). If the district or the local municipality wants a color other than gray or brown, they must meet the requirements of [[1045.5_Policy_on_Color_of_Structural_Steel_Paint|EPG 1045.5 Policy on Color of Structural Steel Paint]]. System H paint should be used on weathering steel while System G should be used on all other steel plate girders.

===751.1.2.10 Longer Bridges===

For bridges that are longer than normal (more than 6 spans being a general rule of thumb), other items must be considered. If the feature you are crossing allows flexibility in bent placement, the most cost efficient span length is one that will result in the cost of one span's superstructure being equal to the cost of one bent. For example, calculate the cost of one intermediate bent, and then adjust the length of the span until the cost of the girders, slab and curb equal the cost of the bent. The use of higher strength concrete in Prestressed I-Girders can allow spans to be increased 16% to 21% as a means to eliminate intermediate bents.

Another item to consider is the placement of expansion devices. Be sure to include the costs of the expansion devices and deadman anchors (if applicable) in your Preliminary Cost Estimate.

===751.1.2.11 Staged Construction===

If the new structure you are laying out replaces an existing structure, the exact details of the staging must be coordinated with the district contact. If the new structure is on a new alignment, there is little cause for concern. However, if the new structure is on the same or slightly different alignment, the location of the bents for the new structure should be spaced to avoid the existing substructure units if at all possible.

Also, if the new structure is on the same or slightly different alignment, the question of traffic handling will need to be addressed. If the district wants to use a temporary bypass, then you need to determine if the district can size some drainage-diversion pipes for the bypass. If the district decides pipes cannot be used, then a temporary bridge is necessary. A separate Bridge Survey/Memo/Bridge No. is required.

If the district does not want to use a temporary bypass, and they want to maintain traffic on the existing bridge while the new one is constructed, then the new structure will have to be staged. One important item to verify in this situation is that the new girders will clear the existing substructure. Another item to consider in setting up the staging is the placement and attachment requirements of the temporary concrete traffic barrier relative to the bridge deck and meeting horizontal distance requirements from the edge of the deck, which determines whether the temporary concrete traffic barrier is to be attached to the deck. It also determines how the temporary concrete traffic barrier is to be attached to the deck.

===751.1.2.12 Temporary Barriers===

Bridge Plans must note whether temporary concrete traffic barrier are attached or freestanding, and if attached, whether they are attached with tie-down straps or bolt through deck attachment. Coordination is required with district Design. See [[617.1 Temporary Traffic Barriers|EPG 617.1 Temporary Traffic Barriers]] for more guidance.

:a. Where sufficient distance is available to accommodate lateral deflection of barriers: No attachment is required. Note on plans as “Freestanding” or “No attachment required”.

:b. Where sufficient distance is not available to accommodate lateral deflection of barriers: Tie-down strap system is required. (Refer to [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/61720.pdf Standard Plan 617.20].) Coordinate with district Design to provide a minimum of four connected temporary concrete traffic barrier sections on approach slab roadway.

:c. Where lateral deflection cannot be tolerated: Bolt through deck system is required. (To be used only on existing decks that will be removed and that have sufficient strength.) (Refer to [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/Online%20Standard%20Plans/61720.pdf Standard Plan 617.20].) Coordinate with District Design Division for required transition barrier attachments that may be used on any deck, existing or new, where lateral deflection is not permitted with approval of the Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer.

[[Image:751.1 Prelim Design Free Standing Temp Barrier.jpg|center|640px|thumb|<center>'''Freestanding Temporary Barrier'''</center>]]

For all other applications of a freestanding temporary concrete traffic barrier, the preferred installation method requires a 2 ft. buffer area behind the barrier to allow for lateral deflection in both work areas and lane separation situations.

Regardless of deflection distance (buffer area) available, if the bridge deck is super elevated or has a large roadway slope, a freestanding temporary concrete traffic barrier should not be used because the barrier has the potential for movement (“walking”) due to gravity forces and vibrations acting on the barrier.

When a temporary concrete traffic barrier is adequately attached to a bridge deck (refer to Standard Plan 617.20) a minimum distance of 6 in. shall be provided from the edge of the bridge deck to the face of the barrier.

[[Image:751.1 Prelim Design Attached Temp Barrier.jpg|center|640px|thumb|<center>'''Attached Temporary Barrier'''</center>]]

===751.1.2.13 Earthquake (Seismic) Consideration===

See [[:Category:756 Seismic Design|EPG 756 Seismic Design]] for flowcharted seismic design requirements.

All new bridge/wall designs must meet Seismic Design Category A requirements which includes nonseismic (or static) designs unless the seismic design category is B, C, or D. If the structure you are laying out falls in Seismic Design Category B, C or D, there are a few items to keep in mind. Box culverts are preferable to bridges on stream crossings because they are exempt from seismic design unless crossing a known exposed fault. Pile cap intermediate bents are preferable to open column bents on footings because footings can grow quite large due to seismic forces. Minimize the number of expansion joints in the deck because each of these locations may require earthquake restrainers which are very costly. Make the superstructure as light as possible, which usually means use steel plate girders or wide flanges instead of prestressed concrete girders where ever possible. For shorter spans, voided and solid slab bridges perform well.

Go to https://earthquake.usgs.gov/designmaps/us/application.php and use the following instructions to determine the LRFD Seismic Design Category:

:Instructions:

:1. For “Design Code Reference Document”, '''select''' “Derived from USGS hazard data available in 2002” followed by “2009 AASHTO”.

:2. For “Site Soil Classification”, '''select''' “Site Soil Classification” (Select Site Class “A, B, C, D or E” for preliminary design per Geotechnical Section recommendation or for final design as given on Foundation Investigation Geotechnical Report.

:3. For “Site Latitude” and “Site Longitude”, '''input''' coordinates or alternatively '''input''' address or zip code in the map area.

The new bridge design schedule for a seismic bridge requires 24 months minimum. See [[#751.1.1.5 New Regular Bridge Design Schedule (Nonseismic) (Nonrailway Crossing)|EPG 751.1.1.5 New Regular Bridge Design Schedule]].

===751.1.2.14 Replacing an Existing Structure===

If you are replacing an existing structure with a new one, you may have to calculate a cost estimate for rehabilitating the old bridge. The sufficiency rating, which can be found on the SI&A form (Structure, Inventory & Appraisal), provides information on eligibility status of the bridge for using federal bridge (HBRRP) funds:

{|border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0" align="center"

|''Status''||width="150"|''Sufficiency Rating (SR)''||''Comment''
|-
|Deficient||and SR < 50||Qualifies for full federal bridge replacement funds.
|-
|Deficient||and 50 < SR < 80||Qualifies for partial federal bridge replacement funds.
|-
|width="100"|Not Deficient|| ||Federal bridge replacement funds can not be used; however, other federal funds could possibly be used.
|}

If the sufficiency rating is greater than 50 but less than 80, then a cost analysis will need to be included in the layout folder showing that it is a better value or more cost effective to replace the bridge than it is to rehab/widen it. If rehab/widen is more cost effective, a state may elect to replace the bridge; however, federal bridge replacement funds may be capped at 80% of the rehab/widen cost estimate. See the following FHWA letter for a more detailed explanation. Include a copy of this form in the Layout Folder.

An interstate job (job no. with an “I” in it) is an example of using federal funds to replace a bridge without worrying about the sufficiency rating of the existing bridge. The reason this is acceptable is because you are using federal “interstate” funds, not federal “bridge replacement” funds.

An example of an SIA form can be seen below, followed by a letter from FHWA explaining guidelines for use of federal bridge replacement money.

<center>[[Image:751.1_Prelim_Design_SI&A_form_(pg_1).jpg|800px]]</center>

<center>[[Image:751.1_Prelim_Design_SI&A_form_(pg_2).jpg|800px]]</center>

<center>[[Image:751.1_Prelim_Design_FHWA_letter_(pg_1).gif]]</center>
<center>[[Image:751.1_Prelim_Design_FHWA_letter_(pg_2).gif]]</center>
<center>[[Image:751.1_Prelim_Design_FHWA_letter_(pg_3).gif]]</center>

===751.1.2.15 Temporary Bridges===

If the district will be using a bypass on stream crossings, a temporary bridge may be necessary. The district should first consider using large drainage-diversion pipes to carry the water under the bypass, if the district determines this is not practical, they should submit a Bridge Survey for a temporary bridge on the bypass. Check with the Structural Project Manager for hydraulic design frequency.

Once the number of 40’ spans has been determined, the district should be contacted so they can locate the pieces necessary for the construction of the bridge. Make sure the pieces the district intends to use have the “new” beam caps that take 14” H-pile. The district should provide you with the location of where the pieces are coming from and where they should be taken by the contractor at the end of the project. If the district is unable to find the pieces, then they will need to be contractor furnished. This has a big impact on costs. See [[751.1_Preliminary_Design#751.1.2.17_Preliminary_Cost_Estimate|Preliminary Cost Estimate]].

===751.1.2.16 Bridges Over Railroads===

Consult the AREMA (American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association) Manual for Railway Engineering located in the Bridge Division’s Development Section for more detailed information. Here are some basic points to keep in mind:

* Railroads often raise their tracks so provide some cushion in your vertical clearance.
* Absolute minimum horizontal clearance shall be 9 ft. on each side of track centerline plus 1.5 inches per each degree of track curvature. (railroad projects manager of the Multimodal Operations Division will obtain the degree of curvature from the railroad)
* Will the railroad want room for an extra track or maintenance roadway?
* Keep the ballast free drained.
* Drainage needs to be designed for 100-year storm.
* Slope protection shall consist of Type 2, 18-inch thick rock blanket placed on top of permanent erosion control geotextile. Some railroads may require changes to this; however, this will be determined on a case-by-case basis.
* Some railroads also now require the barrier curbs and slab overhangs to be designed to accommodate fences that may be added in the future.

If the face of the columns of an intermediate bent falls within 25 ft. of the centerline of the railroad track, a collision wall is required. If the face of the columns of an intermediate bent falls within 12 ft. of the centerline the top of the collision wall shall be set at 12 ft. above top of rail otherwise the top of the collision wall shall be set at 6 ft. above top of rail.

The railroad projects manager in the Multimodal Operations Division is a very good resource for answering questions at any stage of the layout. It typically takes a very long time to receive approval of a layout from the railroad. The railroad has to approve both the preliminary design and the final plans.

When making a [[Media:Layout to Railroad.doc|submittal to the railroad project manager]] for approval of the preliminary design, include three sets of half-sized plat and profile sheets, as well as a copy of the Design Layout.

The new bridge design schedule for a railway crossing bridge requires 24 months minimum. See [[#751.1.1.5 New Regular Bridge Design Schedule (Nonseismic) (Nonrailway Crossing)|EPG 751.1.1.5 New Regular Bridge Design Schedule]].

===751.1.2.17 Historical Bridge Considerations===

You also need to check with the Historical Bridge Coordinator in the Design Division when replacing a bridge. There is not a magic age for a bridge for it to become "historical". Age does not matter. All "Bridge Resources" that will be impacted by MoDOT need to be cleared through the Department of Natural Resources (DNR) Historic Preservation Program (HPP) before they can be replaced, demolished, extensively rehabilitated or deeded to a new owner (county, city, etc.). The following is a definition of "Bridge Resources":

:"Bridge Resources are both public and privately owned highway, railroad and pedestrian bridges, viaducts and culverts. This does not include metal and plastic pipes, unless they are encased in an older concrete, stone or brick structure."

The following is the information on this topic supplied to the district (FYI):

:"Bridge Resources on any given job or [[:Category:126 Location Study and Alternatives Analysis|location study]] need to be checked out and cleared just like historic buildings (architecture) and archaeological sites. Standard size color photographs can be submitted to the Historic Bridge Coordinator directly and/or attached to the Request for Environmental Assessment (RES) or Questionnaire to Determine Need for Cultural Resources Assessment. The Historic Bridge Coordinator will then determine and execute procedures for clearance, if required."

Bridges that are older than 50 years stand a better chance of being evaluated as eligible for the National Register of Historic Places (NRHP) in Clayton Fraser's 1996 draft Missouri Historic Bridge Inventory. This is a study that was undertaken under STURAA (Surface Transportation and Uniform Relocation Assistance Act of 1987) in order to inventory all potentially NRHP eligible historic bridges in the state. Any of these that are determined NRHP eligible by the HPP will require special mitigation (or avoidance) if they are to be affected by project activities. For this reason, it is important that all bridge resources be identified early in the process.

Usually, bridge resources do not stand in the way of right of way acquisition (A-dates) because they are generally located on roadways that the state already owns; however, there are cases in which bridge resources are privately owned and located on private property. In these rare cases, bridge resources would need to be checked out prior to our right of way acquisition approval.

===751.1.2.18 Preliminary Cost Estimate===

The Preliminary Cost Estimate should be neat, legible and dated since a copy of it is included with the Bridge Memo. It should also be rounded to the nearest thousand dollars.

The accepted method of calculating the Preliminary Cost Estimate is to actually calculate some approximate quantities for the bridge and then multiply them by the unit prices supplied by the Bridge Division Preliminary and Review Section. A spreadsheet should be used to calculate these quantities. To estimate the pounds of reinforcing steel in a structure, multiply the number of cubic yards of concrete in the structure by 125 for bridges. See table below for Box Culverts.

:::{|border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center"

|colspan="2"|Box Culvert Reinforcing Steel (lbs.) Estimate
|-
|Design Fill (ft.)||Concrete (lbs/cy) Multiplier
|-
|2.00||225
|-
|6.00||168
|-
|10.00||116
|-
|25.00||96
|-
|32.00||84
|}

The Preliminary Cost Estimate should be increased for the following items: Cost Estimate Guide for rural preliminary design (do not compound the increases by using your judgment).

:::{|border="0"

|Item||% Increase
|-
|width="200"|Staged Construction||align="center"|10
|-
|Horizontally Curved||align="center"|5
|-
|Seismic Performance Cat. B||align="center"|10 *
|-
|Seismic Performance Cat. C||align="center"|25 *
|-
|Seismic Performance Cat. D||align="center"|40 *
|-
|Tight Site/Limited Access||align="center"|3
|}

<math>*</math> These factors assume estimated quantities have not been increased due to seismic forces.

Here are some guidelines for estimating the cost of the removal of existing bridges:

:::{|border="0"

|Type of Bridge Removal||Cost per Square Foot
|-
|Simple Structures Over Streams||align="center"|$ 7
|-
|Girder Structures Over Roads||align="center"|$ 14
|-
|Conc. Slab Structures Over Interstates||align="center"|$ 25
|-
|   (quick opening of lanes to traffic)
|}

After you calculate the Preliminary Cost Estimate, divide it by the area of the deck and compare the price per sq. ft. to this table:

The average costs vary. Usually they fall within these ranges.

:::{|border="0"

|Type of Bridge||Avg. Price/Sq. Ft. of Deck
|-
|Prestressed MoDOT Girder||align="center"|$65 - $100
|-
|Prestressed NU Girder||align="center"|$70 - $100
|-
|Prestressed Bulb-Tee Girder||align="center"|$75 - $115
|-
|Plate Girder||align="center"|$90 - $125
|-
|Voided/Solid Slab||align="center"|$90 - $125
|-
|Temp. Bridge (state furn.)||align="center"|$25 - $45
|-
|Temp. Bridge (cont. furn.)||align="center"|$115 - $145
|-
|Major Lake Crossing||align="center"|$175 - $200
|-
|Major River Crossing||align="center"|$200 - $250
|}

===751.1.2.19 Bridge Memorandums===

Bridge Memorandums are generated for new and rehabilitated bridge structures including retaining walls. Formal correspondence will not be required for special structural work or miscellaneous structures like high mast tower lighting (HMTL) or small retaining walls equal to or shorter than 5 feet; however, documentation such as a Bridge Memorandum may be a good idea in order to effectively communicate the understanding and agreement to the level of design work proposed and associated construction costs with districts.

====751.1.2.19.1 Purpose====
The Bridge Memorandum is the instrument which coordinates bridge plan and roadway plan preparation. It is sent to the district to inform them where we plan to put the bridge, what kind of structure it will be, what the Preliminary Cost Estimate is and any other pertinent information. More information is required on more complicated structures. If you are not sure if the district needs to have a certain piece of information concerning the structure, include it on the Bridge Memorandum to be safe. Too much information is better than too little.

An electronic copy of the bridge memorandum and supporting documents are sent to the district for review and signature. If, during the design process, revision to the bridge memorandum by either the district or the Bridge Division becomes necessary, all parties to the memorandum are to be notified immediately. The proposed revisions must be agreed to by all parties that signed the original bridge memorandum.

The Bridge Memorandum also serves as a design layout for structures where the latter is not required, see [[#751.1.2.32 Finishing Up Design Layout|EPG 751.1.2.32 Finishing Up Design Layout]].

====751.1.2.19.2 Content====
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%;background:#f5f5f5" width="310px" align="right"
|-style="background:#f5f5f5"
|align-"center"|'''Bridge Memorandum Examples '''
|-
|[[media:751.1.2.19.2 Highway Grade Separation.pdf|Highway Grade Separation]]
|-
|[[media:751.1.2.19.2 Railroad Grade Separation.pdf|Railroad Grade Separation]]
|-
|[[media:751.1.2.19.2 Stream Crossing Bridge.pdf|Stream Crossing (Bridge)]]
|-
|[[media:751.1.2.19.2 Stream Crossing Culvert.pdf|Stream Crossing (Culvert)]]
|-
|[[media:751.1.2.18.2 Bridge Rehabilitation.pdf|Bridge Rehabilitation]]
|-
|[[media:751.1.2.19.2 Retaining Wall.pdf|Retaining Wall]]
|}

Sample listing of what to include on the Bridge Memorandum:

1. Identify type of structure, span lengths, skew, loading, roadway width, wing lengths and special end fill considerations. For curved structures, specify how the design span lengths are to be measured i.e., “measured along the CL of Roadway”. If plate girder or wide flange beam, further identify them as either weathering or painted steel.

2. Indicate all pertinent profile grade, alignment and superelevation transition information.

3. Identify the fill exception stations or ends of the bridge. The district uses this to coordinate the bridge with their roadway design features such as guardrail. For PSI-Girder bridges, take into account the [[751.22_P/S_Concrete_I_Girders#psi layout length|layout length]] when calculating these stations.

4. Identify slopes at end bents.

5. Indicate elevation of any berms to be constructed at the end bents.

6. If applicable, call for old roadway fill to be removed to natural ground line.

7. For box culverts, indicate the location of the headwalls and the type of wings to be provided (flared or straight). Also include the upper and lower flow line elevations along the CL of the box.

8. Identify any bridge related items that the district will need to address in their plans or special provisions as a “Roadway Item”.

9. Include the cost estimate for construction (Preliminary Cost Estimate).

10. Include the method of traffic handling while construction is underway. Attach sketches for staged construction when appropriate.

11. For stream crossings, show all pertinent hydrologic data used for the layout of the structure. See [[751.5 Structural Detailing Guidelines#751.5.2.1.5.3 Hydraulic Data|EPG 751.5.2.1.5.3 Hydraulic Data]] for Hydraulic Data tables.

12. For roadway and railroad grade separations, include all minimum vertical and horizontal clearances (final and construction) and include the opening (horizontal limits) of the minimum vertical clearance. The minimum horizontal clearance shall be specified from the edge of the traveled way(s).

13. Quite often, the district will add items to a bridge late in the final design process because they “didn’t think of them” earlier. This often causes extra work due to the necessary redesigns. Include a statement similar to the following to reduce this occurrence:

:*"No conduit, lighting, utility supports or sidewalks are to be included in the final plans for this bridge."

:*If the district has already indicated that they want special items attached to the bridge, include the specifics on the Bridge Memorandum and modify the above note.

14. The design year AADT (annual average daily traffic) and AADTT (annual average daily truck traffic). Request this from the district if it is not shown on the plat sheet. On grade separations, get the AADT and AADTT for both roads.

15. For box culverts, always include the following notes:
:*Channel bottom shall be graded within the right of way for transition of channel bed to culvert openings. Channel banks shall be tapered to match culvert openings. (Roadway Item)
:*If any part of the barrel is exposed, the roadway fill shall be warped to provide 12 inches minimum cover. (Roadway Item) (See [[#751.1.2.7.3.3 Roadway Fill|EPG 751.1.2.7.3.3, Box Culverts, Roadway Fill]].)

16. Also for box culverts, state if guardrail (Roadway Item) is to be provided in lieu of meeting the clear zone requirements. If there will be guardrail over the box culvert and the fill height is less than indicated in [[750.7 Non-Hydraulic Considerations#750.7.4.5 Guardrail Attachment|EPG 750.7.4.5, Box Culverts, Guardrail Attachment]], indicate that attachment of the guardrail to the top slab will be handled in the bridge plans, even though the guardrail itself is a roadway item. For additional information on when to use guardrail attachments, see [[#751.1.2.8.3.2 Length|EPG 751.1.2.8.3.2 Length, Box Culvert, Length]].

17. For stream crossings (new structures, widened structures and rehabs where the waterway opening is reduced.) include a statement stating that a Floodplain Development Permit is required or that a Floodplain Development Permit is not required and that the Bridge Division will request such a permit if necessary. Also indicate the flood hazard zone (i.e., A, A1, B) and whether or not the bridge is in a Floodway.

18. On Rehabilitated and widened structures give the current and proposed load rating and load posting as well as the current condition ratings for the deck, superstructure, substructure and scour.
<div id="19. Identify the bridge"></div>
19. Identify the bridge approach slab class major or minor. If a design exception is required or approved, then note accordingly. Identify asphalt mix type (determined by district) when the asphalt bridge approach slab sub-class is an option.

20. Identify the bridge end drainage provisions as determined by District Design. For example, note when concrete aprons at each wing wall will be required (Rdwy. Item). Note when concrete approach pavement (Rdwy. Item) with or without drain basins (Rdwy. Item) will be required, or note when rock blanket will be required that extends up to full length of bridge approach slabs, or when drain flumes (Rdwy. Item) will be required.
<div id="21. For redecks or in other cases where"></div>
21. For redecks or in other cases where the rock blanket elevations are not shown on the bridge plans and the top of the rock blanket is required to be flush to the existing ground line in accordance with the Memorandum of Agreement with SEMA, include the following note:
: The top of rock blanket shall be flush to the ground line as directed by the engineer. (Roadway Item.)

22. For retaining walls, indicate any aesthetic treatments such as concrete staining and form liner requirements. Be specific regarding names, types and colors of staining, and names and types of form liner.

23. Form liners are standard for MSE large block walls. Be specific regarding names, types and colors of staining, and names and types of form liner. See [http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings – MSE Wall - MSEW].

24. For MSE wall abutments: Identify gutter type, fencing, lower longitudinal and lateral drain pipe sizes (type and sizes to be determined by District Design Division). (Lateral drain pipes are only required as determined by District Design Division.)

25. OPTIONAL Seismic Information for new bridge or wall on Memo: Note “Preliminary Seismic Description: Site Class _, Seismic Design Category _, As = __, SD1 = _” that would require Geotechnical Section input regarding the Site Class and Seismic Design Category used for cost estimating. (This is similar to item no. 9 under [[#751.1.2.32 Finishing Up Design Layout|EPG 751.1.2.32 Finishing Up Design Layout]].)

26. For rehabs, redecks, widenings, recoatings and new replacement structures, see [[#751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating|EPG 751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating]] for notes to include.

====751.1.2.19.3 Supporting Documents====
Supporting documents may provide additional information to the district or request additional information from them. Other documents may need to be included, but at a minimum the following documents should be sent to the district with the Bridge Memorandum:

:* Calculations used for the [[#751.1.2.18 Preliminary Cost Estimate|Preliminary Cost Estimate]]
:* [[:Category:101 Standard Forms#Constructability Questioinnaire|Constructability Questionnaire]], modify to address project issues
:* Layout for [[#751.1.2.20 Soundings (Borings)|Soundings]]

====751.1.2.19.4 Bridge Division Review====

Once the Preliminary Designer has the Bridge Memo and supporting documents completed, they are submitted to the Structural Project Manager (SPM) for their review. The SPM will then request a Bridge Memo Conference with the Assistant State Bridge Engineer, the Structural Resource Manager and the Structural Prelim. & Review Engineer. After the review and conference, the Preliminary Designer will update the Bridge Memorandum and supporting documents.. The Designer and SPM sign and date the memo by typing their names and the date in the locations provided.

====751.1.2.19.5 Bridge/District Agreement Process====

The following process will be used to establish agreement between the district and Bridge Division on Bridge Memorandums:

:1) Bridge Memorandums and supporting documentation will be made available on SharePoint by Bridge Division.
:2) The Bridge Division preliminary designer or Structural Project Manager (SPM) will email the Transportation Project Manager (TPM) and the District Bridge Engineer a link to the Bridge Memorandum in SharePoint when the memorandum is ready for review by the district. (A link to the Constructability Questionnaire, Cost Estimate, Layout for Soundings, and Request for Soil Properties may also be included.) As part of their review the TPM should forward the Bridge Memorandum to the appropriate Resident Engineer to solicit their input on the Memorandum.
:3) Changes to the Bridge Memorandum should be made in revision mode or with bold blue text for additions and red strikethrough text for deletion of existing text. (Discussion of proposed changes with the Bridge Division preliminary designer and SPM is recommended before making changes.)
:4) Once the district’s review of the Bridge Memorandum is complete the approving district personnel should type their names, titles and the date in the appropriate locations.
:5) The TPM or his designee emails the Bridge Division preliminary designer and SPM to inform them the district has reviewed and signed the Bridge Memorandum. A summary explaining any of the changes should be included in the email.
:6) The Bridge Division preliminary designer or SPM will accept the changes or coordinate with the TPM or his designee to resolve any differences.
:7) Once all differences are resolved the Bridge Division preliminary designer or the SPM will email the TPM or his designee indicating the agreement process is complete. Changes made to the Bridge Memorandum after the initial agreement may be handled by email or by the process described above.

====751.1.2.19.6 Documentation====
The Bridge Memorandum, supporting documents and related correspondence will be stored on the Bridge Division SharePoint page in the Projects -Inwork directory.

A copy of the agreed upon bridge memo is placed in the Layout folder. If changes are made after the initial agreement, a copy of the revised memo should be added to the layout folder and the original bridge memo marked as void with the date of revision noted.

<div id="bridge memo"></div>
<center>[[Image:751.1_Prelim_Design_Bridge_Memo_(Ex_1).gif]]</center>

===751.1.2.20 Soundings (Borings)===
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="270px" align="right"
|-
|'''Additional Information'''
|-
|[[media:751.1.2.20 Request Jun 2018.xlsx|Request for Final Soundings for Structures Form]]
|-
|[[media:751.1.2.19 Guidance 2018.xlsx|Guidance for Request for Final Soundings of Structures]]
|}
====751.1.2.20.1 Purpose ====
The borings define subsurface conditions at the project site and are used to determine type of foundation (driven piles, pile cap footing, spread footings, drilled shafts), preliminary estimate of pile lengths and engineering design properties.

Note that two types of soundings are typically provided by a sounding investigation.

:1. Auger Borings - These are the most typical type of sounding provided due to availability of equipment and low cost. This type of boring is generally stopped immediately upon encountering "hard rock". All description of type of soil and rock encountered is determined in the field.
:2. Core Samples - These are more time consuming and expensive. They are also subject to the availability of the specialized equipment and are therefore provided as sparingly as possible by the sounding crew. Once "hard rock" is encountered at a coring location, drilling is continued for an additional 10 ft. to ensure a consistent layer of actual hard rock (not a boulder). If a void layer is encountered in the additional drilling, the drilling is continued until another 10 ft. of consistent hard rock is encountered. In addition to field determination of soil layer type and performance of the Standard Penetration Test (SPT), samples are returned to the lab for additional tests such as determination of rock quality (% RQD).

====751.1.2.20.2 Required Locations====
'''Bridges –''' Borings should be requested at each bent. For bents on columns, estimate the number and location of the columns for each bent and request borings for these locations.

'''Box Culverts –''' Borings should only be requested for Box Culverts on Rock (no bottom slab). Borings should be requested every 10 ft. along the alignment of both exterior walls for single box culverts and along both the exterior and interior walls for multiple cell culverts.

'''MSE Walls –''' Borings should be requested at 25 ft. intervals along the baseline of the MSE Wall and at control points along the wall (such as bend lines). For a MSE Wall that wraps around an end bent, consideration should be given as to whether requesting additional borings in a grid pattern between the walls is necessary.

'''CIP Concrete Retaining Walls –''' Borings should be requested at 25 ft. intervals along the wall alignment.

====751.1.2.20.3 Required Documents====
'''Plan and Elevation/Profile Sheets.''' Using MicroStation, the proposed structure should be drawn on the bridge survey plan sheet(s). Boring symbols should be placed at all requested boring locations.

To find the Northing and Easting, the "Label Coordinates" tool in Microstation can be used. The grid factor, projection factor, coordinate system, zone, horizontal datum and vertical datum will be required information necessary for completing the Request for Final Soundings of Structures Form, all of which should have been provided with the bridge survey report.

'''Plan and Elevation Sheet(s) of Existing Bridge.''' When applicable.

'''[[media:751.1.2.20 Request Jun 2018.xlsx|Request for Final Soundings for Structures Form]].''' [[media:751.1.2.19 Guidance 2018.xlsx|Guidance for filling out the Request for Final Soundings of Structures Form]] is available.

Instructions to Sounding Party included on the form should be similar to the following:

:'''Bridges – '''Provide cores at alternating locations with one core per bent. Where rock is not encountered at core sampling locations, make standard penetration tests at 5 ft. depth increments. If rock is encountered at these core locations, provide RQD determinations at 5 ft. depth increments. If a sounding location is not accessible, please provide an alternative sounding as close as possible to the requested location in order to get an accurate representation of soil conditions at the bent line.

:'''Box Culverts –''' Provide cores at each location to determine depth and quality of rock. Information will be used to determine structure type (concrete box on rock – without bottom slab) and excavation quantities. If rock is unsuitable for concrete box on rock, discontinue core and sound depth to rock. If sounding location is not accessible, provide an alternate sounding as close as possible to the requested location in order to get an accurate representation of soil conditions along proposed culvert wall.

:'''Retaining Walls -''' Request that soundings be taken every 25 ft. along the wall alignment. Soundings shall be made to rock or to a point which is 20 ft. below the bottom of the wall, whichever is higher.

'''Request for Soil Properties –''' The request for soil properties is located on a separate tab in the Request for Final Soundings for Structures form.

:'''Bridges –''' If there is a possibility that drilled shafts will be used, request borings based on using drilled shafts so the appropriate lab work can be done the first time.

:'''MSE Walls –''' The request for soundings for MSE walls should include requests for the angle of internal frictions (Ø) for both the foundation and the retained material.

'''Due Date –''' Use the following guidelines when setting a due date:

<center>
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
|+
! style="background:#BEBEBE" |Project Time Line!! style="background:#BEBEBE" |Foundation Report Due Date
|-
|< 10 Months|| Contact Geotechnical Section'''1'''
|-
|≥ 10 Months|| 13 Weeks from Submittal Date
|-
|colspan="2" width="750" align="left"|'''1''' Preferred due date should be discussed at the memo conference and the Geotechnical Section contacted to establish a due date.
|}
</center>

====751.1.2.20.4 Submittal====
The completed Request for Final Soundings of Structures form and the other supporting documents listed above should be stored on the Bridge Division SharePoint page in the [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/BR/projects/default.aspx Projects-Inwork directory] under the structure’s subfolder. (Consultants should contact the Structural Liaison Engineer).

A request for soundings should be sent by email to the Construction and Materials Division. The email shall be addressed to the Geotechnical Engineer and copied to the Geotechnical Director and the Structural Project Manager (or the Structural Liaison Engineer). It should include at a minimum, a link to the SharePoint folder that contains the completed Request for Final Soundings of Structures Form and supporting documents. In addition to the SharePoint link, any relevant information that may aid the Geotechnical Section in providing the requested borings should be included.

The request for soundings is typically done at the same time that the Bridge Memorandum is sent to the district.

===751.1.2.21 Substructure Type===

Once the signed Bridge Memo and the Borings are received, the entire layout folder should be given to the Preliminary Detailer (requested by SPM, assigned by Structural Resource Manager). The Preliminary Detailer will copy the appropriate Microstation drawings into their own directory. (Do not rename files) Consultants contact Structural Liaison Engineer. The Preliminary Detailer will then draw the proposed bridge on the plat and profile sheets. The bridge should also be drawn on the contracted profile for a perspective of the profile grade relative to the ground line for drainage considerations. The Preliminary Detailer will also generate a draft Design Layout Sheet and then return the layout folder to the Preliminary Designer for review.

The Preliminary Designer will then choose the substructure types for each of the bents. Pile cap bents without concrete encasement are less expensive than column bents but they should not be used at the following locations:

:Where drift has been identified as a problem

:Where the height of the unbraced piling is excessive and kl/r exceeds 120 (kl/r<120 is generally preferred) (take scour into account)

:Where the bent is adjacent to traffic (grade separations)

Encased pile cap bents may be considered if economical. Embed concrete encasement 2 ft. (minimum) below the top of the lowest finished groundline elevation, unless a greater embedment is required for bridge scour. Greater embedment up to 5 or 6 ft. may be considered in situations where anticipated ground line elevation can fluctuate more severely. (Be sure to account for excavation quantities for deeper embedment.) Provision for encasing piles may be considered at the following locations:

:Where drift is a concern and protection is required

:Where larger radius of gyration is necessary and therefore improved buckling resistance for locations where the exposed unbraced column length is large

:Not exclusively where the piles at the pile/wall interface may experience wet/dry cycles and/or excessive periods of ground moisture

<div id="top of permanent casing elevation"></div>
For column bents, an economic analysis should be performed to compare drilled shafts to footings with cofferdams. When evaluating the drilled shaft option, keep in mind that if casing is used (see Geotechnical information) it should extend at least as high as the elevation that would be used for the seal course design. Also keep in mind that the permanent casing should be kept at least one foot below the ground line or low water elevation. Any casing above this elevation will be temporary.

End Bents are usually pile cap bents; however, if quality rock is abundant at or just below the bottom of beam elevation, a stub end bent on spread footings may be used. If you have any doubt about the suitability and uniformity of the rock, you can still use a pile cap end bent. Just include prebore to get a minimum of 10 ft. of piling. If you have concerns about temperature movements, you can require that the prebore holes be oversized to allow for this movement.

For any pile cap bents, where steel piles are to be placed near a fluctuating water line or near a ground line where aggressive soil conditions exist or anticipated to exist in the future, corrosion can result in substantial material loss in pile sections over time, either slowly or rapidly. Galvanized steel piling is required for all new pile cap bents to be used as a deterrent to both accelerated and incidental pile corrosion as commonly seen in the field. Further, conditions like known in corrosive soils, some stream crossings with known history of effects on steel piles and grounds subject to stray currents, these conditions should affect the decision of whether pile cap bents can be effectively utilized. The potential effects of corrosion and the potential deterioration from environmental conditions should always be considered in the determination and selection of the steel pile type and steel pile cross-section (size of HP pile or casing thickness), and in considering the long-term durability of the pile type in service.

Once the substructure type has been determined, re-examine your Preliminary Cost Estimate and notify the district if it needs to be adjusted.

'''Galvanized Steel Piles'''

Galvanizing shall be required for all steel piles. Utilizing galvanized steel piles and pile bracing members shall be in addition to the requirements of [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/2017%20Missouri%20Standard%20Specific%20-%20MHTC%20(Jul%202017).pdf Standard Specifications Sec 702] except that protective coatings specified in Sec 702 will not be required for galvanized piles or galvanized bracing members.

Where galvanized steel piling is expected to be exposed to severe corrosive conditions, consideration can be given to increased steel pile thickness or consideration of a reduced loaded steel area for bearing, or conditions mitigated to prevent long term corrosivity risk . This equally applies to the potential corrosion and early deterioration of permanent steel casing used for drilled shafts though they are not required to be galvanized. For all cases, further consideration beyond normal practice should be given to investigating corrosion protection, rate of corrosion as it relates to steel thickness design and expected service life including galvanizing losses, corrosion mitigation or different substructure support in order to meet a 75 year or longer design life. For additional information refer to LRFD 10.7.5 and 10.8.1.5. Consult with the Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer to determine options and strategy for implementation.

'''All Bridge and Retaining Wall Piles (For Example, abutment piles, wing wall piles, intermediate pile cap bent piles and pile cap footing piles)'''

All surfaces of piles shall be galvanized to a minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) or its full length based on the following guidance. The minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) shall be estimated in preliminary design and finalized in final design. The minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) or full length will be shown on the design layout.

Guidance for determining minimum galvanized penetration (elevation):

The designer shall establish the limits of galvanized structural steel pile (i.e., HP pile and CIP pile). All exposed pile plus any required length below ground shall be galvanized. Based on required galvanized pile length determine and show Minimum Galvanized Penetration (Elevation) or Full Length on the Design Layout and on the plans.

{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE" |Required Pile Length (in ground) !!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Required Pile Galvanizing (in ground) For Nonscour!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Required Pile Galvanizing (in ground) For Channel Scour !!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Required Pile Galvanizing (in ground) For Channel Migration
|-
|align="center"| ≤ 30 feet||align="center"|Full Length of Pile||align="center"| Full Length of Pile||align="center"| Full Length of Pile
|-
|align="center"|> 30 feet ||align="center"|20 feet ||align="center"| Min. Scour Embedment ≥ 20 feet ||align="center"| Potential Migration Loss Depth ≥ 20 feet
|}
<div id="For retaining walls supported"></div>
For retaining walls supported on piles, the minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) for piles shall be 15 ft. below bottom of wall or use engineering judgment.

For bridge end bents on piles with embankments supported by MSE walls, the minimum galvanized penetration (elevation) for piles shall be 15 ft. below top of leveling pad or use engineering judgment.

'''Temporary Bridge Piles'''

Protective coatings are not required in accordance with [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/2017%20Missouri%20Standard%20Specific%20-%20MHTC%20(Jul%202017).pdf Sec 718]. Galvanized pile is not required. All HP piles driven to rock shall require pile point reinforcement.

===751.1.2.22 Type of Footings===

Once it has been determined that a bent will have columns on footings, the next decision is whether the footings should be pile or spread (on shale or rock). If it is a stream crossing, the bottom of footing elevation should be based on the scour calculations found in [[750.3_Bridges|EPG 750.3 Bridges]], an article dealing with hydraulic design. The borings should then be studied to see if a minimum of 10 ft. of piling can be placed below the footings. If this is doubtful because of the presence of shale or rock, spread footings or drilled shafts should be used. In instances where it appears that a spread footing can be used but there are pinnacles in the area, you may want to use a pile footing and just require prebore to ensure that you get the minimum embedment of 10 feet. For spread footings on grade separations, include a “not above” elevation to ensure a footing cover of at least 3 feet.

===751.1.2.23 Types of Piling===

The two types of piling commonly used are HP pile and close-ended pipe pile (cast-in-place, CIP). Open ended pipe pile (cast-in-place, CIP) can also be used. HP piles are commonly used as end bearing piles when shale or rock will be encountered at an elevation that will limit the pile lengths to about 100 ft. or less. CIP piles are commonly used as friction pile for which a minimum tip elevation must be determined (see [[751.36 Driven Piles#751.36.2 Steel Pile|EPG 751.36.2 Steel Pile]] for criteria). All HP piles driven to rock shall require pile point reinforcement. For CIP piles, use pile point reinforcement if boulders or cobbles or dense gravel are anticipated. For all piles, prebore if necessary to achieve minimum embedment.

Here are some guidelines for minimum embedment:

::{|border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center"

|'''Pile Type'''||'''Location'''||'''Minimum Embedment'''
|-
|Steel HP-Pile||All||10' into natural ground 15'-20' below scour depth*
|-
|CIP Pile||All||10' into natural ground 15'-20' below scour depth*
|-
|colspan="3"|'''*''' 15’ if the material is hard cohesive or dense granular; 20’ if the material is soft cohesive or loose granular.
|}

===751.1.2.24 Estimating the Lengths of Piles===

All designers doing preliminary design should use the DRIVEN computer program to estimate the lengths for piling.

One way to check the validity of your DRIVEN results is to look at the piling information for existing bridges in the vicinity. Please also be on the lookout for any borings that contain "glacial till" (gravelly clay). This material is notorious for stopping pile.

This procedure is not a substitute for experience and engineering judgment. It is simply an attempt to have a more uniform method for estimating pile lengths.

All soil data must be obtained as well as elevation information pertaining to intermediate and end bents. The soil borings and core information are then observed. The unit weights of the different soil layers are determined by correlating information from the core data with information found in reference tables. The resulting unit weights are written on the soil boring page. If the soil is cohesive, the undrained shear strength should be determined by dividing the results of the pocket penetrometer test by two. If there was no pocket penetrometer test performed, then a correlation between the SPT blow counts and the undrained shear strength can be determined from reference tables. The water table must be identified or estimated and labeled on each of the borings and cores. The water table is usually distinguishable by the presence of gray colored soil. Note that more accurate data is obtained from cores than is obtained from borings because borings are performed using an auger type apparatus that mixes and remolds the soil.

===751.1.2.25 Drilled Shafts===

Drilled shafts are to be used when their cost is comparable to that of large cofferdams and footings. Other examples include when there are subsurface items to avoid (culverts, utilities, etc.) or when there are extremely high soil pressures due to slope failures.

The Foundation Investigation request should include a request for opinion regarding the necessity of permanent casing when drilled shafts are investigated.

Cost estimate savings and supporting subsurface information shall be discussed with Construction and Materials before permanent casing is omitted on a project.

The Foundation Investigation Geotechnical Report (or soundings report) for drilled shafts should supply you with the nominal end bearing (tip resistance) and side friction (side resistance) as well as the elevations for which the nominal rock values are applicable.

The Design Layout Sheet should include the following information:

:Top of Drilled Shaft Elevation
:[[#top of permanent casing elevation|Top of Permanent Casing Elevation]]
:Anticipated Tip of Casing Elevation
:Anticipated Top of Sound Rock Elevation

:{|border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0" style="text-align:center"

|width="75"|Bent||width="100"|Elevation||width="150"|Side Friction (tsf)||width="150"|End Bearing (tsf)
|-
| || || || 
|}

===751.1.2.26 Excavation Datum===

An Excavation Datum should be placed on the Layout Sheet when water is expected to be encountered during the excavation for footings. The elevation used is usually the Low Water Elevation plus 1 foot (rounded up to the next even foot) but may be made slightly higher on bigger streams and rivers. Everything above this datum is Class 1 Excavation while everything below it is Class 2 Excavation.

===751.1.2.27 Seal Courses===

On structures over water with pile footings, a determination should be made as to whether or not to include seal courses. Seal courses are used in conjunction with cofferdams when a contractor may have trouble dewatering the footing excavation. They are usually necessary when you have sandy or gravelly soils and footing elevations below the stream bed. You will need to include a water surface elevation on the Design Layout Sheet for which the Seal Courses should be designed for. Typically the elevation used is the average of the Low Water Elevation and the Design High Water Elevation; however, a site visit may be required to determine how reasonable this is. In no case should this elevation be higher than the 10 year high water elevation or the overbank elevation.

===751.1.2.28 Cofferdams===

Cofferdams should be included if the depth of the hole for the footing exceeds 8 feet and/or the bottom of footing elevation is below the Ordinary High Water (OHW) elevation. Any bent that requires a seal course will also require a cofferdam. These are bid lump sum per bent. Consult with the Assistant State Bridge Engineer about this. All piling in pile footings should be straight (not battered) when a cofferdam is expected.

===751.1.2.29 Webs===

On structures over water where medium to heavy drift has been indicated on the Bridge Survey, consider using web walls between the columns on the column bents near or in the stream. The bottom elevation for the web is typically 1' higher than the overbank elevation.

===751.1.2.30 Protection of Spill Slopes and Side Slopes===

The district shall be consulted for type of slope protection. Either Concrete Slope Protection or Rock Blanket can be used for grade separations and are Roadway Pay Items. On stream crossings, Rock Blanket is usually placed. The type and thickness of Rock Blanket is to be determined by the district based on the flow velocity from the [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=750.3_Bridges#750.3.1.8_Scour Scour] design flood frequency. This flow velocity is determined by the person doing the hydraulic calculations and should be placed on the Bridge Memorandum. Permanent erosion control geotextile is always required to be placed under rock blanket.

When Rock Blanket is used, an elevation for the upper limit of this protection needs to be calculated. First, calculate the following two elevations:

:100 year High Water Elevation plus 2 feet
:500 year High Water Elevation plus 1 foot

Take the higher of these two elevations and compare it to the Low Girder Elevation minus 1.2 feet. Use the lowest of these two elevations for the upper limit of your Rock Blanket. This elevation should be placed on the profile sheets.

If the toe of the abutment slope falls on the overbank, the rock blanket apron should extend from the toe toward the channel a distance equal to twice the 100 year flow depth on the overbank, but need not exceed 25 feet.

Note: District Design has the option of extending rock blanket up to and for the full length of the bridge approach slab or otherwise using drain flumes for bridge end drainage. See [[:Category:503 Bridge Approach Slabs|EPG 503 Bridge Approach Slabs]], [[:Category:611 Embankment Protection|EPG 611 Embankment Protection]] and [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/documents/60940.pdf Standard Plan 609.40].

===751.1.2.31 Design Exceptions===

Anytime MoDOT standards are not followed, a Design Exception is necessary. These are usually initiated by the Transportation Project Manager in the district; however, if the item is related to the bridge, the Bridge Division will initiate the [[131.1 Design Exception Process|Design Exception]].

The [[media:131.1 Design Exception.docx|Design Exception Information Form]] should be filled out by the preliminary designer and then reviewed by the Structural Project Manager (SPM). A complete explanation of the basis for the design variance must be provided, including cost justification and details on how the variance will affect adjacent properties. The SPM should then submit the Design Exception to the Assistant State Bridge Engineer for review. After this review, the Design Exception should be submitted to the State Bridge Engineer for his signature. This submission should include written comments from the SPM on why the Design Exception should be approved. Once the Design Exception has been signed by the State Bridge Engineer, the SPM should mail the [[media:131.1 Design Exception.docx|Design Exception Information Form]] and [[Media:Design Except to District.doc|cover letter]] to the Transportation Project Manager in the district. The TPM will sign it and then send it to the General Headquarters Design Division for final approval. The Design Division will supply copies of the signed Design Exception to both the district and the Bridge Division.

Some examples of Design Exceptions initiated by the Bridge Division are:

'''Hydraulic Standards'''

These include not meeting the standards for freeboard, design frequency, etc.

'''Vertical Clearance'''

If the vertical clearance under a new or widened bridge does not meet the standard, a Design Exception is required. If the reduction in vertical clearance is due solely to the overlay of the road under the bridge, the Bridge Division would not initiate the Design Exception.

'''Roadway/Shoulder Width Less Than Standard (New Structures)'''

On new structures, if the roadway and/or shoulder widths on the bridge match the approach roadway, the Design Exception would be initiated by the district. If the roadway and/or shoulder widths on a new bridge are less than the approach roadway, the Design Exception would be initiated by the Bridge Division.

'''Roadway/Shoulder Width Less Than Standard (Existing Structures)'''

On Non-Interstate Rehab (3R) jobs, an exception for width is required any time we don’t meet the new design standards. The approach lanes being referred to in the [[media:128 3R Design Standards (Rural) 2013.docx|rural design standards note (8)]] are the new lanes. The last note should be modified to read “Bridges programmed for replacement within 5 years may be allowed to remain in place as is and should be looked at on a case by case basis.”

On Interstate Rehab (4R) jobs, an exception for width is required any time we don’t meet the new design standards. If an existing bridge is over 200 feet long, FHWA has said that they will routinely approve the width if both shoulders are at least 3.5’ wide, but we should still request the Design Exception. FHWA will want to see any approved Design Exceptions before they approve the preliminary design.

'''Bridge Approach Slabs (New Bridges)'''

On new bridges, the interchangeability of bridge approach slab classes will require a design exception. For example, if a Bridge Approach Slab (Major Road) is to be substituted for a Bridge Approach Slab (Minor Road), a design exception will be required and initiated by the Bridge Division based on project core team consensus.

===751.1.2.32 Finishing Up Design Layout===

Design Layouts shall be generated for new bridges, retaining walls and when foundation work is required for bridge widenings. Otherwise, Design Layouts are not utilized for conveyance of information related to rehabilitation projects, or work on existing bridges or, more generally, on structures.

Once the Preliminary Detailer has created the Design Layout Sheet and added the borings and details of the proposed bridge to the plat and profile sheets, they should be checked by the Preliminary Designer. These sheets are the end product of the Preliminary Design process and will be used to perform the structural calculations for the Final Design phase of the bridge, which results in the production of the contract plans. Here is a list of items to include.

{|border="0"
|-
|1.)||colspan="2"|General Information
|-
| ||a.||Live load designation
|-
| ||b.||Traffic counts for the design year (AADT and AADTT).
|-
| ||c.||Tie station (if applicable).
|-
| ||d.||Beginning station.
|-
| ||e.||Horizontal curve data.
|-
| ||f.||Profile grade information (including offset from CL of roadway or median).
|-
| ||g.||Excavation datum.
|-
|2.)||colspan="2"|Superstructure
|-
| ||a.||Type and span lengths.
|-
| ||b.||Roadway widths and type of barrier curbs.
|-
|3.)||colspan="2"|Substructure
|-
| ||a.||Skew(s) of all bents.
|-
| ||b.||Types of all bents.
|-
| ||c.||Type and locations of sway bracing for concrete pile cap intermediate bent with HP pile.
|-
| ||d.||Locations and top of wall elevations for collision walls.
|-
| ||e.||Embedment of encasement for encased pile cap bent.
|-
| ||f.||Location of tie beam.
|-
| ||g.||Bottom elevations of web beam.
|-
|4.)||colspan="2"|End Bents (Abutments)
|-
| ||a.||Type of end fill and maximum slope. Include earth plugs for piling in rock fill.
|-
| ||b.||Berm elevations.
|-
| ||c.||Type and extent of spill and side slope protection (permanent erosion control geotextile fabric is required).
|-
| ||d.||Bridge end drainage provisions per district (drain basins'''1''', rock blanket, drain flumes) (Rdwy. Item)
|-
| ||e.||Angle of internal friction to be used for deadman anchors.
|-
|5.)||colspan="2"|Foundations
|-
| ||a.||Type and lengths of all piling.
|-
| ||b.||Minimum galvanized penetration (elevation)
|-
| ||c.||Minimum tip elevations for all piles.
|-
| ||d.||Location and elevation for any preboring.
|-
| ||e.||Location of any pile point reinforcement (shoes).
|-
| ||f.||Types of footings, their elevations and allowable bearing (if applicable).
|-
| ||g.||Location of any cofferdams and/or seal courses.
|-
| ||h.||End bearing and side bearing capacity for any drilled shafts.
|-
| ||i.||Top of Rock Socket elevations and their minimum lengths.
|-
| ||j.||Estimated Maximum Scour Depth (Elev.)'''2'''
|-
| ||k.||Minimum pile cleanout penetration (Elev.)'''3'''
|-
|6.)||colspan="2"|Traffic Handling
|-
| ||a.||How will traffic be handled (bypass, road closure, staging, other)
|-
| ||b.||Include a sketch of any staging.
|-
|7.)||colspan="2"|Disposition of Existing Structure
|-
| ||a.||Bridge No(s). of structures slated for removal.
|-
| ||b.||Estimate cost of removal and indicate that this cost is included in the total.
|-
|8.)||colspan="2"|Hydraulic Information
|-
| ||a.||Drainage area and terrain description.
|-
| ||b.||Design frequency.
|-
| ||c.||Design discharge.
|-
| ||d.||Design high water elevation.
|-
| ||e.||Estimated backwater.
|-
| ||f.||Overtopping frequency and discharge if less than 500 yr.
|-
|9.)||colspan="2" |Seismic Information (New Bridge or Wall) (Applies to both dynamic and static designs)
|-
| ||a.|| Site Class, Seismic Design Category, As, SD1
|-
| ||b.|| Either “LRFD Seismic Details Only” or “LRFD Complete Seismic Analysis”
|-
| ||c. || For Nonseismic (or static) designs, Seismic Design Category A, As, SD1 (All new designs must meet SDC A. See [[#751.1.2.13 Earthquake (Seismic) Consideration|EPG 751.1.2.13 Earthquake (Seismic) Consideration]].)
|-
|10.)||colspan="2"|Miscellaneous
|-
| ||a.||Locations of Bridge Approach Slabs.
|-
| ||b.||Call out slab drain requirements if other than the standard procedure.
|-
| ||c.||The location of the stationing reference line (CL roadway, CL median, other).
|-
| ||d.||Station equations.
|-
| ||e.||Minimum final and construction clearances (vertical and horizontal).
|-
| ||f.||Use of weathering steel or color of paint (steel girders).
|-
| ||g.||Name and phone number of District Contact.
|-
| ||h.||Preliminary Cost Estimate.
|-
| ||i.||Details of any utilities to be attached to the bridge.
|-
| ||j.||Details of any conduit, light supports or any other unusual attachments.
|-
| ||k.||Channel change requirements.
|-
| ||l.||Temporary shoring requirements and whether it is a Bridge or Roadway Item.
|-
| ||m.||Location of Maint. facility contractor is to use for delivery of MoDOT retained items.
|-
| ||n.||Directory/path for any Ceal, Geopak or Microstation files used for layout of bridge.
|-
| ||o.||Identify asphalt mix type (determined by district) when the asphalt bridge approach slab sub-class is an option.
|}
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|width="20"| ||colspan="2" align="left"|'''1''' Drain basins can be included with concrete approach pavement per district. (Rdwy. Item)
|-
| ||colspan="2" align="left"|'''2''' Show maximum of total scour depths estimated for multiple return periods in years from Preliminary design which should be
|-
|| ||width="10"| ||given on the Design Layout. Show the controlling return period (e.g. 100, 200, 500) in Foundation Data. If return periods are different for different bents, add a new line in Foundation Data. On the plans report note EPG 751.50 E2.22 for CIP pile.
|-
| ||colspan="2" align="left"|'''3''' Show for open ended CIP piles.
|}

Once the Preliminary Detailer and Designer are in agreement on these items, the entire layout folder should be submitted to the SPM for their review. The SPM will then request a Design Layout Conference with the Assistant State Bridge Engineer and the Structural Resource Manager.

Following this conference, the Preliminary Detailer and Designer will make any requested changes and complete the assembly of the Layout Folder by including the approved Design Layout Sheet and one set of half sized plat and profile sheets. The Layout Folder should then be delivered to the SPM along with one set of half-sized plat and profile sheets and a copy of the Design Layout Sheet.

The SPM should then use a cover letter to send the one set of half-sized plat and profile sheets, as well as the copy of the Design Layout Sheet, to the Transportation Project Manager in the district. Include in this cover letter any changes in the Preliminary Cost Estimate and the current Plans Completion Date. An example can be found on the next page.

The Preliminary Detailer should provide a copy of the Design Layout Sheet to the Bridge Survey Processor. The Bridge Survey Processor should then perform the following tasks:
*Enter the Date to Final Design in the Bridge Survey Book and the Survey Rcv. Database
*Supply a copy of the Design Layout Sheet to Development and Review.
*Copy all of the Microstation files in house to
*pwname:\\MoDOT\Documents\Central Office\Bridge\A_Prelim_design\district\job no.
*(Consultants contact Structural Liaison Engineer).

The SPM should then enter the following information into Bloodhound.
*Span layout information
*Preliminary Cost Estimate
*Date of Layout Conference
*[[Media:Layout to District.doc|Preliminary Plans to District]]

All other fields in Bloodhound should be updated at this time by the SPM.

The SPM will then send a request for a Final Designer to the Structural Resource Manager.

===751.1.2.33 FHWA Submittal===

Federal involvement is determined in accordance with [[:Category:123 Federal-Aid Highway Program#123.1.1 FHWA Oversight - National Highway System|EPG 123.1.1 FHWA Oversight – National Highway System]]. Projects which are delegated for federal involvement for preliminary design on the PODI matrix must be submitted to FHWA for approval.

The submittal should include the following:

*[[Media:Layout to FHWA.doc|Cover letter]]
*One set of half-sized plat and profile sheets
*One copy of Design Layout Sheet
*One copy of completed Bridge Survey Report
*One copy of the Borings report including Cover Letter from Materials
*One copy of each approved [[131.1 Design Exception Process|Design Exception]] (if applicable)
*One copy of the Bridge Deck Condition Survey Summary (if applicable)
*One copy of the Bridge Rehab Checklist (if applicable)
*One copy of the Bridge Inspection Report for the existing bridge (if applicable)
*One copy of half-sized existing bridge plans (if applicable)
*One copy of anything else referred to on the Design Layout Sheet (an example would be top of pavement elevations if these are to be used in Final Design)

That is the end of the Preliminary Design phase of bridge design at MoDOT.

===751.1.2.34 Aesthetic Enhancements===

Aesthetic enhancements can include everything from form liners and different colored paints to actual brick or stonework on the bridge. The district is required to inform the Bridge Division if aesthetic enhancements will be required on a bridge. Aesthetic enhancements should be discussed by the core team during the scoping process.

Note: Galvanized slab drains are to remain unpainted unless otherwise requested by the district. The required special provision is available if the district wishes to paint the galvanized slab drains.

'''Specifying Form Liners'''

Form liners are typically supplied in 4 ft. wide sections. Consideration should be given to specifying concrete work in 2 ft. increments to avoid waste of form liner. Use of 1 ft. increments may be possible. Avoid specifying work requiring less than 1 ft. increments of form liner without approval of the Structural Project Manager or Structural Liaison Engineer. Specifying work requiring form liner using other than 4 ft. increments may affect cost and should be reviewed.

===751.1.2.35 Blast Loading Considerations===

Consideration should be given to the blast loading provisions given in ''AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications'' and ''AASHTO Bridge Security Guidelines'' for major bridges only and with the approval of the State Bridge Engineer.

Requirements for provision of blast loading protection and for structural design should be documented on the Bridge Memorandum and Design Layout.

All documentation associated with consideration of and requirements for blast loading protection and/or structural design including structural design computations should be detached or separated from other publicly available documents and marked “Not for Public Consumption.”

===751.1.2.36 Bridge Approach Slabs===

See [[:Category:503 Bridge Approach Slabs|EPG 503 Bridge Approach Slabs]].

===751.1.2.37 Bridge End Drainage===

See [[:Category:503 Bridge Approach Slabs|EPG 503 Bridge Approach Slabs]].

==751.1.3 Overlays/Rehabs/Redecks/Widenings==
===751.1.3.1 Overview===

Modifying existing bridges is quite different from laying out new bridges. Bridge overlays, rehabs, redecks and only widenings when the substructure is not being widened require the preparation and approval of a Bridge Memo as the only official written document requiring signatory approval (see [[#751.1.2.19 Bridge Memorandums|EPG 751.1.2.19 Bridge Memorandums]]) as a matter of procedure. A Design Layout is not required in these instances. However, bridge widenings when substructure and foundation work are required will require procedurally both a Bridge Memo and a Design Layout for signatory approval since soundings for exploring subsurface conditions will be required for the foundations.

These types of projects can be broken into four general categories:

#Overlaying an existing bridge as part of a roadway overlay project.
#Rehabilitating and/or redecking an existing bridge as a stand alone programmed project.
#Widening an existing bridge to meet minimum shoulder width requirements as part of a roadway overlay project.
#Widening an existing bridge to add lanes as part of a roadway project.

===751.1.3.2 Documentation===

[[#751.1.2.19 Bridge Memorandums|Bridge Memorandums]] shall be required for documenting proposed construction work and estimated construction costs for district concurrence. [[#751.1.2.32 Finishing Up Design Layout|Design Layouts]] shall be required only for widening projects where there is proposed foundation construction.

===751.1.3.3 Bridges on Resurfacing Projects===

This is probably the most common type of project. The first step is to determine the limits of the project. This can be done by looking at the description and log miles of the project in the Program Book. The district contact should also be consulted to make sure the project limits have not changed. The second step is using the Bridge Maps produced by the Maintenance Division to locate any and all bridges within the limits of the project.

Once the Bridge Nos. for these structures are known, obtain a copy of the Bridge Maintenance report for each structure. These reports contain the log mile for each structure. Compare this to the log mile limits of the project. If the log mile on the report indicates the bridge is outside of the project limits, check with the district contact again to see if the bridge is to be included in the project.

If a bridge falls within the project limits, it must be evaluated to see if it meets the current safety criteria for such items as shoulder width and curb type/height. If the job will be built with federal funds, any substandard safety item must be remedied or handled with a [[131.1 Design Exception Process|design exception]]. If the job will be built with 100% state funds, the bridge can be left alone (no safety improvements).

===751.1.3.4 Railing Type, Height and Guidelines for Curb Blockouts===

In accordance with AASHTO LRFD, the term “railings” may be generically used to refer to all types of bridge traffic barrier systems used on bridges. Several types of bridge railings are acceptable for use on bridges in Missouri (see the [[#Common Bridge Rails (for Rehabilitations)|Common Bridge Rails table]]); Thrie Beam Post-and-Beam Railings, Safety Barrier Curbs, Median Barrier Curbs, Type C & D Barrier Curbs, Curb and Parapet Railings, or any other FHWA approved crash tested barriers and curbs meeting TL-4 rating as given on the [http://safety.fhwa.dot.gov/roadway_dept/policy_guide/road_hardware/barriers/bridgerailings/ FWA Bridge Railings website].

When using a concrete barrier, a five-hole bolt pattern shall be used for connecting the approach railing to the bridge railing.

Bridge rails on single lane bridges may be used in place if for no other reason than the grade is not being raised. Shallow overlays measuring no more than 3/8” will not be considered as raising the grade.

'''Thrie Beam Railing (Bridge Guardrail)'''

:1. If the deck is less than 8.5 in. thick, the attachment must bolt through the deck with a plate on the bottom side of the deck. In the past, MoDOT used details where a bent stud was formed within the deck. This is no longer acceptable because of observed failure in thin decks where the edge can break off and the bottom of slab can pop out during a collision.

:2. The center of the rail shall be 21 in. (min.) to the top of the finished driving surface.

:3. Thrie beams are not a preferred railing for interstate or high AADTs. Concrete barriers are preferred.

'''Safety Barrier Curb (SBC) and Median Barrier Curb (MBC) '''

:1. If installed at the same time as the driving surface, the top of the curb shall not be less than 2’-8” above the driving surface.

:2. If a wearing surface is installed after the SBC or MBC is in place, the wearing surface thickness shall not be made greater than that whereby the curb height is made less than 2’-6”, i.e. the final grade with wearing surface installed shall not increase more than 2 inches.

'''Curb and Parapet Railing System with Guidelines for Curb Blockout'''

:1. The concrete portions of the curb and parapet are the only components used in determining the height of the railing system for establishing if the system meets current standards or is substandard. The handrails are not crashworthy and therefore are not considered as part of the height of the system.

:2. Curb and parapet railing systems were typically constructed 2’-3” high from the driving surface to top of parapet.

:3. Sections of curb and parapet railing systems may be replaced without consideration of upgrading.

:4. When a wearing surface is to be applied, the height of the existing curb and parapet system shall be determined from the existing driving surface and if necessary shall be heightened to 2’-8” above the proposed driving surface based on Guidelines for Curb Blockout, immediately below. Increasing the height of an existing curb and parapet railing system is generally done by adding a blockout to the curb and parapet (i.e., curb blockout).

====Guidelines for Curb Blockout====

Background and Application

Guidelines were developed considering Practical Design concepts (refer to [[:Category:143 Practical Design|EPG 143 Practical Design]]).

Guidelines apply to bridges to be resurfaced and/or rehabilitated that have concrete curb and parapet railing systems. They do not apply to bridges on Contract Leveling Course projects that are in accordance with [[:Category:402 Bituminous Surface Leveling#402.1 Design of Contract Leveling Course Projects|EPG 402.1 Design of Leveling Course Projects]].

When resurfacing and rehabilitating a bridge, consideration shall be given to upgrading the curb and parapet railing system by increasing the overall height if the railing system does not meet criteria given in these guidelines. The guidelines are based upon reviewing conditions that require satisfying height and horizontal parapet offset requirements using the minimum height of 2’-3” in accordance with 2002 AASHTO 17th Edition and earlier editions and a maximum horizontal parapet offset of 6” from barrier curb face to parapet face which is a MoDOT requirement ([[:Category:128 Conceptual Studies|EPG 128 Conceptual Studies]], 3R-Rural Design Criteria recommends a 6” brush curb). Upgrades to curb and parapet systems should be made by constructing a curb blockout. The following guidelines describe circumstances where it is, or is not, necessary to upgrade curb and parapet railing systems that were either originally built substandard or made substandard due to an earlier overlay or will be made substandard due to a proposed overlay.

Guidelines

Look at the 5-year history of accidents on the bridge (beginning log mile to ending log mile).

If there were any accidents in this time period that involved a vehicle ''striking the curb'', then curb and parapet not meeting current standards should be upgraded to meet the current AASHTO requirement which is to increase the height to 2'-8".

If there were NOT any accidents in the 5-year history AND if the grade is not being raised then it shall not be necessary to upgrade the curb and parapet.

If the accident history or grade criteria are not met, then it shall be necessary to upgrade the curb and parapet. The district may submit a design exception on non-NHS routes with AADT < 1700 to eliminate a curb blockout when there is no history of accidents on the bridge and the grade is being raised no more than 2” from the 2’-3” minimum height requirement.

Limiting Overlay Thickness To Meet Guidelines

The overlay thickness can be limited to that which would not cause the curb and parapet railing height to become substandard. An exception to this is a 1/4" – 3/8” height tolerance to allow for the possibility of placing an epoxy polymer concrete overlay (EPO) on a bridge with an existing standard 2'-3" high curb and parapet as measured from the original driving surface to the top of the parapet. Adding an EPO will not by itself make a satisfactory curb and parapet railing height substandard as reviewed and approved by MoDOT and FHWA.

Note: In all cases, the allowable overlay thickness would also be dependent on a structural review to confirm that the weight of the overlay would not lead to overstresses or an unacceptable posting.

Details

The horizontal offset (or ledge) from the curb face to the parapet face is recommended to be between 0” to 3” but shall not exceed 6”. If a curb blockout is used, the ledge shall not exceed 3”.

End posts are not always the same width as the parapets. If the end posts are wider and if they extend towards the driving lanes, it shall be necessary to remove the end posts completely in order to construct the curb blockouts. If end posts extend towards the outside of the bridge, it may not be necessary to remove the end posts.

====Common Bridge Rails (for Rehabilitations)====

{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
|+
! style="background:#BEBEBE" width="175"|Barrier!! style="background:#BEBEBE" width="160"|Photo !! style="background:#BEBEBE" width="160"|X-Section !! style="background:#BEBEBE" width="100" |UIP !! style="background:#BEBEBE" width="130"|Acceptable Wearing Surface ||style="background:#BEBEBE" width="130"| Retrofit|| style="background:#BEBEBE" width="150"| Notes
|-
|Curb and Parapet (i.e. Brush Curb < 6”)|| [[image:751.1.3.3 less than 6 in..jpg|130px]] || [[image:751.1.3.3 less than 6 in. x section.jpg|130px]] || YES || 3/8” Epoxy Polymer || Curb blockout for > 3/8” wearing surface || Not used on new construction, redecks, or curb or cantilever replacements.
|-
|Curb and Parapet (i.e. Brush Curb > 6”)|| [[image:751.1.3.3 more than 6 in..jpg|130px]] || [[image:751.1.3.3 more than 6 in. x section.jpg|130px]] || NO || None w/o retrofit || Curb blockout preferred. Thrie beam alternate. || Horizontal step must be 6” or less if to be UIP.
|-
|Brush Curb w/ Steel Rail|| [[image:751.1.3.3 street rail.jpg|130px]] || [[image:751.1.3.3 street rail x section.jpg|130px]] || NO || None w/o retrofit|| Curb blockout preferred. Thrie beam alternate.|| A variety of steel railing systems were employed on brush curbs. None are acceptable w/o retrofit.
|-
|*Thrie Beam Bridge Rail (Embedded or bolted thru)|| [[image:751.1.3.4 thrie.jpg|120px]] || [[image:751.1.3.3 thrie x section.jpg|130px]] || YES – W6x15 blockout is not required if to be UIP|| 21” (Min.) from CL rail to top of wearing surface || None required if min. height to CL rail is acceptable.|| Specified for new construction. The W6x15 blockout is included for all new construction. Thrie Beam Bridge Rail is not typically used on interstates or highways with high AADT.
|-
|* Safety Barrier Curb or Single Slope 32” high or greater || [[image:751.1.3.3 safety barrier.jpg|150px]] || [[image:751.1.3.3 safety barrier x section.jpg|130px]] || YES || Up to 2” || - || Specified for new construction.
|-
|*Steel Two Tube Rail || [[image:751.1.3.3 steel two tube.jpg|150px]] || [[image:751.1.3.3 steel two tube x section.jpg|130px]] || YES || Up to 2” || - ||Specified for new construction. Not typically used on interstates or highways with high AADT.
|-
|colspan=7 align="left"|'''*''' Thrie Beam Bridge Rail, Safety Barrier Curb or Steel Two Tube bridge rails are typically specified for new construction, redecks, and curb or cantilever replacements.
|}

'''Notes:'''

Aluminum handrail is not crashworthy and does not contribute to curb height. Use only the concrete portion.

Many other, less common, railing systems have been constructed. Most are not crashworthy for rural highway speeds. Generally, the replacement of the existing rail is the only means to upgrade.

For additional information on curb blockouts, see [[#Guidelines for Curb Blockout|Guidelines for Curb Blockouts]].

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:751.1.3.3 curb and parapet.jpg|275px]]|| [[Image:751.1 Prelim Design Acceptable Rail No. 4.jpg|225px]]
|}
A curb blockout is utilized along full length of curb. Bridge Division provides plans for curb blockouts.

===751.1.3.5 [http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Copy%20of%20751.1.3.5_Structural_Rehabilitation_Checklist.xlsm Structural Rehabilitation Checklist]===

===751.1.3.6 Asphalt Wearing Surface===

Grade B1 seal coat aggregate shall be used whenever a bridge deck is to receive an asphalt wearing surface. Grade A1 seal coat aggregate shall be used whenever the seal coat is to be the final riding surface. Grade C seal coats are no longer used for bridge applications because of dust issues.

===751.1.3.7 Bridge Approach Slabs===

Follow guidance for new bridges and see [[:Category:503 Bridge Approach Slabs|EPG 503 Bridge Approach Slabs]].

===751.1.3.8 Bridge End Drainage===

Follow guidance for new bridges and see [[:Category:503 Bridge Approach Slabs|EPG 503 Bridge Approach Slabs]].

===751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating===

Check [[:Category:145 Transportation Management Systems (TMS)|TMS]]'''1''' to see if an asbestos and lead inspection has been performed for a structure and include the applicable note shown immediately below on the Bridge Memorandum under the Special Notes Section. The report in TMS will be located in the Images link under the Media tab for the structure. Alternatively, refer to the “ACM & LBP Report Listing” available on the [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/br/Pages/default.aspx Bridge SharePoint site]'''1''' to determine if a bridge has been inspected for ACM and LBP. If there is not a report in TMS nor a SharePoint listing, contact the Assistant State Bridge Engineer for a report not yet uploaded to TMS. Include the applicable note of the two shown immediately below on the Bridge Memorandum depending on whether an inspection has not been performed or if the inspection report indicates that asbestos or lead, or both are present or not present. (These notes are also applicable for new replacement structures that involve removal of any part of an existing structure.)

:''“An asbestos and lead inspection has not been performed on this structure (Bridge/Culvert # XXXXX).”

:''“An asbestos and lead inspection has been performed on this structure (Bridge/Culvert # XXXXX). Results indicate that asbestos is present lead is present both are present both are not present. The District will need to include this report in the electronic deliverables folder when submitting contract documents to the Design Division for the Letting (Roadway Item).”''

Include the note shown immediately below if the asbestos and lead inspection report indicates that lead is present and the structure will be recoated. Contact the Wetland Coordinator in the Environmental Section to determine if paint removal will need to be included in the JSPs and include this information in the layout folder. Paint Removal will typically only need to be included on large paint projects, but the Environmental Section will need to be contacted to make this decision on all recoating projects including full repaints, partial repaints, expansion joints only and bearings only.

:''“Bridge Division will contact the Environmental Section to determine if paint removal will need to be included in the JSPs (Bridge Item).”''

'''1'''Available only to MoDOT employees. All others: contact the Bridge Division or the Structural Liaison Engineer directly for information related to EPG 751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating.

==751.1.4 Retaining Walls==
===751.1.4.1 Overview===

This article is intended to help with the issues unique to retaining walls. Many portions of [[751.1 Preliminary Design#751.1.2 Bridges/Boxes|EPG 751.1.2 Bridges/Boxes]] will still need to be used when working on retaining walls.

Retaining walls are very much like bridges in that they require the many of the same items, such as:

*Bridge Survey
*Bridge Number
*Bridge Memorandum
*Soundings
*Design Layout Sheet

===751.1.4.2 Types of Walls===

There are two general types of retaining walls used by MoDOT; cast-in-place (CIP) concrete walls and mechanically stabilized earth (MSE) walls. MSE walls are the preferred type due to their lower cost; however, there are several times when MSE walls cannot be used. These include:

*When barrier curb must be attached to the top of the wall.
*When the underlying soil cannot support the weight of the fill and wall (must use CIP on piling).
*When you don’t have adequate room behind the wall for the reinforcing straps.

In general a minimum reinforcement length of 8.0 ft., regardless of wall height, has been recommended based on historical practice, primarily due to size limitations of conventional spreading and compaction equipment. Shorter minimum reinforcement lengths, on the order of 6.0 ft., but no less than 70 percent of the wall height, can be considered if smaller compaction equipment is used, facing panel alignment can be maintained, and minimum requirements for wall external stability are met.

The requirement for uniform reinforcement length equal to 70 percent of the structure height has no theoretical justification, but has been the basis of many successful designs to-date. Parametric studies considering minimum acceptable soil strengths have shown that structure dimensions satisfying all of the requirements of Article 11.10.5 require length to height ratios varying from 0.8H for low structures, i.e. 10.0 ft., to 0.63 H for high structures, i.e. 40.0 ft.

Significant shortening of the reinforcement elements below the minimum recommended ratio of 0.7H may only be considered when accurate, site specific determinations of the strength of the unreinforced fill and the foundation soil have been made. Christopher et al. (1990) presents results which strongly suggest that shorter reinforcing length to height ratios, i.e. 0.5 H to 0.6 H, substantially increase horizontal deformations.

:The reinforcement length shall be uniform throughout the entire height of the wall, unless substantiating evidence is presented to indicate that variation in length is satisfactory.

:A nonuniform reinforcement length may be considered under the following circumstances:

:Lengthening of uppermost reinforcement layers to beyond 0.7H to meet pullout requirements or to address seismic or impact loads.

:Lengthening of the lowermost reinforcement layers beyond 0.7H to meet overall (global) stability requirements based on the results of a detailed global stability analysis.

:Shortening of bottom reinforcement layers to less than 0.7H to minimize excavation requirements, provided the wall is bearing on rock or very competent foundation soil.

For walls on rock or very competent foundation soil, e.i., SPT > 50, the Bottom reinforcements may be shortened to a minimum of 0.4H with the Upper reinforcements lengthened to compensate for external stability issues in lieu of removing rock or competent soil for construction. Design Guidelines for this case are provided in FHWA Publications No. FHWA-NHI-00-043 (Elias et al. 2001).

For conditions of marginal stability, consideration must be given to ground improvement techniques to improve foundation stability, or to lengthening of reinforcement.

MSE walls are pre-qualified and listed on the internet in two categories:

*Small block walls
*Large block walls

Small block walls are battered walls with a maximum height of 10 feet.

Large block walls are vertical walls with heights that may exceed 10 feet.

Combination wall systems are considered small block wall system and shall be battered with a maximum height of 10 feet.
<div id="Aesthetic enhancements may be used"></div>

Aesthetic enhancements may be used for either CIP or MSE walls. If [[#751.1.2.34 Aesthetic Enhancements|aesthetic enhancements]] are required by the district, form liners and concrete stains are encouraged rather than actual brickwork and stonework since form liners and concrete stains typically need less maintenance, less loading, less detailing, no extra support ledge and produce no risk of delaminations or falling work. However, for MSE large block walls only, form liners are required for all panels. For additional information, see [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=751.24_LFD_Retaining_Walls#751.24.2_Mechanically_Stabilized_Earth_.28MSE.29_Walls EPG 751.24.2 Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) Walls].

Any deviation from the criteria listed shall be discussed with Structural Project Manager.

===751.1.4.3 MSE Walls===

Generally, both the horizontal alignment and the top of wall elevations are supplied by the district in the Bridge Survey. You do need to check the top of wall elevations to make sure the district accounted for any concrete gutters placed behind the top of the wall (Gutters are necessary if the slope of the fill can direct water towards the top of the wall, i.e. positive sloping and flat backfills). The district should decide whether to use Type A or Type B gutters ([http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/60900.pdf Standard Plan 609.00]), or Modified Type A or Modified Type B gutters ([http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/60711.pdf Standard Plan 607.11]) if fencing is required, and where they should drain (to be shown on roadway plans). For general guidelines, see [[751.24 LFD Retaining Walls#751.24.2 Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) Walls|EPG 751.24.2 Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) Walls]].

You will also need to set the elevations for the top of the leveling pad. The minimum embedment, which is the distance between the finished ground line and the top of the leveling pad, is based on this table: (FHWA Demonstration Project 82)

{|border="1" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="5" align="center" style="text-align:center"

|width="250"|'''Slope in Front of Wall'''||width="250"|'''Minimum Embedment'''
|-
|Horizontal||H/20
|-
|3H:1V||H/10
|-
|2H:1V||H/7
|}

The absolute minimum embedment is 2 ft. When the soundings are returned, they will include a minimum embedment necessary for global stability.

Preliminary cost estimating MSE walls is based on the unit price bid history and on the square footage of the area of the face of the wall. The unit price per square foot of wall includes wall elements, leveling pad and backfill. Excavation and retained fill are not included.

If soundings indicate weak material exist, then the designer should investigate that sufficient right of way limits exist to address the required length for the soil reinforcement.

For additional information, see [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=751.24_LFD_Retaining_Walls#751.24.2_Mechanically_Stabilized_Earth_.28MSE.29_Walls EPG 751.24.2 Mechanically Stabilized Earth (MSE) Walls].

===751.1.4.4 CIP Concrete Walls===

Once you determine that you must use a CIP concrete wall, there is very little to do as far as the layout of the structure. Both the horizontal alignment and the top of wall elevations are supplied by the district in the Bridge Survey. You do need to check the top of wall elevations to make sure the district accounted for any concrete gutters placed behind the top of the wall. These are necessary if the slope of the fill will direct water towards the top of the wall. The district should decide whether to use Type A or Type B gutters ([http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/60900.pdf Standard Plan 609.00]), or Modified Type A or Modified Type B gutters ([http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/60711.pdf Standard Plan 607.11]) if fencing is required, and where they should drain to.

You will also need to set the elevations for the top of the footing, which should be a minimum of 2 ft. below the finished ground line for walls south of Interstate 70 and 3 ft. below the finished ground line for walls north of Interstate 70. In tight roadway situations where a barrier curb is to be placed on top of the wall, make sure that a stem thickness of 16 in. will fit.

Check with the district contact to determine if they want any coping on the exposed face of the wall.

French drains will be used to relieve water pressure behind the CIP wall as a default. If you expect to encounter springs or swampy conditions, then check with the district contact on calling for an underdrain. If the decision is made to use an underdrain, the porous backfill and pipes are Roadway Items and this must be noted on the Bridge Memorandum and Design Layout.

For details on requesting soundings, see [[#751.1.2.20 Soundings (Borings)|EPG 751.1.2.20 Soundings (Borings)]].

If you have indications that the foundation material is very poor in quality (less than 1 ton per sq. ft. allowable bearing), consider piling and include in the Preliminary Cost Estimate. Preliminary cost estimating should follow [[751.1 Preliminary Design#751.1.2.18 Preliminary Cost Estimate|EPG 751.1.2.18 Preliminary Cost Estimate]] and be based upon unit price bid history. More refined cost estimating should follow cost-basing estimating.

===751.1.4.5 Obstructions===

Any time the retaining wall will encounter obstructions, provisions must be made on the final plans. Therefore, if you are aware of any obstructions, they should be called out on the Bridge Memorandum and Design Layout Sheet. Here are some examples of types of obstructions and how to describe them on the layout:

::{|
|-
|width="150pt" style="border-bottom:2px solid black;"|Type of Obstruction||style="border-bottom:2px solid black;"|Description
|-
|Lighting Foundation||Std. 45’ Light Pole, Sta. 167+48.50,
|-
| ||16 ft. left
|-
|Sign Truss Foundation||Truss T-72, Sta. 172+41.80,
|-
| ||31 ft. right
|-
|Drop Inlet||2’ x 2’ Type D Drop Inlet,
|-
| ||Sta. 163+12.45, 14 ft. left
|}

[[Category:751 LRFD Bridge Design Guidelines|751.01]]

320.4 Procedure for Final Sounding

2018-06-27T15:09:52Z

EPGsysop: Per BR, clarified Request for Soil Properties Form A in "Request for Final Soundings for Structures" Form

This guidance defines responsibilities and establishes operational procedures for requesting final soundings for structures.

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:15px; border:1px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
|-style="background:#f5f5f5"
|'''Forms'''
|-
|[[media:751.1.2.20 Request Jun 2018.xlsx|Request for Final Soundings for Structures Form]]
|}

==320.4.1 Responsibility==
Excepting those District responsibilities outlined in [[320.3 Drilling Operations|Drilling Operations]], the Construction and Materials Division is responsible for final soundings for structures. This work will be performed by the Geotechnical Section.

==320.4.2 Procedure for Requesting Final Soundings==
On all final sounding work, one (1) copy of the drilling request ([[media:751.1.2.20 Request Jun 2018.xlsx|Request for Final Soundings for Structures Form]]), two (2) copies of the sounding layout, plat, profile sheet, and existing bridge plans when available will be sent to the State Construction and Materials Engineer. If the structure is a wall, two (2) copies of the cross sections should be included.

===320.4.2.1 Drilling Request===
[[media:751.1.2.20 Request Jun 2018.xlsx|Request for Final Soundings for Structures Form]] shall be used by the Bridge Division and District for requesting final soundings from the Construction and Materials Division. The remarks section should be used to further explain the request and to request job specific information.

===320.4.2.2 Sounding Layout===
[[media:751.1.2.20 Request Jun 2018.xlsx|Request for Final Soundings for Structures Form]] shall be used by the Bridge Division and District for specifying the location of requested borings. If the proposed structure is on a skew, it is preferred that the sounding locations are laid out along the skew. The skew angle, how offsets are measured and what the offset is referenced to, should be stated. Coordinates should not be used to request boring locations, rather stations and offsets are preferred.

==320.4.3 Procedure for Requesting Assistance from the District==
On all final sounding work, a copy of the layout, plat, and profile will be sent to the District Engineer by the Geotechnical Section with a letter from the Construction and Materials Division. The letter will indicate when it is anticipated that personnel will be in the District to perform the sounding work and request that the structure be staked and permission for access be obtained by that date. To avoid loss of stakes, structures should not be staked too far in advance of the sounding work. A copy of the staking notes should be delivered to the sounding party while in the field or, if this is not possible, mailed to the State Construction and Materials Engineer, or Faxed to the Geotechnical Section.

==320.4.4 Report==
The report will consist of the typed logs of soundings on Form T-737-1RMO and/or T-737-3RMO with a cover letter from the Construction and Materials Division. Distribution will be as follows:

{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center" align="center"
|+
! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Title!! style="background:#BEBEBE"|Copies
|-
|State Bridge Engineer || Original & 1 Copy
|-
|Project Manager || 2
|-
|File(s) ||
|}

[[Category:320 Soils and Geology]]

320.3 Drilling Operations

2018-06-27T15:09:04Z

EPGsysop: Per BR, clarified Request for Soil Properties Form A in "Request for Final Soundings for Structures" Form

This guidance defines responsibilities and establish operational procedures for all drilling operations performed under district supervision, except pavement coring, which is covered in [[:Category:502 Portland Cement Concrete Base and Pavement#502.2 Material Inspection|Portland Cement Concrete Base and Pavement - Material Inspection]].

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:15px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="240px" align="right"
|-style="background:#f5f5f5"
|'''Form'''
|-
|[[media:751.1.2.20 Request Jun 2018.xlsx|Request for Final Soundings for Structures Form]]
|}

[[Image:320.3 Drilling.jpg|right|250px]]

==320.3.1 Responsibility==
===320.3.1.1 District===
The district is responsible for the following when drilling operations are to be performed in the district, normally administered through the District Geologist or District Soils and Geology Technologist.

'''(a)''' Obtaining permission for access to private property except railroads. The latter is handled through the Railroad Liaison Engineer in [http://wwwi/intranet/mo/ Multimodal Operations].

'''(b)''' Locating Utilities and notifying all utilities in compliance with requirements of Chapter 319, RSMo, as revised 2001.

'''(c)''' Arranging staking or other surveying services if required.

'''(d)''' Warning the operators when working in a quarantine area.

'''(e)''' Arranging for settlement of any damage claims.

The district is '''also''' responsible for the following when drilling operations are performed under technical supervision of district personnel.

'''(a)''' Requesting necessary drilling equipment from the State Construction and Materials Engineer.

'''(b)''' Planning the work.

'''(c)''' Logging and classification of material, selection of samples, etc.

'''(d)''' Directing the disposal of cores and samples.

===320.3.1.2 Construction and Materials Division===
The '''State Construction and Materials Engineer''' is responsible for furnishing the general supervision of equipment, operators, and crews. These responsibilities are discharged through the Geotechnical Section under the general supervision of the Geotechnical Director, the Drilling Superintendent, and the Drilling Supervisor.

The '''Drilling Supervisor''' is responsible for the field supervision of drilling operations, operators, and crews. While not physically present on each job, if needed, the Drilling Supervisor can be contacted through the Geotechnical Section.

The '''Operator''' is responsible for the operation and field maintenance of the equipment. No one except the operator or a member of the crew under the supervision of the operator shall operate the equipment. It is the responsibility of the operator to comply with all [[:Category:132 Safety|safety procedures]].

Certain drilling functions, such as [[320.4 Procedure for Final Sounding|final soundings]] for structures, special [[320.5 Foundation Investigations|foundation investigation]], etc. are performed under technical supervision of the '''Geotechnical Section''' or other sections of the Construction and Materials Division.

==320.3.2 Procedure==
===320.3.2.1 Drilling Request===
[[media:751.1.2.20 Request Jun 2018.xlsx|Request for Final Soundings for Structures Form]] shall be used by the district for requesting drilling services from the Construction and Materials Division.

Preliminary arrangements by telephone with the Geotechnical Section are encouraged; however, all preliminary arrangements shall be confirmed in writing, using FAX if desired. Upon receipt of a request, the Drilling Superintendent will assign the required personnel and equipment. The drilling personnel will report to the District Construction and Materials Engineer's Office, unless other arrangements have been made, for instructions as to the location and type of work to be performed. The District Geologist or District Soils and Geology Technologist normally is in charge of the field explorations.

Producer requests for drilling services for material survey exploration purposes will not be approved since commercial drilling services are readily available throughout the state. Requests for drilling for material survey exploration from within the department will be considered and approved on an individual basis.

===320.3.2.2 Hazardous Wastes===
Drilling of buried hazardous wastes requires specialized training, equipment, and decontamination facilities not presently available to the department's drill crews.

Drilling shall not be performed in any area known to contain hazardous wastes. If suspected hazardous materials are inadvertently encountered, the following steps are to be followed:

'''1.''' Suspend drilling and evacuate the area immediately until a determination can be made as to the nature of the material encountered.

'''2.''' Promptly seek medical attention for any personnel experiencing ill effects from exposure to suspect materials.

'''3.''' Notify supervisory personnel as soon as possible after steps 1 and 2 have been taken.

'''4.''' Notify Risk Management as soon as possible. Normally the supervisory personnel will handle this, but it should be clarified in step 3.

Drilling may, however, be permitted in areas contaminated with substances which might be environmentally undesirable, but which are not inherently hazardous if handled with care. Examples include certain petroleum products spilled or leaking from storage tanks, brine plumes from salt stockpiles, or leaking municipal or residential sewage lines. If there is any question about the safety of drilling in any such site, approval should first be obtained from the Geotechnical Director, the Drilling Superintendent, or the Drilling Supervisor. In all cases, full disclosure shall be made to all concerned personnel as to the nature of any suspected contaminant and appropriate protective clothing and decontamination procedures shall be used.

[[Category:320 Soils and Geology]]

File:751.1.2.20 Request Jun 2018.xlsx

2018-06-27T15:08:12Z

EPGsysop:

Category:101 Standard Forms

2018-06-27T15:07:57Z

EPGsysop: /* Bridge */ Per BR, clarified Request for Soil Properties Form A in "Request for Final Soundings for Structures" Form

[[Image:101.jpg|520px|right]]

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:2px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="520px" align="right"
|-
|EPG articles are not referenced as "sections" but as EPG XXX.X to avoid confusion with MoDOT specs (which are contractually binding).
|}
== ==
Standard forms organized by functional unit are accessible from this page. '''The files accessible by the links below are identical to those accessed through Word, Excel or other software application by MoDOT employees.''' Many of these file links are also contained in Engineering Policy Guide articles that refer to the forms.

==Bridge==
*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/BR/Bridge%20Division%20Memo.dot Bridge Division Memo]

*[[media:101 Bridge Hydraulics Report.docx|Bridge Hydraulics Report]]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/BR/Change%20Order.dot Change Order]
<div id="Constructability Questioinnaire"></div>

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/BR/Constructability%20Questionnaire.dot Constructability Questioinnaire]

*[[media:101 Culvert Hydraulics Report.docx|Culvert Hydraulics Report]]
[[image:101 Bridge.jpg|right|150px]]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/131.1_Design_Exception.docx Design Exception Information]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/BR/Design%20Except%20to%20District.dot Design Except to District]

*[[media:101 Design Layout Box 2014.docx|Design Layout (Box)]]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/BR/Design%20Layout%20(Grade).dot Design Layout (Grade)]

*[[media:101 Design Layout Stream 2014.docx|Design Layout (Stream)]]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/BR/Design%20Layout%20(Wall).dot Design Layout (Wall)]
<div id="Floodplain Development Permit/Application"></div>

*[[media:101 Floodplain Development Permit Application May 2018.pdf|Floodplain Development Permit/Application]]

*[[media:101 Floodplain Development Permit To District Cover Letter.docx|Floodplain Development Permit To District Cover Letter]]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/BR/Layout%20to%20FHWA.dotx Layout to FHWA]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/BR/Layout%20to%20Railroad.dot Layout to Railroad]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/BR/Missouri-Illinois%20Border%20Bridge%20Clearinghouse%20Form.dot Missouri-Illinois Border Bridge Clearinghouse Form]

*[[media:101 No Rise Certificate 2018.pdf|No-Rise Certificate]]

*[[media:751.1.2.20 Request Jun 2018.xlsx|Request for Final Soundings for Structures Form]]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/BR/Telefax.dot Telefax]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/BR/Transmittal%20Letter.dot Transmittal Letter]

*[[media:131.1.7 Vertical Clearance Design Exception Coordination with SDDCTEA.pdf|Vertical Clearance Design Exception Coordination with SDDCTEA]]

==Construction and Materials==
*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/30_Day_Reminder_Final_Invoice_Letter.dotx 30 Day Reminder Final Invoice Letter]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/60_Day_Final_Acceptance_Letter.dotx 60 Day Final Acceptance Letter]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/AC_Index_Price_Adjustment_Hot_Mix_Asphalt_SY.xlsx AC Index Price Adjustment – Hot mix asphalt (per SY)]
[[image:101CM.jpg|right|150px]]
*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/AC_Index_Price_Adjustment_Hot_Mix_Asphalt_Ton.xlsx AC Index Price Adjustment – Hot mix asphalt (per Ton)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/AC_Index_Price_Adjustment_Seal_Coat.xlsx AC Index Price Adjustment – Sealcoat]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/AC_Index_Price_Adjustment_UBAWS_Hot_Mix_and_Membrane.xlsx AC Index Price Adjustment – UBAWS Hot Mix and Membrane]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/AC_Index_Price_Adjustment_Undersealing.xlsx AC Index Price Adjustment – Undersealing]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/ADA_Checklist.dotx ADA Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Aggregate_Base_Random_Locations.xlsm Aggregate Base Random Locations]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/As_Built_Final_Plans_Checklist_SL_District.dotx As Built Plans Checklist - SL District]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Asbestos_Bulk_Sample_Bridge_CL_EL_5.dotx Asbestos Bulk Sample Bridge CL EL 5]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Asbestos_Bulk_Sample_Parcel_CL_EL_5.dotx Asbestos Bulk Sample Parcel CL EL 5]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Asbestos_Survey_Report_T746_T747_T748_C760.dotx Asbestos Survey Report - All Suspect ACM (Form T746), Nonfriable ACM (Form T747) and All Materials (Form T748)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Asphalt_Core_Spreadsheet.xlsx Asphalt Core Spreadsheet]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Asphalt_Mix_Design.xlsm Asphalt Mix Design]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Asphalt_Random_Locations.xlsm Asphalt Random Locations]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Asphalt_Roadway_Report.xlsm Asphalt Roadway Report]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Bridge_Bearings.xlsx Bridge Bearings]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Bridge_Clearance_Report_C239A.dotx Bridge Clearance Report (C-239A)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CO/Bridge%20Fabrication%20Report.dot Bridge Fabrication Report]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Change%20Order.XLS Change Order]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/27_Job_Site_Bulletin_Board_Checklist_fillable.pdf Checklist of the jobsite posters]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/CUF_Determination_Form.pdf Commercially Useful Function (CUF) Determination Form]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Compressive%20Strength%20for%20Forney.xls Compressive Strength for Forney]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Concrete%20Daily%20Inspection%20Report%20C-681.xls Concrete Daily Inspection Report, C-681]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Concrete_Cylinder_Sample_Sent_to_Central_Lab.doc Concrete Cylinder Sample Sent to Central Lab]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Concrete_Roadway_Report.dotx Concrete Roadway Report]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Contingent_Item_Price_Check.dotx Contingent Item Price Check]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Contractor_Performance_Evaluation_Letter.dotx Contractor Performance Evaluation Letter]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Contractor_Performance_Evaluation_Signature_Page.dotx Contractor Performance Evaluation Signature Page]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/C9_Daily_Utility_Report.dotx Daily Utility Report (C-9).dot]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Dimensions%20To%20Tons%20Converter.xlsx Dimensions To Tons Converter]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/EEO_Checklist.dotx EEO Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/EEO_Checklist.dotx Fence Removal Notice]

*[http://ghdcogwp01/c10/cgi-bin/cognosisapi.dll?b_action=cognosViewer&ui.action=run&ui.object=%2fcontent%2ffolder%5b%40name%3d%27SiteManager%20Reporting%27%5d%2ffolder%5b%40name%3d%27Headquarters%27%5d%2ffolder%5b%40name%3d%27Contract%20-Administration%27%5d%2freport%5b%40name%3d%27C239_Final_Acceptance_Report%27%5d&ui.name=C239_Final_Acceptance_Report&run.outputFormat=PDF&run.prompt=true&ui.backURL=%2fc10%2fcgi-bin%2fcognosisapi.dll%3fb_action%3dxts.run%26m%3dportal%2fcc.xts%26m_folder%3di734C7F8180CF4B9BA373FD704584E006 Final Acceptance Report (C-239), Cognos Report]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Final_Acceptance_C_239.pdf Final Acceptance Report (C-239), pdf version]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Final_Plans_Certification.dotx Final Plans Certification]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Final_Plans_Checklist.dotx Final Plans Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/C13_Final_Utility_Report.dotx Final Utility Report (C-13)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Force_Account_Spreasheet.xlsx Force Account Spreadsheet]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Form%20M-45%20Bitumin%20Distributor%20Calibration.doc Form M-45 Bitumin Distributor Calibration]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Fuel_Adjustment_Calculation.xlsx Fuel Adjustment Calculation]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Inspectors_Pay_Qty_Report_IPQR.dotx Inspectors Pay Qty Report (IPQR)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Internal_MoDOT_Product_Form.dotx Internal MoDOT Product Form]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/IRI_Inertial_Profiler_Report_with_Bonus.xlsm IRI Inertial Profiler Report with Bonus]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/JOC_2016_Rail_Cable_Fence_Spreadsheet.xlsx JOC 2016 Rail Cable Fence Spreadsheet]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/JOC_2017_Rail_Cable_Fence_Spreadsheet.xlsx JOC 2017 Rail Cable Fence Spreadsheet]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/JOC_Bridge_Repair_Spreadsheet.xlsm JOC Bridge Repair Spreadsheet]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/JOC_Lighting_Repair.xlsx JOC Lighting Repair]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/JOC_Microsurfacing_Spreadsheet.xlsx JOC Microsurfacing Spreadsheet]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/JOC_Pavement_Repair_Spreadsheet.xlsm JOC Pavement Repair Spreadsheet]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Milestone_Worksheet.dotx Milestone Worksheet]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Mobile_Mixer_Calibration.xlsx Mobile Mixer Calibration]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Mobile_Mixer_Verification_Sheet.dotx Mobile Mixer Verification Sheet]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Nuclear_Density_C709ND.dotx Nuclear Density (C-709ND)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Nuclear_Density_of_Plastic_Portland_Cement_Concrete_C_710ND.dotx Nuclear Density of Plastic Portland Cement Concrete (C-710ND)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Order_Record.dotx Order Record (C-259)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Outlier%20Analysis.xls Outlier Analysis]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Pavement_Type_Selection_Submittal.dotx Pavement Type Selection Submittal Information (PTS Submittal Form)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Payroll_Log.xltx Payroll Log Form]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Pile%20Driving%20Chart2.xls Pile Driving Chart]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Pile_Driving_Data.dotx Pile Driving Data]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Pore_Pressure_Report_Type_A.dotx Pore Pressure Report - Type A]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Pore_Pressure_Report_Type_B.dotx Pore Pressure Report - Type B]

<div id="PreCon Letter - Federal No Trainees"></div>
*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/PreCon_Letter_Federal.dotx PreCon Letter - Federal]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/PreCon_Letter_State.dotx PreCon Letter - State]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Prestress_Deficiency_Report.dotx Prestress Deficiency Report (1029-01)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Price_Verification.xlsx Price Verification]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Railroad_Crossing_Inspection.dotx Railroad Crossing Inspection]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/RE_Letterhead.dotx RE Letterhead]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Retroreflectivity_Calculation.xlsm Retroreflectivity Calculation]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Retroreflectometer_Request.xlsx Retroreflectometer Request]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Retroreflectometer_Results.xlsm Retroreflectometer Results]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/RM_Aggregate_Scale_Calibration_200.dotx RM Aggregate Scale Calibration - 200]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/RM_Aggregate_Scale_Calibration_300.dotx RM Aggregate Scale Calibration - 300]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/RM_Aggregate_Scale_Calibration_350.dotx RM Aggregate Scale Calibration - 350]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/RM_Air_Dispenser_Calibration.dotx RM Air Dispenser Calibration]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/RM_Cement_Scale_Calibration_150.dotx RM Cement Scale Calibration - 150]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/RM_Cement_Scale_Calibration_175.dotx RM Cement Scale Calibration - 175]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/RM_Cement_Scale_Calibration_200.dotx RM Cement Scale Calibration - 200]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/RM_Concrete_Systems_Form.dotx RM Concrete Systems Form]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/RM_Equipment_Calibrated_and_Verified_Form.dotx RM Equipment Calibrated and Verified Form]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/RM_Truck_Mixer_Information_Form.dotx RM Truck Mixer Information Form]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/RM_Water_Calibration.dotx RM Water Calibration]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/RoCap_Test_Form_Long_Bolts.dotx RoCap Test Form - Long Bolts]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/RoCap_Test_Form_Short_Bolts.dotx RoCap Test Form - Short Bolts]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Semi_Annual_Labor_Compliance_Report.dotx Semi-annual Labor Compliance Report]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Semi_Final_Inspection_C_236.pdf Semi-Final Inspection (C-236)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Sitemanager_Contractor_Payment_Schedule.pdf Sitemanager Contractor Payment Schedule]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Standard%20Compaction%20Test%20Blank.xls Standard Compaction Test Blank]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Survey%20Calculator.xlsx Survey Calculator]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Tank%20Capacity%202.0.xls Tank Capacity]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/CR1_Wage_Rate_Interview.pdf Wage Interview (Form CR-1)]

*[http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/TR/mo/travinfoitsworkzonemanagment/workzones/Shared%20Documents/Inspections/WorkZone_Inspection-form%202014.pdf Work Zone Inspection Form]

===Forms for Contractor Use ===
====Construction and Contractor Related====

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Blank_2AA_Sheet.pdf 2AA Sheet – Blank]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Example_2AA_Sheet.pdf 2AA Sheet – Example]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Affidavit_for_Compliance_with_Prevailing_Wage.pdf Affidavit for Compliance with Prevailing Wage Law]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Contractors_Affidavit_C-242.pdf Contractor's Affidavit Regarding Settlement of Claims (C-242)]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Contractor_Questionnaire.pdf Contractor Questionnaire] (to bid contracts less than $2,000,000)

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/DBE_Contractor_Project_Trucker_Equipment_List_Form.pdf DBE Contractor Project Trucker Equipment List Form]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/DBE_Contractor_Subcontractor_Project_Trucker_Form_Instructions.pdf DBE Contractor Subcontractor Project Trucker Form Instructions]

:* [[media:101 DBE Identification Submittal Form.pdf|DBE Identification Submittal Form]]

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/Lead_Abatement_MODOT_Contractor_Informational_Packet.pdf Lead Abatement MoDOT Contractor Informational Packet]

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/Lead_Abatement_MODOT_FA_Project_Notification.pdf Lead Abatement MoDOT FA Project Notification]

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/Lead_Abatement_MODOT_Project_Notification.pdf Lead Abatement MoDOT Project Notification]

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/Lead_Abatement_MODOT_Project_Re_Notification.pdf Lead Abatement MoDOT Project Re-Notification]

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/Lead_Abatement_Program_Contact_Info.pdf Lead Abatement Program Contact Info]

:* [http://eprojects/Templates/MODOT_Workforce_JSP_Cummulative_Workforce_Hours_Report.xlsx MoDOT Workforce JSP Cumulative Workforce Hours Report]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/MoDOT_Workforce_Pre_Construction_Diversity_Plan_Report.xlsx MoDOT Workforce Pre-Construction Diversity Plan Report]

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/OJT_1_Trainee_Notification.pdf OJT-1, Trainee Notification]

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/OJT_2_Contractor_Monthly_Training_Report.pdf OJT-2, Contractor Monthly Trainee Report]

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/OJT_3_Training_Completion.pdf OJT-3, Training Completion]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/OJT_4_Trainee_Contact.pdf OJT-4, Trainee Contact]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/OJT_5_Discrimination_Complaint.pdf OJT-5, Discrimination Complaint]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/OJT_6_Final_Trainee_Summary.pdf OJT-6, Training Summary]

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/Prequalification_Questionnaire.pdf Prequalification Contractor Questionnaire] (to bid a contract of any size)

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/Request_to_Subcontract_C_220.pdf Request to Subcontract Work (C-220)]

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/Subcontractor_Certification_Regarding_Affirmative_Action.pdf Subcontractor Certification Regarding Affirmative Action]

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/Value_Engineering_Proposal_C_104.doc Value Engineering Change Proposal (C-104)]

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/Wage_Flow_Chart_for_Federal_Jobs.pdf Wage Flowchart for Federal Jobs – Precon]

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/Wage_Flow_Chart_for_State_Jobs.pdf Wage Flowchart for State Jobs – Precon]

:* [http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/Waste_Disposal_Agreement.pdf Waste Disposal Agreement]

====Materials Related====
:*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/AsphPlantInspCumulative.xls Asphalt Inspection Worksheet Cumulative Gradation]

:*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/AsphPlantInspNonCumulative.xls Asphalt Inspection Worksheet Non-Cumulative Gradation]

:*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/PipeShippingReportForm2.pdf CMP, RCP, Precast Drainage Units and Precast Box Culvert Shipping Report Form]

:*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Concrete%20Mix%20Design%20Submittal%20Form.xls Concrete Mix Design Submittal Form]

:*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Missouri%20CoreLok%20Aggregate%20Workbook.xls CoreLok Aggregate Workbook]

:*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/GS013F2.pdf Fabricator’s PAL Receival Form]

:*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/NewProductEvaluationForm.pdf New Product Evaluation Form]

:*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/GS013F4.pdf PAL Program Inclusion Certifications and Guarantee Statement]

:*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/Producer_Supplier_List.pd Producer/Supplier List]

:*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/PipeShippingReportForm_Thermoplastic.pdf PVC & HDPE Pipe Shipping Report Form]

:*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Request_to_Transfer_Inspected_Matl.pdf Request for Transfer of Inspected Materials]

:*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/GS013F3.pdf Shipper’s PAL Transmittal Form]

====Posters, Federal Aid====

Please refer to [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=Category:110_State_and_Federal_Wage_Rates_and_Other_Requirements#Required_Notices_and_Posters EPG 110.2 Federal-Aid Projects, Required Notices and Posters].

====Posters, State Aid====

Please refer to [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=Category:110_State_and_Federal_Wage_Rates_and_Other_Requirements#Required_Notices_and_Posters EPG 110.2 Federal-Aid Projects, Required Notices and Posters].

====Utility or Right of Way Related====

:*[http://www.modot.mo.gov/asp/intentToWork.shtml Notice of Intent to Perform Work Process]

:*[https://www6.modot.mo.gov/ElectronicPermitting/ElectronicPermitting.html# Permit for Work on Right of Way]

===Quick Reference Guides (QRGs) [[image:bulldozer.jpg|20px]]===

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Change_Order_Codes.doc Change Order Codes]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Change_Order_reports.docx Change Order Reports]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Change_Orders_zero_dollar.docx Change Orders - Zero Dollar]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Change_Orders.docx Change Orders]
<div id="Change Orders – Mobilization and Contract Bond"></div>
:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Change_Orders_Mobilization_and_Contract_Bond.docx Change Orders – Mobilization and Contract Bond]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Change_Orders_Time_Adjustment.docx Change Orders – Time Adjustment]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Change_Orders_Value_Engineering.doc Change Orders – Value Engineering]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Check_for_Current_Version_of_SiteManager.doc Check for Current Version of SiteManager]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Concrete_Cylinder_Sample_Sent_to_Central_Lab.doc Concrete Cylinder Sample Sent to Central Lab]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Concrete_mix_design_creation.doc Concrete Mix Design Creation]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Consent_Decree_Closeout.pdf Consent Decree Close Out Procedure]
<div id="Land Disturbance Deficiency"></div>

:* [[media:101 Land Disturbance Deficiency QRG.pdf|Consent Decree Deficiencies – Halting, Un-halting, Resolving (Land Disturbance Deficiency)]]

:* [http://sharepoint/sites/de/epg/Lists/EPGResponse/Attachments/527/Consent%20Decree%20Inspections.pdf Consent Decree Erosion Reporting]

:* [http://sharepoint/sites/de/epg/Lists/EPGResponse/Attachments/639/Consent%20Decree%20Initial%20Setup.pdf Consent Decree Initial Setup]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Contract_Adjustments.docx Contract Adjustments]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Contract_Master_List.docx Contract Master List]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Contract_Finalization.doc Contract Finalization]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Contractor_Pay_Estimates.docx Contractor Pay Estimates]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/CRE20_Contractor_Reoporting_Excel2Oracle.docx CRE2O - Contractor Reporting Excel2Oracle]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/CRE20_QA_Asphalt_Guide.docx CRE2O QA Asphalt Guide]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Daily_Work_Reports.docx Daily Work Reports]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Diaries.docx Diaries]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Digital_Signature_for_Adobe_Reader_DC_or_Pro_DC.docx Digital Signature for Adobe Reader DC or Pro DC]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Disposition_Remarks_for_PAL_Materials.doc Disposition Remarks for PAL Materials]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Emergency_Contacts.docx Emergency Contacts]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Equipment_Rental_Rates_online.doc Equipment Rental Rates from the Blue Book]
<div id=" Equipment Verification Samples "></div>
:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Equipment_Verification_Samples.docx Equipment Verification Samples]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Estimate_Based_Documentation_Records.doc Estimate Based Documentation Records]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Filtering_a_SiteManager_Pick_List.doc Filtering a SiteManager Pick List]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/How_to_Use_Cognos_Reports.docx How to Use Cognos Reports]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Job_Order_Contracts.docx Job Order Contracts]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Key_Dates.docx Key Dates]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Line_Item_Adjustments.docx Line Item Adjustments]
<div id="Liquidated Damage Adjustments"></div>

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Liquidated_Damage_Adjustments.docx Liquidated Damage Adjustments]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Milestones.docx Milestones]
<div id="Moving Files from SharePoint to CIA"></div>

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/PAL_Plant_Inspection_and_Record.docx PAL Plant Inspection and Record]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/SL_Reason_Codes_for_Time_Extension_Change_Orders.doc SL District Reason Codes for Time Extension Change Orders]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/SL_Signal_Maintenance.docx SL District Signal Maintenance by Contractor Key Dates]
<div id=" Sample Record General Information "></div>
:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Sample_Record_General.docx Sample Record General Information]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Sample_Record_of_DEC_Inspection.doc Sample Record of DEC Inspection]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Sample_Record_of_Soil_Density_Inspection.doc Sample Record of Soil Density Inspection]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Sample_Record_of_Visual_Inspection.doc Sample Record of Visual Inspection]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Sampling_Checklist.docx Sampling Checklist]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Stockpiled_Materials.doc Stockpiled Materials]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Subcontracts.docx Subcontracts]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/SuperPave_Adjustments.doc SuperPave Adjustments]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Terminal_Services-Remote_Desktop_Connection.docx Terminal Services/Remote Desktop Connection]

:* [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Vendor_Master_List.doc Vendor Master List]

==Design==
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:15px; border:1px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
|-
|'''[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/d-sheets.htm Microstation D-Sheets]'''
|-
|'''Signing'''
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/D-28.doc D-28], D-29 through D-34
|-
|'''Signals'''
|-
|D-37A through D-37d, D-38 through D-38e
|-
|'''Typical Sections'''
|-
|D-49 through D-70
|-
|'''Miscellaneous'''
|-
|D-71
|}
===Bridge===
*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/Environmental/404%20Permits.dot 404 Permits]

*[[media:747 Bridge Survey Checklist 2018.doc|Bridge Survey Checklist]]

*[[media:747 Bridge Survey Location Request.docx|Bridge Survey Location Request]]

*[[media:747 Bridge Survey Report April 2018.docx| Bridge Survey Report Form]]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Copy%20of%20751.1.3.5_Structural_Rehabilitation_Checklist.xlsm Structural Rehabilitation Checklist (Excel)]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/BR/Vertical%20Clearance%20Design%20Exception%20Coordination%20with%20SDDCTEA%20Form.doc Vertical Clearance Design Exception Coordination with SDDCTEA]

===Checklist===
*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Design%20Progress%20Check%20List.docx Design Progress Check List]

*[[media:D-12 June 6 2018.pdf|District Final Design Checklist - D-12]]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Preliminary%20Plans%20Check%20List.dot Preliminary Plans Check List]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/124_Project_Reviewing_Checklist.docx Project Reviewing Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Checklist/Right%20of%20Way%20Check%20List.dot Right of Way Check List]

===Computer===
*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Computer/Design%20Computer%20Files%20&%20Drawings%20Log%20Sheet%20-%20D-97.dot Design Computer Files & Drawings Log Sheet - D-97]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Computer/MicroStation%20Computer%20Drawings%20Log%20Sheet%20-%20D96.dot MicroStation Computer Drawings Log Sheet - D96]

===Contracts===
*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/BiddingContract/District%20Award.dot District Award]

*[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/documents/ComputerDeliverableContractPlans.pdf Computer Deliverable Contract Plans 2005]

*[http://wwwi/intranet/cc/contracts.asp?f=DE&nav=modot Consultant Services Contract - State Funded (MoDOT Users)]

*[http://wwwi/intranet/cc/contracts.asp?f=DE&nav=modot De1]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/BiddingContract/DE11_Municipal_Agreement.doc DE11]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Sample%20Scope%20of%20Services%20-%20Location%20and%20Environment.dot Sample Scope of Services - Location and Environment]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Sample%20Scope%20of%20Services%20Design.dot Sample Scope of Services Design]

===Design Forms===
*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/3R%20CONCEPTUAL%20STUDY%20REPORT.dot 3R Conceptual Study Report]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/4R%20PAVEMENT%20REHABILITATION%20ANALYSIS%20DATA%20AND%20CONCEPTUAL%20STUDY%20REPORT.dot 4R Pavement Rehabilitation Analysis Data and Conceptual Study Report]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/Aerial%20Mosiac%20Submittal%20for%20Recon%20Study.dot Aerial Mosiac Submittal for Recon Study]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/Commission%20Backup%20Form%20Blank.dot Commission Backup Form Blank]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/Commission%20Backup%20Form%20Instructions.dot Commission Backup Form Instructions]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Conceptual%20Study%20Report.dot Conceptual Study Report]

*[[media:134.2.2.5.1 May 2017.doc|Consultant Rating Form]]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/Cultural%20Resource%20Assessment%20Letter.dot Cultural Resource Assessment Letter]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/D-28.doc D-28 Sign Design Order Form]

*[[media:131.1 Design Exception.docx|Design Exception Information]]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/Equipment%20and%20Materials%20List.dot Equipment and Materials List]

*[[media:Form 806.8.2.pdf|Form 806.8.2, Project-Specific SWPPP Information]]

*[[media:Form D21 2018.pdf|Highway Lighting Warrants D21]]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/Inquiry%20Report.dot Inquiry Report]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/EPG/JSP-Formatting-Guide.doc Job Special Provision Formatting Instructions]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Location%20Study%20Report.dot Location Study Report]

* [[media:M-40 2013.docx|M-40 Request for Drilling Services]]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Pavement%20Distress%20Log%20Form%20-%20Asphalt%20-%2011x17.dot Pavement Distress Log Form - Asphalt - 11x17]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Pavement%20Distress%20Log%20Form%20-%20Concrete%2011x17.dot Pavement Distress Log Form - Concrete 11x17]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Pavement%20Repair%20Log.dot Pavement Repair Log]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Preliminary%20Plans%20Proposal%20Review.dot Preliminary Plans Proposal Review]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Preliminary%20Signal%20Plan%20Submittal.dot Preliminary Signal Plan Submittal]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/PROJECT%20ASSIGNMENTS%20AND%20COMPLETION%20DATES.dot Project Assignments and Completion Dates]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/Project%20Data%20for%20BAMS.dot Project Data for BAMS]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/Project%20Initialization%20Estimate%20Form.dot Project Initialization Estimate Form]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/EPG/JSP-Formatting-Guide.doc Roadway Job Special Provision Formatting Instructions]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/EPG/Roadway_JSP_Templet.doc Roadway Job Special Provision Template]

*[[media:134.2.2.2 Nov 2017.docx|Submittal to Professional Services Committee]]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/Suggested%20Revision%20to%20a%20CADD%20Standard.dot Suggested Revision to a CADD Standard]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/Test-Cultural%20Resource%20Assessment%20Letter.dot Test-Cultural Resource Assessment Letter]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/Traffic%20Signal%20Warrants,%20Form%20D22.dot Traffic Signal Warrants, Form D22]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/Utility%20Print%20Submittal%20Letter.dot Utility Print Submittal Letter]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-DEForms/Utility%20Print%20Submittal%20letter_Revised%20Plans.dot Utility Print Submittal letter_Revised Plans]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/WORK%20DAY%20STUDY%20-%20124.dot Work Day Study - 124]

===[http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=Category:134_Engineering_Professional_Services#134.1.3_Consultant_Qualification Engineering Professional Services]===

===Environmental and Cultural===
*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/Environmental/Categorial%20Exclusion%20Form.dot Categorical Exclusion Form]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Env&Cultural/Categorial%20Exclusion%20Form.dot Cultural Resource Assessment Letter]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Env&Cultural/Cultural%20Resource%20Structure%20Log.dot Cultural Resource Structure Log]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Env&Cultural/DNR%20Land%20Survey%20Request.dot DNR Land Survey Request]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Env&Cultural/Farmland%20Conversion%20IMpact%20Rating%20(Site).dot Farmland Conversion Impact Rating (Corridor)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Env&Cultural/Farmland%20Conversion%20Impact%20Rating%20(Corridor).dot Farmland Conversion Impact Rating (Site)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Env&Cultural/Fig%202-06-9,%20Farmland%20Conversion%20Impact%20Rating.dot Fig 2-06-9, Farmland Conversion Impact Rating]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Env&Cultural/Initial%20Site%20Assessment%20Form.dot Initial Site Assessment Form]

*[https://www6.modot.mo.gov/EnvironmentalRequest/Pages/Login.aspx Request for Environmental Services (RES) Form]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/Environmental/127.1%20Instructions%20for%20the%20RES%20Form.docx Instructions for the RES Form]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/Environmental/127.1_Consultant_RES_form_instruction.docx Consultant information needed to fill out RES Form]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Env&Cultural/STRUCT.dot STRUCT]

===Hearings===
*[http://wwwi/intranet/cc/contracts.asp?f=DE&nav=modot Generic Meeting Sign-Up Sheet]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Notice%20of%20Formal%20Public%20Hearing.dot Notice of Formal Public Hearing]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Open-House%20Public%20Hearing.dot Open House Public Hearing]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Public%20Hearing%20Statement%20Form.dot Public Hearing Statement Form]

===Materials===
*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Materials/Hazardous%20Waste%20Removal%20Bid%20Information.dot Hazardous Waste Removal Bid Information]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Materials/Itemized%20Proposal%20-%20Demolition,%20Asbestos,%20UST%20Removal.dot Itemized Proposal - Demolition, Asbestos, UST Removal]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Materials%20Suppliers,%20Source%20and%20Location.dot Materials Suppliers, Source and Location]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Request%20for%20Asphalt%20Cement%20%25%20Grade.dot Request for Asphalt Cement % Grade]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Materials/Soil%20Info%20Request.dot Soil Info Request]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Materials/Soil%20Survey%20Request.dot Soil Survey Request]

===Photo===
*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Photo/Aerial%20Photography%20Requisition.dot Aerial Photography Requisition]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Photo/Microfilm-Print%20Billing%20Form.dot Microfilm-Print Billing Form]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Photo/Prints%20of%20Previous%20Photography%20Requistion.dot Prints of Previous Photography Requistion]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Photo/Request%20for%20Color%20Copies.dot Request for addition to flight program]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Photo/Request%20for%20addition%20to%20flight%20program.dot Request for Color Copies]

===Planning===
*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/ARAN%20Report%20Request.dot ARAN Report Request]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Conceptual%20Study%20Traffic%20Count%20Request.dot Conceptual Study Traffic Count Request]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Planning/Fis%20Formc.dot Fis Formc]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Turning%20Movement%20Traffic%20Count%20Request.dot Turning Movement Traffic Count Request]

===Right of Way===
*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE-ROW/Certification%20of%20Right%20of%20Way%20Plans%20for%20Condemnation%20Letter.dot Certification of Right of Way Plans for Condemnation Letter]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-ROW/Forthcoming%20RW%20Plan%20changes.dot Forthcoming RW Plan Changes]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-ROW/Preliminary%20Right%20of%20Way%20Estimate.dot Preliminary Right of Way Estimate]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-ROW/Right%20of%20Way%20Approval%20(Amended_Plans)%20Condemnation%20Required.dot Right of Way Approval (Amended Plans) Condemnation Required]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-ROW/Right%20of%20Way%20Plans%20Reviewed.dot Right of Way Plans Reviewed]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-ROW/Right%20of%20Way%20Plans%20to%20Dist%20RW%20Agent.dot Right of Way Plans to Dist RW Agent]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-ROW/RW%20Change%20Information%20for%20Microfilming.dot RW Change Information for Microfilming]

*[[media:236.13.15 2014 certification.docx|Certification Document]]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/RW/RW%20Plans%20Approval%20-%20Letter%20of%20Certification.dot RW Plans Approval - Letter of Certification]

===Scoping===
*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Bridge%20Checklist.dot Bridge Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Construction%20and%20Materials%20Checklist.dot Construction and Materials Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/104.6_Design_Checklist_Apr_26,_2012.doc Design Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Project%20Scoping%20Memorandum.dot Draft Project Scoping Memorandum]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Environmental%20Checklist.dot Environmental Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/FHWA%20Checklist.dot FHWA Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Maintenance%20Checklist.dot Maintenance Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Scoping/Major%20Project%20Scope%20or%20Estimate%20Change.dot Major Project Scope or Estimate Change]
[[image:101 survey.jpg|right|150px]]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Scoping/Non-Major%20Project%20Scope%20or%20Estimate%20Change.dot Non-Major Project Scope or Estimate Change]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Planning%20Checklist.dot Planning Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/104.6_Design_Liaison_Checklist.doc Design Liaison Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Project%20Estimate%20Quality%20Assurance%20Report.dot Project Estimate Quality Assurance Report]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/104.6_Project_Scoping_Checklist_Apr_26,_2012.doc Project Scoping Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Scoping/Project%20Scoping%20Memorandum.dot Project Scoping Memorandum]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Public%20Information%20and%20Outreach%20Checklist.dot Public Information and Outreach Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Railroad%20Checklist.dot Railroad Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Scoping/Right%20of%20Way%20Checklist.dot Right of Way Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/Traffic%20Checklist.dot Traffic Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Scoping/Utilities%20Checklist.dot Utilities Checklist]

===Survey===
*[[media:747 Bridge Survey Location Request.docx|Bridge Survey Location Request]]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Survey/Center%20Line%20Staking%20-%20Letter%20to%20Property%20Owner.dot Center Line Staking - Letter to Property Owner]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/CADD/Center%20Line%20Staking.dot Center Line Staking]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Survey/Permanent%20RW%20Marker%20Setting%20-%20letter%20to%20property%20owner.dot Permanent RW Marker Setting - letter to property owner]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Survey/Permanent%20RW%20Marker%20Settings.dot Permanent RW Marker Settings]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/CADD/238.2.18.2_Plat_Review_Checklist.pdf Form 238.2.18.2 Plat Review Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/CADD/Preliminary%20Surveying%20-%20letter%20to%20property%20owner%201.dot Preliminary Surveying - letter to property owner 1]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/CADD/Preliminary%20Surveying%20-%20letter%20to%20property%20owner.dot Preliminary Surveying - letter to property owner]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/CADD/Preliminary%20Surveying.dot Preliminary Surveying]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/CADD/238.2.17_Professional_Land_Surveyor_2013.doc Professional Land Surveyor Description Review Form]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/DE-Survey/RW%20Marker%20Setting.dot RW Marker Setting]

*[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/CADD/Survey%20Request%20Form.dot Survey Request Form]

==External Civil Rights==
*[[media:101 Contractor's Monthly New Employee Report.pdf|Contractor's Monthly New Employee Report]]

*[[media:101 Sample Company Workforce Diversity Job Special Provision Action Plan.docx|Sample Company Workforce/Diversity Job Special Provision Action Plan]]

*[[media:101 Workforce Pilot Program Employee Notification.pdf|Workforce Pilot Program Employee Notification]]

==Financial Services==
*[[media:235 Agreements Checklist.doc|Agreements Checklist]]

==Maintenance==
*[[media:101 Maintenance - Deer Death Report Form and Map.xls|Deer Death Report Form and Map (Excel)]]

*[http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/TR/mo/travinfoitsworkzonemanagment/workzones/Shared%20Documents/Inspections/WorkZone_Inspection-form%202014.pdf Work Zone Inspection Form]

===Chip Seal Forms===
*[http://wwwi/maintenance/Forms/App%20Adjust%20Form.pdf Application Adjustment Factor Form]
*[http://wwwi/maintenance/Forms/Traffic%20Eval%20Factor.pdf Traffic Evaluation Factor (TEF) for Asphalt Application Adjustment]

===Bridge Maintenance===
*[[media:101 Maintenance - blankinspreport.pdf|Blank Inspection Report]]
*[[media:101 Maintenance - bridgemaintenancerepairreport.xls|Bridge Maintenance Repair Report (Excel)]]
*[http://ghepg01/forms/BR/774_Cathodic_System_Evaluation.dotx Cathodic System Evaluation]
*[[media:101 Maintenance - CIF - Written form.dot|CIF (Critical Inspection Finding)]]
*[[media:101 Maintenance - Follow-up Action Required-Written form.doc|FAR (Follow-Up Action Required)]]
*[[media:101 Maintenance - maintmatlusage.xls|Maintenance Material Usage (Excel)]]
*[[media:101 Maintenance - Maintenance Recommendation Report.pdf|Maintenance Recommendation Report]]
*[[media:101 Maintenance - paintdatareportformblank.xls|Paint Data Report (Excel)]]
*[[media:101 Maintenance - Photo Log.xls|Photo Log Sheet (Excel)]]

===Snow & Ice Control===
*[[media:101 Maintenance - Snow and Ice Control Equipment Inventory.xls|Snow and Ice Control Equipment Inventory (Excel)]]
*[[media:101 Maintenance - Chemical Requirements.xls|Chemical Requirements (Excel)]]
*[[media:101 Maintenance - Salt Storage.xls|Salt Storage (Excel)]]

===Rest Areas===
*[[media:101 Maintenance - Rest Area Truck Parking.xls|Rest Area Truck Parking (Excel)]]
*[[media:101 Maintenance - REST AREA inspection_2005.doc|Rest Area Inspection]]

===Commuter Lots===
*[[media:101 Maintenance - Commuter Lot Inspection Form.xls|Commuter Lot Inspection (Excel)]]
*[[media:101 Maintenance - Commuter Lot Survey.pdf|Commuter Lot Survey]]

===Disasters===
*[[media:101 Maintenance - DDIR.xls|Detailed Damage Inspection Report (Excel)]]
*[[media:101 Maintenance - Non Federal Aid Route DDIR.xls|FEMA Detailed Damage Inspection Report (Excel)]]

===Performance Indicators===

===Pavement Management===

==Motor Carrier Services==
*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/MCS/Accounting%20Payment%20Error%20Notice.dot Accounting Payment Error Notice]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/MCS/IRP%20Altered%20Temporary.dot IRP Altered Temporary]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/MCS/IRP%20Outstanding%20Temporaries.dot IRP Outstanding Temporaries]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/MCS/IRP%20Surrendering%20Plates.dot IRP Surrendering Plates]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/MCS/IRP%20Suspension.dot IRP Suspension]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/MCS/IRP-IFTA%20Reject%20Letters.dot IRP-IFTA Reject Letters]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/MCS/MCS%20MoDOT%20Letterhead.dot MCS MoDOT Letterhead]

==Planning==
*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/MCS/MCS%20MoDOT%20Letterhead.dot MTFC Letterhead]

==Right of Way==
*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/RW%20Mortgage%20Analyzer.xlt RW Mortgage Analyzer (Excel)]
===General Information===
===Right of Way Organization and Personnel===
===Administration===

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%203_Administration/Acquisition%20Complete%20Cost%20Estimate%20Worksheet_Form%203-3_3B.dot Acquisition Complete Cost Estimate Worksheet_(Form 3-3_3B)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%203_Administration/Categorical%20Exclusion%20Review_Form%203-1_2.dot Categorical Exclusion Review_(Form 3-1_2)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%203_Administration/Request%20for%20Acquisition%20Authority_Form%203-6_10A.dot Request for Acquisition Authority_(Form 3-6_10A)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%203_Administration/Form%203-4_1A%20.dot Request for Federal Funding_Limited Acquisition Authority_(Form 3-4_1A)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%203_Administration/Form%203-4_1B.dot Request for Limited Acquisition Authority_(Form 3-4_1B)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%203_Administration/Form%203-4_2A.dot Request for Federal Funding_(Form 3-4_2A)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%203_Administration/Right%20of%20Way%20Cost%20Estimate%20Worksheet_Form%203-3_3A.dot Right of Way Cost Estimate Worksheet_(Form 3-3_3A)]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%203_Administration/Right%20of%20Way%20Cost%20Estimate_Form%203-3_3C.dotx Right of Way Cost Estimate_(Form 3-3_3C)]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%203_Administration/Form%203-4_1C.dot Safe and Sound Acquisition Authority Date (Form 3-4.1C)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%203_Administration/Supplemental%20Page_Form%203-3_3A.dot Supplemental Page_(Form 3-3_3A)]

===Description Writing and Titles===

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%204_Description%20Writing%20&%20Titles/Affidavit%20of%20Scriveners%20Error%20Form%204_6_4a.dot Affidavit of Scrivener's Error (Form 4-6.4a)]

===Property Management===

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%205_Property%20Management/ Internet Posting Request]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%205_Property%20Management/Property%20Inventory%20Record.dot Property Inventory Record]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%205_Property%20Management/Property%20Inventory%20Record%20Instructions.dot Property Inventory Record Instructions]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%205_Property%20Management/Real%20Estate%20Risk%20Assessment%20Form.pdf Real Estate Risk Assessment Form]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%205_Property%20Management/Realty%20Asset%20Sale%20Legal%20Opinion%20Memo.pdf Realty Asset Sale Legal Opinion Memo]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%205_Property%20Management/Form%20236.5.19a.dot Request for Excess Parcel Survey (Form 236.5.19a)]

===Appraisal and Appraisal Review===
===Negotiation===
===Relocation Assistance Program===

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%208_Relocation/Advance%20Increased%20Interest%20Payment%20Agreement.dot Advance Increased Interest Payment Agreement (Form 236.8.11.4(d)(2))]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%208_Relocation/Advance%20Replacement%20Housing%20and%20Increased%20Interest%20Pmt%20Agreement.dot Advance Replacement Housing and Increased Interest Payment Agreement (Form 236.8.11.4(d)(1))]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%208_Relocation/Condemnation%20Agreement%20Residential%20Property.dot Condemnation Agreement Residential Property (Form 236.8.9.3(e)(1))]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%208_Relocation/Form%20236.8.6.4.dot Relocation Report (Form 236.8.6.4)]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%208_Relocation/Form%20236_8_5_2.dot Relocatee Needs Questionnaire]

===Asbestos Abatement-Removal of Building Improvement===
===Right Of Way Condemnation===
===Mediation===
===Quality Assurance Reviews===
===Designing Right of Way Plans===
===Change in Route Status Report===
===Requests from Cities for Annexations===
===Outdoor Advertising===

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/ADMREVREQUEST.dot Administrative Review Request]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/ADV%20PROFILE%20REPORT1.DOT ADV Profile Report]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/Application%20for%20Outdoor%20Advertising%20Vegetation%20Permit.pdf Application for Outdoor Advertising Vegetation Permit]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/ILLEGAL%20COURTESY%20LTR2.DOT Courtesy Letter ("cannot be permitted")]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/ILLEGAL%20COURTESY%20LTR1.DOT Courtesy Letter ("possibly permitted")]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/CUTOUT%20EXTENSION.dot Cutout or Extension]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/NEW%20PERMIT.pdf New Permit]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/NEW%20ROUTE.pdf New Route]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/NOTE%20OF%20WITHDRAWAL.pdf Notice of Withdrawal (OAN-15)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/noticepropowner.dot Notice to Property Owner]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/NOTETOREMOVE3.dot Notice to Remove (NTR)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/NOTICESIGNOWNR.dot Notice to Sign Owner]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/NOTETOTERMNATE.dot Notice to Terminate (NTT)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/NOTETOVOID.dot Notice to Void (Release of Permit)]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/ODAPERMIT.dot Outdoor Advertising Permit]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/Outdoor%20Advertising%20Permit%20Application.pdf Outdoor Advertising Permit Application]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/BIENNIALPERMITCOVER.dot Outdoor Advertising Permit Cover Letter]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/PERMIT%20TRANSFER%20APPLICATION.pdf Permit Transfer Application]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/Unzoned%20Qualifying%20Business%20Checklist.dot Qualifying Business Checklist]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/RELEASELETTER.dot Release Letter]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/REJECTAPPCOVER.dot Rejection Letter for Outdoor Advertising Permit Application]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/scanning%20procedure.doc Scanning Procedures]

*[http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/SIGN%20STATUS.pdf Sign Status]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/Vegetation_Cost_Letter.dot Vegetation Cost Letter]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/REJECTVEG.dot Vegetation Rejection letter]

*[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/RW/Chapter%2016_Outdoor%20Advertising/VoidCover.dot Void Cover Letter]

===Junkyards===

* [http://ghepg01/forms/RW/Chapter%2017_Junkyards/Application%20for%20License%20to%20Maintain%20A%20Junkyard.pdf Application for License to Maintain a Junkyard]

===Local Public Agency Land Acquisition===

[[image:101 bottom.jpg|center|1025px]]

237.14 Electronic Design Data Delivery (BIM Deliverables)

2018-06-26T19:27:39Z

EPGsysop: /* 237.14.2.6 Civil Geometry Report */Per CADD, updated reference to document used to produce the Civil Geometry Report. The archaic "MoDOTCivilGeometry Report" was replaced.

[[image:237.14.jpg|right|180px|thumb|<center>'''Operator using GPS grading'''</center>]]
MoDOT requires the use of Bentley SS4 Power GEOPAK software for highway and bridge design. SS4 Power GEOPAK is based on a 3D workflow. Throughout the entire project design, MoDOT Design staff and design consultants shall produce Electronic Design Data using Bentley’s SS4 Power GEOPAK as defined in this section. Any conversion process from another CADD package to SS4 Power GEOPAK Electronic Design Data is not acceptable. Please refer to [[#237.14.5 Glossary of Terms|EPG 237.14.5 Glossary of Terms]] for the MoDOT definition of ''italicized terms'' as they apply to this document and the delivery of Electronic Design Data for MoDOT projects. Electronic Design Data requirements pertain to road design, bridge design and survey projects. These electronic deliverables are now referred to as Electronic Design Data (EDD). A subset of this information is then posted on the MoDOT [http://www.modot.org/business/contractor_resources/bid_opening_info/OpenLetting.shtml ''Online Plan Room''] for use by potential bidders.

==237.14.1 MoDOT and Consultant Electronic Design Data Requirements==

Consultants are required to deliver Electronic Design Data following the same requirements as MoDOT internally designed projects. Required consultant and MoDOT Electronic Design Data include all files used to generate the design. Files include but are not limited to:

:* Project Data Summary Report (.xlsx)
:* Survey report (.pdf)
:* Survey Coordinate file(.csv)
:* Survey file (.dgn)
:::- Existing surface(s) export (.xml)
:* Civil geometry file (.dgn and .xml)
:::- Alignment(s) & Profile(s) export (.xml)
:* Civil geometry report (.xlsx)
:* Corridor file(s) plus reference(.dgn)
:* Proposed Terrain(.dgn)
:::- Proposed surface export(.xml)
:* Plan sheets plus references (.dgn)
:* Signed Adobe Acrobat plan sheets ( .pdf)

==237.14.2 Specifications for Electronic Design Data ==
Electronic Design Data is required for all MoDOT and consultant designed projects, but varies by project type. (See Table 237.14.2 for requirements).

{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
|+ '''Table 237.14.2'''
! style="background:#BEBEBE"| !!style="background:#BEBEBE" colspan="3"|Required Electronic Design Data1
|-
!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Project Includes this Type of Electronic Design Data !!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Project Data Summary Report, Plan Sheets (.dgn) and Signed Sheets (.pdf)!!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Survey file (dgn), Survey Report, Coordinate File, Civil Geometry File and Report !!style="background:#BEBEBE"|Corridor File(s), Existing and Proposed Terrain Model Files
|-
|Cross Sections || Y|| Y|| Y
|-
|Plan Sheets with Civil Geometry|| Y|| Y|| n/a
|-
|Plan Sheets|| Y|| Optional|| n/a
|-
|colspan="4" align="left"|'''1''' All Electronic Design Data shall follow the file naming convention outlined in [[237.13 Contract Plan File Name Convention#237.13.2 Electronic Design Data|EPG 237.13.2 Electronic Design Data]].
|}

===237.14.2.1 Project Data Summary Report===
This Excel report, prepared by the designer, gives a summary of all Electronic Design Data files submitted with the project and is an important reference for MoDOT staff and contractors that may use the Electronic Design Data. This file contains specific project information and acts as table of contents with descriptions for all files submitted.

The [http://design.modot.mo.gov/CADD/Files/Project_Data_Summary_Report.xlsx Project Data Summary Report] shall be provided as a Microsoft Excel file (.xlsx).

===237.14.2.2 Survey Report ===
The [http://design.modot.mo.gov/CADD/Files/Electronic_Design_Data/Survey_Report.pdf Survey Report] is prepared by the project’s ''Professional Land Surveyor of Record''. It is used for documenting the ''project control'' metadata and the method in which the ''topography'' and terrain information is obtained for a project.

A [http://design.modot.mo.gov/CADD/Files/Electronic_Design_Data/Survey_Report_Example.pdf Survey Report Example] is available.

The Survey Report shall be provided as a Adobe Acrobat file (.PDF).

===237.14.2.3 Survey Coordinate File===
The comma delimited Survey Coordinate File is prepared by the project’s ''Professional Land Surveyor of Record'' and contains project '''control points'''. Please ensure that all control points share the '''same''' ''modified state plane coordinate system projection factor'' and ''vertical datum''. Include the projection factor and vertical datum in the survey report.

A [http://design.modot.mo.gov/CADD/Files/Electronic_Design_Data/Survey_Coordinate_File_Example.pdf Survey Coordinate File Example] is available.

The Survey Geometry File shall be provided in the following format:
:* Comma Separated Value file (.CSV) in the format: pt. no., n, e, z, descr.

===237.14.2.4 Survey (.dgn) file===
The existing surface and mapping is prepared by the ''Professional Land Surveyor of Record'' and is the basis for roadway design. Both the Existing Ground surface (stored as a SS4 Power GEOPAK terrain model) and the existing topography mapping is stored in the Power GEOPAK .dgn file. The terrain model is produced from ''traditional survey'' methods, ''aerial acquisition'', ''laser scanning'' or a combination of methods using appropriate MoDOT '''surface feature definitions'''. The project ''projection factor'' and ''vertical datum'' are documented in the Survey Report.

Survey data must be process through Bentley’s SS4 Power GEOPAK Survey Tool located in the Project Explorer > Survey tab.

The existing terrain model shall be submitted in the following formats:
:* Power GEOAPK file (.dgn)
:* LandXML'''1''' (.xml)
::: - Access is available to the video [http://design.modot.mo.gov/CADD/BentleyCivil/Terrain_Modeling/Exporting_Existing_Ground_Terrain_To_LandXML.wmv Creating the LandXML File (Exporting Existing Ground Terrain To LandXML)] .

:'''1''' '' MoDOT utilizes ''LiDAR'' to capture existing conditions; these are large files and may exceed the limit of LandXML file creation. If the file size is too large to export via LandXML 1.2, the existing ground surface must be broken into multiple sections. Please contact CADD Support for additional information.''

===237.14.2.5 Civil Geometry File (alignments and profiles)===
The Civil Geometry File, prepared by the designer, contains all ''horizontal and vertical alignments'' used in the development of the design. Horizontal alignment examples include: ''baselines'', ''special ditches'', etc. Vertical alignments include: baseline profiles, special ditch profiles, retaining wall profiles, etc. The Civil Geometry File should not contain any preliminary or unused alignments. All geometry contained in this file shall follow the [http://design.modot.mo.gov/CADD/Files/MoDOT_Linear_Feature_Naming_Convention.pdf file naming convention for the designed Linear Features] (i.e. Alignments and Profiles) found in the plans. A summary of all geometry shall be captured in the Civil Geometry Report.

The Civil Geometry File shall be provided in both of the following formats:
:* SS4 Power GEOPAK file (.dgn)
:::- LandXML (.xml)
::: - Access is available to the video [http://design.modot.mo.gov/CADD/BentleyCivil/Civil_Geometry/Geometry-to-XML_CC.wmv Creating the LandXML file (Geometry to XML CC)].

===237.14.2.6 Civil Geometry Report===
The [http://design.modot.mo.gov/CADD/Files/Civil_Geometry_Report.xlsx Civil Geometry Report], prepared by the designer, can be produced by using the style sheet report “MoDOTHorizontalandVerticalAlignmentReviewReport.xsl”. This report is available in the MoDOT SS4 Power GEOPAK ''workspace''. The Civil Geometry Report shall include all horizontal and vertical alignments that make up the project. (For example: roadway baselines and profiles, radius returns, special ditches, etc.).

Access is available to the video, [http://design.modot.mo.gov/CADD/BentleyCivil/Civil_Geometry/Electronic_Delieverables_H_V_Report_CC.wmv Creating the Civil Geometry Report], that shows the steps to assemble a Civil Geometry Report.

The Civil Geometry Report shall be provided in either of the following formats:
:* Microsoft Excel file (.xlsx)
:* Adobe Acrobat file (.PDF)

===237.14.2.7 Corridor File(s).dgn File===
Corridor files, prepared by the designer, consist of items such as ''templates'', ''corridors'', edges of pavement, shoulders, curbs, gutters, sidewalks, retaining walls or any other ''feature'' used in the dynamic generation of a ''3D model''. Multiple corridors are often required to model a ''roadway corridor''.

Corridor(s) shall be created in adequate detail to produce the following results:

:* Produce ''cross sections'' at ''template drop'' locations.
:* ''Earthwork quantities'' computed from the cross sections are satisfactory.
:* Pavement and shoulder elevations and locations are accurate.

The Corridor File(s) shall be provided as a SS4 Power GEOPAK file (.dgn).

===237.14.2.8 Proposed Terrain Model===
This terrain model, prepared by the designer, represents the entire ''proposed finished grade'' surface which includes but is not limited to ''fore slopes'', ''back slopes'', ditch bottoms, roadway surfaces, etc. It can be created using the MoDOT ''graphical filter'': “Design - Proposed Finished Grade“.

[[image:237.14.2.8.jpg|center|650px|thumb|<center>'''Example of Proposed Terrain Model'''</center>]]

Access is available to the video [http://design.modot.mo.gov/CADD/BentleyCivil/Terrain_Modeling/Using_MoDOT_Graphic_Filters.wmv Creating the Design - Proposed Finished Grade Terrain Model].

The Proposed Terrain Model shall be submitted in the following formats (when applicable based on type of project):
:* Power GEOPAK file (.dgn)
:* ssLandXML file (.xml)
:::- Access is available to the video [http://design.modot.mo.gov/CADD/BentleyCivil/Terrain_Modeling/Exporting_Proposed_Ground_Terrain_To_LandXML.wmv Creating the LandXML file].

===237.14.2.9 Plan Sheets plus References===
These SS4 Power GEOPAK files, prepared by the designer, are used to generate ALL signed plan sheet ''Adobe Acrobat'' ''contract documents''. Each sheet file must be provided with any associated reference files (.dgn, imagery, etc.) that are attached to produce the final signed plan sheet .pdf files.

The Plan Sheets plus References shall be provided as a SS4 Power GEOPAK file (.dgn).

===237.14.2.10 Signed Adobe Acrobat Plan Sheets===
These are ''Adobe Acrobat'' files, prepared by the designer and signed by the Project Manager, that represent the ''plan sheets'' created in SS4 Power GEOPAK. The Acrobat Files can be produced by MoDOT staff in bulk using the ''ProjectWise PDF Creation Tool''. Files created by this method are automatically placed in the appropriate ProjectWise location where they can be ''signed'' by the MoDOT Project Manager. Signed consultant contract documents will be uploaded to the appropriate ProjectWise location by the MoDOT Project Manager after delivery.

Access is available to the video [http://design.modot.mo.gov/CADD/Manuals/Raw_Manuals/ProjectWise/04_Make_PDF_Process_for_Contract_Plans.pdf ProjectWise “Make PDF Request” process for Highway Design Plans and Bridge Plans].

==237.14.3 Project Submittal ==

After design and project review is completed the Electronic Design Data must be organized and submitted to the ''Bidding and Contracts Section''.

===237.14.3.1 Preparation of Electronic Design Data===
The following steps must be performed so that projects can be advertised by the Bidding and Contracts section.

:* Ensure ''Adobe Acrobat'' ''plan sheets'' (.pdf) are complete and ''signed''.
:* Organize project files and eliminate unused SS4 Power GEOPAK data.
:::- Create Survey report (.pdf)
:::- Export Survey Coordinate file(.csv)
:::- Civil geometry file (.dgn)
::::: Export .xml file
:::- Export Civil geometry report (.xlsx)
:::- Corridor file(s) plus references (.dgn)
:::- Existing Terrain Model (.dgn and .xml)
:::- Proposed Terrain Model (.dgn and .xml)
:::- Plan sheets plus references (.dgn)
:* Create Project Data Summary Report (.xlsx)
:*Designer performs [http://design.modot.mo.gov/CADD/Files/Electronic_Design_Data_Checklist.xlsx ''Electronic Design Data Checklist'']

===237.14.3.2 Submittal of MoDOT Designed Projects===
All Electronic Design Data used in the development of the ''contract plans'' is stored in ProjectWise during all design, construction and post construction phases. A subset of Electronic Design Data is packaged in a file called Job#_EDD_info.zip, by the designer, for posting on the electronic plans room. The zip file is placed in the “Contract Plans” folder within ProjectWise at the time contract plans and other plan, specification and estimate (PS&E) documents are completed. The naming convention and other guidance for the creation of the zip file are provided in [[237.9 Submission of Plans and Supporting Documents|EPG 237.9 Submission of Plans and Supporting Documents]]. The MoDOT Project Manager has the responsibility to ensure all data is accurate and represents the contract plans as signed. Contractors are not provided all Electronic Design Data as specified below.

Files that are provided in the Job#_EDD_info.zip file:
:* Project Data Summary Report
:* Survey report
:* Coordinate file
:* Civil geometry (.dgn and .xml)
:* Corridor(s) file plus references (.dgn)
:* Existing Terrain Model (.dgn and .xml)
:* Proposed Terrain Model (.dgn and.xml)

Files that are NOT provided in the Job#_EDD_info.zip file:
:* All SS4 Power GEOPAK sheet drawings(.dgn). (i.e. plan sheet and cross section sheet drawings, etc.)
:* Unnecessary document and data files not required for bidding or construction.
:* Signed plan sheets and cross section sheets (.pdf).

===237.14.3.3 Submittal of Consultant Designed Projects: ===
Consultant Electronic Design Data is typically submitted to MoDOT via DVD or download. It is then uploaded by MoDOT by the Project Manager to ProjectWise and stored in the same location and project structure as any other MoDOT project. The delivered consultant SS4 Power GEOPAK files should be processed by MoDOT staff with the [https://library.modot.mo.gov/CADD/CADD_Programs/ProjectWise/Scan_for_Reference_Files_Wizard.pdf ''ProjectWise Ref Scan Tool''] so that all broken ''reference file'' links are repaired. The Electronic Design Data should be reviewed for completeness and manually checked for broken reference file links. Any problems should be resolved. Once all deliverables have been reviewed and accepted, the Project Manager then submits the Electronic Design Deliverables according to [[#237.14.3.1 Preparation of Electronic Design Data|EPG 237.14.3.1 Preparation of Electronic Design Data]] and [[#237.14.3.2 Submittal of MoDOT Designed Projects|EPG 237.14.3.2 Submittal of MoDOT Designed Projects]].

===237.14.3.4 Plans Room ===
MoDOT Bidding and Contracts has developed a web site to allow contractors and plans providers to easily download the bidding documents and Electronic Design Data. The Electronic Design Data zip file as well as the signed Adobe Acrobat plan sheets (.pdf) are accessed by Bidding and Contracts staff using ProjectWise and then will upload to the online plans room. Other non-CADD contract documents are accessed by the Bidding and Contracts section via SharePoint and are uploaded to a different section of the plans room.

See also [[237.9 Submission of Plans and Supporting Documents|EPG 237.9 Submission of Plans and Supporting Documents]].

===237.14.3.5 Electronic Information for Bidder’s Automation===
General Provision [http://contribute.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/BLUE_PACK_01_01_2018.pdf Electronic Information for Bidder's Automation (page 24 of this link)], of the Missouri Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, provides information for bidder automation. If provided, the Electronic Design Data does not constitute part of the bid or contract documents. This information, used for project design and quantity estimation purposes, is provided for the bidder’s use in automation of bid estimating, contractor furnished staking, automated machine guidance and other construction methods.

===237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction===
Construction staff requires Electronic Design Data for constructing the project, checking quantities, and producing as-built plans.

:1. By the request of the Resident Engineer to the Project Manager, all Electronic Design Data; including plan sheet drawings (.dgn) and reference files will be made available to Construction Staff. This request should be done at or around the Pre-Construction meeting.

:2. Project Manager instructs District Design staff to prepare files for transfer, see [[#237.14.3.1 Preparation of Electronic Design Data|EPG 237.14.3.1 Preparation of Electronic Design Data]].

:3. If ProjectWise is utilized in the Project Office: District Design staff will request the Electronic Design Data via the “PW Access Group” at [mailto:pwaccess@modot.mo.gov pwaccess@modot.mo.gov] with the following information: District, County, Job Number, and name of Project Office receiving the files. Electronic Design Data then will be copied to the Construction folder within ProjectWise by CADD Services Staff.

:4. If Project Wise is not utilized in Project Office: District Design staff exports the completed project from ProjectWise using the proper settings to preserve reference file links. See [http://caddnet/index.php?title=Export_a_Completed_Project_For_Construction How to Export a Completed Project in ProjectWise to Construction]. District Design staff will then request their District Information Systems staff to move (not copy) the exported EDD files to the Project Office’s server on the ustation share (t:\drive).

:5. SharePoint SHOULD NOT be used in any way for the transfer of SS4 Power GeoPak data. SS4 Power GEOPAK does not function when accessing files via SharePoint because it is unable to resolve any reference file links.

The Project Office may also obtain the files that are provided to the contractor via the [http://www.modot.org/business/contractor_resources/bid_opening_info/OpenLetting.shtml MoDOT Online Plans Room].

==237.14.4 Specifications of Electronic Design Data for Consultants and MoDOT==
MoDOT drawing standards are provided to consultants to create a [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/MicroStationV8.htm SS4 Power GEOPAK ''workspace''] that exactly matches the workspace used internally by MoDOT staff. These standards, when used in conjunction with SS4 Power GEOPAK help ensure that drawings provided meet MoDOT requirements.

===237.14.4.1 General CADD Requirements ===

'''1.''' The consultant shall furnish to MoDOT all of the contract plan drawings, for an entire project as SS4 Power GEOPAK drawings (DGN format). The consultant is responsible for verifying with MoDOT Design CADD Services for the current software version. All associated files that are attached to the drawing such as cell libraries, line definitions, dgnlib and reference files must be included if not automatically embedded in the file. The use of Microsoft Excel spreadsheet program can be used to create quantity summary sheets, however, any type of linking between the files to the contract plans is not permitted.

'''2.''' All design elements of the project shall be designed and delivered to the department in [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/MicroStationV8.htm SS4 Power GEOPAK format] using the current MoDOT workspace.

'''3.''' Each drawing file that is part of the final contract set shall be a full size plan sheet of 22 in. x 34 in. (560 mm x 865 mm) nominal size. All images shall be within a border of 20.375 in. x 31.25 in. (520 mm x 800 mm). The border shall be centered on the plotted page to ensure no part of the drawing is cut off during reproduction. Other than cross-section sheets, there shall be one SS4 Power GEOPAK drawing file that corresponds to each sheet of the plan set as submitted. The consultant may provide all cross-section sheets in a single SS4 Power GEOPAK file but must reference MoDOT’s border to each individual sheet.

'''4.''' The plan drawings shall be to a represented scale. The geometry shall be within a 2D file and consist of vector lines. Drawings shall be created in real world modified state plane coordinates at a 1 to 1 scale where applicable and plotted to the represented scale.

'''5.''' All drawings shall be self-contained or furnished with the supporting library of symbols and details to make the drawings complete in the format provided. MoDOT plots all drawings in a WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) format based upon a MoDOT specific border file attached as a reference file. The department will furnish the appropriate color table through its [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/geopakstandards.htm SS4 Power GEOPAK Drawing Standards internet site]. All line style, cells and symbology are applied to the SS4 Power GEOPAK drawing and not modified at plot time. Drawings that require specific commercial plotting software to create plots that match delivered contract documents will not be accepted. All drawings must be fully reproducible in black and white. Screening, shading and use of grayscale on plans will not be accepted for final plans delivery.

'''6.''' MoDOT will verify the computer drawings using SS4 Power GEOPAK. The PDF contract plans will be checked against a SS4 Power GEOPAK drawing (DGN format), or vice versa, furnished by the consultant.

'''7.''' Drawings shall have a color table meeting department’s standards to simplify the transfer process. MoDOT will furnish the appropriate color table through its [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/geopakstandards.htm SS4 Power GEOPAK Drawing Standards internet site].

'''8.''' All drawings shall conform to department drawing standards as established in the [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/MicroStationV8.htm MoDOT workspace]. All drawings shall follow the department’s standards for names and colors and line weights as defined in the workspace.

'''9.''' Drawings shall be saved with the project number as the name of the parent folder and following the naming convention in [[237.13 Contract Plan File Name Convention|EPG 237.13 Contract Plan File Name Convention]]. Subfolders can be used to improve organization.

'''10.''' Drawing files shall be submitted when all work covered by the contract is complete. Road project files shall be delivered to the MoDOT Project Manager. Bridge project files shall be delivered to the Structural Liaison Engineer responsible for the project.

'''11.''' Seed files and cell libraries are provided in the MoDOT workspace. [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/currentstandardplans.htm The Missouri Standard Plans for Highway Construction] are available in SS4 Power GEOPAK and Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) format on the department's web site.

===237.14.4.2 SS4 Power GEOPAK Requirements===

'''1.''' All elements representing existing topography features shall be processed using the settings defined by the current MoDOT Survey Manager Database File (MoDOT_Power_GeoPak_SMD.xml) which is provided in MoDOT’s workspace.

'''2.''' All survey information supplied by the consultant shall be in compliance with EPG 238.1 Aerial Mapping and LiDAR Surveys. The feature codes used in the survey and photogrammetry information shall conform to the MoDOT standard feature codes as specified in the current MoDOT Civil Survey Style File (MoDOT_Power_GeoPak_SMD.xml).

'''3.''' The consultant shall utilize the MoDOT SS4 Power GEOPAK feature definitions as provided in the [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/MicroStationV8.htm MoDOT workspace].

'''4.''' MoDOT provides a ''superelevation'' preference (SEP) file for the calculation of superelevation based on 2011 AASHTO standards.

'''5.''' Proposed ''cross sections'' shall be created from a corridor model. Cross section modifications should be avoided because edited cross sections would no longer match the corridor model.

'''6.''' MoDOT will provide a standard ''template library'', ''civil cell'' library, and feature definition library. These files are available in the [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/MicroStationV8.htm MoDOT workspace].

'''7.''' The consultant is required to use MoDOT SS4 Power GEOPAK standard libraries provided in the workspace.

'''8.''' The consultant shall submit ALL files used in the preparation of the roadway design.

'''9.''' Cross sections shall be provided in SS4 Power GEOPAK drawing file(s) that contain no other design data. The cross sections shall exactly match the Adobe Acrobat cross section sheet files (.pdf).

'''10.''' Cross sections sheets(.pdf) shall be submitted for but not limited to earthwork sections, entrance sections and superelevation transition sections. The superelevation transition sections included shall be at the following locations as described in [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/documents/20320.pdf Standard Plan 203.20] and [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/documents/20321.pdf Standard Plan 203.21]: Section A-A (normal crown), Section B-B (0% superelevation), Section C-C (reverse crown) and Section D-D (full superelevation).

==237.14.5 Glossary of Terms==

'''2D Point Feature.''' Power GEOPAK 2D Point Features are defined and stored in plan model. Contains no elevation (Z).

'''3D Geometry.''' Power GEOPAK 3D geometry is created in 3D model by mathematically combining the horizontal and vertical geometry to create 3D elements. These 3D geometry elements in turn define a design model.

'''3D Model.''' Created from linear features, corridor(s) and terrain models and resides in a Power GEOPAK dgn file. It is created and managed automatically.

'''3D Point Feature.''' 3D points can be defined in plan model or 3D model. They are stored in 3D model but represented in both plan and 3D (Power GEOPAK).

'''Active Profile.''' The Civil Horizontal Element can have multiple profiles, the active profile is the one used for design and the creation of Corridors. The active profile is combined with the horizontal geometry to build a 3D element which is used in the 3D model.

'''Active Terrain Model.''' One Power GEOPAK terrain model can be designated as “Active”. The active terrain model is the one used to display “existing ground”; in other words the one which displays automatically in a profile model when it is opened. The active terrain model is also the one which is targeted by side slopes unless the template defines a different target by name.

'''Adobe Acrobat.''' The software used to create and view the portable document file (PDF) format. It can be read by any computer by using Acrobat Reader software without needing the program with which the document was originally created. Acrobat .pdf files can be viewed using Acrobat Professional, Acrobat Reader and BlueBeam Review. Acrobat .pdf files can be signed using Acrobat Professional or Acrobat Reader DC.

'''Aerial Photography.''' Photographs of the ground from an aircraft in the direct-down position (see ''Nadir'') or sometimes at an oblique angle. See ''Photogrammetry''.

'''Apply Surface Template.''' To applya Power GEOPAK corridor template to a terrain model for the purpose of creating components (such as pavement layers) under the terrain model.

'''Arc Definition.''' Curve definition method generally used in roadway applications. The radius R is used to define the curve and is defined by the equation R = 5729.58/D where the degree of curvature D is the central angle subtended by a 100 ft. arc. Set in the Design File Settings > Civil Formatting under Radius Settings. See also ''Chord Definition''.

'''Back Slope.''' The slope up from the bottom of a ditch away from the roadway. Expressed as run:rise.

'''Base Geometry.''' In many instances the Power GEOPAK geometry element will be trimmed. The original (or base), untrimmed element is always preserved as it is the storage for the rule.

'''Baseline.''' A baseline is an alignment that is established for the design of road. A baseline is assigned stationing and contains no vertical information. The existing baseline shall be established by the PLS of record. Proposed baselines are usually established by the design engineer of record.

'''Bentley.''' The company that produces MoDOT's roadway design software. Products include: Power GEOAPK, ProjectWise and ConceptStation.

'''Berm.''' A raised earth barrier separating two areas

'''Bidding and Contracts Section.''' The MoDOT Bidding and Contract Services unit is responsible for letting MoDOT's highway construction and maintenance projects. This includes reviewing and advertising the projects, estimating, processing the letting, analyzing the bid results and providing a recommendation to management for award or reject of projects.

'''Border.''' In MoDOT highway plans, the border is a reference file that is included in every sheet drawing. The border is what makes a Power GEOPAK drawing a sheet drawing. The aspect of the border (width to height ratio) will match the desired paper size which is typically 24" x 36". The size of the border determines the scale of the sheet. For example a 36 in. wide border at 100 scale will measure 3,600 ft. wide. The contents of the sheet is generally referenced in to the sheet drawing. The border is placed in the sheet drawing at the proper location, rotation and size. The reference files are then clipped so that they don't extend outside the border. The border file also contains the title block information.

'''Boundary.''' Used to constrain the external boundary of the Power GEOPAK terrain model. No triangles are created outside the boundary. In addition, any point data outside the boundary is ignored.

'''Break Line.''' A Power GEOPAK surface feature that represents a defined slope change (eg. EOP, EOS, Ditch bottom, slope breaks). No triangle side (in the triangulated surface) can cross over a break line.

'''Break Void.''' A closed area of missing or obscured data. No tringulation inside the void.

'''Bridge Survey.''' Bridge surveys are prepared and submitted to the Bridge Division by the district to provide the basis for preliminary bridge layouts and ultimately for the preparation of bridge plans by the Bridge Division. Information required includes: Plan sheet, Typical Section, Profile Sheet, Valley/Channel Sections, Cross Sections and aerial imagery.

'''Cardinal Points.''' One of the points used to define the geometry of an alignment. Cardinal points include PC, PT, PI, and CC points for horizontal geometry and VPC, VPI and VPT for vertical geometry.

'''Chord Definition.''' Curve definition method generally used in railway applications and in highway design before the mid 1900s. The radius R is used to define the curve, and is defined by the equation R = 50/SIN(0.5*D) where the degree of curvature D is the central angle subtended by a 100 ft. chord. See also ''Arc Definition''.

'''Civil Cell.''' Power GEOPAK predefined cell that can contain civil geometry, terrain models, corridors, linear template and features. (eg. Intersections, entrances, box culvert, median openings)

'''Civil Geometry File.''' This Power GEOPAK .dgn file contains all final horizontal and vertical alignments used in the development of the contract plans in .dgn or .xml format.

'''Civil Geometry Report.''' This report will include all horizontal and vertical alignments that make up the project.

'''Civil Template.''' See ''Template''.

'''Clipping Reference.''' Clipping allows you to remove areas of overlap when working with multiple Power GEOPAK corridors in a single surface. For example, in a corridor intersected by a crossing roadway, clipping would be used to remove all overlapped features within the intersection.

'''Complex Terrain Model.''' A Power GEOPAK terrain model created by merging or appending two or more terrain models.

'''Context Toolbox.''' When a Power GEOPAK element is selected, hovering over the element provides a heads-up and context sensitive toolbar which pops up at the cursor. This toolbar provides a few of the most commonly used tools which operate on the element selected element type. The first tool in this toolbar is always Quick Properties.

'''Contour.''' A linear symbol representing points of equal elevation relative to a given datum.

'''Contour, Major.''' The primary elevation line indicating a specific elevation in a surface model. Usually major contours are drawn with a heavier line weight or using a different color. Elevation text labels are usually drawn in association with major contours.

'''Contour, Minor.''' A secondary elevation line indicating a specific elevation in a surface model. Minor contours are often drawn without special color or weight indexing and without elevation text labels.

'''Contract Documents.''' Includes signed sheet drawings and specifications.

'''Control Points.''' See ''Project Control''.

'''Coordinate File.''' A text file containing, at a minimum, x(E),y(N) or north(N), east(E) coordinate pairs and usually contains elevation values (z). These coordinates represent locations (points) on a plane. The file should be comma delimited but can be tab or space delimited and can contain additional colums of informaiton such as point ID, description or code. It is important to document the units, projection and vertical datum of the corrdinate data.

'''Corridor or Corridor Model.''' An object in Power GEOPAK that is used for modeling a roadway and is automatically managed by the corridor modeling tools. (See ''Roadway Corridor''.)

'''Cross Section Sheets.''' The cross section sheets are byproduct of cross sections. Acrobat .pdf cross section sheet files are printed from the SS4 Power GEOPAK cross sections for the purpose of creating contract plans documents that can be signed.

'''Cross Sections.''' SS4 Power GEOPAK Cross sections that are generated from the 3D Model and written into a .dgn file. Sections are not dynamic and must be re-generated after any design change. Cross sections can be placed in the .dgn by Power GEOPAK in a way that they are arranged properly and stacked within sheet borders.

'''Curve Stroking.''' Stroking is the process of automatically adding shots to the Power GEOPAK terrain model or corridor by interpolating new shots from the curved sections of the data. This distance is used to interpolate new shots along the curved element in corridor processing and applying linear templates. This value is used as a perpendicular minimum distance from chords generated along the arc. Chords are drawn along the arc and the perpendicular distance is measured from the middle of each chord to the arc. If this distance is larger than the Curve Stroking, the process is repeated with a shorter chord length. This process is repeated until the end of the curve is reached. The flatter the curve, the fewer number of points will be calculated. The steeper the curve, the greater number of points that will be calculated.

'''Datum.''' See ''Horizontal Datum'' and ''Vertical Datum''.

'''DDB File.''' GEOPAK file (Design Database) which contains features definitions, associated symbology and annotation settings.

'''Delta Terrain Model.''' A surface containing data derived from the difference in elevation between two terrain models or a terrain model and a plane.

'''Downstream.''' The indicated path follows the steepest descent from a user-defined point through the terrain model terminating at a low point or the edge of the terrain model.

'''Drape.''' The process of vertically projecting elements onto a surface so that the element elevations are defined by the surface.

'''Drape Void.''' A closed area of missing or obscured data where the void coordinates are not included in the triangulation. Voids are inserted post triangulation. The void coordinates and lines are draped on the TIN surface. Even though a user must provide an elevation for the Drape Void vertices, the user elevations are changed to the elevation of the TIN surface at the XY Drape Void coordinate position.

'''Drone.''' An unmanned aircraft or ship guided by remote control or onboard computers. See ''UAS''.

'''Dynamic Cross Sections.''' Temporary Power GEOPAK cross sections cut on the fly from the 3D Model using the corridor creation tools. They cannot be edited or printed.

'''Earthwork or Earthwork Quantities.''' Average end area excavation and fill design quantities generated from the cross sections. Construction earthwork quantities can be calculated by average end area or by the surface to surface method.

'''Electronic Design Data (EDD).''' MoDOT Highway Designers and consultants are required to provide specific file deliverables for the purpose of advertising, bidding and constructing roadway projects. This data is called Electronic Design Data (EDD).

'''Electronic Design Data Checklist.''' A checklist that is performed to verify the complete delivery of EDD for internal and Design Consultant project.

'''Element Template.''' MicroStation concept which allows preconfigured definitions for symbology and other miscellaneous display of MicroStation elements and civil features.

'''End Condition.''' A specialized component of a corridor template which provides information tie into active surface.

'''End Condition Exception.''' Used to modify the behavior of an end condition solution without requiring the use of additional template drops. When an end condition exception is added, it must be edited to change its behavior.

'''Existing Terrain Model.''' The existing terrain model is a single layer surface inside a Power GEOPAK .dgn computer file that represents the actual 3D ground features.

'''Feature.''' A Feature is anything that can be seen or located and is a physical part of your Power GEOPAK design, representing a real world thing. A feature’s definition is one of its properties. At any given time in the design process, the feature will have a Horizontal Geometry, a Vertical Geometry, 3D Geometry or a combination to define its location. examples: curb, pavement,spot dirt, manhole, wall, agg base, R/W marker, ditch, fill slope, etc.

'''Feature Definition.''' The feature definition typically is a property applied to Power GEOPAK plan view civil geometry. (eg. special ditch, eop, eos) The feature definition is automatically inherited by its associated profile and the derrived 3D geometry. Feature definitions are used by corridors for horizontal feature control. (eg. new pavement will seek "eop new"). Also see ''Surface Feature Definition''.

'''Feature Name.''' The name given to a Power GEOPAK Feature. See ''Feature''.

'''Fore Slope.''' The slope typically from the edge of the shoulder to the bottom of the ditch or to the bottom of the roadway fill. Expressed as run: rise.

'''Gap.''' When a feature is trimmed the part(s) which are invisible on the base geometry.

'''GEOPAK.''' See ''SS4 Power GEOPAK''

'''GPK.''' A legacy GEOPAK database containing coordinate geometry information. The GEOPAK database file extension is: “gpk”.

'''Graphical Filter.''' Used in developing Power GEOPAK terrain models from Power GEOPAK corridors.

'''Grid Coordinate.''' A coordinate typically in the State Plane Coordinate System for highway design. Can be in UTM or other system. A grid coordinate not a ground coordinate.

'''Ground Coordinate.''' A coordinate x,y value in a ground projection (i.e. modified state plane). It is derrived by taking a grid coordinate and multiplying it by a scale factor. This scaling process does not effect the elevation. Highway design, staking and construction are performed using ground coordinates.

'''Horizontal Alignment.''' A 2D linear feature in Power GEOPAK with a special purpose of defining the centerline or the baseline of a roadway. (aka chain).

'''Horizontal Datum.''' Horizontal datums are used for describing a point on the Earth's surface, in latitude and longitude or a cartisian coordinate system. The North American Datum 1983 (NAD83) is the most important for highway design and surveying. See ''Vertical Datum''.

'''Horizontal Geometry.''' The Power GEOPAK elements which define the horizontal layout of the design. These elements are 2D elements even if the DGN model is 3D. Horizontal Geometry may be points, lines, arcs, spirals, splines or any combination in a complex element.

'''Island.''' A closed area of land, inside a Power GEOPAK terrain model void. i.e., island in the middle of a lake or land inside an obscured area.

'''Key Station.''' Additional station added to the Power GEOPAK corridor to force processing at the particular location.

'''LandXML.''' A non-proprietary file format for the sharing of civil data between applications. The LandXML file extension is: “.xml”.

'''Laser Scanner.''' A LiDAR acquisition device, typically mounted on a tripod, used to collect point cloud information for the purpose of creating an existing terrain model. See ''LiDAR''.

'''LIDAR.''' LiDAR (Light Detection And Ranging) is an laser scanning technology which scans ground and other physical features to produce a 3D model.

'''Linear Feature.''' A Power GEOPAK plan element composed of lines, arcs, spirals and splines or a profile element composed of lines, parabola and splines.

'''Linear Stroking.''' Stroking is the process of automatically adding shots to the terrain model or corridor by interpolating new shots from the linear sections of the data. Linear stroking is measured along the element. Interpolated vertices are added whenever the distance between the vertices is greater than the linear stroking value (in master units).

'''Linear Template.''' To apply a Power GEOPAK template to a 3D linear feature as part of creating a proposed surface. (eg. End conditions, pavement widening, guard rail, bridge fill face)

'''Mapping.''' A collection of natural and manmade conditions that are surveyed and represented as SS4 Power GEOPAK Survey features in the Bentley .dgn format.

'''MicroStation.''' See ''SS4 Power GEOPAK''.

'''Mobile LiDAR.''' A vehicle mounted LiDAR acquisition device used to collect point cloud information while moving for the purpose of creating an existing terrain model. See ''LiDAR''.

'''Modified State Plane Coordinate System.''' A ground coodinate system that is derrived for a specific project or area by multiplying State Plane Coordinates (n & e but not elev.) by a project projection factor. Design work and constion is performed using a modified state plane coordinate system. See ''State Plane Coordinate System'' and ''Ground Coordinates''.

'''Nadir.''' The point on the ground that is vertically downward from an airborne observer.

'''Online Plans Room.''' MoDOT's [http://www.modot.org/business/contractor_resources/bid_opening_info/OpenLetting.shtml Online Plan Room] provides access to contract documents for projects currently in the process of receiving competitive bids.

'''Parametric Constraints.''' Used to set up Power GEOPAK corridor constraint value overrides for specified station ranges. (eg. Pavement width transition, end condition slopes)

'''Photogrammetry.''' Photogrammetry is the science of making measurements from overlapping photographs. Until a few years ago, photogrammetry was used extensively by MoDOT to develop the existing terrain model for projects. That technology has been replaced with LiDAR. Photogrammetry has been reborn as the predominate method of surface creation when using unmanned aerial vehicles (UAV).

'''Plan Model.''' The usual Power GEOPAK DGN model, used for laying out horizontal geometry. Best practices will dictate that this is a 2D DGN model but 3D DGN model can be used. This is where geometric layouts and corridor definitions are kept. The geometric layouts are not only alignments but also edges, parking, striping, sidewalks, etc.

'''Plan Sheet (.dgn).''' A Power GEOPAK .dgn drawing file that contains a border. Used to produce a .pdf plan sheet contact document. See ''Border''.

'''Plan Sheet (.pdf).''' An Adobe Acrobat .pdf file that represents a plan sheet and is a contract document. In other words it contains a border and title block. .pdf files can be electronically signed.

'''Point Cloud.''' A set of vertices in a 3D coordinate system and are defined the by X, Y and Z coordinates. Point clouds are usually created by Laser scanners, Aerial LiDAR or Mobile LiDAR. These devices measure a large number of points on the surface of an object and output a point cloud as a data file. The point cloud represents the visible surface of the object that has been scanned or digitized.

'''Point Control.''' Used to modify the behavior of points in a template. These controls take precedence (they override) over existing constraints on the point.

'''Point Features.''' Defined by a single X, Y (Z optional) location. A point need not be a feature. It may be defined as a non-featurized point by way of AccuDraw, Civil AccuDraw, Snap or a data point. Non featurized points are use to control the construction of Linear Features.

'''Power GEOPAK Corridor.''' See ''Corridor''.

'''PowerGEOPAK.''' See ''SS4 Power GEOPAK''.

'''Professional Land Surveyor (PLS) of Record.''' The professional land surveyor whose signature appears on survey documents or is responsible for the quality of surveying work.

'''Project Control.''' High precision locations that are located in the field with steel pins or other permanent marker. They provide the basis for lower precision surveys and staking on construction projects.

'''Project Data Summary Report.''' This Excel report, prepared by the designer, gives a summary of all Electronic Design Data files submitted with the project and is an important reference for MoDOT staff and contractors that may use the Electronic Design Data. This file contains specific project information and acts as table of contents with descriptions for all files submitted.

'''Project Explorer.''' The Power GEOPAK interface for browsing elements in a DGN file. Extended by civil to accommodate specialized civil needs.

'''Projection Factor.''' The project specific factor that is used to convert state plane north and east coordinates to modified state plane ground coordinates for use in design and construction. Elevations are not multiplied by the projection factor.

'''ProjectWise.''' ProjectWise is, among other things, a CADD document management tool that provides the ability to check out, open, modify and manage documents to include PDF, DGN, DOCX, and XSLX files.

'''ProjectWise PDF Creation Tool.''' A ProjectWise tool that produces Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) files to be used as contract plans.

'''ProjectWise Ref Scan tool.''' A tool that corrects the relationships between the master file and the reference files so they can be managed correctly by ProjectWise.

'''Proposed Terrain Model.''' A Power GEOPAK terrain model consisting of a triangulated surface that completely describes the design features of a corridor and ties into the existing ground terrain model at its edges. See ''Terrain Model''.

'''Reference Element.''' The rule for some geometry is a calculation from another element. This other element is the reference element.

'''Reference File.''' A Power GEOPAK drawing can have other drawings and image files attached to it. Elements in a reference file display as though they are geometry in the active design file. Although you cannot manipulate or delete the elements displayed in a reference file, you can snap to them or copy them into the active design file.

'''Roadway Corridor.''' A generally linear tract of land that defines at least one main line of some mode of transportation. (See ''Corridor or Corridor Model''.)

'''Secondary Alignment.''' Used to modify the direction of cross section processing. By default, as any given station, the cross section is created orthogonal to the main alignment/feature. If a secondary alignment exists, then that portion of the cross section which lies outside the secondary alignment will be orthogonal to the secondary alignment instead of the main alignment.

'''Sheets.''' Typically Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) files created from Power GEOPAK .dgn files. The plan sheet .pdf files are signed by the Project Manager and are part of the contract documents. See ''Border''.

'''Signed.''' The term signed indicates that an Adobe Acrobat contract file has been electronically signed by the engineer of record. The PLS Surveyor of record perfroms electronic signatures as well as "wet" signatures as part of their work. Wet signature indicates signing and dating paper plans in ink.

'''SMD File.''' GEOPAK file (Survey Manager Database) which contains survey features definitions and associated element and textual settings.

'''Special Ditch.''' A standard ditch has a consistent depth so the bottom of ditch elevations run parallel the edge of the shoulder. The bottom of ditch elevations of special ditches are defined by a profile to control the ditch elevations and can be manipulated by the design to provide a desired result.

'''Spot Elevation.''' A set of X, Y, Z coordinates representing a point on the terrain model surface. There is no implied relationship between spot elevation points.

'''SS4 Power GEOPAK.''' Power GEOPAK is a suite of software that includes MicroStation drafting software and GeoPak civil design tools. SS4 (Select Series 4) is the version required for use on MoDOT work.

'''State Plane Coordinate System.''' One of 124 geographic coordinate systems designed for specific regions of the United States. They rely on a simple x,y coordinate system to specify locations rather than latitude and longitude to allow the use of "plane surveying" methods. Also, the system is highly accurate within each zone. Missouri has three state plane zones: East, Central and West. Control surveying is typically performed in the state plane coordinate system. Design and construction work is not performed in the state plane coodinate system but in the modified state plane coordinate system that is project specific. A project specific grid to ground projection factor is used to convert State Plane coordinates to Modified State Plane ground coordinates.

'''Stationing.''' Stationing is a system of measurement used for road layout and construction. From the beginning station, and all distances along the roadway centerline are measured from that point using 100 foot stations. The number to the left of the + is the distance in full 100 foot stations and the number to the right of the + is the distance beyond that full station in feet. The station 123+34 is 12,334 feet from the beginning of the alignment.

'''Superelevation.''' Superelevation is the rotation of the pavement on the approach to and through a horizontal curve.

'''Superelevation Lane.''' The closed area defined by the Power GEOPAK superelevation tools used for the limits of transition calculations and pivoting location.

'''Superelevation Section.''' Area along a Power GEOPAK horizontal geometry element, where superelevation will be calculated.

'''Surface Feature Definitions.''' The surface feature definition is a property applied to Power GEOPAK terrain model. It determines the default display properties (eg. Contours, triangles, material type)

'''Surface File.''' A LandXML, GEOPAK tin or other file type that contains only surface information. Typically exported by Survey or Design software for use in another system.

'''Survey Coordinate File.''' The comma delimited Survey Coordinate File is prepared by the project’s Professional Land Surveyor of Record and contains project control points.

'''Survey Report.''' The Survey Report is prepared by the project’s Professional Land Survey of Record. It is used for documenting the project control metadata and the method in which the topography and terrain information is obtained for a project.

'''Target Aliasing.''' Used to create the desired results when working with multiple surfaces without having to edit the template from the template library. Target aliases can also be used so that one corridor can target the solution of another corridor.

'''Template Drop.''' An area (usually defined by station limits) along a corridor to which a specific template is applied. The template drop spacing is determined by the designer to provide the accuracy required for the surfaces.

'''Template Library.''' A Power GEOPAK file that stores definitions for templates, generally with an ITL file extension.

'''Template or Civil Template.''' The configuration in Power GEOPAK that defines the cross sectional shape of the roadway being modeled. This cross-section is then “extruded along” a 3D geometry element to form the final model. The corridor template can create or target features such as road edges. The result is the creation of a corridor.

'''Template Transition.''' MoDOT does not currently utilize template trainitions. See ''Parametric Constraints''.

'''Terrain Model.''' A Power GEOPAK three-dimensional DGN element defined by spots, break lines, voids, holes, contours to model a surface on the earth. The terrain model replaces the .tin file format used before Power GEOPAK SS3.

'''Topography.''' A detailed description or representation on a map of the natural and artificial features of an area.

'''Topolift.''' A laser scanner mounted on a pickup that is composed of a lift and bridge mechanism. The automated lift operation substantially reduces the drive, stop and setup time compared to tripod-based operations as well as adding additional height for better coverage. The scanner is completely isolated from the pickup during scans.

'''Trace Slope.''' Upstream - The indicated path follows the steepest ascent from a user-defined point through the terrain model terminating at a high point or the edge of the terrain model.

'''Traditional Survey Methods.''' Traditional surveying includes the use of GPS, total stations, leveling, bathymetry, etc.

'''UAS.''' Unmanned Aerial Systems (UAS) is an all encompassing description that encapsulates the aircraft or UAV, the ground-based controller, and the system of communications connecting the two.

'''UAV.''' An unmanned aerial vehicle piloted by remote control or onboard computers. See ''UAS'' and ''Drone''.

'''Vertical Alignment.''' A linear feature in a Power GEOPAK profile model with a special purpose of defining the elevations of an alignment.

'''Vertical Datum.''' A vertical datum is a surface of zero elevation to which heights of various points are measured. The vertical datum can be based on sea level (obsolete), an ellipsoid or a geoid model of the earth. The North American Vertical Datum of 1988 (NAVD88) is the current vertical datum for highway design and surveying. Plans produced prior to 1988 and during the transition period were typically based on the National Geodetic Datum of 1929 (NGVD29). See ''Horizontal Datum''.

'''Vertical Geometry.''' The elements which define the vertical layout of a corresponding horizontal geometry element. These vertical elements are 2D and are stored in a profile model.

'''Void.''' Closed shape representing areas of missing data or obscure areas. No point or break data located within the void area is utilized and no triangles are created inside the void areas. The Void coordinates are included in the triangulation and void lines between successive void coordinates are inserted as drape lines on the surface. Therefore, they do not change the slope or elevations of the surface.

'''Watershed.''' Defined by either a low point within the terrain model or a low edge point along the terrain model edge, it's the closed area wherein all water would drain to the low point.

'''Workspace.''' A workspace is a Power GEOPAK environment or configuration. Organizations establish a standard workspace to help users comply with standards and increase production speed. It also helps reduce errors caused by using incorrect resources such as fonts, text styles, line styles, seed files and dimension styles.

[[category:237 Contract Plans|237.14]]

Main Page

2018-06-26T15:25:48Z

EPGsysop: EPG 238.2.17

[[Image:EPG 2013b.jpg|1030px|center]]

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:0px; border:3px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 100%; background:#E3C87E" width="1030px" align="center"
|-
|rowspan="2" align="right" |'''HELPFUL EPG VIDEOS: || ||align="left"|''' <BIG>'''[[media:Logging into the EPG.wmv|•Logging into the EPG]] ||align="left"|''' <BIG>'''[[media:Help Finding EPG Info.wmv|•Finding Info in the EPG]]'''
|-
| ||align="left" colspan="2"|''' <Big>[[media:Article History and Receiving.wmv|•Article History & How to Receive EMails When Articles are Revised]]
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''___________'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''<Big>Want help on how to update your EPG guidance?  It is available at [[:Help Article#EPG Approval Process|EPG Approval Process]].'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''___________'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''<Big>[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/highwayspecs.htm The Electronic MoDOT Spec Book for Mobile Devices] is now available. You may also [https://www6.modot.mo.gov/eMoDOTWeb/jsp/signon/signon.jsp sign up for E-Update notices]. To receive notices regarding Engineering Policy Revisions, select "Engineering Policy" then mark the appropriate subjects of interest. '''
|}

<div style="padding-bottom: .3em; margin: 0 .5em .5em"></div>
{| cellspacing="3"
|- valign="top" width="100%"
|style="border: 1px solid #696969; color: #000; background-color: #A9A9A9"|<big><center>'''WELCOME'''</center></big>
| valign="top" width="60%" cellspacing="3" cellpadding="3" style="border: 1px solid #FF8C00; background:#FFA500" align="center"|'''<big>RECENT POLICY CHANGES IN THE EPG</big>'''
|-
|valign="top" style="border: 1px solid #A9A9A9; color: #000; background-color: #F8F8FF"|
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 23, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> Employees at the Kansas City District General Services Garage get a demonstration of Jeff, the [http://www.modot.org/kansascity/newrelease/District4Release.shtml?action=displaySSI&newsId=215977 new, agile mini-robot] (lower center), that will be used to conduct some surveys and pipe inspections. The robot will spare workers from dangerous situations such as cave-ins. </center>''']]
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 18, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> The new [http://www.modot.org/northeast/newsandinformation/District3Release.shtml?action=displaySSI&newsId=215953 I-70 interchange at Warrenton] will include three roundabouts. The $8.5 million project is expected to be completed this fall. </center>''']]
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 7, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> [https://paceconstructionstl.com/ Pace Construction] crews work on the final preparations to complete a [http://www.modot.org/stlouis/major_projects/I-44atRoute141DesignBuild.htm new flyover ramp between Rte. 141 and I-44] in Valley Park. The ramp is one portion of a [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=Category:139_Design_-_Build design-build construction project] to be completed by July 15 that reduces congestion and improves traffic flow through and in the vicinity of the interchange. </center>''']]
|}

MoDOT has made great strides to build a good transportation system and increase taxpayers' trust in its ability to deliver what was promised. Innovative concepts, such as [[:Category:143 Practical Design|Practical Design]] and [[:Category:139 Design - Build|design-build]], were used to deliver those commitments and have made MoDOT a leader in the transportation industry.

These forward-thinking, innovative concepts are reflected in the ''ENGINEERING POLICY GUIDE'' (EPG). This document provides a single reference for all engineering and engineering-related guidance by combining the former [http://sharepoint/sites/de/RealEstate/SitePages/Home.aspx Right of Way], [http://sharepoint/sites/de/Pages/default.aspx Design], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/br/pages/default.aspx Bridge], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/cm/Pages/default.aspx Construction], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/tr/Pages/default.aspx Traffic] and [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/mt/default.aspx Maintenance] manuals.

MediaWiki, the engine behind the Wikipedia on the World Wide Web, is the software delivering the EPG. Over 50 million hits on the EPG endorse this format to be easy to navigate and pleasing to read. A small [[:Help:Contents|'''HELP ARTICLE''']] is included to assist with helpful hints on how to use the EPG as well as other points of interest.

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="background-color: #F8F8FF"
|-
|colspan="5" | '''Perhaps you've wondered how many hits the most popular EPG articles have. As of late June, the numbers of hits are:'''
|-
|'''20.''' [[:Category:136 Local Public Agency (LPA) Policy|EPG 136]]|| 171278
|| '''10.''' [[751.5 Standard Details|EPG 751.5]]|| align="right"| 241641
|-
|'''19.''' [[:Category:134 Engineering Professional Services|EPG 134]]|| 180109 || '''9.''' [[616.23 Traffic Control for Field Operations|EPG 616.23]]||align="right"| 276044
|-
|'''18.''' [[136.4 Consultant Selection and Consultant Contract Management|EPG 136.4]]|| 180574 || '''8.''' [[:Category:600 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION|EPG 600]]||align="right"| 285214
|-
|'''17.''' [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40]]|| 180743 || '''7.''' [[:Category:100 GENERAL|EPG 100]]||align="right"| 335130
|-
|'''16.''' [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B)|EPG 620.2]]|| 191789 || '''6.''' [[:Category:700 STRUCTURES AND HYDRAULICS|EPG 700]]||align="right"| 352151
|-
|'''15.''' [[:Category:903 Highway Signing|EPG 903]]|| 200037 || '''5.''' [[:Category:900 TRAFFIC CONTROL|EPG 900]]||align="right"| 370826
|-
|'''14.''' [[:Category:200 GEOMETRICS|EPG 200]]|| 211862 || '''4.''' [[136.12 Figures, Glossary and Other Useful Links|EPG 136.12]] ||align="right"| 393784
|-
|'''13.''' [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50]]|| 214538 || '''3.''' [[:Category:101 Standard Forms|EPG 101]]||align="right"| 396987
|-
|'''12.''' [[136.9 Plans, Specs and Estimates (PSE)|EPG 136.9]]|| 221105 || '''2.''' [[:Category:751 LRFD Bridge Design Guidelines|EPG 751]]||align="right"| 459831
|-
|width="130"|'''11.''' [[:Category:616 Temporary Traffic Control|EPG 616]]|| 225696 || width="150"| '''1.''' EPG Main Page||align="right"| 3170836
|}

|valign="top" cellspacinepgg="0" cellpadding="5" style="border: 1px solid #FFA500; background:#ffdead"|
'''[[238.2 Land Surveying#238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review|EPG 238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review]]'''

6/26/18: Guidance was clarified with current business practices.

'''[[751.11 Bearings#ASTM F1554 Grade 105 anchor bolts|Design of Elastomeric Bearings' Anchor Bolts]]'''

6/5/18: ASTM F1554 Grade 105 anchor bolts may be used when Grade 55 is not adequate.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#(B3.2)|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

6/1/18: Note B3.2 was clarified.

'''[[751.10 General Superstructure#751.10.3.1 Type, Alignment and Spacing|EPG 751.10.3 Bridge Deck Drainage - Slab Drains]]'''

5/24/18: Guidance now states the allowed slab drain color coatings.

'''[[106.12 Pre-Acceptance Lists (PAL)#Upon receipt and review|EPG 106.12 PAL Material Arrival Confirmation]]'''

5/22/18: Pre-Acceptance Identification Tag guidance was clarified to allow for identifying PAL material shipped to MoDOT projects.

'''[[:Category:806 Pollution, Erosion and Sediment Control#Design Guidance|EPG 806.7 Temporary Erosion Control Blankets Design Guidance]]'''

5/17/18: The types of erosion control blankets were increased and guidance now includes a matrix for choosing blanket types based on the region, length of slope and the necessary blanket duration.

'''2-loop and 3-loop Concrete Barriers'''

5/17/18: In [[616.19 Quality Standards for Temporary Traffic Control Devices#2- and 3-Loop Type F|EPG 616.19.2.5 Temporary Traffic Barriers]] and [[617.2 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 617#Temporary Concrete Traffic Barrier|EPG 617.2 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 617]], guidance was clarified for anchoring 2-loop and 3-loop concrete barriers on asphalt, composite and concrete pavements in work zones.

'''Design Agreements and Contracts'''

5/14/18: Those who need to review [[153.8 Design#DE43|DE43, DE44 and DE46-49]] prior to contractual execution has been updated.

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#Uniformed Services|Three new Federal Aid Projects Posters]]'''

5/11/18: Three new posters are required to be displayed on Federal-Aid project sites: [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/27_USERRA.pdf Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act (USERRA)],
[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/28e_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (English)] and [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/29s_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (Spanish)].

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2|EPG 110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2]]'''

5/9/18: New guidance agreed to by the DOL is now available about the DOL's PW-2 form.

'''[[231.4 Shoulder Width#A minimum shy distance at least|EPG 231.4 Shoulder Width]]'''

5/9/18: Guidance about guardrail placement from the edge of the shoulder was clarified.

'''[[751.1 Preliminary Design#751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating|EPG 751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating]]'''

5/3/18: New bridge preliminary design guidance for assessing asbestos and lead considerations for structure removal, rehabs and recoatings as well as how to address these considerations on the Bridge Memorandum.

'''[[237.14 Electronic Design Data Delivery#237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction|EPG 237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction]]'''

5/2/18: Guidance about the initial request for the Construction files has been clarified.

'''Outdoor Advertising'''

4/30/18: Guidance in [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.8.5 Vegetation Site Inspection|EPG 236.16.8.5 Vegetation Site Inspection]], [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.4 Cutting of Vegetation|EPG 236.16.15.4 Cutting of Vegetation]], [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.6 Trimming of Trees|EPG 236.16.15.6 Trimming of Trees]] and [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.9 Releasing a Vegetation Permit|EPG 236.16.15.9 Releasing a Vegetation Permit]] have been impacted by Administrative Rule revisions.

'''[[102.2 Contractor Performance Rating System#102.2.7 Performance Discussion|EPG 102.2.7 Performance Discussion]]'''

4/27/18: Guidance for when certified mail is necessary for the Contractor Performance Rating has been updated.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#(E2.27)|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

4/25/18: A new standard detailing note about deviations in galvanized pile penetration is now available.

'''[[903.4 Overhead Sign Mounting#The standard footing for steel and aluminum box truss|EPG 903.4.6 Span, Cantilever and Butterfly Box Trusses]]'''

4/16/18: Guidance about drilled shaft footings has been clarified. MoDOT may be the designer of the footing and if not, others will have to submit signed and sealed drawings.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

4/13/18: In [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#D. Temporary Bridge (Notes for Bridge Standard Drawings)|EPG 751.50 D. Temporary Bridge]], revisions include a new clarifying note D1.5 and replacing an archaic option in D1.21 with the current option. In [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#H9. Thrie Beam and Other Rail Types (Notes for Bridge Standard Drawings)|EPG 751.50 H9. Thrie Beam and Other Rail Types]], revisions include the new H9.29 for two thrie beam standard drawings.

'''[[751.8 LRFD Concrete Box Culverts#751.8.3.4 Wing Walls on Rock|EPG 751.8.3.4 Wing Walls on Rock]]'''

4/11/18: New guidance for culvert wing walls on rock is now available.

'''Inclusion of DOL Wage Rates In Contracts'''

4/10/2018: In [[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#110.1 Wage Rates (Guidance for Sec 110.1)|EPG 110.1 Wage Rates]], guidance about including the correct wage rate order from the Dept. of Labor on MoDOT projects was updated.

'''[[127.29 Storm Water#Special Watersheds where MoDOT|Special Watersheds where MoDOT has been assigned a Wasteload Allocation]]'''

4/9/18: Guidance to go with the MDNR permit agreement has been added.

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#Required Notices and Posters|Project Bulletin Board Inspection Rate]] '''

4/5/18: The bulletin board inspection rate was revised from every two months to every three months.

'''[[:Category:749 Hydrologic Analysis#749.5.3 Time of Concentration|EPG 749.5.3 Time of Concentration]]'''

4/5/18: Time of Concentration guidance was revised by providing an optional combination of Kirby-Hathaway and Kirpich equations and adding the optional low slope factor presented in new research.

'''[[media:747 Bridge Survey Report April 2018.docx|Bridge Survey Report]]'''

4/4/18: The latest version of this form is now available.

'''[[237.13 Contract Plan File Name Convention#237.13.5 Example Set of Electronic Design Data|EPG 237.13.5 Example Set of Electronic Design Data]]'''

4/3/18: This chart has been updated with current examples.

238.2 Land Surveying

2018-06-26T13:32:47Z

EPGsysop: Per RW, clarified EPG 238.2.17 with current business practices. Updated Exhibit A - legal descriptions-survey approval and Form 238.2.18.2 Plat Review Checklist.

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:15px; border:1px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="260px" align="right"
|-
|'''Figures'''
|-
|[[media:238.2 1 Traffic Safety-Equipment.pdf|Traffic Safety-Equipment and Procedures]]
|-
|[[Media:238.2 RW Markers.pdf|Types of RW Markers]]
|-
|[[Media:238.2.6 RW Monument Cap.pdf|R/W Monument Cap and Stamping]]
|-
|[[Media:238.2.7 RW Witness Post Decal.pdf|RW Witness Post Decal]]
|-
|'''Forms'''
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/238.2_Sample_Letter_Notifying_Property_Owner_of_Survey.doc Sample Letter Notifying Property Owner of Survey Work]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/RW/238.2_Form_A-472.pdf Property Damage Release Form A-472]
|-
|[http://wwwi/intranet/cc/contracts/RW/RW11%20Crop%20Damage%20Compensation%20Agreement%20and%20Release.doc Crop Damage Compensation Agreement and Release (RW11)]
|-
|[http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/MoDOT_2006_Survey_Code_Sheet.pdf Survey Coding Sheet]
|-
|[http://spexternalsignin/sites/de/BlogUploads/05-10-2018_Exhibit-A_LegalDescription.docx Legal Description, Exhibit A]
|-
|[http://spexternalsignin/sites/de/BlogUploads/05-10-2018_SurveyPlatCheckList_DE.docx Form 238.2.18.2 Plat Review Checklist]
|}

==238.2.1 Location Surveys and Definitions==

Surveys that are the responsibility of a project surveyor (Registered Survey Party Chief) are generally described as Location Surveys. They are used to locate the right of way corridor, used to locate public and private lands, used to locate tracts described by metes and bounds, or used to locate any property associated to a right or interest. Location Surveys performed by MoDOT project surveyors fall into four basic categories;

# Right of way surveys,
# Right of way resurveys,
# Department parcel surveys, and
# Public land surveys.

To ensure proper accounting for each of the various surveying tasks involved with land surveys, the [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/MoDOT_2006_Survey_Code_Sheet.pdf correct coding] must always be used.

==238.2.2 Right of Way surveys==

Right of way surveys are performed for the purpose of locating, monumenting and describing newly acquired lands to be used for development of a highway corridor, creating a new parcel defined by the right of way limits. A right of way survey is an original survey of the corridor parcel made at the time the parcel is created. The right of way survey is not made to ascertain existing boundaries. It is made to create the new right of way. Right of way surveys are conducted as part of the larger highway project. The right of way survey will occur as part of the design stage of the project. In general terms, right of way procedures will be performed during the preliminary design phase and the final design phase.

==238.2.3 Right of Way Resurveys==

Right of way resurveys are performed for the purpose of remarking, reestablishing, restoring or delineating the right of way line or breaks of a previously created corridor. These surveys are to restore the original right of way lines in the same position as they were originally marked. They are called for in instances of right of way encroachment, location disputes, excess right of way, etc.

==238.2.4 Parcel Surveys==

Department parcel surveys are standard boundary surveys performed for the locating, monumenting and describing of parcels that are acquired by the department for the purpose of facilities management. These surveys, not associated to any right of way, create a new parcel out of a larger parent tract, for the purpose of conveying the new parcel.

==238.2.5 Public land surveys==

Public land surveys are performed for the resurvey of the lands of the United States Public Land Survey System. These surveys will be performed during the conduct of all location surveys. Ties to the public land survey system are necessary for locating rights of way and parcels. Public land surveys will also be performed for the purpose of perpetuating the public corners that are affected by corridor development and highway construction.

==238.2.6 Survey Supervision==

The district land survey manager, land survey supervisior, or land surveyor is required to provide "immediate personal supervision" of the following activities:
:*the location survey,
:*the location survey plan preparation,
:*writing of the land descriptions,
:*and the marking of all MoDOT's land boundaries or rights in real property.

These duties shall be completed by or under the direction of the professional land surveyor (PLS). "Immediate personal supervision" is defined as complete oversight and reponsibility of the work products defined in this article and not necessarily management supervision of the individuals performing the work.

'''Supervision of the survey will entail:'''

:1. Acquisition of all necessary records and data.

:2. Investigation of the selection of the ground control (such as section corners, block corners, survey corners or other corners or monuments found) as a result of the field survey to be used to position the survey on the ground.

:3. Reviewing the execution of the survey, the survey computations and the preparation of the drawing.

'''Supervision of the location survey plan and land description:'''

:1. Supervise each step of the preparation of the plats, maps, survey plans, drawings, reports, description, surveys or other documents and have input into their preparation prior to their completion.

:2. Review the final plats, maps, survey plans, drawings, reports, descriptions, surveys or other documents and makes necessary and appropriate changes.

'''Supervision of setting and reestablishing right of way:'''

:1. During design and construction activities, the need to locate right of way can occur at any time throughout our process. Best management practice establishes all of the right of way monuments before construction. This addresses most, if not all, construction marking issues. This approach may require resource reallocation to allow for adequate PLS involvement prior to the project award. These duties can be completed by or under the direction (oversight and responsibility) of the PLS.

:2. During utility construction activities, the construction surveyor can mark utility locations or utility corridors anywhere within MoDOT’s marked property boundaries. Should the right of way boundary need to be marked, the work can be completed by or under the direction (oversight and responsibility) of the PLS.

:3. When granting a permit for a driveway, the improvement is intended to extend to MoDOT’s right of way line. If monuments are in place, they may be used to detect the location of MoDOT’s right of way at the permit location. If there are no monuments in place, the work can be completed by or under the direction (oversight and responsibility) of the PLS.

:4. The practice of showing landowners where to build a fence has always been a common activity for MoDOT personnel. If there are no existing right of way markers, the landowner can choose to have a survey done by a private surveyor or MoDOT surveyors could complete the necessary survey for the landowner depending on the availability of resources and the anticipated completion date.

==238.2.7 Contacts with property owners==

Prior to a request for a survey the designer sends a [http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/DELiaison/238.2_Sample_Letter_Notifying_Property_Owner_of_Survey.doc letter to property owners] located along the proposed roadway improvement. The district Right of Way office will supply the designer with a list of property owners and their addresses. The survey party chief will contact property owners and/or occupants, if conveniently possible, prior to entering a property as a matter of respect and to promote good public relations. The survey party chief explains in general the proposed improvement, explains in layman terms how the survey will proceed, and requests the consent of the owner and/or occupant to proceed with the survey. Should the owner and/or occupant refuse to allow the survey party chief to enter the property the project development engineer is immediately advised of the situation. They will handle the case beyond this point. The survey party will not enter any property when consent to enter has been refused until further advised by the project development engineer. The survey party chief will advise the owner and/or occupant that the survey is made a step at a time and the party will be passing through the property several times to complete the work. These numerous visits are not an indication that mistakes have been made. If the survey is a photogrammetric survey the owner and/or occupant must understand the placement and purpose of ground control targets. The public is never given questionable information by the survey party. It is much better to say, "I do not know" than to impart false information. A letter may be sent to property owners in lieu of other means of contact

==238.2.8 Survey Property Damage==

During the process of making surveys, it may become necessary to trim crops or trees; or be involved in other circumstances that may involve property damage related to obtaining survey information. When property damage does result, it is the responsibility of the survey party chief to complete the [http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/RW/238.2_Form_A-472.pdf Property Damage Release and Report Form A-472], and obtain the necessary signature if possible. If circumstances of the property damage are questionable, a letter of explanation will be sent to the Design Division prior to submitting the property damage release and report form to fiscal services. The property owner must be contacted prior to the cutting of crops or trees. The survey party chief must inform the property owner of the need for, and the extent of, the required damage.

==238.2.9 Traffic safety==

Survey parties are to utilize the equipment and procedures available to provide the maximum level of safety for their personnel and the traveling public. When working on the road, [[media:238.2 1 Traffic Safety-Equipment.pdf|appropriate signing]] is used as a minimum guide for traffic safety. When working on the outside shoulder one "Survey Crew" sign is placed on that shoulder, preceding the work by 200 ft. in urban areas and 500 ft. in rural areas. When working in the median, "Survey Crew" signs are used facing both directions. When working outside the outside shoulder line signing is not normally used. The major factors bearing on the protection to be used in each situation are:
* Speed
* Volume of traffic
* Highway geometrics
* Duration of operation
* Exposure to hazards
* Weather (or road conditions)

[[media:238.2 1 Traffic Safety-Equipment.pdf|Warning signs]] are placed at appropriate minimum distances. Field conditions will control the actual placement of signs and channelizers. The individual in charge of the survey party has the responsibility to see that the necessary safety precautions are taken. Safety vests are to be worn by all members of the survey party while working on the right of way. Where signs are used they are to be placed prior to beginning work and at locations having adequate approach visibility. Channelizers are to be used as needed. Personnel using stop-slow paddles are positioned as needed to provide the best direction of traffic and safety for working personnel. Personnel must be instructed concerning the importance of staying alert, being courteous to motorists, and the fact that the responsibility for the lives of the party and traveling public are in their hands. The department publication ''Safety Rules and Regulations'' gives additional traffic control information. Trucks with top mounted flashers may be used to provide additional protection for personnel by blocking the lane or parking on the shoulder. Two-way radios may be used to handle traffic where two-way operation over a single lane is maintained without visible contact between personnel.

==238.2.10 Tolerances==

The required degree of accuracy for conventional surveys is shown in the following table. The survey party is responsible for obtaining at least this degree of accuracy, through the proper adjustment and care of instruments and equipment and the method of making measurements.

{|border="1" style="text-align:center" cellpadding="3" align="center"
|-
! style="background:#6B8E23" colspan="2"|SURVEY ACCURACY
|-style="background:#6B8E23"
|'''MEASUREMENT'''||'''ALLOWABLE ERROR'''
|-style="background:#cccccc"
|Distance||1:20,000
|-style="background:#cccccc"
|Angular||6 Seconds
|-style="background:#cccccc"
|Levels||0.05 ft. x Sq. Root Dist.(miles)
|}

==238.2.11 Recording accuracy==

Single measurements are recorded to the accuracy shown in the following table.

{|border="1" style="text-align:center" cellpadding="3" align="center"
|-
!colspan="2" style="background:#CD853F"|SURVEY RECORDING ACCURACY
|-style="background:#CD853F"
|'''MEASUREMENT'''||'''ACCURACY'''
|-style="background:#cccccc"
|Distance||0.01 ft.
|-style="background:#cccccc"
|Angular||5 Seconds
|-style="background:#cccccc"
|Levels||0.01 ft. Bench Levels, Turns, etc. 0.01 ft. on Concrete 0.1ft. All Others
|}

==238.2.12 Subdivision or lot ties==

The survey includes ties between the survey tangent line, and the legal land survey corner monuments that may be recorded subdivision or lot corner monuments. At least two ties are required in each subdivision or lot. The best ties are to the subdivision corner monuments nearest the highway survey line. The ties are measured and recorded in bound notebooks, similar to the requirements for land survey corner monuments. The ties include a complete and definite description of the monument being tied. The project development engineer is advised early in the survey concerning the corner monuments that need to be re-established or witnessed, so that this work can be completed and the information added to the plans prior to submittal of the plans to [http://wwwi/intranet/rw/ Right of Way].

==238.2.13 Reestablishing corner monuments==

The county surveyor or a registered land surveyor may witness or reestablish survey corner monuments. Establishment of reference monuments for corners that MoDOT might destroy will require the submittal of “temporary” corner forms to the Department of Natural Resources. These monuments are considered a reference monument set for the purpose of reestablishment of a permanent monument in the previous corner position when the project is complete. Corners that are in or near roadways or in other unsafe areas like medians will require establishment of permanent reference monuments in a suitable area on the right of way between the ditch slope and the utility easement. Standard monuments for replacing corners are to be used.

===238.2.13.1 Preservation of Existing Recorded Boundary Marker===

In the event that corners of the United State Public Land Survey System, property boundary markers of record, or vertical and horizontal control stations are in jeopardy of being disturbed by a MoDOT project, it shall be the responsibility of the project Professional Land Surveyor to preserve the positional location of these monuments following the guidelines below:

:1. Monuments shall be referenced to the 1983 Missouri State Plane Coordinate System.

:2. Documentation, preservation and relocation of these findings shall be prepared either using an approved agency form if applicable or by recording a Boundary Resurvey plat with the County Recorder of Deeds in which the project resides.

===238.2.13.2 Temporary Easements===

When MoDOT is acquiring a Temporary Easement for construction, the project surveyor shall research the records, conduct a field survey to locate all existing recorded boundary markers that are on or near the Commission’s boundary, and re-monument all boundary markers of record disturbed by construction. All other evidence not of record or its origin cannot be determined, must be listed in a recovery table using state plane coordinates, and shown on the Boundary Resurvey plat of the existing Missouri Highways and Transportation Commission (MHTC) boundaries. This shall be executed in compliance with applicable rules for surveys administered by the Missouri Board for Architects, Professional Engineers and Professional Land Surveyors defined in [http://www.sos.mo.gov/adrules/csr/current/20csr/20c2030-16.pdf 20 CSR 2030-16] and pertinent laws from [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText060.html Missouri Revised Statutes Chapter 60], [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText226.html Chapter 226] and [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText327.html Chapter 327].

The intent of EPG 238.2.13.2 is to preserve the location of all existing recorded evidence potentially in jeopardy of being disturbed by a construction project along the Commission’s boundary and since original boundaries are not being altered by these actions, a complete survey of any adjoining properties will not be required.

==238.2.14 Monumenting Right of Way==

To reduce the need for multiple staking of the right of way line, permanent markers will normally be set by the design survey party prior to or at the time of condemnation for conventional surveys. [[media:238.2 RW Markers.pdf|Specific types of marker]] and markings are used for conventional surveys. In location surveys, monuments must be set according to the following guidelines and the Missouri Minimum Standards for Land Surveys.

Permanent monuments are set prior to the recording of the location survey plan if they will not be moved or destroyed by construction activities within six months of their installation. Until the right of way acquisition is completed, semi permanent monuments may be used. If the required permanent monuments will be disturbed by utility adjustment or construction activity, semi permanent monuments can remain until 12 months after the location survey plan is recorded. In any event, permanent monuments must be installed within 12 months after the plan has been recorded.

The monumentation of right of way can only be performed under the supervision of a department project surveyor or consultant land surveyor, and only as part of a survey. Right of way monumentation by unauthorized department personal is not allowed. This not only applies to compliant monumentation, but also to any marking placed along the highway corridor near or on the right of way lines with the intention of representing either the precise or approximate location of right of way.

===238.2.14.1 Monuments to be set on Highway Corridors===

Highway corridors will be monumented with devices complying with criteria set forth in state statutes. The devices are set at the location of right of way breaks, which represent the “called to” locations of the land description of the highway corridor.

While variation may be necessary due to terrain, the setting of the monument must comply with permanent monument standards. The standard department monument consists of a 5/8 in. steel rod 24 in. long. This rod will have a permanently attached 2 in. diameter aluminum cap. The name of the department, as well as the license number of the project surveyor will be [[media:238.2.6 RW Monument Cap.pdf|stamped on the cap]]. Cap installation details are shown on [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/60200.pdf Standard Plan 602.00].

The monument must be accompanied by a witness post offset from the monument itself by 1 ft. along the right of way line. The [[media:238.2.7 RW Witness Post Decal.pdf|witness post]] is a white carsonite post 6 ft. long. A department informational decal is attached to the “highway” side of the post. Post installation details are shown on [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/standards_and_specs/documents/60200.pdf Standard Plan 602.00].

===238.2.14.2 Monuments to be set on Permanent Easements===

Permanent easements will be monumented with devices complying with criteria set forth in state statutes. The standard department monument for permanent easements consist of a steel or aluminum rod marker not less than one-half inch (1/2") in diameter and not less than eighteen inches (18") in length and having a plastic or aluminum cap.

===238.2.14.3 Monumenting Landowner's Property Lines When Requested===

MoDOT project surveyors, when requested by Right of Way and provided with a existing survey of the property owners land, will monument the Land owners new property pins at the intersection of the new MoDOT boundary line and the owners side lines in compliance with applicable rules for surveys administered by the Missouri Board for Architects, Professional Engineers and Professional Land Surveyors defined in [http://www.sos.mo.gov/adrules/csr/current/20csr/20csr.asp#20-2030 20 CSR 2030] and pertinent laws from Missouri Revised Statutes [http://www.moga.mo.gov/statutes/C060.HTM Chapter 60], [http://www.moga.mo.gov/statutes/C226.HTM Chapter 226] and [http://www.moga.mo.gov/statutes/C327.HTM Chapter 327].

==238.2.15 Right of Way Description==

The right of way description must be written to describe and locate the right of way corridor as a unique parcel of land (for additional information, refer to [[236.4 Description Writing and Titles#236.4.6 The Description|236.4 Description Writing and Titles]]). This description will:
* Be based on the location survey
* Be concise
* Contain title identity
* Contain measured dimensions and highway stationing in ground units
* Contain measurement data that describes the geometric area of the corridor and closes mathematically
* Contains information that does not lend to alternate interpretations and
* Be written to facilitate the relocation of the corridor by a professional land surveyor.
The right of way description will be by referral, making calls to the location survey plan. The description must also contain calls to the right of way monuments and their station values. Written to locate the highway centerline relative to nearby, measured corners of the public survey system, the description will follow the form of a strip conveyance, metes and bounds or a combination of the two.

==238.2.16 Location surveys==

Location surveys are performed to provide the department a clear and accurate record and marking of the highway corridor right of way lines and breaks. Location surveys include the execution of a survey compliant with the Missouri Minimum Standards for Property Boundary Surveys ([http://sos.mo.gov/adrules/csr/current/20csr/20c2030-16.pdf 20 CSR 2030-16.010 through 20 CSR 2030-16.110]) and the development of a [[238.2_Land_Surveying#238.2.1.18 Location Survey Plan|Location Survey Plan]] that serves as the recordable survey plat. Associated to the survey and plan is a land description of the highway right of way containing two basic elements

* Description of the interest being conveyed
* Description of the land itself.

The description will be in the manner of a description by referral, making reference calls to the right of way survey plan, as well as calls to the survey and all right of way monumentation.

==238.2.17 Professional Land Surveyor Review==

Legal descriptions attached to a recordable document for both the acquisition of property rights (negotiated and condemned) and the conveyance of property rights, which affect the location of the properties boundary lines are required to have a Professional Land Surveyors (PLS) signature and seal.

The PLS assigned to a project will verify that the property descriptions written for acquisition of property rights (negotiated and condemned) and conveyance of property rights, are based on a legal survey tied to the PLS system. In the event the district PLS prepares the description, the review may be skipped as outlined in the EPG.

Prior to any right of way being negotiated, the PLS will review all descriptions if written by others to ensure these descriptions meet the following criteria:

:1) A Professional Land Surveyor surveyed any description of property ties to the Public Land Survey System (PLSS) used in deeds. This would include the description of the centerline if used to tie the property to the PLSS or direct traverse ties to monuments in the PLSS.

:2) Descriptions written follow guidance as described in the Engineering Policy Guide.

:3) Leased property descriptions must be reviewed and approved by the district PLS.

Once satisfied with the review, the PLS will sign and affix the PLS's seal to the property description attached to the recordable document. This includes the PLS review and signed and sealed legal descriptions included in deeds conveying property exactly as it was acquired.

In situations where multiple recordable documents are prepared to release all outstanding interest in properties being acquired, it is not necessary to obtain multiple original exhibits. A copy of the property description signed and sealed by a PLS may be attached to the recordable document.

The signature and seal of the PLS on legal descriptions is not required in the following situations because the locations of the boundary lines are not affected:

:* When the only property right being acquired or conveyed is access rights.
:* When the only property right being acquired is a temporary easement.
:* When the entire property is being acquired, and the legal description is being copied from the last deed of record.
:* When an access parcel is being conveyed exactly as it was acquired.

==238.2.18 Location Survey Plan==

Location surveys are planned and performed according to the following procedures as well as in compliance with applicable rules for surveys administered by the Missouri Board for Architects, Professional Engineers and Professional Land Surveyors defined in [http://sos.mo.gov/adrules/csr/current/20csr/20csr.asp#20-2030 20 CSR 2030] and pertinent laws from Missouri Revised Statutes chapters [http://www.moga.mo.gov/STATUTES/C060.HTM 60], [http://www.moga.mo.gov/STATUTES/C226.HTM 226] and [http://www.moga.mo.gov/STATUTES/C327.HTM 327]. All survey work will be done in English units. There may be special circumstances where the project surveyor cannot comply with some provisions of the minimum standards. If the survey deviates from these minimum standards, it should be documented, justified and archived by the project surveyor. Minimum standards require that such deviation be shown, described, and justified on the right of way survey plan. Where conditions require the use of procedures not covered in the minimum standards, the Design Division may be consulted to establish criteria and procedures for those conditions.

===238.2.18.1 Criteria===

The essential purpose of the location survey plan is to:

:*represent the correct size and shape of the corridor to scale,
:*to define by dimension this size and shape,
:*to locate the right of way corridor within the United States Public Land Survey System,
:*to specify locative points such as physical monuments, planimetric features, accessories, etc.,
:*show title identity and
:*show data that lends authority to the plan, including date, surveyor’s name, certificate of accuracy and surveyor’s stamp and signature.

The right of way survey plan should be developed on nominal size (22 in. x34 in.) sheets. [[Media:238.2 Location Survey Plan Example.pdf|An example]] location survey plan sheet is available. The specifications for the location survey plan should conform to all of the following provisions, where applicable:

:*The location survey plan should be a drawing made to a convenient scale on the type of material consistent with the purpose and permanency required. The project surveyor will also archive the plan in digital format. The project surveyor will sign and seal the location survey plan. The plan should be the official plat and should take precedence over the digital data.
:*The location plan should show the department’s name and the date of certification.
:*The plan should bear the signature and seal of the project surveyor in responsible charge. Whenever more than one (1) sheet must be used to accurately portray the survey, each sheet should bear the signature and seal of the project surveyor.
:*Lettering on the location survey plan presented to the recorder should be no smaller than eight-hundredths in. (0.08 in.) tall. All characters should be open, well-rounded and of uniform width.
:*The direction of boundary lines on the plan should be shown by direct angles between established lines or by azimuths or bearings based upon the Missouri Coordinate System of 1983. The direction reference system should be clearly described on the plat and must be retraceable for future surveys.
:*A prominent north arrow should be drawn on every sheet.
:*Complete dimensions (distances, directions, and curve data) of the right of way corridor.
:*All dimensions should be shown in feet and decimal parts thereof. All plan dimensions or highway stations should be given as horizontal distances at the ground surface. A written scale should be noted on all plans.
:*All vertical dimensions should be shown by elevations above an established or assumed datum.
:*Measurements and calculated areas will be shown on the plan to a number of significant figures representative of the actual precision of the measurements.
:*Curved lines should show at least two (2) elements of the curve and preferably these three (3): radius, central angle and length of arc. When not tangent to the preceding and or succeeding course, the bearing or angle of either the initial tangent, radial line or long chord should be shown. Pertinent information on compound curves should be shown.
:*The survey should show sufficient data (distances and directions) to positively locate the right-of-way surveyed within the United States Public Land Survey. If the survey cannot be located by either of the previously mentioned provisions, it must be referenced to other lines and points sufficiently established by record.
:*All controlling corners accepted or restored should be shown or noted on the plat.
:*All controlling corner physical monuments either found or set should be shown and described on the plan. A note or symbol should show which were found and which were set.
:*The class of property should be noted on the plan.
:*Any material variation between measured and record dimensions should be noted on the plan.

===238.2.18.2 Standardization===

Surveys, plans and descriptions should be standardized to the greatest extent throughout the department to promote efficiency, uniformity and ease of data analysis. Standardization includes the use of standard sheets, forms, procedures, monuments, archiving and procedures. A checklist for review of survey plats for compliance with Missouri Minimum Standards for property boundary surveys should be completed for every Location Survey Plat made for the department. A sample generic checklist for plat review, provided by the State Land Surveyor’s office, is shown in [http://spexternalsignin/sites/de/BlogUploads/05-10-2018_SurveyPlatCheckList_DE.docx Form 238.2.18.2 Plat Review Checklist].

===238.2.18.3 Project Responsibility===

When a location survey is needed, the district design engineer will appoint a project surveyor and assign a survey party and design technicians to the project for execution of the survey and the preparation of plans. The district right of way manager will assign specialists from that division to the survey project for the purpose of research and description writing. The project surveyor will supervise members of the project team. In the case of a right of way survey that is called for as part of a larger highway project, the project surveyor is an active participant on the project development team and works in partnership with the project manager to provide direction. The project surveyor is responsible for and in charge of all phases of the survey, the plan preparation, and description writing. Project phases fall in the general order of:

:* title evidence research consisting of the written evidence found in deeds, abstracts, title policies and plats,
:* evidence research of county records of surveys, field books, notes, maps, General Land Office (GLO) survey records, county surveyor records, records from the State Land Surveyor’s office,
:* inspect the parcels and search for existing monuments,
:* take and evaluate testimony evidence, particularly that associated to existing monuments,
:* make measurements to existing monuments and public corners,
:* perform calculations and analyze the results,
:* make conclusions in accordance with the priorities of evidence,
:* make measurements to set new monuments based on conclusions,
:* prepare survey plans and write descriptions and
:* ensure Location Survey Plans are recorded at the county courthouse.

===238.2.18.4 Project Chronology===

While each survey project is unique and may pose its own particular adjustments to procedures, the following is provided as a general guideline for orderly project conduct and execution.

'''Evidence Gathering'''

Collecting and compiling available records containing pertinent information associated to the lands of the survey project area.

:*Compile copies of assessor’s maps and aerial photomaps.
:*Acquire names and addresses of possible affected parties.
:*Acquire deeds and plats for affected properties.
:*Acquire title records and abstracts (may include deeds of record, title certification, etc.).
:*Compile evidence from recorded surveys.
:*Gather highway plans in the affected area.
:*Field books from previous surveys in the area.
:*Gather right of way deeds.
:*Search records for available survey control.
:*Attain copies of USGS quad maps for the project area.
:*Acquire copies of aerial photography for the area.
:*Attain corner certification records.
:*Acquire descriptions, plats and notes from original government surveys.
:*Attain copies of survey plats and notes that have been made by county surveyors and private surveyors over the time frame from the original surveys to current date.
:*Acquire geodetic control data for the project area. Evidence may have to be expanded to include other resources and other data such as unrecorded devices that may be provided from affected parties, private surveys that have been performed in the area, title policies for affected lands, limits of incorporation, etc.

'''Preliminary Field Survey'''

The field survey work to inspect the project location and affected parcels. Physical evidence may be recovered as well as initial measurements made.

:*Prior to the preliminary field survey, contact letters are to be sent to all possible affected parties.
:*During field reconnaissance and contacts with affected parties, witness evidence may be taken and locations of existing monuments and evidence of possession may be recovered.
:*Search and recover monuments called for in written conveyances acquired from title research. Locate accessories where monument evidence may not be found.
:*Locate cultural features and activities that may serve as evidence of possession.
:*Search for and recover public land corners.
:*Perform control survey throughout the project area. Establish control stations within the project that will facilitate accurate measurements to recovered evidence and public corners.
:*Make measurements and records of recovered evidence and public corners.

'''Evidence and Survey Analysis'''

The compilation and analysis of gathered evidence and results of field measurements includes the following:

:*Perform mathematical checks of control survey traverses. Check all measurement and observation data.
:*Execute appropriate data adjustments. Perform additional measurements if necessary.
:*Confirm compliance with the survey tolerances found in minimum standards.
:*Perform computations for any necessary public land corner reestablishment.
:*Prepare public corner certification documents.
:*Execute field survey needed for any public corner reestablishment.
:*File the certification documents with the State Land Surveyor.

'''Final Field Survey'''

The measuring and placing of the right of way monuments and the development of the location survey plan includes the folowing.

:*Check layout computations for point locations of right of way corridor breaks.
:*Review prior documents, measurements and check computations. Prepare the location survey plan and record.
:*Perform a staking survey prior to acquisition in the area of each parcel. Staking survey should include placing permanent monuments at locations of right of way breaks and permanent easements as well as temporary monuments at the corners of temporary easements.
:*Place a [[Media:238.2.7 RW Witness Post Decal.pdf|witness post]] at Location Survey monument locations on right of way. It is not necessary to place witness posts on any easement point unless it is at a Location Survey monument.
:*Confirm land descriptions are written by referral, with calls to the right of way survey plan, the monuments and the survey.

===238.2.18.5 Use of the Project Surveyor’s Seal===

Department project surveyors should certify location surveys they perform. Certification of the survey is by their signature and application of seal to the right of way survey plan or department parcel plats. Application of the certification must conform to the rules for use of the seal, with particular attention given to the following rule: "The signing and sealing of plats, surveys, drawings, documents, specifications, estimates, reports and other documents or instruments not prepared by the registered land surveyor or under his/her immediate personal supervision is prohibited." Survey project assignments must be organized in such manner the project surveyor is placed in a position of responsibility and authority of the work to which the surveyor signs and seals. To file or record any map, plat, or survey, requires the personal seal and signature of the professional land surveyor by whom or under whose authority and supervision the map, plat or survey was prepared.

===238.2.18.6 Recording the Location Survey Plan===

It is the district's responsibility to ensure the final survey is completed (all permanent markers set) and the location survey plan is recorded as soon as possible after a project has advanced to the point that the permanent monuments will not obstruct construction activities. As the project progresses, the District Land Survey Manager should contact the Resident Engineer to determine the earliest possible time the final survey can be performed without risk of the contractor disturbing any of the permanent markers. In most cases, the final survey can begin, and perhaps even be completed, prior to completion of the project. A SiteManager[[image:bulldozer.jpg|20px]] pop-up message to the RE will occur when the project is approximately 80% complete to remind the RE to contact the DDE and District Land Survey Manager to schedule the final survey work if the survey has not already begun.

Once the Location Survey Plan is completed and sealed by the project surveyor, it should be delivered promptly to the District Right of Way Manager for filing with the county recorder’s office.

[[category:238 Surveying Activities|238.02]]

Main Page

2018-06-22T18:17:08Z

EPGsysop:

[[Image:EPG 2013b.jpg|1030px|center]]

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:0px; border:3px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 100%; background:#E3C87E" width="1030px" align="center"
|-
|rowspan="2" align="right" |'''HELPFUL EPG VIDEOS: || ||align="left"|''' <BIG>'''[[media:Logging into the EPG.wmv|•Logging into the EPG]] ||align="left"|''' <BIG>'''[[media:Help Finding EPG Info.wmv|•Finding Info in the EPG]]'''
|-
| ||align="left" colspan="2"|''' <Big>[[media:Article History and Receiving.wmv|•Article History & How to Receive EMails When Articles are Revised]]
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''___________'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''<Big>Want help on how to update your EPG guidance?  It is available at [[:Help Article#EPG Approval Process|EPG Approval Process]].'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''___________'''
|-
|colspan="4" align="center"| '''<Big>[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/highwayspecs.htm The Electronic MoDOT Spec Book for Mobile Devices] is now available. You may also [https://www6.modot.mo.gov/eMoDOTWeb/jsp/signon/signon.jsp sign up for E-Update notices]. To receive notices regarding Engineering Policy Revisions, select "Engineering Policy" then mark the appropriate subjects of interest. '''
|}

<div style="padding-bottom: .3em; margin: 0 .5em .5em"></div>
{| cellspacing="3"
|- valign="top" width="100%"
|style="border: 1px solid #696969; color: #000; background-color: #A9A9A9"|<big><center>'''WELCOME'''</center></big>
| valign="top" width="60%" cellspacing="3" cellpadding="3" style="border: 1px solid #FF8C00; background:#FFA500" align="center"|'''<big>RECENT POLICY CHANGES IN THE EPG</big>'''
|-
|valign="top" style="border: 1px solid #A9A9A9; color: #000; background-color: #F8F8FF"|
{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 23, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> Employees at the Kansas City District General Services Garage get a demonstration of Jeff, the [http://www.modot.org/kansascity/newrelease/District4Release.shtml?action=displaySSI&newsId=215977 new, agile mini-robot] (lower center), that will be used to conduct some surveys and pipe inspections. The robot will spare workers from dangerous situations such as cave-ins. </center>''']]
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 18, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> The new [http://www.modot.org/northeast/newsandinformation/District3Release.shtml?action=displaySSI&newsId=215953 I-70 interchange at Warrenton] will include three roundabouts. The $8.5 million project is expected to be completed this fall. </center>''']]
|-
|[[image:Main Page May 7, 2018.jpg|center|400px|thumb|''' <center> [https://paceconstructionstl.com/ Pace Construction] crews work on the final preparations to complete a [http://www.modot.org/stlouis/major_projects/I-44atRoute141DesignBuild.htm new flyover ramp between Rte. 141 and I-44] in Valley Park. The ramp is one portion of a [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=Category:139_Design_-_Build design-build construction project] to be completed by July 15 that reduces congestion and improves traffic flow through and in the vicinity of the interchange. </center>''']]
|}

MoDOT has made great strides to build a good transportation system and increase taxpayers' trust in its ability to deliver what was promised. Innovative concepts, such as [[:Category:143 Practical Design|Practical Design]] and [[:Category:139 Design - Build|design-build]], were used to deliver those commitments and have made MoDOT a leader in the transportation industry.

These forward-thinking, innovative concepts are reflected in the ''ENGINEERING POLICY GUIDE'' (EPG). This document provides a single reference for all engineering and engineering-related guidance by combining the former [http://sharepoint/sites/de/RealEstate/SitePages/Home.aspx Right of Way], [http://sharepoint/sites/de/Pages/default.aspx Design], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/br/pages/default.aspx Bridge], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/cm/Pages/default.aspx Construction], [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/tr/Pages/default.aspx Traffic] and [http://sharepoint/systemdelivery/mt/default.aspx Maintenance] manuals.

MediaWiki, the engine behind the Wikipedia on the World Wide Web, is the software delivering the EPG. Over 50 million hits on the EPG endorse this format to be easy to navigate and pleasing to read. A small [[:Help:Contents|'''HELP ARTICLE''']] is included to assist with helpful hints on how to use the EPG as well as other points of interest.

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="background-color: #F8F8FF"
|-
|colspan="5" | '''Perhaps you've wondered how many hits the most popular EPG articles have. As of late June, the numbers of hits are:'''
|-
|'''20.''' [[:Category:136 Local Public Agency (LPA) Policy|EPG 136]]|| 171278
|| '''10.''' [[751.5 Standard Details|EPG 751.5]]|| align="right"| 241641
|-
|'''19.''' [[:Category:134 Engineering Professional Services|EPG 134]]|| 180109 || '''9.''' [[616.23 Traffic Control for Field Operations|EPG 616.23]]||align="right"| 276044
|-
|'''18.''' [[136.4 Consultant Selection and Consultant Contract Management|EPG 136.4]]|| 180574 || '''8.''' [[:Category:600 INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION|EPG 600]]||align="right"| 285214
|-
|'''17.''' [[751.40 Widening and Repair (Non-LRFD)|EPG 751.40]]|| 180743 || '''7.''' [[:Category:100 GENERAL|EPG 100]]||align="right"| 335130
|-
|'''16.''' [[620.2 Pavement and Curb Markings (MUTCD Chapter 3B)|EPG 620.2]]|| 191789 || '''6.''' [[:Category:700 STRUCTURES AND HYDRAULICS|EPG 700]]||align="right"| 352151
|-
|'''15.''' [[:Category:903 Highway Signing|EPG 903]]|| 200037 || '''5.''' [[:Category:900 TRAFFIC CONTROL|EPG 900]]||align="right"| 370826
|-
|'''14.''' [[:Category:200 GEOMETRICS|EPG 200]]|| 211862 || '''4.''' [[136.12 Figures, Glossary and Other Useful Links|EPG 136.12]] ||align="right"| 393784
|-
|'''13.''' [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50]]|| 214538 || '''3.''' [[:Category:101 Standard Forms|EPG 101]]||align="right"| 396987
|-
|'''12.''' [[136.9 Plans, Specs and Estimates (PSE)|EPG 136.9]]|| 221105 || '''2.''' [[:Category:751 LRFD Bridge Design Guidelines|EPG 751]]||align="right"| 459831
|-
|width="130"|'''11.''' [[:Category:616 Temporary Traffic Control|EPG 616]]|| 225696 || width="150"| '''1.''' EPG Main Page||align="right"| 3170836
|}

|valign="top" cellspacinepgg="0" cellpadding="5" style="border: 1px solid #FFA500; background:#ffdead"|
'''[[751.11 Bearings#ASTM F1554 Grade 105 anchor bolts|Design of Elastomeric Bearings' Anchor Bolts]]'''

6/5/18: ASTM F1554 Grade 105 anchor bolts may be used when Grade 55 is not adequate.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#(B3.2)|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

6/1/18: Note B3.2 was clarified.

'''[[751.10 General Superstructure#751.10.3.1 Type, Alignment and Spacing|EPG 751.10.3 Bridge Deck Drainage - Slab Drains]]'''

5/24/18: Guidance now states the allowed slab drain color coatings.

'''[[106.12 Pre-Acceptance Lists (PAL)#Upon receipt and review|EPG 106.12 PAL Material Arrival Confirmation]]'''

5/22/18: Pre-Acceptance Identification Tag guidance was clarified to allow for identifying PAL material shipped to MoDOT projects.

'''[[:Category:806 Pollution, Erosion and Sediment Control#Design Guidance|EPG 806.7 Temporary Erosion Control Blankets Design Guidance]]'''

5/17/18: The types of erosion control blankets were increased and guidance now includes a matrix for choosing blanket types based on the region, length of slope and the necessary blanket duration.

'''2-loop and 3-loop Concrete Barriers'''

5/17/18: In [[616.19 Quality Standards for Temporary Traffic Control Devices#2- and 3-Loop Type F|EPG 616.19.2.5 Temporary Traffic Barriers]] and [[617.2 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 617#Temporary Concrete Traffic Barrier|EPG 617.2 Construction Inspection Guidelines for Sec 617]], guidance was clarified for anchoring 2-loop and 3-loop concrete barriers on asphalt, composite and concrete pavements in work zones.

'''Design Agreements and Contracts'''

5/14/18: Those who need to review [[153.8 Design#DE43|DE43, DE44 and DE46-49]] prior to contractual execution has been updated.

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#Uniformed Services|Three new Federal Aid Projects Posters]]'''

5/11/18: Three new posters are required to be displayed on Federal-Aid project sites: [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/27_USERRA.pdf Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act (USERRA)],
[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/28e_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (English)] and [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/29s_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (Spanish)].

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2|EPG 110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2]]'''

5/9/18: New guidance agreed to by the DOL is now available about the DOL's PW-2 form.

'''[[231.4 Shoulder Width#A minimum shy distance at least|EPG 231.4 Shoulder Width]]'''

5/9/18: Guidance about guardrail placement from the edge of the shoulder was clarified.

'''[[751.1 Preliminary Design#751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating|EPG 751.1.3.9 Environmental Considerations: Asbestos, Lead and Recoating]]'''

5/3/18: New bridge preliminary design guidance for assessing asbestos and lead considerations for structure removal, rehabs and recoatings as well as how to address these considerations on the Bridge Memorandum.

'''[[237.14 Electronic Design Data Delivery#237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction|EPG 237.14.3.6 Electronic Design Data for MoDOT Construction]]'''

5/2/18: Guidance about the initial request for the Construction files has been clarified.

'''Outdoor Advertising'''

4/30/18: Guidance in [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.8.5 Vegetation Site Inspection|EPG 236.16.8.5 Vegetation Site Inspection]], [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.4 Cutting of Vegetation|EPG 236.16.15.4 Cutting of Vegetation]], [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.6 Trimming of Trees|EPG 236.16.15.6 Trimming of Trees]] and [[236.16 Outdoor Advertising#236.16.15.9 Releasing a Vegetation Permit|EPG 236.16.15.9 Releasing a Vegetation Permit]] have been impacted by Administrative Rule revisions.

'''[[102.2 Contractor Performance Rating System#102.2.7 Performance Discussion|EPG 102.2.7 Performance Discussion]]'''

4/27/18: Guidance for when certified mail is necessary for the Contractor Performance Rating has been updated.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#(E2.27)|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

4/25/18: A new standard detailing note about deviations in galvanized pile penetration is now available.

'''[[903.4 Overhead Sign Mounting#The standard footing for steel and aluminum box truss|EPG 903.4.6 Span, Cantilever and Butterfly Box Trusses]]'''

4/16/18: Guidance about drilled shaft footings has been clarified. MoDOT may be the designer of the footing and if not, others will have to submit signed and sealed drawings.

'''[[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes|EPG 751.50 Standard Detailing Notes]]'''

4/13/18: In [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#D. Temporary Bridge (Notes for Bridge Standard Drawings)|EPG 751.50 D. Temporary Bridge]], revisions include a new clarifying note D1.5 and replacing an archaic option in D1.21 with the current option. In [[751.50 Standard Detailing Notes#H9. Thrie Beam and Other Rail Types (Notes for Bridge Standard Drawings)|EPG 751.50 H9. Thrie Beam and Other Rail Types]], revisions include the new H9.29 for two thrie beam standard drawings.

'''[[751.8 LRFD Concrete Box Culverts#751.8.3.4 Wing Walls on Rock|EPG 751.8.3.4 Wing Walls on Rock]]'''

4/11/18: New guidance for culvert wing walls on rock is now available.

'''Inclusion of DOL Wage Rates In Contracts'''

4/10/2018: In [[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#110.1 Wage Rates (Guidance for Sec 110.1)|EPG 110.1 Wage Rates]], guidance about including the correct wage rate order from the Dept. of Labor on MoDOT projects was updated.

'''[[127.29 Storm Water#Special Watersheds where MoDOT|Special Watersheds where MoDOT has been assigned a Wasteload Allocation]]'''

4/9/18: Guidance to go with the MDNR permit agreement has been added.

'''[[:Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements#Required Notices and Posters|Project Bulletin Board Inspection Rate]] '''

4/5/18: The bulletin board inspection rate was revised from every two months to every three months.

'''[[:Category:749 Hydrologic Analysis#749.5.3 Time of Concentration|EPG 749.5.3 Time of Concentration]]'''

4/5/18: Time of Concentration guidance was revised by providing an optional combination of Kirby-Hathaway and Kirpich equations and adding the optional low slope factor presented in new research.

'''[[media:747 Bridge Survey Report April 2018.docx|Bridge Survey Report]]'''

4/4/18: The latest version of this form is now available.

'''[[237.13 Contract Plan File Name Convention#237.13.5 Example Set of Electronic Design Data|EPG 237.13.5 Example Set of Electronic Design Data]]'''

4/3/18: This chart has been updated with current examples.

'''[[236.5 Property Management#236.5.16 Legal Opinion of Title|EPG 236.5.16.1 Fee Simple vs. Less Than Fee Simple Interest]]'''

4/2/18: Clarified guidance about the legal title of opinion for excess property appraised for $25,000 or less that includes any references to right of way in the acquisition deed.

Category:134 Engineering Professional Services

2018-06-22T14:28:21Z

EPGsysop: /* 134.1.1 Federal Law */ updated broken CFR 172.3 link

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" align="right"
|-
|[[Image:EPSG pic.jpg|right|400px]]
|-
|
{| style="padding: 0.3em; text-align: left; margin-left:9px; border: 2px solid #cccccc; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="395px" align="right"
|-
|align="center"|'''Helpful Links for Engineering Policy'''
|-
|[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/BridgeSpecialProvisions.htm Bridge Special Provisions]
|-
|[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/bridgestandards.htm Bridge Standard Drawings]
|-
|[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/geopakstandards.htm GEOPAK and Microstation Drawing Standards]
|-
|[http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/ProjectCostEstimation.htm Project Cost Estimation]
|-
|[http://ghepg02/index.php?title=Category%3A321_Geotechnical_Engineering EPG 321 Geotechnical Engineering]
|-
|[http://gpsweb3.modot.mo.gov MoDOT GPS Reference Station Network]
|-
|[http://contribute.modot.mo.gov/business/consultant_resources/documents/LPABrochure04.17.13.pdf Engineering Consultant Services Brochure]
|}
|}

==134.1 Introduction==

When projected workloads are high and available MoDOT staffing resources are limited, the need may arise to solicit for consultant services. EPG 134 Engineering Professional Services is a guide for soliciting, selecting and managing consultant contracts with MoDOT. Professional services are defined under the federal law, The Brooks Act, 40 USC 1102. Most consulting services that MoDOT utilizes fall under the federal description of professional services, therefore MoDOT must follow the federal guidelines outlined in the Brooks Act for soliciting and selecting a consultant.

===134.1.1 Federal Law===
The Brooks Act, [https://www.gpo.gov/fdsys/pkg/USCODE-2012-title40/html/USCODE-2012-title40-subtitleI-chap11.htm 40 USC 1101 – 1104], [https://www.law.cornell.edu/cfr/text/23/172.3 23 CFR 172.3] (Public Law 92-582, 1972) requires agencies to “promote open competition by advertising, ranking, selecting and negotiating contracts based on demonstrated competence and qualifications for the type of engineering and design services being procured, and at a fair and reasonable price.” This requirement applies to all federally funded projects. This is commonly referred to as Qualifications Based Selection or QBS, meaning a firm is chosen based on qualifications and not price.

===134.1.2 State Law===
Commonly referred to as the “Mini-Brooks Act”, the State of Missouri, in [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/00800002851.html sections 8.285 thru 8.291 RsMO], requires Qualification Based Selection (QBS) for all architectural, engineering and land surveying professional services and reflects the language contained in the federal legislation. This requirement applies to ALL projects in Missouri regardless if it contains federal funds or not. Keep in mind that the federal laws supersede the state laws if the project has federal funding.

===134.1.3 Consultant Qualification===
{| style="padding: 0.3em; text-align: left; margin-left:9px; border: 2px solid #cccccc; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="375px" align="right"
|-
|align="center"|'''Forms and Figures'''
|-
|[[media:134.2.2 July 11 2017.doc|Fig. 134.2.2 Processing Standard Consultant Contracts Checklist]]
|-
|[[media:134.2.2.2 Nov 2017.docx|Fig. 134.2.2.2, Solicitation and Request Letter]]
|-
|[[media:134.2.2.5.1 May 2017.doc|Fig. 134.2.2.5.1, Consultant Rating Form]]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/LPA/134.2.2.5.2.doc Fig. 134.2.2.5.2, Consultant Selection Rating Summary]
|-
|[[media:134.2.2.5.3 June 2016.docx|Fig. 134.2.2.5.3, Consultant Selection Approval Letter]]
|-
|[[media:134.2.2.5.4 June 2016.doc|Fig. 134.2.2.5.4, PSC Review of Short List]]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/LPA/134.2.2.5.5.doc Fig. 134.2.2.5.5, Sample Criteria and Point Values for Rating Presentations/Interviews]
|-
|[[media:134.2.2.5.6 2016.docx|Fig. 134.2.2.5.6, Invitation to Present]]
|-
|[[media:134.2.2.5.7 2016.docx|Fig. 134.2.2.5.7, Sample Letter to Interview ]]
|-
|[[media:134.2.4 July 11 2017.doc|Fig. 134.2.4 Processing On-Call/MOU Consultant Contracts Checklist]]
|-
|[[media:134.3.1 2017.doc|Fig. 134.3.1, District Checklist for Reviewing Executed Consultant Contracts]]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/LPA/134.3.2.pdf Fig. 134.3.2, MoDOT Allowable Profit Curve ]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/LPA/134.3.6.1.1%20Common%20Unallowable%20Costs.pdf Fig. 134.3.6.1.1, Common Unallowable Costs]
|-
|[http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/LPA/134.3.6.1.2.pdf Fig. 134.3.6.1.2, Overhead Schedule Example ]
|-
|[[media:134.4.1 June 2016.docx|Fig. 134.4.1, PSC Approval to Execute Contract ]]
|-
|[[media:134.4.2 2016.docx|Fig. 134.4.2, Notice to Proceed (NTP) Letter ]]
|-
|[[media:134.5.1.1 2013.xlsx|Fig. 134.5.1.1, Blank Consultant Invoice ]]
|-
|[[media:134.5.1.2 July 31, 2012.docx|Fig. 134.5.1.2, MoDOT Consultant Invoice Checklist ]]
|-
|[[media:134.5.1.3 2016.xlsx|Fig. 134.5.1.3, Blank Consultant Invoice - Hourly Rate Contracts (only)]]
|-
|[[media:134.5.1.4.docx|Fig. 134.5.1.4, MoDOT Consultant Invoice Checklist - Hourly Rate Contracts (only)]]
|-
|[[media:134.5.1.5 Sept 2012.xlsx|Fig. 134.5.1.5, Example Invoice ]]
|-
|[[media:134.5.2 2017.docx|Fig. 134.5.2, PSC Approval to Execute Supplemental Agreement ]]
|-
|align="center"|'''Additional Information'''
|-
|[[237.14 Electronic Design Data Delivery#237.14.4 Specifications of CADD Deliverable Contract Plans for Consultants|EPG 237.14.4 Specifications of Computer Deliverable Contract Plans]]
|}
Effective January 1, 2013, all prime consultants must be prequalified to perform engineering services on any project. To become prequalified the consultant will be required to do the following:

:1. Statement of Qualifications (SOQ) on file with MoDOT

:2. Registered to do business in Missouri (Certificate of Good Standing) and hold a certificate of authority with the Missouri Board for Architects, Professional Engineers, Professional Land Surveyors and Professional Landscape Architects. (Note: A Certificate of Authority is not required for sole proprietorships or partnerships. It is only required if the firm is incorporated or registered as a limited liability company. For sole proprietorships and/or partnerships, individual professional license certificates must be submitted in lieu of the Certificate of Authority. In addition, the certificate of authority is not required for firms that do work outside the jurisdiction of the Missouri Board for Architects, Professional Engineers, Professional Land Surveyors and Professional Landscape Architects.)

:3. Have current E-Verify MOU and E-Verify Affidavit
::* E-Verify MOU – one time submittal
::* E-Verify Affidavit - yearly

:4. Have current Annual Financial Prequalification with MoDOT

::* Step-by-step instruction for becoming prequalified and a list of pre-qualified consultants can be found on [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/consultant_resources/consultant_home.htm MoDOT's Consultant Services webpage].

::* This annual financial prequalification is good for one year.
<div id="5. MoDOT Bridge Consultants Only (Not required for LPA Consultants)"></div>
:5. MoDOT Bridge Consultants Only (Not required for LPA Consultants): ): All bridge plans for MoDOT projects must be signed and sealed by a professional engineer from a firm that is prequalified for bridge design (with the firm’s logo shown in the title block of the bridge plans). For consultants who wish to become prequalified to perform bridge design, MoDOT's Bridge Division requires that the consultant submit a Bridge Experience Profile and a Personal Bridge Experience Record. These forms can be found on [http://www.modot.org/business/lpa/BridgeForms.htm MoDOT's Consultant Services webpage] and must be updated every 3 years. In addition, the consultant must have a QA/QC plan on file with MoDOT that also must be updated every 3 years. The prime consultant is not required to be prequalified for bridge design unless the scope of work performed by their firm includes bridge design. For more information, please contact MoDOT's Bridge Division.

The prequalification process complies with AASHTO guidelines published in the [http://audit.transportation.org/Documents/UAAG-3%20FINAL.pdf ''Uniform Audit & Accounting Guide, 2012 Edition'']. This prequalification process ensures that projects are in compliance with state and federal regulations.

The prequalification is only required for prime consultants. Subconsultants are strongly encouraged to become prequalified in order to reduce repetitive paperwork for future projects. For more information on subconsultant requirements see [[#134.3.5 Subconsultants|EPG 134.3.5 Subconsultants]].

For prequalification requirements for LPA consultants, see [[136.4 Consultant Selection and Consultant Contract Management|EPG 136.4.1.5 Consultant Qualification]].
<div id="Non-Profit and Governmental Indirect Cost Rate Requirements"></div>

'''Non-Profit and Governmental Indirect Cost Rate Requirements'''

In order to claim indirect costs for grant reimbursement, each such sub-recipient is required to annually submit a signed cost allocation plan for review and acceptance by MoDOT. The rate must be audited by an independent certified public accountant (CPA) firm with experience in preparing cost allocation plans for non-profit or governmental organizations in accordance with [http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title02/2cfr200_main_02.tpl 2 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 200].

Compliance with 2 CFR 200 requires MoDOT to review the following documents:

:1. Cost allocation plan
:2. Organization chart
:3. Employee time sheet sample showing allocation of direct and indirect labor hours
:4. Audited schedules of indirect costs and fringe benefits
:5. Audited, reviewed or compiled financial statements
:6. Certification of indirect costs
:7. Listing of grants/contracts with MoDOT

===134.1.4 Conflict of Interest===
A conflict of interest occurs when a consultant has a financial or personal interest in a federally funded project. To avoid a potential conflict of interest, see [https://www.gpo.gov/fdsys/granule/CFR-2011-title23-vol1/CFR-2011-title23-vol1-sec1-33/content-detail.html 23 CFR 1.33] for the federal law governing Conflict of Interest.

===134.1.5 Suspension/Debarment===
All consultants receiving individual awards and all subrecipients/subconsultants must certify that the organization and its principles are not suspended or debarred. Each MoDOT Project Manager should check the [https://www.epls.gov/epls/search.do?page=A&status=current&agency=69#A Non-procurement List]. The [https://www.epls.gov/epls/search.do?page=A&status=current&agency=69#A Excluded Parties List Systems] is also available at that website. Copies of the list may be obtained by purchasing a yearly subscription from the Superintendent of the Documents, US Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402 or by calling the Government Printing Office inquiry and Order Desk at (202)783-3238. The user will be required to record their name and organization for purposes of the Computer Matching and Privacy Act of 1988.

===134.1.6 Frequently Asked Questions===
A list of FAQs regarding consultant issues can be found on [http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/programadmin/172qa.cfm FHWA’s website].

===134.1.7 Workforce Diversity===
Diversity includes all the characteristics and experiences that define each individual. Diversity includes a wide range of individual characteristics such as age, religion, gender, race, ethnicity, disability and sexual orientation. Diversity can also include such things as communication style, work style, economic status and geographic origin. MoDOT supports and encourages diversity within the transportation industry. MoDOT’s desire is for the diversity of its consultants and contractors to reflect the diversity of the citizens of Missouri.

MoDOT’s engineering consultant solicitations require the consultant to describe their company’s approach to promoting and developing a diverse workforce. This category within the solicitation is a pass/fail category. An example of promoting and developing diversity is being involved with local secondary and higher education facilities to educate individuals in the field of engineering. Developing a cooperative/training program targeting the wide range of individual characteristics as listed above would be another example how firms are embracing workforce diversity. Continual efforts of encouraging a wide range of diverse individuals to the field of engineering will in turn develop a more diverse workforce.

Workforce diversity within the consulting firm as a whole can sometimes vary drastically from the diversity within the project team producing the work. Assembling diverse project teams is a way to support workforce diversity. Engineering consulting firms will be required to report on the '''project team’s''' diversity in the workforce diversity verification section of the template invoice, [[media:134.5.1.1 2013.xlsx|Fig. 134.5.1.1, Blank Consultant Invoice]]. See [[#134.5.1.1 Workforce Diversity Verification|EPG 134.5.1.1]] for workforce diversity reporting requirements.

Workforce diversity differs from Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE). DBE focuses on firms owned and operated by socially and economically disadvantaged individuals. For more information on DBE, visit [http://www.modot.org/ecr/index.htm MoDOT’s External Civil Rights webpage].

==134.2 Solicitation and Selection Process==
When MoDOT needs consultant services, specific processes for soliciting and selecting a consultant must be followed. MoDOT must use the Qualifications Based Selection (QBS) for the procurement of engineering and design related services. This is mandated by both the federal and state law. See [[#134.1.1 Federal Law|EPG 134.1.1 Federal Law]] and [[#134.1.2 State Law|EPG 134.1.2 State Law]] for the applicable laws. If MoDOT does not follow the solicitation and selection process, federal funds could be jeopardized.

===134.2.1 Professional Services Committee (PSC)===
The PSC ensures that MoDOT follows State and Federal laws for the use of professional services. The committee is composed of the Transportation Planning Director, State Design Engineer (chair) and the State Bridge Engineer. The committee may incorporate additional Division Directors/Engineers for contracts involving areas under their purview. On behalf of the committee, the Chair approves or rejects the selection of the consultant. The PSC provides comments as needed.

MoDOT is committed to getting the “best value for every dollar spent”. This is accomplished in the consultant selection by using the QBS process and selecting the most qualified consultant not the lowest bidder. The PSC ensures that MoDOT follows the QBS process for all MoDOT consultant procurements with the exception of the Design-Build projects where the Design Build Project Director is responsible for ensuring QBS is followed.

The PSC committee chair approval is required at several stages.

:1. The PSC chair approves the district or division engineer’s request to solicit consultants to provide professional services for MoDOT.

:2. For contracts involving interviews or presentations, the PSC chair approves the “short list” first and is invited to attend the interview or presentations.

:3. For standard contracts and supplemental agreements, the PSC chair approves the consultant selection, the negotiated number of man-hours and the “not to exceed” amount of the contract concurrent with the execution of the contract. The PSC and division liaisons provide review and comment to the chair prior to approval.

:4. For on-call, hourly rate contracts, the PSC chair approves district and division consultant selections for master agreements.

===134.2.2 Consultant Solicitation and Selection Process - Standard Solicitation Method===
Outlined below is the step-by-step process for Standard Consultant Solicitation and Selection Method. The standard solicitation method is used for the majority of MoDOT Consultant projects. This method gives all consultants equal consideration during the solicitation process. [[media:134.2.2 July 11 2017.doc|Fig. 134.2.2 Processing Standard Consultant Contracts Checklist]] has been developed to help project managers through the paperwork process of hiring a consultant using the standard method.
[[image:Engineering Professional Services.jpg|right|300px|thumb|'''<center>A project manager'''</center>]]

====134.2.2.1 Solicitation and Selection Step 1 – PE Funding====
After the need to procure a consultant has been identified, the MoDOT Project Manager (PM) or Contract Administrator (CA) must first ensure that Preliminary Engineering (PE) funds are identified in [[121.3 The Statewide Transportation Improvement Program (STIP)|the approved STIP]] or STIP amendment for this project and if applicable, the TIP or appropriate MoDOT Budget. The PM/CA should work with their District Planning Manager if there is a need to revise the STIP and/or TIP to adjust the funding levels to match the project costs.

====134.2.2.2 Solicitation and Selection Step 2 – PM/CA to Submit Solicitation & Request Letter to PSC====
The PM/CA will work with the core team members to develop a more detailed scope of services for the consultant contract. The PM/CA will also need to identify the following items prior to sending a request to solicit for a consultant services to the PSC:
:'''1. Construction Project Information''' – Project Description
:'''2. Construction Project Information''' – Fiscal Year for Construction Project Award
:'''3. Construction Project Information''' – Estimated project construction amount
:'''4. Scope of Services''' – Detailed description of anticipated consultant services.
:'''5. Project Funding''' – Total consultant contract costs (not to exceed amount).
:'''6. Project Funding''' – Total consultant contract costs broken down by fiscal year.
:'''7. Project Funding''' – Anticipated budget to be used for consultant services.
:'''8. Project Funding''' – State or federal funds for PE. All projects must be evaluated to determine if it will have federal assistance. Work with your Design Liaison Engineer to make this determination.
:'''9. Project Funding''' – Amount of PE dollars in the STIP
:'''10. Project Funding''' – Cost Share/Cost Participation Information or federal earmark (if applicable)
:'''11. DBE Requirements''' –Once the scope of work is defined, the MoDOT PM/CA must obtain a DBE Goal by sending the appropriate project information to MoDOT External Civil Rights (ECR) for review at DBEConsultGoal@modot.mo.gov. The DBE goal shall be included in the PSC solicitation request letter and the solicitation itself. All consultant contracts that utilize federal funds must be reviewed by ECR, regardless of the dollar amount of the contract.
:'''12.''' Will consultant selection process include interviews or presentation – can be determined by the PSC
:'''13. Period of Service''' – for the consultant contract.
:'''14. Selection Process''' – for procurement of consultant (ex: Standard Solicitation, Modified Solicitation etc.). See [[#Consultant Presentations and Interviews|Consultant Presentations and Interviews]], below, to determine if they are needed.
:'''15. Selection/Procurement Schedule''' – Anticipated schedule for procurement.
:'''16. Anticipated Incentive/Disincentive Provisions''' – for the consultant contract (if applicable) See [[#134.5.6 Incentive and Disincentive Program|EPG 134.5.6 Incentive and Disincentive Program]].
<div id="17. The PM/CA"></div>
:'''17.''' The PM/CA should include or delete the signature line, as needed, for any additional division director(s) (e.g., State Highway Safety and Traffic) who may need to review and sign the PSC letter.

All of the items listed above are the criteria that must be included in the [[media:134.2.2.2 Nov 2017.docx|Solicitation and Request Letter]] that is prepared by the PM/CA and sent to the PSC via the email group CODEPSCReview. The solicitation must not contain any information concerning man-hours, labor rates or cost information. If a maximum known value is available to fund the professional services contract, it may be noted in the solicitation to avoid submission of letters by consultants unable to provide the services for the expenditure MoDOT has determined as reasonable for the projects. Cost information can only be considered after a consultant has been selected and a contract is being negotiated. The solicitation should contain ALL of the rating categories that will be used to rate the consultant. MoDOT must follow [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/00800002891.html RsMO 8.289] when evaluating the consultant but additional criteria can be added as long as it is published in the solicitation. Effective July 1, 2016, PM/CAs must indicate on the Solicitation and Request Letter if consultant services are being requested for planning studies for more than Taking Care of the System (TCOS) improvements. More-than-TCOS planning studies must meet the following criteria:

:1. District has demonstrated that its asset management goals can be met over the next ten years, and
:2. District has the financial ability to fund, or has written commitment from another entity to fund the construction of a significant portion, or more, of any improvement resulting from the study within ten years of the initiation of the study, and
:3. The region has prioritized the study along with roadway and bridge improvements and is willing to fund the study with STIP right of way and construction funds or funding from others, or
:4. The cost of the study is funded by another entity, with minimal MoDOT funding involvement for oversight and guidance.

The cost of more-than-TCOS planning studies will result in an adjustment to the district’s STIP right of way and construction funds, except for studies funded by other entities.

====134.2.2.3 Solicitation and Selection Step 3 – Central Office Review of Solicitation Request====
After the PSC receives the [[media:134.2.2.2 Nov 2017.docx|Solicitation and Request Letter]], it will be distributed to the appropriate MoDOT Divisions and Central Office staff for review. If any comments need addressed, Central Office staff will forward revision requests to the District. When all parties involved agree on the content of the consultant solicitation/request for qualifications (RFQ), the PSC chair approves the request and Central Office will post the RFQ to the [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/consultant_resources/consultant_home.htm MoDOT's Consultant Services Webpage]. An electronic notification of the RFQ is sent to Design Consultant Distribution List alerting interested parties of the opportunity.

====134.2.2.4 Solicitation and Selection Step 4 – Consultant Response to the Solicitation/RFQ====
Interested firms who wish to respond to the RFQ can submit a letter of interest. Beginning January 1, 2013, only firms listed on the [http://www.modot.org/business/lpa/documents/ConsultantPreQualList.pdf Approved Consultant Prequalification List] will be considered eligible for MoDOT projects. Cost information shall not be provided from the consultant at this time in the solicitation process. Cost can only be considered after a consultant is selected and the contract is being negotiated.

====134.2.2.5 Solicitation and Selection Step 5 – Selection of Consultant====
When the RFQ expires, MoDOT will evaluate the letters of interest or SOQ. The PM/CA must first email the PSC (Transportation Planning Director Machelle Watkins, State Bridge Engineer Dennis Heckman and State Design Engineer Eric Schroeter), and cc the appropriate liaison, a list of all consultants who responded to the solicitation (see below under Rating/Scoring the Consultants). The email must indicate whether or not the firms were prequalified. [http://www.modot.org/business/lpa/documents/ConsultantPreQualList.pdf MoDOT's Approved Consultant Prequalification List] contains the prequalification information on the firms. According to state law [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/00800002911.html RsMO 8.291], MoDOT must list a minimum of 3 highly qualified firms and then select the firm best qualified to perform the work, based on the rating criteria outlined in the RFQ. It is not necessary to interview the firms, but should be considered. See [[#Consultant Presentations and Interviews|Consultant Presentations and Interviews]] below for more information on presentations and interviews. When fewer than three responses are received, it is suggested that the RFQ be re-advertised at least once. If fewer than three responses are received again, then MoDOT must determine whether or not this is a suitable number of responses based on the nature and size of the project. Consider whether there was some aspect of the RFQ that was overly restrictive or otherwise had an adverse impact on the completion of the project. If the decision is made to move forward, then the district should document that the RFQ requirements were not restrictive, it was adequately publicized and that the one or two firms who responded were capable of performing the tasks outlined for the project. MoDOT will then rate all firms based on the criteria that was outlined in the RFQ. Performance evaluations from past MoDOT projects may be considered as part of the evaluation. '''Price quotations shall not be requested or used for consideration prior to selecting a firm.''' Price can only be determined AFTER the consultant is selected.

'''The Selection Team.''' The district and/or division forms a team to review the consultant responses and select a firm to provide the necessary services. In most cases, the team shall include at least three members, one of whom is from the Central Office (usually a Design or Structural Liaison Engineer). If a major component of the project is a specialty area supported only by Central Office staff, that division should be asked to participate as well. If the project is a project designated for federal involvement for any element related to Design, the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) must be offered the opportunity to participate as a team member. Should another entity (KDOT, IDOT, [http://www.modot.mo.gov/plansandprojects/long-range_plan/workingtogethermetropolitanplanning.htm MPO], city, county, etc.) be funding part of the cost of the work that entity must be offered the opportunity to participate as a member of the selection team. If the consultant’s team is expected to include a public involvement sub-consultant, the PSC, including the Community Relations Director, should be invited to participate on the team. Note: members of the PSC are non-voting members of the selection team.

'''Rating/Scoring the Consultants.''' Before any consultants are rated or short-listed, the PM/CA must email the PSC (Transportation Planning Director Machelle Watkins, State Bridge Engineer Dennis Heckman and State Design Engineer Eric Schroeter), and cc the appropriate liaison, a list of ALL consultants who responded to the RFQ. The PM/CA must allow 3 business days (from the date of the email) for the PSC to review the list of respondents prior to rating the firms.

If it was determined and noted in the solicitation request letter that the PM/CA was going to conduct interviews or presentations with the consultants, see [[#Consultant Presentations and Interviews|Consultant Presentations and Interviews]] below for more information on how to rate and score the consultants. If interviews and/or presentations will not take place, the selection team can begin rating the consultants. The [[media:134.2.2.5.1 May 2017.doc|Consultant Rating Form, Fig. 134.2.2.5.1]], can be used to rate and select the firm. The consultants MUST be rated based on the rating criteria that was published in the solicitation, adding or deleting criteria after the solicitation expires is not allowed.

Each member of the selection team will individually develop a numeric score to rate each firm using the categories listed in [[media:134.2.2.5.1 May 2017.doc|Fig. 134.2.2.5.1]]. The team will, as a group, compare these scores and discuss how they were determined. The team must reach consensus on the consultant to select. The team will create a rating summary as outlined in [http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/LPA/134.2.2.5.2.doc Fig. 134.2.2.5.2] clearly indicating which firm has been recommended for selection and documenting the selection process. The documentation must include written text on how the scores were determined. This documentation will be kept in the project file. A copy of all documentation must be sent to the Central Office via the email group CODEPSCReview along with a letter ([[media:134.2.2.5.3 June 2016.docx|Fig. 134.2.2.5.3]]) requesting approval of the selected consultant. The team must receive approval before notifying the consultant that was selected or any other parties. The approved selection will be posted at [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/consultant_resources/consultant_home.htm MoDOT's Consultant Services Webpage].

=====Consultant Presentations and Interviews=====
The majority of projects do not require interviews or presentations and the selection team may select by scoring the consultants and choosing the top ranked firm. Specific conditions that allow the selection to take place without interviews or presentations are as follows:

:* The scope and cost of the contract is considered to be minor or routine in nature.
:* The district or division is very familiar with the qualifications and capabilities of all the short-listed firms from previous services or presentations and believes presentations or interviews will not increase knowledge of the short-listed firms.
:* The need for an accelerated selection process due to the critical nature of the contract.

If interviews and/or presentations are required, the selection team will first rate all the consultants based on the rating criteria published in the solicitation using [[media:134.2.2.5.1 May 2017.doc|Fig. 134.2.2.5.1]] and as outlined above under Rating/Scoring the Consultants. Then the selection team will select the top 3-5 highest scoring firms and place them on a short list for further evaluation during presentations and/or interviews. The short list of consultants must first be approved by the PSC if the consultants will be required to interview or present. [[media:134.2.2.5.4 June 2016.doc|Fig. 134.2.2.5.4]] is the short-list approval letter that must be sent to the PSC prior to notifying the firms that they have been short-listed. See below for Consultant Presentations and Consultant Interviews.

'''Consultant Presentations.''' The short list of consultants must first be approved by the PSC if the consultants will be required to present. Fig. 134.2.2.5.4 is the short-list approval letter that must be sent to the PSC prior to notifying the firms that they have been short-listed. The leader of the selection team should provide the opportunity for the PSC to attend the presentations. Before the presentations, the selection team must determine the scoring criteria ([http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/LPA/134.2.2.5.5.doc Fig. 134.2.2.5.5]) to be used. These criteria can include many variables, but each element must be assigned a point value and expectations for assigning the maximum points should be developed. See the [[media:134.2.2.5.6 2016.docx|sample letter, Fig. 134.2.2.5.6]], inviting the consultant to present. Following these presentations, the selection team will reach consensus on which consultant will be selected to provide the professional services.

After each consultant presentation, the selection team moves to a private location to discuss the presentation. After the final presentation, each member of the selection team will individually develop a numeric score to rate each firm based on the pre-determined criteria and scoring process. Although use of the example is not required, the criteria and scoring process must be determined prior to the actual presentation. The team will, as a group, compare these scores and discuss how they were determined; the team must reach consensus on the consultant to select.

The team will create a [http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/LPA/134.2.2.5.2.doc rating summary (Fig. 134.2.2.5.2)] for all the firms, clearly indicating which firm is recommended for selection and documenting the selection process. The rating summary is only one tool used in the selection. Although selection of the highest scoring firm is not required, if it is not selected the reasons must be documented. This documentation will be kept in the project file. A copy of all documentation must be sent to the Central Office via the email group CODEPSCReview along with a letter ([[media:134.2.2.5.3 June 2016.docx|Fig. 134.2.2.5.3]]) requesting approval of the selected consultant. The team must receive approval before notifying the consultant that was selected or any other parties. The approved selection will be posted at [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/consultant_resources/consultant_home.htm MoDOT's Consultant Services Webpage].

'''Consultant Interviews.''' The short list of consultants must first be approved by the PSC if the consultants will be required to interview. Fig. 134.2.2.5.4 is the short-list approval letter that must be sent to the PSC prior to notifying the firms that they have been short-listed. For a feasibility study, environmental assessment, environmental impact statement, major river bridge design, or major investment study or at the PSC direction, the selection team should conduct interviews with the short-listed firms. This requires considerable preparatory work; however, the selection team can limit the number of consultant staff and specify particular individuals as well as the opening topics. (See [[media:134.2.2.5.7 2016.docx|Fig. 134.2.2.5.7 sample letter to interview]]). The leader of the selection team should provide the opportunity for the PSC to attend the interviews. Before the interviews, the selection team must determine the interview questions to be asked along with a description of the correct type of answer. Depending on the complexity of the questions, 15 to 18 questions will fill the time allotted. Additionally, the scoring criteria to be used must be pre-determined. These criteria can include many variables, but each element must be assigned a point value and expectations for allocating the maximum points should be developed. The consultants should not be allowed to bring anything into the interview. A sample format for an interview (with time guidelines) follows:

:During the interview, each team member individually scores the consultant as each question is answered. After each interview, the selection team discusses the consultant responses and averages the scores from the entire team. After the final interview, the team will, as a group, compare these scores and discuss how the firms rank; the team must reach consensus on the consultant to select. The team will create a rating summary clearly indicating which firm is recommended for selection and documenting the selection process. The rating summary is only one tool used in the selection. Although selection of the highest scoring firm is not required, if it is not selected the reasons must be documented. This documentation will be kept in the project file. A copy of all documentation must be sent to the Central Office via the email group CODEPSCReview along with a letter ([[media:134.2.2.5.3 June 2016.docx|Fig. 134.2.2.5.3]]) requesting approval of the selected consultant. The team must receive approval before notifying the consultant that was selected or any other parties. The approved selection will be posted at [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/consultant_resources/consultant_home.htm MoDOT's Consultant Services Webpage].

===134.2.3 Consultant Solicitation and Selection Process – Modified Solicitation Method===
Under specific circumstances it may be determined that the standard solicitation process is not appropriate to follow the complete QBS process . Each circumstance will be evaluated on a project by project basis. The Modified Solicitation Method may be considered on projects with an accelerated schedule, the emergency nature of the work affecting public safety or is highly specialized knowledge that would result in few consultants responding to the RFQ. Examples of this specialized work are, Hazardous Waste Services, Wetland Mitigation, Urgent Bridge projects and Historic Preservation. The PM/CA will contact their Design Liaison Engineer to determine if the project needs requires a PSC Modified Solicitation Approval and if deemed appropriate, will complete and submit the [[media:134.2.2.2 Nov 2017.docx|Solicitation and Request Letter (Fig. 134.2.2.2)]] to Design via the email group CODEPSCReview for PSC review and approval.

One of the three special conditions listed below warrant modified solicitation letters of interest:

:1. The critical nature of the work requires an accelerated selection process. The term “critical nature” refers to tasks required as a result of unanticipated events, legal actions or compliance with directives from regulatory agencies. However, the PSC chair will consider these requests on a case by case basis.

:2. The scope of services requires highly specialized knowledge and expertise that limits the number of qualified firms. Examples are underwater bridge inspection, designs to address environmental mitigation, and cultural resource investigations.

:3. The work qualifies for the small purchase category. This category includes those contracts with a cost less than $25,000 and required services that are outside the work categories for an hourly rate contract.

===134.2.4 Consultant Solicitation and Selection Process – Standard Solicitation Method for On-Call Cost Plus Fixed Fee Contracts===

Every three years MoDOT requests interested firms to respond to a Master Agreement RFQ, which lists specific work categories in a specific district or Central Office Division. The selected consultant is approved to only provide professional services under a Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) for the district/division in their selected work category. Each respective district/division evaluates the letters of interest from responding consultants, completes the consultant selection process, following [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/00800002911.html RsMO 8.291], and requests PSC approval of the selected consultants. Once the PSC approves the selections, the Design Division drafts and executes a Master Agreement with each approved consultant and also maintains a list of consultants approved to provide services under the Master Agreement per district and/or division. The current on-call consultant list is available at [http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/consultant_prequalification_requirements.htm MoDOT's Consultant Prequalification Requirements]. The following lists the 20 specific work categories approved for the 2017-2020 Master Agreements:

:'''District Work Categories'''

::1. Construction Materials Testing & Inspection
::2. Roadway Design
::3. Subsurface Utility Engineering (SUE)
::4. Surveying
::5. Traffic Engineering
::6. Traffic - ITS Management & Design
::7. Traffic - Structures

:'''Division Work Categories'''

::1. Bridge Deck Surveys
::2. Bridge Design
::3. Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE)
::4. Environmental - Cultural Resources
::5. Environmental - Endangered Species
::6. Environmental - Hazardous Waste
::7. Environmental - NEPA
::8. Environmental - Noise Studies
::9. Environmental - Stormwater
::10. Environmental - Wetlands
::11. General Services - Architectural/Interior Design
::12. General Services - Civil/Structural
::13. General Services - Mechanical/Electrical
::14. Geotechnical Engineering Services
::15. LiDAR & Photogrammetry
::16. Pavement Friction Testing
::17. Traffic - Electrical Engineering
::18. Traffic - Safety Data Analysis
::19. Utility Accommodation & Coordination
::20. Value Engineering

Deletions or additions to the on-call consultant list require the PSC chair’s approval. Approval to use a consultant other than on the district’s or division’s approved list may be granted upon written request to the PSC in some circumstances. [http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/consultant_prequalification_requirements.htm MoDOT's Consultant Prequalification Requirements webpage] contains the lists of approved on-call consultants.

Information on the financial prequalification process for consultants can be found on MoDOT's Consultant Prequalification Requirements webpage. Consulting firms must be financially prequalified to be considered for selection to the on-call consultant list and must maintain their prequalification throughout the three year term of the Master Agreement. In order for the district/division to execute an MOU with a consultant, the selected consultant must be pre-qualified and have current E-Verify on file.

To ensure that on-call contracts are used as intended, the PSC has established several guidelines:

:1. All district MOUs must be approved by the Design Liaison Engineer prior to selection of an on-call consultant to ensure all other resources have been considered.

:2. The Master Agreement may be executed for a maximum period of three years, although the master agreement may include provisions for a one year extension at the end of the three-year period.

:3. No single MOU will exceed a total cost of $200,000. Both the district and division may execute MOUs for a given job number with a maximum limit of $200,000, in aggregate. Neither the District, nor Central Office, may, in any instance, execute multiple MOUs for a single job for services that exceed a total of $200,000 in aggregate. MOUs within the $200,000 limit do not need prior PSC approval for execution and can be executed by the respective District Engineer or division engineer. If an MOU is near the $200,000 limit, the Project Manager/Contract Administrator (PM/CA) shall contact their Design Liaison Engineer to determine if the project will follow the guidance of [[#134.2 Solicitation and Selection Process|EPG 134.2 Solicitation and Selection Process]].
<div id="Master Agreement Execution Process"></div>

'''Master Agreement Execution Process'''

Outlined below is the process of executing the Master Agreement for On-Call Contracts.

:1. The RFQ is posted to the web and electronic notification is sent to interested parties listed on the Design Consultant distribution list.
:2. The district/division rates and develops a list of selected consultants.
:3. The PSC chair approves the selection of consultants for specific work categories in each district/division.
:4. Only Approved Pre-Qualified Consultants are eligible for Master Agreement. The pre-qualification process also includes a review of the firm’s overhead rates.
:5. Since the amount of future services to be performed under the agreement is unknown, the allowable profit based upon direct labor cost is limited to 12 percent.
:6. The Design Division develops a “Master Agreement” to be executed by the approved consultant(s). This agreement outlines the basic conditions of the contractual relationship and specifies the work category(ies). The Master Agreement is the foundation for a Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) that the district or division later executes with a consultant to address the need for a specific scope of services in a specific work category. When the agreement is created and saved in eAgreements, the system will auto-assign a new file name. This auto-assigned file name must be used as the agreement number, in the header, within the agreement itself.
:7. Design Division drafts the Master Agreement in eAgreements and executes the Master Agreements [[media:134 Docusign.pdf|electronically through DocuSign]].

<div id="The district then follows the procedures below"></div>

The district or division then follows the procedures below for executing individual MOUs to obtain services as the need arises.
<div id="MoDOT MOU Execution Process "></div>
'''MoDOT MOU Execution Process'''

[[media:134.2.4 July 11 2017.doc|Fig. 134.2.4 Processing On-Call/MOU Consultant Contracts Checklist]] has been created to guide project managers through the process of hiring an on-call consultant through close- out of the MOU.

Outlined below is the process of executing an MOU for On-Call Contracts.

:1. '''As of Jan 15, 2014, all MOUs will be federally funded, therefore, the Project Manager/Contract Administrator (PM/CA) must choose the federal MOU contract from the [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements SharePoint site], unless approved by the PSC to use a state funded MOU contract (state funded MOU contracts may be used if the funding source is the District/Division budget).'''
:2. All District MOU’s must be reviewed and approved by the assigned Design Liaison Engineer prior to selection of an on-call consultant to ensure all other resources have been considered.
:3. PM/CA to choose the MOU contract from the eAgreements SharePoint site.
:The federal MOU contract must be used for all MOU’s unless approved by the PSC to use a state funded MOU contract (state funded MOU contracts may be used if the funding source is the District/Division budget). When the agreement is created and saved in eAgreements, the system will auto-assign a new file name. This auto-assigned file name must be used as the agreement number, in the header, within the agreement itself.
:4. Development of Scope of Services and DBE Requirements – Once the scope of work is defined, the MoDOT PM/CA must obtain a DBE Goal by sending the appropriate project information (including scope, county, estimated construction cost, and potential subcontracting opportunities) to MoDOT External Civil Rights (ECR) for review at DBEConsultGoal@modot.mo.gov. Once the DBE goal has been established by ECR, it shall be included in the MOU. All consultant contracts that utilize federal funds must be reviewed by ECR, regardless of the dollar amount of the contract. If the prime consultant or any sub-consultants are DBE firms, the DBE section must be filled out. If the prime or subs are not DBE firms, the DBE section can be left blank.
:5. The PM/CA will review the on-call consultant list and choose a consultant based on the scope of services that has been developed and DBE goal established. The on-call consultant list is found on the [http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/consultant_prequalification_requirements.htm MoDOT Website – Consultant Services – Consultant Prequalification Requirements].

:'''Note: Only firms that are prequalified with MoDOT financially can be chosen from the on-call consultant list. Firms must update their information yearly in order to stay current on their prequalification. MoDOT’s consultant prequalification list can be found on the [http://www.modot.org/business/consultant_resources/consultant_prequalification_requirements.htm MoDOT Website – Consultant Services – Consultant Prequalification Requirements]. '''

:6. Consultant agreements are to be sent to the assigned Design Liaison Engineer for “Review by Staff” in eAgreements.
<div id="7. DBE Concurrence must be obtained"></div>
:7. DBE Concurrence must be obtained from External Civil Rights prior to sending a federally funded MOU to the consultant for execution. The PM/CA will send External Civil Rights (email group '''DBEConcurrence''') as a “Reviewer”, along with the assigned Liaison Engineer, when processing the agreement for “Review by Staff” in eAgreements. ECR will respond to the email notification if any additional DBE information is needed - including, but not limited to, specific DBE details, such as name of DBE firm, DBE Goal, dollar amount of DBE participation, Exhibits such as Scope of Services, Fee Estimate, etc.
:8. After receiving the DBE Concurrence from External Civil Rights, the PM/CA will send the MOU to the consultant for execution. Agreements may be executed by wet signatures or [[media:134 Docusign.pdf|electronic signatures in DocuSign]]. Electronic signatures are encouraged to expedite the execution process.
:9. The respective District Engineer or Division Engineer will execute the MOU as described in MHTC Policy "Delegation of Authority for Approval and Execution of Documents".
:10. If using electronic signatures, copies of the fully executed agreement will be distributed to the recipients entered into DocuSign (see below for the Central Office Divisions that must receive a copy of the fully executed agreement).

:If using wet signatures, the PM/CA is responsible for uploading a copy of the fully executed MOU in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements], sending the consultant a copy of the fully executed agreement, and sending a link to the fully executed agreement to the appropriate Central Office Divisions. (See Item 9, below, for the Central Office Divisions that must receive a copy of the fully executed agreement.)

:11. The PM/CA must email an electronic link to the fully executed agreement to the following Central Office Divisions:
::* Financial Services Division (email group '''Obligate''' with message '''“Obligate - please obligate funds for the fully executed agreement”''' and provide any specific funding details here, as applicable).
::* Design Division (email group '''CODEPSCReview''' with message '''“CODEPSCReview - fully executed agreement for your records”''').

:'''Note:''' If federal funds are used, the PM/CA must wait for email notifications from the following Central Office Divisions before issuing NTP to the consultant:
::* Financial Services indicating the obligation of funds is complete.
::* External Civil Rights (ECR) indicating concurrence in DBE participation.

:12. The PM/CA will send the [[media:134.4.2 2016.docx|NTP letter (Fig 134.4.2)]] to the consultant AFTER:
::* Receiving DBE concurrence from External Civil Rights
::* Execution of the contract
::* Obligation of federal funds by Financial Services.

==134.3 Consultant Contract Negotiation==
Price is negotiated after a consultant is selected and notified. This is the only time in the selection process when price can be considered. Beginning January 2013 only firms listed on the Approved Annual Financial Pre-Qualification List will be eligible to provide professional services to MoDOT. '''Additional scope beyond what was advertised in the RFQ cannot be negotiated into the contract.'''

The selected firm will need to use the provisional overhead rate that was accepted by MoDOT in that firms prequalification process with MoDOT. If the firm elects to voluntarily reduce their overhead rate the following language must be incorporated into the contract:

:“The Company has voluntarily reduced its overhead rate to ___%. This rate will be used on all billings. Upon completion of these services outlined under this Agreement the final payment for these items will be based on accounting records of the Consultant incurred during the period of the Agreement. MoDOT reserves the right to require the actual audited overhead rates be used if those rates are less than the voluntarily reduced rate noted previously.”

===134.3.1 Engineering Services Contract (ESC)===
Contract negotiation starts once the selection is made and should follow the schedule provided in the solicitation. Consult CCO early in the negotiation phase for any proposed changes in the boilerplate agreement language. Modifications to the standard agreement language may be considered only where no other compromise can be reached to successfully negotiate the agreement, and '''must be approved “as to form” by CCO.''' If the PM/CA works with their Regional Counsel to approve the revisions to the boilerplate agreement, that Regional Counsel will need to approve the partially executed contract “as to form”. In general, no changes are allowed to the ESC.

The standard engineering services contracts (ESCs) can be found in the [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements SharePoint site]. ESCs must follow the eAgreements process for drafting, reviewing and executing, as defined in [[:Category:153 Agreements and Contracts|EPG 153 Agreements and Contracts]] and the [http://sp/sites/eagreements/TrainingDocuments/Forms/AllItems.aspx eAgreements Training Manual]. In addition, the appropriate approvals must be obtained through the Professional Services Committee (PSC) process. When the agreement is created and saved in eAgreements, the system will auto-assign a new file name. This auto-assigned file name must be used as the agreement number, in the header, within the agreement itself.

The MoDOT unit responsible for the contract, either the district or the division, provides the consultant with a printed, or PDF format electronic copy of the tentative contract. The tentative scope of services (including [[237.14 Electronic Design Data Delivery#237.14.4 Specifications of CADD Deliverable Contract Plans for Consultants|Specifications of Computer Deliverable Contract Plans]]) may be provided in a non-PDF electronic format. The PM/CA is responsible to complete the Consultant Contracts. Consultants do not receive electronic copies of MoDOT’s Sample Consultant Contract in a non-PDF format; any revisions to the standard consultant contract language must be approved by Chief Counsel’s input prior to execution of the contract.

After reviewing the tentative contract and scope of services, the consultant prepares a proposal containing a detailed estimate of cost that includes man-hours, basic pay rates, pre-qualification accepted overhead rates, direct costs and fixed fee. Each of these items is reviewed by MoDOT to ensure it is reasonable with respect to the type of work involved and anticipated size of the contract. PM/CAs are responsible for the quality and content of professional services agreements. [[media:134.3.1 2017.doc|Fig. 134.3.1, District Checklist for Reviewing Consultant Contracts]] is a tool provided for PM/CAs to utilize while reviewing contracts.

After the PM/CA and consultant agree to the terms of the agreement, the PM/CA converts the Word document to a pdf file in eAgreements. The pdf file should include the Scope of Services and Exhibits.

====134.3.1.1 Liability Insurance====
The MoDOT Standard Consultant Contract language includes provisions for the amount of liability insurance that the consultant must provide to cover claims that may result from errors, omissions, or negligent acts of the consultant. Insurance Certificate of Liability must meet [http://insurance.mo.gov/industry/sovimmunity.php Missouri’s Sovereign Immunity Limits]. In rare instances, the PM/CA may request an Acceptance of MHTC Liability to reduce the insurance requirements on the consultants. This process must obtain PSC approval and follow the procedures outlined in the Acceptance of MHTC Liability, available through the CCO, depending on the nature and complexity of the services.

A copy of the certificate of liability insurance for the prime consultant is to be requested by the PM/CA and kept in the project files with the executed contract. It is the responsibility of the consultant to meet the insurance requirements of the contract. Receipt of the consultant’s certificate of insurance liability does not imply approval of the amounts.

====134.3.1.2 Payment Bond====
State statute requires that in the event that any subconsultants are used to supply at least twenty five thousand dollars ($25,000) worth of materials and/or labor not within the scope of environmental assessment services or licensed professional services as defined by [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText327.html Chapter 327, RSMo], the consultant shall require any such subconsultants to provide laborers and materialmen with adequate bond security.

The payment bond value shall equal the amount of the total subcontracted non-engineering services and applicable direct costs. If there is uncertainty about whether an item of work is considered as non-engineering or as an applicable direct cost, it should be included in the amount covered by the payment bond. Fully document all decisions regarding contracted services not included in the payment bond amount and retain in the project file until the contract has been closed and audited for final payments. A copy of the payment bond is to be requested by the project manager and kept in the district project files with the executed contract.

For more information on the payment bond language, see the [http://wwwi/intranet/cc/Contracts1.asp?nav=modot standard engineering services contract on Chief Counsel’s intranet webpage].

===134.3.2 Fixed Fee Review===
The fixed fee is based on the complexity of the project, risk to the consultant, and the amount of sub consultant management and is the profit to the consultant. Fixed fees are calculations that are based upon direct salary costs. The percentage of the fixed fee to the direct salary costs must not exceed the MoDOT maximum allowable profit curve shown in [http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/LPA/134.3.2.pdf Fig. 134.3.2 MoDOT Allowable Profit Curve]. However, MoDOT does not allow a profit of more than 15 percent.

Fixed fees may not be calculated on direct expenses. Sub consultants are a direct expense to the prime consultant. Therefore, sub consultant expenses may not be included in the fixed fee calculations for the prime consultant. It should be noted that the “fixed fee” is fixed and will be paid in full even if the consultant does not use all of the hours in the contract. ''Care should be taken not to overestimate man-hours. ''

===134.3.3 Man Hours Review===
In order to establish a measure of “Fair & Reasonable” a pre-negotiation estimate is required by federal regulations in [http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/hep/49cfr18.htm#sec.18.36 49 CFR 18.36]. The MoDOT PM/CA shall develop an estimate based on the man-hours that MoDOT would require to perform the same service. The consultant man-hour estimate is reviewed and compared to the MoDOT estimate. The consultant’s fee proposal submittal must include detailed hours and cost breakdowns by sub-task and by job title. For any subtask on the scope, it should be known how many different people, how many hours per person, any direct expenses, etc. for the prime and any subs. Negotiations should occur to assure that man-hours in the contract are comparable to the MoDOT estimated hours and those from similar projects. PMs should confer with the appropriate Central Office liaison engineer for concurrence with the review.

===134.3.4 Basis of Payment===
The majority of Design Consultant Engineering Services Contracts are actual cost contracts. This means that all costs submitted for payment must be based on actual wages, overhead. Federal regulations ([https://www.acquisition.gov/far/current/html/Subpart%2016_1.html#wp1085501 FAR Part 16.102]) prohibit the use of cost plus a percentage of cost or percentage of construction costs as a method of compensation. The following methods maybe used as the basis of payment in a contract:

:* Actual Cost Plus Fixed Fee (majority of contracts)
:* Specific rates of pay (for emergency situations only)
:* Lump Sum (prior approval required)
:* Hourly Rate (prior approval required)

Each Subcontractor or subconsultant must be identified in the contract. Subcontractor expenses should also be calculated based upon actual costs. Prompt payment of subconsultants is required per [https://www.acquisition.gov/far/current/html/Subpart%2032_9.html FAR Subpart 32.9].

Per [[#134.3.5.1 Subconsultant Cost Exceeding $25,000|EPG 134.3.5.1]], if the consultant is using a subconsultant with a cost exceeding $25,000, then the subconsultant shall include a detailed estimate of cost and a detailed overhead rate schedule (cost plus fixed fee breakdown).

Per [[#134.3.5.2 Subconsultant Cost NOT Exceeding $25,000|EPG 134.3.5.2]], if the consultant is using a subconsultant with a cost that DOES NOT exceed $25,000 then a letter quote from the subconsultant can be submitted with the engineering service contract.

Retainage is not allowed as a routine part of the contract i.e. blanket retainage is prohibited. Payment may be withheld on any particular work item that has not been completed in accordance with the contract. This can include work incidental to the work item, and required documentation directly related to the work.

Direct costs must be estimated using current Privately Owned Vehicle (POV) mileage reimbursement rates and per diem rates for Missouri. These rates can be found on the following web pages.

Mileage, subsistence and lodging must follow federal travel regulation guidelines.
:* [http://www.gsa.gov/portal/content/100715 Current POV Mileage Reimbursable Rates]
:* [http://www.gsa.gov/portal/category/100120 Current Per Diem Rates for Missouri]

===134.3.5 Subconsultants===
The use of subconsultants is allowed provided that each firm is identified in the engineering services contract. DBE firms should be listed under Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Requirements, and other subconsultants should be listed in Subconsultants. The use of 2nd and 3rd Tier subconsultants is not allowed, that is, only the prime consultant can have subconsultants, the subconsultants cannot have subconsultants. Subconsultants do not have to be prequalified but it is strongly encouraged especially if the subconsutlants routinely performs work >$25,000.

====134.3.5.1 Subconsultant Cost Exceeding $25,000====
If the consultant is using a subconsultant with a cost exceeding $25,000, then the subconsultant shall include a detailed estimate of cost and a detailed overhead rate schedule (cost plus fixed fee breakdown). [http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/LPA/134.3.6.1.1%20Common%20Unallowable%20Costs.pdf Fig. 134.3.6.1.1] lists common unallowable costs. If the subconsultant is prequalified, the overhead rate listed must be the current overhead rate accepted by MoDOT through the annual financial prequalification process. In this case, a detailed overhead rate schedule would not be required.

If the subconsultant is not pre-qualified with MoDOT then the firm shall also include their [http://contribute.modot.mo.gov/business/consultant_resources/documents/MRC_FHWA_Order.pdf Consultant Certification of Indirect Cost Form]. Each subconsultant in this category must show its overhead in the required format. [http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/LPA/134.3.6.1.2.pdf Fig. 134.3.6.1.2] provides an example Overhead Schedule. The detailed overhead rate schedule should be reviewed for possible unallowable costs per [https://acquisition.gov/far/current/html/FARTOCP31.html FAR Pt. 31], [http://epg.modot.org/forms/DE%202017%20Forms/LPA/134.3.6.1.1%20Common%20Unallowable%20Costs.pdf Fig. 134.3.6.1.1] lists common unallowable costs. The prime consultant is responsible for ensuring that all subconsultants comply with state and federal regulations, such as E-Verify, and are registered to do business in Missouri.

====134.3.5.2 Subconsultant Cost NOT Exceeding $25,000====
If the consultant is using a subconsultant with a cost that DOES NOT exceed $25,000 then a letter quote from the subconsultant can be submitted with the engineering service contract. The letter should quote the subconsultant’s cost shown in Exhibit III of the consultant contract. It is preferred however, that the subconsultants have cost plus fixed fee break down. If the subconsultant is not pre-qualified with MoDOT, the firm shall also include their [http://contribute.modot.mo.gov/business/consultant_resources/documents/MRC_FHWA_Order.pdf Consultant Certification of Indirect Cost Form]. The prime consultant is responsible for ensuring that all subconsultants comply with state and federal regulations, such as E-Verify, and are registered to do business in Missouri.

===134.3.6 Ceasing Negotiation===
If the district/division cannot negotiate a reasonable price with the consultant selected, they can formally cease negotiations with a formal written letter and begin negotiations with the next most qualified firm. After the district/division has ceased negotiations with the selected firm and have started negotiations with the next most qualified firm, they cannot go back to the first firm and start another round of negotiations; this is looked upon as price shopping and is unallowable. See the [http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/programadmin/consultant.cfm FHWA Consultant Services webpage] for more information. If a contract cannot be negotiated with the second consultant, MoDOT may choose to negotiate with the third most qualified consultant. At any time, all proposals may be rejected and MoDOT can re-advertise the project with a revised scope.

===134.3.7 Negotiation Documentation===
All written correspondence with the consultant during the course of the negotiations is included in and made part of the project file for the consultant contract, including all email correspondence. Document in writing all verbal communication and personal visits with the consultant regarding the contract negotiations and also include in the project file. These records shall be maintained for a period of three years after the final invoice is submitted. If any litigation, claim, negotiation, audit or other action involving the records is started before the expiration of the three-year period, the records are retained until completion of the action and resolution of all issues arising from it or until the end of the three-year period, whichever is later.

===134.3.8 Contract Assurances===
Prior to executing a contract with a consultant, MoDOT will assure the following:

:1. The consultant has been apprised of all applicable technical work requirements and administrative controls, including those of the FHWA and any other agencies that may have jurisdictions over the project.
:2. After selection, the firm was provided all pertinent information relative to the desired engineering services or other professional services requested. The tentative contract set out the scope of the services in sufficient detail to provide the consultant with a definite knowledge of the services and results expected. The consultant was instructed to submit a proposal that indicated clearly identifiable, sufficiently detailed, and easily auditable charges for the work and/or units of work. These proposed charges (rates and man-hours) were reviewed for acceptability before negotiations proceeded.
:3. Contracts include a requirement for a three-year retention of records after the final payment is made under the contract. On actual cost contracts, the consultant was informed that records must be open for inspection by authorized government personnel.

==134.4 Contract Approval, Execution and Distribution==
Once the district and the division agree to the man-hours, salary rates, overhead rates, direct costs, and fixed fee, the information is submitted to the PSC for review and for the PSC chair’s approval, via the email group CODEPSCReview. See [[media:134.4.1 June 2016.docx|Fig. 134.4.1]]. The submittal letter to the PSC documents that the above procedures have been followed and the requirements of Brooks Act, [http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/programadmin/23cfr172.cfm 23 CFR 172] and [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/00800007001.html RSMO Section 8] have been satisfied. When approved by the PSC, the standard contract language, the scope of services and the consultant’s cost proposal are made part of a formal agreement for execution.

Consultant agreements are to be sent to the assigned Design Liaison Engineer for “Review by Staff” in eAgreements.
<div id="DBE Concurrence must be obtained from External"></div>
DBE Concurrence must be obtained from External Civil Rights prior to sending a federally funded agreement to the consultant for execution. The PM/CA will include External Civil Rights (email group '''DBEConcurrence''') as a “Reviewer”, along with the assigned Liaison Engineer, when processing the agreement for “Review by Staff” in eAgreements. ECR will respond to the email notification if any additional DBE information is needed - including, but not limited to, specific DBE details, such as name of DBE firm, DBE Goal, dollar amount of DBE participation, Exhibits such as Scope of Services, Fee Estimate, etc.

After receiving the DBE Concurrence from External Civil Rights, the contract may be executed. MHTC authorization to execute the contract may be obtained in one of following ways:

:1. Projects in the Statewide Transportation Improvement Program (STIP)
:The Commission’s approval of the STIP includes delegation of authority to execute professional services contracts for projects contained in the STIP. The execution of agreements is done either by electronic or wet signature. Instructions are included in the eAgreements Training Manual and summarized below.

:2. Projects Not Included in the STIP
:To obtain authorization to execute contracts for projects that are not included in the approved STIP and have a contract ceiling exceeding $25,000, the contracts must be presented to the MHTC at a regularly scheduled monthly meeting. The appropriate division places these contracts on the Commission agenda for the next meeting. The District Engineer or division engineer should be prepared to discuss this item at the Commission meeting in case questions arise. After obtaining authorization to execute the contract from the Commission, the contract administrator then proceeds with the execution process.

Execution and Distribution of the Professional Services Contract

The Professional Services Contract can be executed either [[media:134 Docusign.pdf|electronically in DocuSign]] or by wet signatures:

:* Electronic Signatures – Signing agreements electronically in DocuSign will expedite the execution process. The PM/CA must add all recipients in the DocuSign site that need to sign and/or receive an electronic copy (see below) of the fully executed agreement.
:* Wet Signatures – The PM/CA will mail two hard copies of the contract, executed by the consultant, to CCO for approval as to form, and then to the Commission Secretary, who has the appropriate individuals to execute them. Commission Secretary will mail one executed copy back to the PM/CA. The Commission Secretary keeps 1 hard copy of the agreement and uploads a scanned copy of the agreement in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements]. The PM/CA then mails the fully executed agreement back to the consultant and sends a link to the appropriate Central Office Divisions (see below).

The PM/CA must send an electronic copy of the fully executed agreement to various Central Office Divisions. For electronically executed agreements, this is done by cc:/ in DocuSign and for wet signatures this is done by emailing an electronic link to the fully executed agreement found in eAgreements. The following are the Central Office Divisions that must be notified:

:* Financial Services Division (email group '''Obligate''' with message '''“Obligate - please obligate funds for the fully executed agreement and please advise when we can give a NTP”''' and provide any specific funding details here, as applicable).
:* Design Division (email group '''CODEPSCReview''' with message '''“CODEPSCReview - fully executed agreement for your records”''').

'''Note:''' If federal funds are used, the PM/CA must wait for email notifications from the following Central Office Divisions before issuing NTP to the consultant:
:* Financial Services indicating the obligation of funds is complete
:* External Civil Rights (ECR) indicating concurrence in DBE participation

If federal funds were used to finance the contract, Financial Services submits a copy of the executed contract to the FHWA Finance Section for approval. Federal funds will not be paid for charges to the contract prior to FHWA approval. Any supplemental agreements are also submitted to the FHWA after execution.

Notice to Proceed Letter

The PM/CA is responsible for sending a [[media:134.4.2 2016.docx|Notice to Proceed (NTP) Letter (Fig. 134.4.2)]] to the consultant. The NTP cannot be sent prior to:

:* Receiving DBE concurrence from External Civil Rights.
:* Execution of the contract
:* Obligation of federal funds by Financial Services

==134.5 Consultant Contract Administration==
A MoDOT employee will be assigned as the PM/CA for each contract, including contracts in which the services are for project management of a construction project or for contract administration. MoDOT's PM/CA is responsible for administering the contract and overseeing the consultant’s progress towards the provision of services required by the contract. Some of these responsibilities are:

:1. Scheduling and attending progress meetings with the consultant and being involved in decisions leading to change orders or supplemental agreements.
:2. Being familiar with the qualifications and responsibilities of the consultant’s staff.
:3. Assuring that costs billed are consistent with the acceptability and performance of the consultant’s work.
:4. Monitoring the consultant’s operations, as necessary, and adequately documenting contract performance (prior to final settlement of the contract) for later use.
:5. Conducting interim technical and audit evaluations as deemed necessary during the performance of the consultant contract.
:6. Completing performance evaluations in the Design Consultant Database at major milestones and at the completion of the contract. An evaluation is to be completed at least annually.
:7. Notifying the Design Division, Financial Services and AI when a project is complete and finalized. The PM/CA should make arrangements with the Resident Engineer to be notified when construction is complete.

===134.5.1 Invoicing===
The consultant files a monthly invoice and progress report to the PM/CA. The [[media:134.5.1.1 2013.xlsx|invoice template found in Fig. 134.5.1.1]] must be used for all consultant contracts. Prime consultant invoices '''must''' use Fig. 134.5.1.1. Sub-consultants who have a contract with the prime that is greater than $25,000 must either use Fig. 134.5.1.1 or provide all the information that is listed in this figure to be considered acceptable. Each invoice must be submitted with the necessary supporting documentation and must be numbered in sequential order and label the final invoice as FINAL. The invoice shall be based on the total incurred cost during the invoice period. Invoices should identify each task in the scope of work, as well as the employees and hours spent on each task during the billing period. Direct costs must also be shown by task. The [[media:134.5.1.2 July 31, 2012.docx|MoDOT Consultant Invoice Checklist (Fig 134.5.1.2)]] can be used as tools to ensure all proper documentation is in place for each invoice in order for the invoice to be accepted and paid. [[media:134.5.1.5 Sept 2012.xlsx|Fig. 134.5.1.5]] is available as an example of a filled-out invoice.

The PM/CA should make every effort to see that the consultant is paid in a timely manner, the goal being 30 days. Missouri law states that the consultant is entitled to interest if the invoice is not paid in 45 days. The 45-day period starts when all questions about the invoice have been addressed and agreed to by both parties.

The PM/CA sends a copy of the invoice to Financial Services with a cover letter or email stating that the PM/CA has reviewed the invoice and approves it for payment. [[media:134.2.2 July 11 2017.doc|Fig. 134.2.2]] and [[media:134.2.4 July 11 2017.doc|Fig. 134.2.4]] are checklists to help PM/CAs with the paperwork process for Standard and On-call contracts, including invoicing.

The letter or email should state:

:* Project #
:* Amount to be paid
:* Entity/Vendor that is being paid
:* Activity Code.

The following are the most frequently used activity codes:

{| style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|-
|'''Activity'''||width="15"| ||'''Description'''
|-
|align="center"|R351|| ||Conceptual Plans
|-
|align="center"|R352|| ||Surveying/Mapping
|-
|align="center"|R354|| ||Preliminary Plans
|-
|align="center"|R356|| ||Final Design Plans
|-
|align="center"|R358|| ||Final Construction Plans
|-
|align="center"|R35A|| ||Support – Build New Hwys & Bridges
|}

If the contract encompasses more than one job number, the cover letter or email and all invoices must clearly state how much is to be applied to each job number as well as the total contract. When the last invoice is submitted for payment, the cover letter or email must include a statement notifying Financial Services that the contract is complete (see [[#134.5.3 Consultant Contract Close-Out|EPG 134.5.3 Consultant Contract Close-Out]]).

If errors are found on the consultant invoice, the PM/CA should contact the consultant and request a corrected invoice. The PM/CA should never change an invoice. The invoice should be sent back to the consultant for corrects and '''they must re-date the invoice''' and re-submit to MoDOT. If the consultant makes an error and requests more reimbursement than allowed by the contract, the PM/CA may submit the invoice and authorize payment of an amount less than the invoice requests. The reasons for paying an amount different than the invoice requests must be clearly documented in the cover letter.

If the period of service in the contract has lapsed, a letter to extend the period of service signed by both MoDOT and the consultant must be completed prior to paying any invoices. For hourly-rate contracts the period of service is defined in the MOU not the Master Agreement.

Consultant invoices must be submitted electronically by the PM/CA to Financial Services at Contractual.Payments@modot.mo.gov.

Consultant invoices for projects administered by the [http://wwwi/intranet/br/default.htm Bridge Division] should be submitted electronically by the consultant directly to BRInvoiceAdmin@modot.mo.gov.

Electronic payments to a consultant may be set up by submitting an “Electronic Funds Transfer” form. Information is available at [https://missouribuys.mo.gov/ MissouriBUYS].

====134.5.1.1 Workforce Diversity Verification====
The workforce diversity verification section of the template invoice ([[media:134.5.1.1 2013.xlsx|Fig. 134.5.1.1, Blank Consultant Invoice ]]) must be filled out. The verification summary should contain the '''project team’s''' diversity, not the company wide diversity. For reporting purposes, females and minorities are the only diversity categories that must be reported in the verification summary. The following groups are considered to be minorities: Black, Hispanic, Asian, American Indian, Native Hawaiian or Pacific Islander. The report is based on the hours worked by minorities and women during the life of the contract.

===134.5.2 Supplemental Agreements===
Supplemental agreements, are to be used to add/delete work within the scope of services that was advertised in the RFQ. Supplemental agreements cannot be used to increase the scope of work outside the RFQ or to increase overhead or fixed fee. For example, a no cost supplemental agreement can be executed to extend the period of service as outlined in the original consultant contract.

Each supplemental agreement must include new subconsultants, and changes to the scope of services, new cost estimates and schedule or period of service adjustments as applicable.

Costs associated with these “new” services may be covered by the unit costs included in the original contract or by a newly negotiated cost in the supplemental agreement. When a supplemental agreement to an hourly rate contract is needed, the unit salary costs for the service provided by the supplement must be the same as those salary costs contained in the MOU. Direct costs and overhead costs for the services contained in the supplemental agreement should reflect the costs that will be in effect during the performance of the service.
<div id="Once it is determined that the scope of services"></div>

Once it is determined that the scope of services needs modification, the PM/CA follows the same negotiation process for the supplemental agreement that is followed for new contracts through submission to the PSC, via the email group CODEPSCReview. Any change in the scope of services, whether it results in a change in cost or not, must be included in an approved supplemental agreement. If a DBE goal was established in the original contract it will continue to apply. The agreement must be executed prior to the consultant receiving authorization to proceed with the modified scope of services. Supplemental Agreements for extension of time, with no additional cost, are not required to be submitted through the PSC. The district or division director has the delegation of authority to sign the Supplemental Agreement. The executed copy of the Supplemental Agreement must be submitted through CODEPSCReview.

When a supplemental agreement is necessary, additional funds to cover the added costs in the contract must be identified from the appropriate budget category and be approved as a necessary expenditure.

Supplemental agreements are to be sent to the assigned Design Liaison Engineer for “Review by Staff” in eAgreements.
<div id="DBE Concurrence must be obtained from External Civil"></div>
DBE Concurrence must be obtained from External Civil Rights prior to sending a federally funded agreement to the consultant for execution. The PM/CA will include External Civil Rights (email group '''DBEConcurrence''') as a “Reviewer”, along with the assigned Liaison Engineer, when processing the agreement for “Review by Staff” in eAgreements. ECR will respond to the email notification if any additional DBE information is needed - including, but not limited to, specific DBE details, such as name of DBE firm, DBE Goal, dollar amount of DBE participation, Exhibits such as Scope of Services, Fee Estimate, etc.

After receiving the DBE Concurrence from External Civil Rights, the contract may be executed. The contract information is submitted to the PSC via the email group CODEPSCReview using [[media:134.5.2 2017.docx|PSC Approval to Execute Supplemental Agreement,
Fig. 134.5.2]]. After PSC approval has been granted, the PM/CA will execute the supplemental agreement. The supplemental agreement can be executed either [[media:134 Docusign.pdf|electronically in DocuSign]] or by wet signatures:

:* Electronic Signatures – Signing agreements electronically in DocuSign will expedite the execution process. The PM/CA must add all recipients in the DocuSign site that need to sign and/or receive an electronic copy (see below) of the fully executed supplemental agreement.
:* Wet Signatures – The PM/CA will mail two hard copies of the supplemental agreement, executed by the consultant, to CCO for approval as to form, and then to the Commission Secretary, who has the appropriate individuals to execute them. Commission Secretary will mail one executed copy back to the PM/CA. The Commission Secretary keeps 1 hard copy of the supplemental agreement and uploads a scanned copy of the supplemental agreement in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements]. The PM/CA then mails the fully executed supplemental agreement back to the consultant and sends a link to the appropriate Central Office Divisions (see following paragraph).

The PM/CA must send an electronic copy of the fully executed supplemental agreement to various Central Office Divisions. For electronically executed agreements, this is done by cc:/ in DocuSign and for wet signatures this is done by emailing an electronic link to the fully executed supplemental agreement found in eAgreements. The following are the Central Office Divisions that must be notified:

:* Financial Services Division (email group '''Obligate''' with message '''“Obligate - please obligate funds for the fully executed agreement”''' and provide any specific funding details here, as applicable).
:* Design Division (email group '''CODEPSCReview''' with message '''“CODEPSCReview - fully executed agreement for your records”''').

'''Note:''' If federal funds are used, the PM/CA must wait for email notifications from the following Central Office Divisions before issuing NTP to the consultant:
:* Financial Services indicating the obligation of funds is complete
:* External Civil Rights (ECR) indicating concurrence in DBE participation

If federal funds were used to finance the contract, Financial Services submits a copy of the executed contract to the FHWA Finance Section for approval. Federal funds will not be paid for charges to the contract prior to FHWA approval. Any supplemental agreements are also submitted to the FHWA after execution.

Notice to Proceed Letter 

The PM/CA is responsible for sending a [[media:134.4.2 2016.docx|Notice to Proceed (NTP) Letter (Fig. 134.4.2)]] to the consultant. The NTP cannot be sent prior to:
:* Receiving DBE concurrence from External Civil Rights.
:* Execution of the contract
:* Obligation of federal funds by Financial Services

===134.5.3 Consultant Contract Close-Out===
To close out a consultant contract the PM/CA must notify Design and Financial Services that the last invoice is the FINAL invoice and no further payments will be processed. The PM/CA must change the Agreement Status to “Completed” in [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx eAgreements] to initiate the retention schedule of the document and to accurately track open/closed contracts. See [[#134.5.1 Invoicing|EPG 134.5.1 Invoicing]] for information on invoicing and the appropriate email addresses to send the FINAL invoices.

'''Final Audit.''' MoDOT conducts a final audit to determine total allowable contract costs, unless the contract is on a firm, fixed-price basis. Allowable cost principles are identified based on the experience of MoDOT personnel in administering past contracts and in accordance with applicable requirements of [https://www.acquisition.gov/far/current/html/FARTOCP31.html 48 CFR Part 31], Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR), and [http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/programadmin/23cfr172.cfm 23 CFR 172, Administration of Engineering and Design Related Service Contracts].

The PM/CA is responsible for notifying Design when the contract is substantially complete. The final audit may be conducted any time after the project is let; the consultant contract need not be completed for the final audit to be conducted.

Should MoDOT agree prior to contract execution that it is necessary for a consultant to purchase special equipment, materials, or property to accomplish the required services, MoDOT will establish a before and after value and will receive an appropriate credit for any residual values. This credit is passed on to FHWA.

===134.5.4 Consultant Performance Appraisals===
The MoDOT PM/CA must perform an [http://netprod3/DesignConsultant/Questionnaire Online Evaluation] of the consultant’s performance under any engineering services contract with MoDOT at each project milestone and at a minimum, on an annual basis during the term of the consultant’s services provided by the contract. Input for the evaluation should be requested from other divisions that may have project experience with the company, such as the Environmental section, or Construction Division. MoDOT’s PM/CA also completes a final comprehensive evaluation of the consultant’s performance within 30 days after contract completion. The evaluation is included in the project file. MoDOT personnel complete another evaluation of the consultant’s performance within 30 days of completion of the construction phase of the project. The evaluation must contain written comments on how the evaluation was determined. All evaluation comments must be factual and not based upon personal opinion, i.e. all comments must be able to be backed up by actual facts.

Upon completing any evaluation, furnish a copy to the consultant prior to meeting with the district or division project manager to discuss the evaluation. These evaluations are included in MoDOT’s Design Consultant Database and are used during consideration of the consultant for future work assignments. The PM/CA is defined as the project manager, or other person who is responsible for reviewing and approving the consultant’s invoices.

===134.5.5 Restitution for Errors and Omissions===
At times, errors or omissions in the project design or in the information provided for the project may become evident during a project’s bidding or construction phases. When this occurs, the causes surrounding the errors or omissions are investigated to determine a final resolution, which may require financial restitution. A face-to-face meeting between the DE and the consultant will take place to discuss the situation.

The procedure for investigating errors or omissions is:

:1. Contractor/RE initializes a change order with the reason code – CD ([http://epg.modot.mo.gov/files/b/b4/Recovery_of_Cost_Due_to_Consultant_Design_Error.doc Consultant Design Error]). The RE and PM from Construction and Design review the change order and develop recommendation for action and assessment of both direct and indirect costs.

:2. The District Construction and Material Engineer and the District Engineer review and provide comments.

:3. The District Engineer reviews and makes final district recommendations. Form is forwarded to the Construction Division.

:4. The Construction Division Liaison Engineer, the Design Division Liaison Engineer and CCO jointly make the final decision regarding pursuit of reimbursement. The district is informed of the decision.

:5. If the decision is to pursue recovery of costs, then CCO drafts a “Letter of Notice” for the District Engineer’s signature.

:6. The District Engineer sends the Letter of Notice to the Controller’s Division – Accounts Receivable Section (CT A/R) requesting an invoice be created. A copy is to be sent to the Design Division.

:7. Upon receipt of DE’s Letter of Notice to the design consultant, Controller’s Division will create an invoice for the amount of the claim and submit it directly to the design consultant with the Letter of Notice. The revenue source code of 1814-05 “Design Consultant Claims” will be used to track reimbursement by design consultants.

:8. If the consultant does not respond by the “respond by date” in the Letter of Notice, then the Design Liaison Engineer presents the background information to senior management, who make a decision whether or not to begin legal proceedings to pursue reimbursement of costs. If legal proceedings are pursued, Design Liaison Engineer notifies Controller’s Division – Accounts Receivable.

Should formal dispute resolution as detailed in [[#134.6 Dispute Resolution|EPG 134.6 Dispute Resolution]] be initiated during the above procedure, the following steps will ensure MoDOT receives payment:

:1. The PM/CA, with the help of CCO, prepares and provides the controller with a letter from the State Design Engineer to the consultant indicating the Dispute Resolution Committee’s (DRC) decision and the dollar amount of restitution.

:2. The controller prepares an invoice for the amount of the restitution payment and sends it to the consultant with the letter from the State Design Engineer. A copy of the letter and invoice is provided to the Design Division and the district. These documents indicate the payment is made to Department of Revenue – Credit State Road Fund and mailed to:

:::Missouri Department of Transportation
:::Controller’s Office
:::P.O. Box 270
:::Jefferson City, Mo. 65102

:The controller will track the invoice to ensure payment is received from the consultant in a timely manner.

===134.5.6 Incentive and Disincentive Program===

MoDOT has instituted an incentive and disincentive program with the consulting industry to assure that consultants:

:1. Deliver the most cost-efficient design that provides the right solution to the identified need (i.e., Practical Design)
:2. Deliver quality plans
:3. Deliver the roadway and bridge design plans on time as required in the contract
:4. Prepare construction cost estimates that are within an acceptable range of the contract award amount.

The incentive and/or disincentives vary according to the listed category. This program will not be used on every MoDOT roadway and bridge design contract. The incentive and disincentives will be used in whole or in part on major projects that are critical to MoDOT accountability with the public. Fifty percent of the fixed fee is the maximum disincentive that can be incurred. When the district requests approval from the PSC chair to solicit consultant services, the approval will specify whether the contract will or will not include the incentive/disincentive program. Project specific incentives and disincentives will be noted in the contract agreement.

'''Cost-effective Design (Practical Design) and Quality Plans.''' The consultant’s performance on delivering the most cost-efficient design that provides the right solution for the identified need will become a part of the consultant performance evaluation. Quality of Plans will be based on the score for overall performance.

Evaluation scores must be considered on all future contract selections. Consultants who perform poorly or who do not deliver cost-effective designs will not be considered for future contracts until they demonstrate to MoDOT that significant changes have been made within their company to address the concerns. The PSC will monitor this performance and MoDOT staff will be kept informed on the status of any firms that are not being allowed to compete for projects.

'''Deliver Roadway and Bridge Design Plans on Time. '''

:'''Right of Way Plans.''' The project manager should use the flowchart below to determine whether the incentives or disincentive are applicable based on the scheduled delivery date contained in the current contract or supplemental agreement. If changes are made by MoDOT that impact scheduling, the letting date may be re-negotiated .

[[Image:Design Plan Delivery Flow Chart.png|center|600px]]

:'''Final Plans, Surveys, and Estimates.''' The project manager should use the flowchart below to determine whether the incentive or disincentive is applicable based on the scheduled delivery date contained in the current contract or supplemental agreement. If changes are made by MoDOT that impact scheduling, the letting date will be re-negotiated.

[[Image:PS&E Delivery Flow Chart.png|center|600px]]

:'''Accurate Cost Estimates''' are critical for MoDOT to be able to deliver the program promised to the public. Program estimates are published in the STIP and each district programs sufficient projects each year to spend every dollar allocated. Poor estimating causes MoDOT numerous problems at letting. Once the project budget has been set it is then the design consultant’s responsibility to design a good project that satisfies the purpose and need within that budget. The project manager should use the flowchart below to determine whether the consultant qualifies for an incentive or disincentive based on their project estimates.

[[Image:Incentive Disincentive Decision Flow Chart.png|center|600px]]

==134.6 Dispute Resolution==

[[Image:134.3.3.jpg|center|750px]]

Once a consultant is selected to work for MoDOT, circumstances may arise that lead to a dispute between MoDOT’s PM/CA and the consultant. In most cases, a complete understanding and recognition of each party’s concerns will result in successful resolution of the disagreement. However, when that is not the case, this [[#Dispute Resolution Process (DRP)|dispute resolution procedure]] is used.

The relationship between the consultant and MoDOT is a professional contractual relationship. All parties to the contract should understand the dispute resolution process. The PM/CA and the consultant should make every attempt to fully understand the dispute and express honest statements of fact prior to initiating formal dispute resolution. In this context, the PM/CA is defined as the person who authorizes MoDOT’s payment of the consultant invoices.

Before initiating formal dispute resolution, the following activities should occur:

:1. The district engineer, or division engineer (hereinafter indicated by “DE”) prepares a letter to the consultant outlining the contested issues.

:2. The disputing parties (project manager level for both MoDOT and consultant) participate in a face-to-face meeting.

:3. The consulting firm conveys the firm’s recommendations for resolving the dispute.

:4. MoDOT’s representative discusses the consultant’s proposed resolution and responds in a letter, either accepting the proposal or offering a rebuttal.

:5. MoDOT and the consultant attempt to negotiate a settlement.

If the PM/CA and the consultant reach an agreement that provides the consultant with payment greater, or less than the contract maximum, the PM/CA needs to initiate a supplemental agreement and follow normal procedures to get the supplemental agreement executed, including approval by the PSC. If no settlement is forthcoming, formal dispute resolution is initiated.

===134.6.1 Initiating Formal Dispute Resolution===
When attempts between the PM/CA and the consultant have failed to resolve the disagreement, the consultant should enumerate the firm’s concerns in a letter to the DE, thereby initiating formal dispute resolution. A Dispute Resolution File should be started by the PM/CA.

Disagreements may arise over the scope of services, fees, hours, the consultant evaluation, errors and omissions, or other issues. Initiation of the resolution process will in no way be reflected on negatively in the consultant’s performance evaluation. The consultant’s letter to the DE should specifically outline the disagreement and the consultant’s view of the issues. This detailed letter must include:

:1. A clear description of the items that are being disputed
:2. What the consultant desires to resolve the dispute
:3. Background—the sequence of events that led to the dispute
:4. Documentation to support the request
:5. All correspondence between the parties relating to the items in dispute (including e-mail)
:6. A listing of previous attempts to resolve the issue (including e-mail)
:7. A copy of the contract and any supplemental agreements

Upon receiving the consultant’s letter and documentation, the DE will have the PM/CA prepare a similar letter, also addressed to the DE, outlining the administrator’s view of the disagreement with particular attention to the information in the consultant’s letter. MoDOT may also initiate formal dispute resolution by the PM/CA sending a letter, under the DE’s signature, to the consultant contact listed in the contract. The consultant should be directed to respond to the department’s letter. As a courtesy, the PM/CA should notify the consultant project manager before writing this letter.

===134.6.2 Dispute Review by District or Division Engineer===
The PM/CA transmits the letter documenting the issues of the dispute, with the consultant’s letter attached, to MoDOT’s DE for review. In addition, the DE also notifies the Assistant Chief Engineer and the State Design Engineer that formal dispute resolution has been initiated. With this notice, the State Design Engineer begins tracking the dispute resolution process. Whenever the two parties in the dispute reach a resolution, the State Design Engineer should be notified of the following:

:1. Where in the process resolution was reached
:2. The date resolution was reached
:3. What resolution was reached

The DE evaluates the information in the letters, discussing it with the PM/CA and the consultant project manager as necessary.

===134.6.3 Meeting of the Two Parties===
The DE arranges a meeting with the consultant principal. If an agreement is reached after discussion between the DE and the consultant principal, the DE provides a letter to the firm indicating the terms of the agreement. However if agreement is still not reached, the dispute may be taken to the Dispute Resolution Committee.

===134.6.4 Dispute Resolution Committee===
The Dispute Resolution Committee (DRC) is comprised of the Assistant Chief Engineer (acting as chair), Director of External Civil Rights, and Chief Financial Officer. In preparation for the DRC’s meeting, the DE will share written details of the formal dispute resolution’s outcome to this point with the State Design Engineer who then facilitates the DRC procedures. The committee will review this information together with other background information, including the original letters from the PM/CA and the consultant project manager outlining the dispute. When the committee meets, all representatives of the disputing parties are given the opportunity to attend. The DRC discusses the issues with the disputing parties and tries to reach a resolution satisfactory to both parties. If a resolution cannot be reached, an offer of mediation is made to the two parties. Should both parties agree to use mediation to settle the claim, they will share the cost of mediation equally.

If an agreement is reached, the DRC sends the consultant a letter outlining the resolution of the dispute.

===134.6.5 Mediation===
A mediator is an outside party who facilitates a discussion between the disputing parties and enables them to explore options to reach agreement. Responsibility for dispute resolution is solely that of MoDOT and the consultant. The mediator has knowledge of the process and the general terms of the dispute but is not intimately knowledgeable of all project details.

After the consultant has accepted MoDOT’s offer for mediation, the State Design Engineer is responsible for making arrangements for a mediator. This includes selecting an approved mediator from a list (developed jointly by ACEC and MoDOT) and arranging the time and place of the meeting. Participants at the meeting are limited to the DE, the DRC’s chair, the consultant principal, and the mediator. Others, including the PM/CA and the consultant project manager, are not active participants in this meeting but may provide information if the mediator so requests. Legal representation is optional. The disputing parties are responsible for their own costs associated with the mediation but will share all expenses associated with the mediator equally.

Should the mediation result in the dispute’s resolution, the DRC sends the consultant a letter explaining the resolution of the dispute. However, should the mediation not result in resolution of the dispute, the issue is forwarded to MoDOT's Chief Engineer for final action.

===134.6.6 Final Decision by the DRC===
When mediation fails, the State Design Engineer will notify the DRC and MoDOT’s Chief Engineer and provide any additional information gathered during the mediation process. The Chief Engineer will review the information provided and if desired, meet with the members of the DRC to discuss the results of the dispute resolution process up to that point. Upon decision by the Chief Engineer, the State Design Engineer provides a letter to the DE and the consultant principal informing them of the decision. When the consultant receives the letter from the State Design Engineer outlining the decision of the Chief Engineer, the firm may respond; however, formal dispute resolution will have been completed and MoDOT will not entertain further appeals from the consultant.

<div id="Dispute Resolution Process (DRP)"></div>

[[Image:134.3.3.7.jpg|center|800px|thumb|<center>'''Dispute Resolution Process (DRP)'''</center>]]

File:127.25.2.1 Hazardous June 2018.docx

2018-06-21T15:28:13Z

EPGsysop:

127.25 Maintenance Environmental Policies

2018-06-21T15:27:49Z

EPGsysop: Per Env'l, updated "Hazardous Materials Response Plan" document

{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:7px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
|-
|'''Forms'''
|-
|[[media:101 Maintenance - Deer Death Report Form and Map.xls|Deer Death Report Form and Map (Excel)]]
|-
|'''Additional Information'''
|-
|[[media:127.25.2.2 Spill Prevention.doc|Top Ten Spill Prevention Items]]
|}

==127.25.1 Solid Waste==

===127.25.1.1 Asbestos===

Asbestos or possible asbestos containing material that is to be removed during remodeling, repair or demolition shall be sampled by a MoDOT Asbestos Inspector. Material that tests positive for asbestos must be removed by a permitted removal contractor and overseen by a MoDOT Asbestos Contractor Supervisor. All asbestos containing materials shall be handled according to local, state and federal regulations. Asbestos containing materials that do not have to be removed or disturbed shall be left in place. Materials found to have been damaged or become friable (crumbles easily) will be repaired or removed and replaced with non-asbestos containing material. All asbestos work must be done by qualified personnel. There are two types of notifications required by MDNR in regard to asbestos abatement and demolition. Asbestos abatement notification must be provided to MDNR at least 10 working days prior to the start of the project. Demolition or major renovation notification must be provided to MDNR at least 10 working days prior to the start of that project. The demolition notice is required even if there is no asbestos identified in the project.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c10-6a.pdf 10 CSR 10-6], Air Pollution Control Program

[http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText643.html RSMo 643.225 - 643.620] Air Conservation

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15
[[image:127.25.1.2.jpg|right|300px]]

====127.25.1.1.1 Asbestos and Bridge Maintenance====
MoDOT asbestos inspector will inspect bridges to determine if Asbestos Containing Material (ACM) is present on a bridge. The following guidelines will be followed when conducting bridge maintenance work renovations that impacts ACM:

:1. Bridge maintenance work renovations that impacts ACM over the regulated threshold quantities of 260 linear ft., 160 ft2, or 35 cu. ft.

::* MoDOT is required to notify MDNR at least ten (10) working days prior to beginning of project and submit an Asbestos Project Notification (MDNR Form MO 780-1226) and an Asbestos NESHAP Notification of Demolition and Renovation notification (MDNR form MO 780-1923).
::* MoDOT will submit an Asbestos Post-Notification (MDNR form MO 780-1225) when project is completed.
::* All ACM material removed will be packaged, mark and disposed as Regulated Asbestos Containing Material (RACM) in a landfill that accepts RACM.
::* MoDOT employees who work on ACM on bridges will be certified Asbestos Supervisors or Workers by MDNR.

:2. Bridge maintenance work renovations that impacts ACM under the regulated threshold quantities of 160 ft2, 260 linear ft., or 35 cu. ft.
::*. MoDOT is not required to notify MDNR.
::* MoDOT employees who work on ACM on bridges will be certified Asbestos Supervisors or Workers by MDNR.
::* All ACM material removed will be packaged, marked and disposed of in an approved sanitary landfill that accepts ACM.

:3. When conducting emergency Bridge maintenance work renovations on a bridge that has not been inspected for ACM or will impact ACM over the regulated threshold:
::* Contact MDNR and notify them of the Bridge related emergency.
::* Follow guidance for Bridge Maintenance renovations over the regulated threshold quantities. See item #1 above.

:4. MoDOT employees will follow MoDOT’s Respiratory Protection Policy when working on bridges.

:5. MoDOT employees will follow MoDOT’s Asbestos Protection Policy when working on bridges with ACM.

:6. MoDOT will submit one Asbestos Contractor Registration Application (MDNR Form MO 780-1224) annually for MoDOT bridge maintenance work renovations that occurs statewide.

'''Reason for Policy:''' [https://cfpub.epa.gov/adi/ EPA Applicability Determination April 2015], 10 CSR 10-6,

'''Effective Date:''' 7/1/16

'''Revision Dates:'''

===127.25.1.2 Solid Waste===

The department shall dispose of garbage, refuse and other discarded material in a permitted sanitary landfill. Materials such as whole tires, batteries, appliances, used oil and hazardous wastes are prohibited from being disposed of in a sanitary landfill and shall be recycled as regulations dictate. [http://dnr.mo.gov/env/cdwaste.htm Construction and Demolition Waste] also considered solid waste from older buildings being renovated or demolished to make room for newer, more modern buildings. Properly managing the waste during the demolition will prevent threats to human health and the environment.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/26000002001.html RSMo 260.200] - 260.345 Environmental Control

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.1.3 Tire Management===

Waste tires unsuitable for sale or recapping shall be disposed of under state contract [http://sp/sites/eagreements/SitePages/Home.aspx CCO form MT15]. Contact an Environmental Specialist for current contract information. Burning tires or tire pieces is prohibited. Tires and tire pieces shall be stored in a manner that avoids providing a mosquito-breeding site. Twenty-five or more whole tires stored at any one site must be covered. Maintain an inventory of less than 500 whole tires at any one site, at any one time, unless they are loaded on a truck for disposal.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c80-8.pdf 10 CSR 80-8.010 - 80-8.040] Solid Waste Management

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.1.4 Street Sweepings===

Street sweepings are considered solid waste by the [http://www.dnr.mo.gov/ Missouri Department of Natural Resources (MDNR)]. The sweepings must be disposed of in a permitted sanitary landfill. An exception from disposal in a landfill has been granted by MDNR. To qualify for the exemption, the street sweepings must meet the beneficial use requirements as established by MDNR.
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:1px;margin-left:6px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="240px" align="right"
|-
|'''MDNR Approval Letters and Street Sweeping Sampling Information'''
|-
|[[media:127.25.1.4 Street Sweep DNR 2007 letter.pdf|Street Sweep MDNR 2007 letter]]
|-
|[[media:127.25.1.4 Street Sweep DNR 2010 letter.pdf|Street Sweep MDNR 2010 letter]]
|-
|[[media:127.25.1.4 Street Sweep Guidance.pdf|Street Sweep Guidance/Beneficial Use Approval]]
|-
|[[media:127.25.1.4 Street Sweep Sampling Protocol.pdf|Street Sweep Sampling Protocol]]
|}

To qualify for the beneficial use exception, the sweepings must be composed of grit and dirt from the roadway surface and only minor amounts of trash, litter or automotive parts can be present in the sweepings. The sweepings can contain asphaltic concrete materials as clarified in the April 2010 MDNR approval letter.

Street sweepings need to be processed or screened to remove trash, litter and other debris. If the screenings still contain excessive amounts of trash, litter or other debris, additional processing will be required; or the materials will need to be disposed in a landfill. All of the trash, litter and other debris removed by the screening process shall be disposed of in a sanitary landfill.

Sampling and testing of the screened grit and dirt material is required by MDNR. At least one sample must be collected for every 500 cubic yards of screened material created. The guidance in the sampling protocol must be followed. This includes proper sample collection, preservation and analysis by MoDOT’s chemical laboratory. Questions regarding the sampling protocol should be directed to the appropriate [http://sharepoint/sites/DE/environmental_historic_pres/Hazardous%20Waste1/haz%20waste%20assignments.pdf Environmental Specialist in Design Division].

A copy of the sample results must be kept on file at the Maintenance building where the screenings were processed and a copy of the sample results needs to be provided to the Environment section of the Design Division.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.sos.mo.gov/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10csr.asp#10-80 10 CSR 80] Solid Waste Management Regulations and [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText644.html RSMo 644] Missouri Clean Water Law.

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.1.5 Antifreeze===

In the [http://dnr.mo.gov/pubs/pub114.htm ANTIFREEZE WASTE MANAGEMENT GUIDE DNR Publication 114], waste antifreeze is not a listed hazardous waste under the federal hazardous waste regulations in [https://www.law.cornell.edu/cfr/text/40/part-261/subpart-D 40 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 261 Subpart D], but antifreeze may contain metals, particularly lead, and other substances that would cause it to be classified as a characteristic hazardous waste ([http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys/pkg/CFR-2012-title40-vol27/xml/CFR-2012-title40-vol27-part261-subpartC.xml 40 CFR 261 Subpart C]). Spent antifreeze from vehicle maintenance activities shall be collected and processed through a MoDOT antifreeze recycler. Antifreeze that is not reused in the vehicle must be sent to a recycler that accepts antifreeze. Antifreeze may never be discharged to storm sewers, septic systems, streams or on the ground.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c25-5.pdf 10 CSR 25-5.262], Hazardous Waste Management Program. Reduce antifreeze cost and disposal cost.

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.1.6 Battery Management===

All non-rechargeable batteries shall be managed as a solid waste. All rechargeable batteries shall be recycled with an approved recycler. Place cracked lead acid batteries in an acid safe container and contact your battery recycler or Environmental Specialist for specific information. All lead acid batteries should be inside secondary containment.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys/pkg/CFR-2011-title40-vol27/pdf/CFR-2011-title40-vol27-sec266-80.pdf 40 CFR 266.80] Rechargeable batteries contain specific hazardous components such as nickel, cadmium, mercury, lead and sulfuric acid that cause the batteries to be a hazardous waste unless they are sent to a recycler, [http://dnr.mo.gov/pubs/pub2058.htm DNR publication 2058].

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.1.7 Disposal of Animal Carcasses===

Animal carcasses found on MoDOT right of way shall be disposed of properly. Options for disposal are listed below under Accepted Disposal Practices. It is the supervisor's responsibility to choose the option that best suits the needs of their particular area. Disposal practices other than the accepted practices listed below will require State Maintenance Engineer approval.

Since the distribution of [[media:127.25.1.7 MDC Agreement.pdf|a 1987 letter of agreement]], MoDOT has reported all deer killed on its right of way to the Missouri Department of Conservation (MDC). Each deer found on MoDOT right of way is to be reported to the district office and the information logged on the [[media:101 Maintenance - Deer Death Report Form and Map.xls|Deer Death Report Form and Map (Excel)]]. The monthly log sheets are to be forwarded to the Maintenance Operations Functional Unit at General Headquarters by the 15th of the following month. The information will be forwarded to the MDC.

'''Accepted Disposal Practices'''

:*Option 1 - Bury the carcass on highway right of way, provided it is not prohibited by local ordinances, and not in a waterway. The carcass should be buried at a minimum depth of 30 inches. Call [[:Category:142 Missouri One Call System|800-DIG-RITE (800-344-7483)]] prior to digging.

:*Option 2 - Dispose of the animal carcass at a state-approved sanitary landfill, with the landfill operator's approval. There will likely be a fee associated with this option.

:*Option 3 - Dispose of the carcass in an animal compost bin, which can be built at a maintenance facility. The procedures for building composting units shall meet the guidelines established by the University of Missouri as outlined in [http://dnr.mo.gov/pubs/pub1250.htm DNR publication 1250].

:*Option 4 - Dispose of the carcass at a site and in a manner pre-approved by the MDC. Written approval from MDC is required.

:*Option 5 - Where available, the carcass may be taken to a city or county animal control facility equipped to dispose of animal carcasses.

:*Option 6 - Missouri law allows an individual who has struck and killed a deer with their vehicle to claim the deer carcass if written authorization to possess the deer is granted by a MDC Agent.

:*Option 7 - Disposal of domestic animal carcasses by the owner is allowed provided the owner can be identified in a timely manner. If there are any identifying marks on the carcass, department personnel shall attempt to notify the owner.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText269.html RSMo 269] Environmental Control 40 CFR 30 Federal Endangered Species Act, DNR Solid Waste Program and Water Pollution Control Program,MoDOT liability.

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Date''': 10/27/15

==127.25.2 Hazardous Material Spills==

===127.25.2.1 Hazardous Material Spills (Roadway) by Others===

MoDOT may become responsible for abandoned drums and containers, illegal dumped chemicals and accidental releases of hazardous materials on department property. When hazardous material spills and incidents are discovered on department property, MoDOT personnel shall follow the department's [[media:127.25.2.1 Hazardous June 2018.docx|''Hazardous Materials Response Plan'']] to assure the material is handled properly. Reporting will be made to the Missouri Department of Natural Resources (MDNR) Environmental Emergency Response (EER) (573) 634-2436 in accordance with MoDOT procedures and Missouri [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/26000005001.html RSMo 260.500] through 260.550.

:'''Note''': All unknown materials and containers will be treated as hazardous waste until proven otherwise. When an unknown material or a known hazardous material is discovered on the department's property, the District Hazardous Material Coordinator (DHMC) will be notified. The [[media:127.25.2.1 Contact.docx|DHMC contact list is available]]. The DHMC will call the MoDOT Environmental Section, (573) 526-4778, and the MDNR ERR 24 hour hotline number, (573) 634-2436, and report all information available to both. It will then be the responsibility of the MDNR ERR to determine if the material is hazardous. If DNR makes the declaration of a “hazardous substance emergency”, they will (1) respond with their own resources, or (2) contact the contractor to respond to the incident. In either case, either party will conduct the initial containerization and remove the material from the ROW to the nearest available storage facility, while any additional waste stream profile analysis is performed. MoDOT staff will arrange for any required shipment, disposal and reporting once waste stream profiling is complete.

In the event the abandoned container is neither leaking nor bulging, but is located within the clear zone, then the same contact protocol would apply as specified above. The only exception would be if MDNR were unable to respond immediately to the incident (due to lack of personnel availability, etc.), then MoDOT shall contact the appropriate emergency response contractor as specified in our [http://archive.oa.mo.gov/purch/noa/c313018.pdf Hazardous Substance Cleanup & Disposal Services OA contract] to ensure a timely response.

If a responsible party cannot be identified, then the response, characterization and disposal costs would become the responsibility of MoDOT (for either hazardous or non-hazardous substance responses). In those instances where an owner (responsible party) can be identified, MoDOT will seek cost recovery from the owner. If there has been a release, it will be necessary to coordinate with district Traffic personnel to write a permit to the responsible party or the emergency response contractor to allow cleanup on department property.

:'''Note:''' Discovery of suspect mobile meth labs shall follow a variation of this process, as outlined in “Publication for Dealing with Mobile Meth Labs”, due to the law enforcement aspect associated with this material.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/26000005001.html RSMo 260.500 - 260.550] Environmental Control [http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40cfr260_main_02.tpl 40 CFR 260] - 261, MoDOT liability

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.2.2 MoDOT Hazardous Material Spills===
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:7px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="160px" align="right"
|-
|[[media:127.25.2.2 Spill Prevention.doc|'''Top Ten Spill Prevention Items''']]
|}
Hazardous material spills, and spills of other materials that leave MoDOT and enter waters of the state from MoDOT operations are the responsibility of the Department and will be reported to the MDNR ERR 24 hour hot line number immediately by the first Department employee to discover the spill. That employee will also notify their supervisor and the DHMC. An environmental specialist will also be notified of the spill. MoDOT employees will take immediate action to contain the release and clean up spilled material. Reporting will be made to the Missouri Department of Natural Resources (MDNR) Environmental Emergency Response (ERR) 573-634-2436 in accordance with MoDOT procedures and Missouri [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/26000005001.html RSMo 260.500] through 260.550. If any of the material spilled comes in contact with waters of the state (creeks, springs, rivers, groundwater or ponds) the incident shall also immediately be reported to the [http://www2.epa.gov/emergency-response/national-response-center National Response Center] (NRC) at 800-424-8802. Incidents during the normal working day should be reported to the district as soon as possible. The District office should report to the Maintenance division as soon as possible. Should an incident occur after normal working hours, information should be telephoned to available maintenance personnel, as well as the pertinent [http://sharepoint/sites/DE/environmental_historic_pres/Hazardous%20Waste1/haz%20waste%20assignments.pdf Environmental Specialist in Design Division]. Design Division environmental contacts are also referenced in the maintenance facility SPCC plans.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/26000005001.html RSMo 260.500] - 260.550 Environmental Control

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15, 8/4/16

==127.25.3 Rest Areas==

===127.25.3.1 Rest Area Lagoon===

All rest area lagoons shall have a current [http://www.dnr.mo.gov/env/wpp/stormwater/sw-land-disturb-permits.htm National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit]. These permits require the department to submit discharge samples results on a regular basis to the Missouri Department of Natural Resources. The department will comply with all requirements of the (NPDES) permits. Application for renewal shall be submitted to MDNR every five years at least 180 days prior to the expiration date of the permit. All NPDES permits must be kept current.The NPDES permit describes the limits and requirements for each specific site. These requirements include the discharge limits, frequency of sampling, location of sampling and where sample results are to be submitted. All reporting requirements and sample collection will be in compliance with the NPDES permit. A copy of the permit shall be readily available to the person who conducts sampling and report submittal.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText644.html RSMo 644] Water Pollution,Federal Water Pollution Control Act, Public Law 92-500, 92nd Congress

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.3.2 Rest Area Drinking Water===

All rest areas that are using on-site wells as the source of drinking water shall have a valid operating permit issued by the Missouri Department of Natural Resources (MDNR) Public Drinking Water Program (PDWP). Operation and maintenance of these wells shall be in accordance with the MDNR-PDWP rules and regulations pertaining to drinking water supplies. Rest areas that are served by a municipal or public water supply shall adhere to specific rules and regulations established by the water supplier concerning operation and maintenance of the water distribution system. For additional information see [[127.25 Maintenance Environmental Policies#127.25.4.3 Well Closures|EPG 127.25.4.3 Well Closures]] and [[127.25 Maintenance Environmental Policies#127.25.3.2.1 Well Drilling|EPG 127.25.3.2.1 Well Drilling]].

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c60-1.pdf 10 CSR 60-1.010] Public Drinking Water

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

====127.25.3.2.1 Well Drilling====

The following procedures are established for well drilling:

:*The district office shall request the Department of Natural Resources (DNR), Research and Technical Information Division, Rolla, Mo., to advise the district office concerning the expected depth of the proposed well and the estimated casing depth.
:*The district office will use the "Standard Bid Form - Well Drilling" to receive bids for the work from only licensed well drillers.
:*The district shall appoint an employee who is familiar with well drilling to make regular inspections of the work in progress.

For additional information see [[127.25 Maintenance Environmental Policies#127.25.3.2 Rest Area Drinking Water|EPG 127.25.3.2 Rest Area Drinking Water]] and [[127.25 Maintenance Environmental Policies#127.25.4.3 Well Closures|EPG 127.25.4.3 Well Closures]].

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chaptersIndex/ChaptIndex256.html RSMo 256.000-256.640]

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

==127.25.4 Water Management==

===127.25.4.1 Storm Water Regulations===
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:10px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="250px" align="right"
|-
|'''Additional Form Available'''
|-
|[http://dnr.mo.gov/env/wpp/permits/issued/docs/R100000.pdf Missouri State Operating Permit for Land Disturbance]
|-
|'''Additional Information'''
|-
|[[media:127.25.4.1 June 2012 Changes in the Permit July 2012.docx|June 2012 Changes in the MO State Operating Permit for Land Disturbance]]
|}
MoDOT activities disturbing one acre or more of total land area require storm water permit authorization from the Missouri Department of Natural Resources (MDNR). This includes many construction and maintenance grading operations. The "[[media:127.25.4.1 permit.pdf|MoDOT Operating Permit for Land Disturbance]]" from the MDNR authorizes these MoDOT grading activities so long as a site-specific [[806.8 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)|storm water pollution prevention plan (SWPPP)]] has been developed for the activity prior to commencing land disturbance. Some minimal impact activities, such as narrow linear, strip or ribbon construction or maintenance activities such as cleaning or routine maintenance of roadside ditches are exempt from the storm water permit requirements. Contact the MoDOT [http://mysite/Person.aspx?accountname=MODOTDS%5Ckopine1 Stormwater Compliance Coordinator] if you have questions.

:Note: The MDNR defines storm water as storm water runoff, snow melt runoff, surface runoff and drainage.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c20-6.pdf 10 CSR 20-6.200], page 44, Missouri Department of Natural Resources, Water Pollution Control Program

'''Effective Date''': 3/31/12

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.4.2 Maintenance Operations Impacting Streams===

Activities in most streams are regulated by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (COE) and require [http://epg.modot.org/index.php?title=127.4_Wetlands_and_Streams 404 Permits]. Districts shall contact the local COE Office or their wetland specialist prior to beginning any work in streams. The necessary permits for removal or placement of materials in the stream shall be obtained from the COE prior to conducting the work, unless emergency authorization has been given by the COE to do the work. Technical assistance can be obtained from the [http://sharepoint/sites/de/environmental_historic_pres/Wetlands/Wetland%20Staff%20Assignments.pdf Wetland Specialist] in applying for a COE 404 permit. (Use the [http://res/Pages/Start.aspx Request for Environmental Services Database] for STIP jobs or contact your wetland specialist for typical maintenance projects.)

For additional infoprmation see [http://www.nwk.usace.army.mil/Portals/29/docs/regulatory/Activities%20Requiring%20Permits%20Fact%20Sheet%20-%20Apr%202015.pdf Activities Requiring Permits].

'''Reason for Policy'''

The specific regulatory authority for the COE is based on the following laws: [http://water.epa.gov/lawsregs/guidance/wetlands/sec404.cfm Clean Water Act-Section 404]; [http://dnr.mo.gov/env/wpp/401/index.html Water Quality Certification-Section 401].

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.4.3 Well Closures===

The proper abandonment of water wells is imperative to the protection of ground water. All wells not in use or planned to be used shall be properly closed to comply with the Water Drillers Act. A permitted water well, pump installer, monitoring well or heat pump installer shall oversee the closures. Contact an [http://sharepoint/sites/DE/environmental_historic_pres/Hazardous%20Waste1/haz%20waste%20assignments.pdf environmental specialist] for guidance in well closures. See [[127.25 Maintenance Environmental Policies#127.25.3.2 Rest Area Drinking Water|EPG 127.25.3.2 Rest Area Drinking Water]] and [[127.25 Maintenance Environmental Policies#127.25.3.2.1 Well Drilling|EPG 127.25.3.2.1 Well Drilling]].

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chaptersIndex/ChaptIndex256.html RSMo 256.000 - 256.637] Geology, Water Resources and Geodetic survey [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c23-3.pdf 10 CSR 23–3.110]

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

==127.25.5 Containers==

===127.25.5.1 Fuel Storage Tanks===

Underground fuel storage tanks and their piping are required to have operational, approved leak, corrosion and overfill protection and, when necessary, vapor controls. A tank registration form shall be submitted to the Missouri Department of Natural Resources within 30 days of bringing a tank into use and when a change is made to the tank or ancillary equipment.

All above ground tanks shall be labeled as to their contents. Any facility that has any kind of oil storage capacity (55 gallons or larger containers) that totals 1320 gallons aggregate, is required to have a SPCC plan. All above ground tanks containing oil-based product are required to have secondary containment with sufficient capacity to hold the largest container plus the maximum expected rainfall. The plan must be made available to an EPA inspector if requested during an on-site inspection.

Tanks that exceed the minimum reportable quantity of hazardous material require an NFPA 704 Hazard Communication sign. For additional information see [[127.25 Maintenance Environmental Policies#127.25.5.1.1 Fuel Pump Calibration|EPG 127.25.5.1.1 Fuel Pump Calibration]].

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40cfr112_main_02.tpl 40 CFR 112]

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

====127.25.5.1.1 Fuel Pump Calibration====

Fuel pumps shall be calibrated annually except for those that have a history of reporting errors, or when normal tracking of petroleum usage indicates that there is a problem. Those pumps that are showing unacceptable variances should be calibrated as needed and corrections made until the problem is solved or the pump is replaced.

For additional information see [[127.25 Maintenance Environmental Policies#127.25.5.1 Fuel Storage Tanks|EPG 127.25.5.1 Fuel Storage Tanks]].

'''Reason for Policy''': MoDOT inventory requirement to eliminate petroleum theft.

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.5.2 Herbicide Containers===

Instructions on container labels shall be followed for storage, use and disposal of containers and their contents. Empty herbicide containers shall be triple rinsed with water and the rinsate reused in mixing operations. The container shall be returned to the supplier or disposed of in a permitted sanitary landfill or sent to a recycler. To dispose of containers containing some herbicide material or an out of specification herbicide, contact an [http://sharepoint/sites/DE/environmental_historic_pres/Hazardous%20Waste1/haz%20waste%20assignments.pdf Environmental Specialist] for assistance.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText260.html RSMo 260] Environmental Control, [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/28100002201.html RSMo 281.220 - 281.310] Pesticides

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.5.3 Empty Drums and Containers===

All empty (less than an inch of product remaining) containers, including 55 gallon drums, shall have all openings closed with containers stored on their sides to prevent rainwater from mixing with product residues.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40cfr260_main_02.tpl 40 CFR 260]-261. Prevent the formation of large quantities of used products that require complying with Hazardous Waste Regulation

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

==127.25.6 Environmental Compliance==

===127.25.6.1 Threatened or Endangered Species===

All MoDOT Maintenance activities shall be conducted in a manner that does not impact any federally or state listed threatened or endangered species or their critical habitat. If an activity will impact a listed species, MoDOT must conduct formal consultation with the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service and obtain a Biological Opinion prior to conducting the activity.

Prior to starting any new activities (mowing, spraying, etc.) or changing methods for conducting established activities maintenance personnel should contact Chris Shulse at (573) 526-6678 or Bree McMurray at (573) 526-0606 to determine if the activity will impact any rare species or critical habitat.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys/pkg/CFR-2002-title50-vol1/pdf/CFR-2002-title50-vol1-sec17-3.pdf 50 CFR 17] Endangered Species Act, [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/3csr/3c10-4.pdf 3 CSR 10-4.111], State Endangered Species Rule

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.6.2 Tier II Reporting===

A copy of the Tier II Reporting form shall be clearly posted on a bulletin board in each maintenance building. Tier II refers to [http://dnr.mo.gov/env/hwp/enf/epcra.htm state and federal Emergency Planning Community Right-to-Know Act (EPCRA)].

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/29200006051.html 292.605] Missouri Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

==127.25.7 Hazardous Waste==

===127.25.7.1 Hazardous Waste Compliance===

The department shall comply with all Federal Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and Missouri Department of Natural Resources (MDNR) regulations regarding waste materials. This includes the generation, transportation, storage, and disposal of hazardous waste. The Department of Natural Resources' [http://dnr.mo.gov/env/hwp/enf/ Hazardous Waste Program's Compliance and Enforcement Section] works to ensure compliance with hazardous waste laws. If you have reason to think your site or location is producing a hazardous waste you should contact the district Hazardous Material Spill Coordinator or an Environmental Specialist in Design division.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c25-1.pdf 10 CSR 25-1.010] and [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c25-14.pdf 10 CSR 25-14.010], Missouri Hazardous Waste Management Regulations, [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText260.html RSMo. 260], [http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40cfr260_main_02.tpl 40 CFR 260] - [http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40cfr265_main_02.tpl 265].

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.7.2 When a Product Becomes a Waste===

Generators must use products for their intended purpose. A product can become a waste if a facility does not properly store the material or the product is beyond its shelf life. If a generator is no longer using the product, it must be properly disposed and not abandoned or stored. A facility storing a material that is a hazardous waste must comply with Missouri’s hazardous waste regulations.

Missouri Department of Natural Resources has produced the [http://dnr.mo.gov/pubs/pub1349.htm Waste or Product Determination Guidance publication 1349] to provide criteria to consider when a product becomes a waste.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c25-1.pdf 10 CSR 25-1.010] and [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c25-14.pdf 10 CSR 25-14.010], Missouri Hazardous Waste Management Regulations, [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText260.html RSMo. 260], [http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40cfr260_main_02.tpl 40 CFR 260] - [http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40cfr265_main_02.tpl 265].

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.7.3 Lead Based Paint Abatement===

The following activities involving lead paint abatement currently require licensing of personnel and project notification to the Department of Health & Senior Services (DHSS):

:1. Any testing or identification of lead-based paint on the surface of structures,
:2. Determinations of whether a painted structure is a lead hazard because of deteriorated paint, and
:3. Performance of lead abatement activities.

MoDOT has entered into a [http://www.modot.org/business/contractor_resources/documents/MOUBetweenMoDOTandDHSS.pdf Memorandum of Understanding (MOU)] with the DHSS that stipulates the above requirements will be followed for all MoDOT-let lead abatement projects. Specific requirements include:

:1. All contractors and subcontractors performing lead abatement activities must be licensed as Missouri lead abatement contractors. Additionally, employees of the contractors performing lead abatement activities are required to be licensed as Missouri lead abatement supervisor(s) and/or workers,
:2. The MoDOT Resident Engineer (RE) shall provide notification to DHSS through the submittal of a lead abatement project funding agency notification form which is required to be submitted 10 days prior to the onset of lead abatement projects, and
:3. The [http://www.modot.org/business/contractor_resources/documents/ContractorInformationPacketofLeadWorkActivities.pdf contractor shall also provide notification to DHSS] through the submittal of a lead abatement project notification form which is required to be submitted 10 days prior to the onset of lead abatement projects.

Lead based paint removed from any surface is considered a hazardous waste. Lead based paint removed from steel structures or buildings shall be containerized, labeled and disposed of at an approved hazardous waste facility. In some instances, the lead paint and blast material may be recycled and exempted as a hazardous waste. Contact an [http://sharepoint/sites/DE/environmental_historic_pres/Hazardous%20Waste1/haz%20waste%20assignments.pdf Environmental Specialist] for assistance or additional information.

'''Reason for Policy:''' [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText260.html RSMo. 260-265] and [http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40cfr268_main_02.tpl 40 CFR 268], [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c25-4.pdf 10 CSR 25-4.010], Hazardous Waste Management. [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/70100003001.html RSMo 701.300-701.332] and [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/19csr/19c30-70.pdf 19 CSR 30-70.600(19)], Lead Abatement and Assessment Licensing, Training Accreditation.

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.7.4 Equipment Cleaning Fluids===

The department shall make every effort to purchase fluids that do not exhibit any characteristics of hazardous materials which would result in the generation of a hazardous waste when used. These characteristics include the following:
:*A flash point of 140° Fahrenheit or less
:*Corrosive, a pH of equal to or less than 2 or equal to or greater than 12.5
:*Reacts violently with water
:*Listed as a toxic hazardous waste
:*Products containing chlorinated components

All efforts are made to identify products that are not only safe for the environment but our employees also. The [http://sharepoint/sites/de/environmental_historic_pres/Hazardous%20Waste1/Waste%20Minimization%20Info/Approved%20environmentally%20friendly%20products.docx approved products list] outlines those products which meet the objectives for both environmental compliance and worker safety. Some [http://sharepoint/sites/de/environmental_historic_pres/Hazardous%20Waste1/Waste%20Minimization%20Info/CRC%20GREEN%20Product%20Review.pdf product review] information is also available.

'''Reason for Policy:''' Clean Water Act, Solid Waste Law, Hazardous Waste Law. MoDOT desires to produce as few hazardous wastes as possible. Chlorinated solvents pose a health risk to employees. Contact your [http://sharepoint/sites/DE/environmental_historic_pres/Hazardous%20Waste1/haz%20waste%20assignments.pdf Environmental Specialist] for more information.

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.7.5 Used Oil===

The department shall store used oil, prior to shipment off-site, in containers that are in good condition, void of leaks and clearly labeled as used oil. All oil storage tanks are required to be included in the SPCC plan and have secondary containment with sufficient capacity to hold the largest container plus the maximum expected rainfall.

'''NOTE:''' Used petroleum fluids such as gear lube, transmission oil and hydraulic oil are defined as used oils. '''Mixing solvents or antifreeze with used oil is strictly prohibited.''' Records of contracts, shipper name and identification number, dates of shipment, quantity and type of oil and the processor's name and permit number shall be kept on file. [http://dnr.mo.gov/pubs/pub153.htm Additional information on regulation and disposal of used oil] is available through DNR.

'''Reason for Policy:''' [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c25-11.pdf 10 CSR 25-11], Hazardous Waste Program.

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.7.6 Hazardous Waste Reporting===

The department must file a quarterly [http://dnr.mo.gov/forms/780-1097.pdf summary report] for all MoDOT hazardous waste shipments from the large quantity generator sites with the Missouri Department of Natural Resources (MDNR). Annual reports are required for small quantity and one-time shipment sites. Following receipt of a copy of the hazardous waste manifest from the hazardous waste disposal facility, the Environmental Specialist shall forward a copy of the manifest to both the district hazardous materials spill coordinator and Central Office Design. If the manifest is not received from the hazardous waste facility within 45 days, an exception report must be filed with MDNR.

'''Reason for Policy:''' [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c25-5.pdf 10 CSR 25-5.262] Missouri Hazardous Waste Management Regulations.

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

==127.25.8 General==

===127.25.8.1 Open Burning===

There shall be no open burning of trade waste or refuse generated by the department at any of its facilities except for open burning of tree trunks, limbs and vegetation at the point of generation, unless permitted. Restrictions concerning open burning:
:*[http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c10-2.pdf 10 CSR 10-2.100] Kansas City Metropolitan Area
:*[http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c10-3.pdf 10 CSR 10-3.030] Out State Missouri
:*[http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c10-4.pdf 10 CSR 10-4.090] Springfield Green County Area
:*[http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c10-5.pdf 10 CSR 10-5.070] St. Louis Metropolitan Area

Contact individual county planning and zoning offices for areas requiring compliance. Trade wastes are defined as solid, liquid, or gaseous material resulting from construction or the prosecution of any business, trade or industry or any demolition operations including, but not limited to cardboard, plastics, cartons, grease, oil, chemicals or cinders. Trade wastes include scrap lumber and wooden shipping pallets. Refuse is defined as garbage, rubbish, trade waste, leaves, salvageable material, agricultural wastes or other wastes.

'''Reason for Policy:''' Comply with State Regulations Air Pollution Control Law and Regulations [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c10-6a.pdf 10 CSR 10-6], Air Pollution Control Program [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText643.html RSMo 643].

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.8.2 Lead Mining Chat===
Lead mining chat encapsulated in asphalt or concrete, may be used for highway construction. Special requirements apply to chat from the Tri-State Mining District (Jasper, Newton, Lawrence and Barry Counties in southwest Missouri) as referenced in . Refer to [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=14 Missouri Standard Specifications for Highway Construction 1001.12]. For additional information see [[#127.25.8.2.1 Abrasives|EPG 127.25.8.2.1 Abrasives]].

'''Reason for Policy:''' MDH Health Study established to protect the health of workers and persons living along roadways. Air Pollution Control Law and Regulations 10 CSR 10-6, Air Pollution Control Program, [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText643.html RSMo 643], [http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40cfr260_main_02.tpl 40 CFR 260-265], [http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?tpl=/ecfrbrowse/Title40/40cfr268_main_02.tpl 40 CFR 268], [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText260.html RSMo 260], [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c25-4.pdf 10 CSR 25-4.10].

'''Effective Date:''' 8/28/2015

'''Revision Dates:'''

====127.25.8.2.1 Abrasives====
The maximum aggregate size for abrasives shall not exceed 3/8 inch. Lead mining chat (within established limits) may be used for general maintenance purposes. See [[#127.25.8.2 Lead Mining Chat|127.25.8.2 Lead Mining Chat]], for requirements for chat from the Tri-State Mining District. See [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=14 Missouri Standard Specifications for Highway Construction Sec 1001.12] for established lead limits in mining by-product aggregates.

For additional information see [[#127.25.8.2 Lead Mining Chat|EPG 127.25.8.2 Lead Mining Chat]].

'''Reason for Policy:''' Experience has shown that an aggregate size larger than 3/8 in. is ineffective and contributes to broken windshields. Mine tailings may contain environmentally unsafe materials.

'''Effective Date:''' 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates:''' 6/17/03, 9/25/15

===127.25.8.3 Sewage Disposal System===

Where a sewage system at a present maintenance site is being modified or when a sewage system is being designed for a new facility, the department shall consider the feasibility of connecting onto a publicly owned waste water treatment plant (POTW). If it is not economically feasible to connect to a POTW, an on-site sewage treatment system shall be considered. The [http://dnr.mo.gov/forms/780-2189-f.pdf required construction permit] shall be obtained from the Missouri Department of Health or the Missouri Department of Natural Resources, Water Pollution Control Program, prior to construction. For additional information see [[127.25 Maintenance Environmental Policies#127.25.8.3.1 Industrial and Domestic Waste Waters on Right of Way|EPG 127.25.8.3.1 Industrial and Domestic Waste Waters on Right of Way]].

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/70100000251.HTML RSMo 701.025 - 701.059] State Standards, [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText644.html RSMo 644] Water Pollution Control Program, Federal Clean Water Act [http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys/granule/USCODE-2011-title33/USCODE-2011-title33-chap26-subchapI-sec1251/content-detail.html 33 U.S.C. 1251-1387].

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

====127.25.8.3.1 Industrial and Domestic Waste Waters on Right of Way====

Sewage and waste shall be disposed of by discharging into a sewer system regulated pursuant to chapter 644, RSMo, or shall be disposed of by discharging into an on-site sewage disposal system operated as defined by rules promulgated pursuant to sections 701.025 to 701.059, RSMo. Any person installing on-site sewage disposal systems shall be registered to do so by the [http://health.mo.gov/index.php Missouri Department of Health and Senior Services].

Private homeowners are regulated by the Missouri Department of Health and Senior Services. The Missouri Department of Health and Senior Services is to be contacted when wastewater discharge from private homeowners is found on right of way. If a property owner requires assistance in containing effluent, they should be directed to the Department of Health for assistance.

Commercial businesses and industries are regulated by [http://dnr.mo.gov/ MDNR]. When wastewater discharge from a regulated entity is discovered on MoDOT right of way, the Environmental Specialist will contact MDNR to determine if the commercial business or industry has a valid operating permit issued by MDNR to discharge effluent.

The Environmental Specialist will request MDNR to take whatever legal action necessary concerning any business or industry that does not have a valid permit from MDNR to discharge effluent to the highway right of way.

For additional information see [[#127.25.3.1 Rest Area Lagoon|EPG 127.25.3.1 Rest Area Lagoon]], [[#127.25.8.3 Sewage Disposal System|EPG 127.25.8.3 Sewage Disposal System]] and [[#127.25.8.3.2 System Attachments by Others|EPG 127.25.8.3.2 System Attachments by Others]].

'''Reason for Policy:''' [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/chapters/chapText701.html RSMo. 701]

'''Effective Dates''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 12/27/12, 10/27/15

====127.25.8.3.2 System Attachments by Others====

Piped connections to the drainage system are prohibited unless approved by the district engineer. In situations where connections are permitted, plans and specifications are required to meet MoDOT specifications. If approved, the work shall be done under an approved permit and/or a Missouri Highway and Transportation Commission Agreement. Attachments to bridges and large box culverts that qualify as bridges should be referred to the Bridge Division for review. Connections to MoDOT's drainage system should be reviewed for compliance under MoDOT's MS4 stormwater permit.

For additional information see [[127.25 Maintenance Environmental Policies#127.25.8.3.1 Industrial and Domestic Waste Waters on Right of Way|EPG 127.25.8.3.1 Industrial and Domestic Waste Waters on Right of Way]] and [[127.29 Storm Water#127.29.5 MCM 3: Illicit Discharge Detection and Elimination (IDDE) Program|EPG 127.29.5 MCM 3]].

'''Reason for Policy''': Protect MoDOT from possible litigation. Protect the current drainage system.

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 12/27/12, 10/27/15, 11/30/15

===127.25.8.4 Vehicle Placarding===

Department vehicles transporting regulated quantities of hazardous waste shall be placarded. MoDOT is exempt from placarding asphalt distributors and product shipments.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://www.ecfr.gov/cgi-bin/text-idx?c=ecfr;sid=68a3027b802cf7b31b57de42b86e7dee;rgn=div5;view=text;node=49%3A2.1.1.1.2;idno=49;cc=ecfr 49 CFR 105]-177 U.S.DOT, [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c10-6a.pdf 10 CSR 25-6.010], Missouri Hazardous Waste Regulations

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.8.5 Fugitive Dust===

The department shall operate in a manner that minimizes and/or prevents fugitive dust from going beyond MoDOT property lines or off right of way. Dust from operations such as concrete sawing, crack and joint repair, street sweeping and roadway rotomilling shall be contained on department property.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c10-6a.pdf 10 CSR 10-6.170], Air Pollution Control Program. Provide driving conditions free from dust obstructions.

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.8.6 Vehicle Painting===

A permit may be required for vehicle painting using power spray operations at maintenance buildings. When required, such permits shall be acquired prior to initiation of painting operations. Painting with a brush or touch up painting with an aerosol can does not require a permit.

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://s1.sos.mo.gov/cmsimages/adrules/csr/current/10csr/10c10-6a.pdf 10 CSR 10-6.020], Air Pollution Control Program

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.8.7 Environment Site Assessment===

All properties to be disposed of or purchased shall have an environmental review conducted prior to selling or purchasing. Environmental reviews are conducted for the benefit of the department to identify existing or potential environmental liability that may be present. Environmental reviews shall be conducted by the Environmental and Historic Preservation section of Design.

'''Reason for Policy''': Reduce MoDOT liability.

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

===127.25.8.8 Salt Runoff===

Measures shall be implemented that will eliminate damage to adjacent property from salt runoff generated from maintenance facilities. Salt and salt mix shall be stored under waterproof cover. For additional information see [[127.25 Maintenance Environmental Policies#127.25.8.8.1 Storage|EPG 127.25.8.8.1 Storage]].

'''Reason for Policy''': [http://revisor.mo.gov/main/OneChapter.aspx?chapter=644 RSMo 644] Water Pollution, Federal Clean Water Act [http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys/granule/USCODE-2011-title33/USCODE-2011-title33-chap26-subchapI-sec1251/content-detail.html 33 U.S.C. §§ 1251]-1387. There have been a number of incidents in which salt, salt brine, liquid calcium chloride runoff, or spillage from the storage of salt has caused environmental damage. Storm water runoff from salt piles, brine and calcium storage tanks and mixing areas has proven to be detrimental to aquatic life and vegetation.

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 10/27/15

====127.25.8.8.1 Storage====

Chemicals and stockpiles of treated abrasives are to be stored in a manner to prevent loss of material and prevent damage to State or private property. All bulk salt shall be stored inside covered storage structures. Asphalt pads are to be constructed under and in front of all storage facilities. Mixed materials shall be covered when not in use and between storm events.

For additional information see [[127.25 Maintenance Environmental Policies#127.25.8.8 Salt Runoff|EPG 127.25.8.8 Salt Runoff]].

'''Reason for Policy''': Prevent loss of material and drainage to private property. Most salt runoff damage comes from mixed piles.

'''Effective Date''': 6/1/99

'''Revision Dates''': 6/17/03, 10/27/15

[[Category:127 MoDOT and the Environment|127.25]]

Category:110 State and Federal Wage Rates and Other Requirements

2018-06-21T13:58:21Z

EPGsysop: /* Required Notices and Posters */Per CM, updated " checklist of the jobsite posters" link

[[image:110 State and Federal Wage.gif|right|400px]]

Missouri and federal law often require minimum wage rates (pay) for the various skilled trades. These wage rates are specified in the contract at the time of bidding and are enforced by MoDOT and the [http://www.labor.mo.gov/ Department of Labor] during the construction of the project. Typical MoDOT contracts that do not require Wage Rate Determinations are railroad adjustments, utility adjustments and some Maintenance funded projects.

[[#Application of Prevailing Wage off of the Worksite|Two flowcharts are available]] to help guide the application of wage rate compliance, one for federally funded projects and one for state funded projects.

==110.1 Wage Rates (Guidance for [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=4 Sec 110.1])==
[[image:110.jpg|right|225px]]

Contractors on MoDOT projects are required to pay the appropriate state or federal prevailing hourly wage rate for any craft or type of worker required to perform the work, except when expressly provided by the contract document.

The [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/contractor_resources/bidOpenIndex.shtml state and federal wage rates] are posted on MoDOT’s website. MoDOT will post the applicable wage rates 10 days prior to the bid opening. In instances where the wage rates change within the 10-day window, MoDOT will not update the wage rates since doing so will not provide contractors sufficient time to accommodate the revised wage order in their bids.

To view the wage rates for a specific letting on [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/contractor_resources/bidOpenIndex.shtml MoDOT's website], select the desired letting date, click the "View Letting" button and then proceed to State Wage Rates and Current Federal Wage Rates. The full wage order must be posted on the bulletin board or may be kept in the job trailer or in the foreman's truck for employee inspection. Employees should be made aware where the complete wage order is kept if the entire packet is not posted on the bulletin board. In lieu of placing the complete wage order on the bulletin board, the contractor can create a spreadsheet (a one page document) that shows the wages for the county in which the project is located. This would include listing each of the crafts along with the appropriate wage that is to be paid under the contract for each craft. In addition, at the bottom of the one page document, the contractor must indicate where on the project the complete wage order may be found.

The [[:category:105 Control of Work#105.9 Authority and Duties of Resident Engineer (Sec 105.9)|resident engineer]] or delegated representative is responsible for monitoring compliance with the wage rate laws at the project level. Wage Rate Compliance Checks (WRCC) shall be performed on active projects when applicable. WRCC consist of two major items: Reviewing Payrolls and Wage Rate Interviews.

Payrolls, wage rate interviews and all other labor compliance related documents are to be kept in the resident engineer's office for the duration of the project. Paperless payrolls that are submitted electronically are stored on a server. After project completion, payrolls shall be stored for a period of three years.
<div id="To ensure compliance"></div>
To ensure compliance there are three areas of quality assurance that are performed:
{|style="padding: 0.3em; margin-left:7px; border:2px solid #a9a9a9; text-align:center; font-size: 95%; background:#f5f5f5" width="255px" align="right"
|-
|[https://lsglm700.learnsoft.com/LSGLM/Login/modotloginlink.aspx?cid=69&loiid=167082&enroll=1&svtab=1&launchwbt=1 '''Payroll training, "Project Clerks Basic Training", is available through MoDOT U''']
|}
:'''Training.''' A yearly payroll training will be conducted for all project clerks or other designees that perform the payroll reviews in project offices. A payroll training review course is also available through MoDOT U for new hires and as a refresher for existing employees.

:'''Quality Assurance.''' The final plans processor in each district will select one job every 6 months from each project office to review. They will be checking payrolls, wage rate compliance, C-220s and other pertinent items.

:'''RE review.''' A monthly report indicating the number of wage rate interviews required and performed for each project is generated monthly. This report is sent to the Resident Engineer.

==110.2 Federal-Aid Projects (Guidance for [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=4 Sec 110.2])==
For any contract where a federal rate applies, the greater of the federal or state rate shall be paid.

===Required Notices and Posters===
The contracts for highway construction projects require certain information to be conspicuously displayed on the project where employees regularly congregate in preparation for the day's work. Notices and posters may be provided in a binder for mobile operations to give employees an option for accessing the information so long as the project is 30 work days or less. Unless the project is less than 30 working days the information should also always be made available on a standard bulletin board. The number of locations will depend on the contractor's operations. The resident engineer, or a delegated representative, is to conduct inspections of the bulletin boards. The first inspection should occur when employees begin work on the project. After the initial review, inspections should be conducted every three months until the project is completed to ensure the bulletin board is in good condition and still displays the required posters.

The following is a list of required information to be posted both on the project and in the resident engineer's office:

:Many of the posters can be downloaded from [http://www.modot.mo.gov/business/contractor_resources/forms.htm MoDOT’s internet contractor resources website]. A [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/Job_Site_Bulletin_Board_Checklist_fillable.pdf checklist of the jobsite posters] is also available.

:'''POSTERS AND PACKETS TO BE DISPLAYED ON THE PROJECT SITE:'''
[[image:135.4.jpg|right|400px]]
[[image:135.4 ley.jpg|right|400px]]
<div id="Project Site"></div>

::'''FEDERAL-AID PROJECTS:'''
:::[http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/01_EEO_Policy_Example_Letter.pdf Equal Employment Opportunity], to include name, address and telephone number of company's EEO officer.
:::[http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/02_Letter_Appointing_EEO_Officer.pdf Letter Appointing EEO Officer]
:::[http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/03e_Equal_Employment_Opportunity_110.2.pdf Equal Employment Opportunity is the Law (English)]
:::[http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/04s_Equal_Employement_Opportunity_110.2.pdf Equal Employment Opportunity is the Law (Spanish)]
:::[http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/05e_Employee_Rights_Davis_Bacon_WH1321.pdf Employee Rights Under Davis Bacon Act WH-1321 (English)]
:::[http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/06s_Employee_Rights_Davis_Bacon_WH1321.pdf Employee Rights Under Davis Bacon Act WH-1321 (Spanish)]
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/07e_Job_Safety_Health_Protection_OSHA_3165.pdf Job Safety & Health Protection (OSHA 3165) (English)]
:::[http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/08s_Job_Safety_Health_Protection_OSHA_3167.pdf Job Safety & Health Protection (OSHA 3167 (Spanish)]
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/09e_Notice_to_Workers_Disability_WH_1284.pdf Notice to Worker’s with Disabilities Paid at Special Minimum Wage WH-1284]
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/10e_Minimum_Wage_1088_English.pdf Your Rights- Federal Min. Wage WH-1088 (English)]
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/11s_Minimum_Wage-1088_Spanish.pdf Your Rights- Federal Min. Wage WH-1088 (Spanish)]
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/13s_Notice_Polygraph_Spanish_WH_1462.pdf Notice to Employee Polygraph Protection Act WH-1462 (Spanish)]
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/12e_Notice_Polygraph_English_WH_1462.pdf Notice to Employee Polygraph Protection Act WH-1462 (English)]
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/14e_Your_Rights_Under_Family_and_Medical_Leave_Act_WH1420.pdf Your Rights Under Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993- WH-1420 (English)]
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/15s_Your_Rights_Under_Family_and_Medical_Leave_Act_WH1420.pdf Your Rights Under Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993- WH-1420SP (Spanish)]
:::[http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/16_Notice_FHWA_1022.pdf Notice – FHWA 1022 Title 18]
[[image:110.2 posters.jpg|right|400px|thumb|<center>'''After the initial review, the bulletin board should be inspected every third month until the project is completed to ensure the bulletin board is in good condition and still displays the required posters.'''</center>]]
:::Federal Wage Rate (Order/Determination). See Contract.
<div id="Uniformed Services"></div>
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/27_USERRA.pdf Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act (USERRA)]
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/28e_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (English)]
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/29s_Pay_Transparency.pdf Pay Transparency Nondiscrimination Provision (Spanish)]

::'''ADDITIONAL POSTERS FOR FEDERAL-AID AND STATE-AID PROJECTS:'''
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/18e_Discrimination_in_Employment_is_Prohibited_MCHR_9.pdf Discrimination in Employment is Prohibited by Law in Missouri – MCHR-9 (English)]
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/19s_Discrimination_in_Employment_is_Prohibited_MCHR_9.pdf Discrimination in Employment is Prohibited by Law in Missouri – MCHR-9 (Spanish)]
:::[http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/20e_Workers_Compensation_Law_WC106.pdf Worker’s Compensation Law WC106 (English)]
:::[http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/21s_Workers_Compensation_Law_WC106.pdf Worker’s Compensation Law WC106 (Spanish)]
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/22_Stormwater_Permit_Sign_135.4.pdf Storm Water Permit]
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/23e_Discrimination_in_Public_Accommodations_MCHR07.pdf Discrimination in Public Accommodations MCHR07 (English)]
:::[http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/24s_Discrimination_in_Public_Accommodations_MCHR07.pdf Discrimination in Public Accommodations MCHR07 (Spanish)]
:::[http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/25e_Unemployment_Benefit_Law_MODES_B_2.pdf Unemployment Benefit Law – MODES B-2 (English)]
:::[http://epg.modot.org/forms/CM/26s_Unemployment_Benefit_Law_MODES_B_2.pdf Unemployment Benefit Law – MODES B-2 (Spanish)]

==110.3 Prevailing Wages and Records (Guidance for [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=4 Sec 110.3])==

[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=4 Sec 110] indicates the detail that is required of the contractor payroll.
[[image:110.1.jpg|right|200px]]
Each prime contractor, contractor, subcontractor and subordinate shall furnish weekly a digital certified payroll of wages paid to each of their employees on all projects except those that do not contain Wage Rate Determinations by federal or Missouri law. Payroll information must also include workers on the project provided as part of a rental agreement. One certified copy of labor payrolls must be submitted for each week that work is performed.

Each payroll shall be accompanied by a statement of compliance signed by the contractor, subcontractor, or their agent who pays or supervises the payment of persons employed under the contract, and shall certify that the payroll for the pay period contains the information required and that such information is correct and complete (Certified Statement of Compliance).

The prime contractor must submit a certified copy of each weekly payroll within 7 days of the payment date of the payroll. The certified statement of compliance may be on the payroll itself or on a separate document. The prime contractor will be considered responsible for submittal of payrolls and certifications for all subcontractors on the project within 7 days as well. The certification must be digitally signed and submitted electronically. The prime contractor should be advised that failure to submit these payrolls within the 7-day period may result in delay in submittal of the engineer's payment estimates for those projects involved. The [[:category:105 Control of Work#105.9 Authority and Duties of Resident Engineer (Sec 105.9)|resident engineer]] shall keep a log of all payrolls received as described under Item No. 3 [[#3. Payroll Log|Payroll Log]], below.
<div id="Occasionally a subcontractor"></div>

Occasionally a subcontractor will refuse to sign the prevailing wage affidavit because of a pay dispute with the prime contractor. The prevailing wage affidavit is required by [http://www.moga.mo.gov/mostatutes/stathtml/29000002901.html Missouri law]. Therefore a refusal to sign this document is in violation of Missouri law. The prime contractor, in accordance with this law, has the right to withhold final payment if the subcontractor does not submit the affidavit. The prompt payment law is not enforceable until the subcontractor submits the affidavit.

A best practice is to notify the subcontractor that a refusal to sign the document is in violation of law. This will only harm the subcontractor and not the prime. There are better options for subcontractors to pursue payment. They can contact the bonding company and file a claim against them. They can also pursue civil action against the prime contractor.

Electronic payrolls should not be printed, but should be saved in the “Pending” folder until checked, then moved to the “Checked” folder. The following steps should be included in all payroll checks to ensure proper labor compliance:

<center>'''Payroll Checklist for Every Payroll'''</center>

:1. Payroll Violations

::a. Document any "Payroll Violations" found based on the requirements in this checklist.

::b. Notify the contractor of the violation and track the actions taken until it has been corrected.

:2. Statement of Compliance

::a. Make sure each payroll has a Certified Statement of Compliance with an approved contractor digital signature.

::b. Make sure each Statement of Compliance covers one week (seven-day period).

::c. If there is no work for the entire week, no Statement of Compliance is needed for that week. Note this fact in the [[media:110.3 Payroll Log 2015.xlsx|payroll log]] as described in the following items.

::d. Statement of compliance '''must list''' all deductions that are included on the payroll.
<div id="3. Payroll Log"></div>

:3. Payroll Log

::a. A payroll log is required to track payrolls received to ensure a certified payroll is on file for every week in which work was performed. A [[media:110.3 Payroll Log 2015.xlsx|payroll log form]] is available for this purpose. A separate log is required for the prime and each subcontractor. Payrolls are identified by the date range that they represent. Weeks in which there was no work activity do not require a payroll, but it should be noted in the payroll log that no work was performed that week. Once the final payroll is received, this should be noted in the remarks section of the payroll log.

::b. The payroll log should include: Date range for the week, Checkbox indicating if work was performed, Date Payroll Processed (This is the date the contractor processed payroll. The contractor is required to submit payrolls within 7 days of this date.), Date Received (This is the date MoDOT received the payroll if work was performed.), Checkbox indicating if the payroll was reviewed by MoDOT staff (This will help monitor how many payrolls were checked.), and a Comments field for special notes.

::c. Run a Cognos report each week to reveal all contractors who were present on the project that week. Check the indicator box in the payroll log for all active contractors to show that a payroll is required. It is paramount that inspectors accurately note the presence of all contractors in their DWR so that the Cognos report accurately reflects a list of active contractors for the payroll checker.

<div id="4. Name and Employee Identifying Number"></div>

:4. Name and Employee Identifying Number

::Make sure the employee’s full name and an employee identification number (such as last four digits of Social Security Number) appear on each payroll. The contractor is not allowed to include complete Social Security numbers or employee addresses on certified payrolls. The Prime Contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social security number and current address of each covered worker, and shall provide them upon request to the Contracting Officer (Commission), the Contractor, or the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance with prevailing wage requirements.

:5. Classification

::a. Check to ensure each employee has a classification.

::b. Make sure classifications are correct as related to the type of work the company has subcontracted (if applicable).

::c. Employees enrolled in the MoDOT training program must be shown on the payroll in the classification they are enrolled in as trainee. (i.e. Crane Operator Trainee, Carpenter, Laborer, etc.)

::d. When possible, confirm that employees are classified correctly as to what type work they are performing by using the interview process, jobsite visits, communication with the inspectors, and by reviewing the Inspector’s Daily Report of Construction.

::e. Foremen or supervisors who perform '''20% or less''' of the day with the tools of the trade are exempt from the Davis Bacon Act. They must appear on the payroll as "foreman" or "supervisor" with a breakdown of hours per day and total hours and, since hourly wage rates are not required, they can be listed under Salary Agreement.

::f. Foremen or supervisors who work with tools of the trade more than 20% of the day are not entitled to an exemption under the Davis Bacon Act. Thus, if the hourly wage rate is the same for both classifications the employee will be listed on the payroll to show both classifications in which they performed (i.e. Foreman/Carpenter), hours per day listed, along with an hourly wage rate, gross amount earned, deductions and net wages paid. But, if the hourly wage rate is not the same for both classifications then multiple listings for the employee shall be included on the payroll to show each classification of work performed in each day along with all the appropriate information.

<div id="Rate of Pay"></div>
:6. Rate of Pay

::a. The rate of pay, and other items described below, should be checked to the extent that all information is reasonably accurate. Checking of all payrolls is recommended, but this may not be feasible in all cases due to other priorities. As a minimum, all initial payrolls from each contractor should be thoroughly reviewed. For subsequent payrolls, a thorough checking process should be established to ensure the payrolls are accurate. As a general rule, a complete check (100% of the payroll) of at least half of all payroll submittals on each project is a sufficient frequency to screen for errors. Further checking might be necessary for those contractors found to have frequent errors, while checking less than half of the payrolls may be sufficient for contractors who display extreme competence with payroll compliance. Checking of the calculation of total pay is generally not required unless the payrolls are not automated. Check employee’s rate of pay against the state and federal wage rates to make sure he/she is receiving at least the minimum for his/her classification as per the prevailing wage schedule in the contract. For federally funded projects the rate of pay to be used is the higher of either the federal or state wage rates in cases where the overtime rules are the same. If the overtime rules differ, the contractor must ensure the employee is paid the higher total amount per pay period after applying the appropriate overtime rules. For instance, the state base rate may be lower than the federal base rate, but after applying the state overtime rules the total compensation for the pay period might be higher than the federal rate and federal overtime rules.

::b. Make sure fringe benefit amount, plus base pay amount, matches or exceeds the designated fringe benefit amount, plus designated base pay amount, from the applicable wage order. For example, the base pay amount could be less than that designated as the prevailing wage, if the fringe benefit amount is more than that designated, and the two together meet or exceed the designated gross prevailing wage. The contractor should be encouraged to list the exact fringe paid for each employee on the payroll. If the contractor chooses to certify that the fringe benefits are being paid to approved plans, funds, or programs, the contractor shall provide documentation that the correct payment amount is being paid to the fund for the individual employees.

::c. If an apprentice is used on the project (whether or not there is an OJT Goal) the contractor must submit documentation from the Dept. of Labor (DOL) approved apprenticeship program stating that the person is currently registered in the program, the period/ term in the program (including percentage of journeyman payscale), amount of hours completed in apprentice program to date, and the amount of hours needed to reach journey level. Contact MoDOT’s External Civil Rights at (573) 751-1216 for help to determine the proper DOL documentation.

:7. Deductions

::a. All deductions must be identified. If a deduction of “other” is listed on the payroll it must be explained on the statement of compliance.

::b. Some typical standard deductions include

::::1) State or federal taxes

::::2) Voluntary insurance, pension, and/or retirement plans

::::3) Child support and other payments ordered by a court (but not payments to the employer)

::::4) Prepaid wages

::::5) Payments to charitable organizations

::::6) Union dues when agreed to by the union (fines are not allowable)

::c. Any non-standard deductions that are not listed in 7(b) must be pre-approved by the employee prior to performing the work. The contractor must provide a copy of the employee-signed agreement (i.e. payroll deduction form) for all non-standard deductions. If the employee does not speak English, such agreement shall be written in the employee's native language. This agreement form should be kept on file with the certified payrolls. Subsistence reimbursements, such as lodging, travel and meals are the most common examples of non-standard deductions that an employer might withhold when the employer is providing those services to the employee. MO Statute 290.315.1 requires MoDOT to pre-approve these non-standard deductions as fair and reasonable before the start of work. The contractor shall provide sufficient documentation to verify the deductions are fair and reasonable. Such documentation shall include lease or rental arrangements for housing linked to each employee and receipts or invoices for food and/or travel expenses linked to each employee. For amounts expended by the contractor on behalf of multiple employees, such as multiple employees residing in a single rental unit, each employee's subsistence deduction shall reflect a pro-rata share or less of the expense. Subsistence deductions shall comprise exclusive column(s) on certified payrolls, not to be mixed with garnishments, child support or any other deduction.

:8. Interviews

::a. Check all interviews taken within the period covered by the payroll.

::b. Conduct Wage Rate Interviews according to the frequencies listed in [[#110.3.1 Wage Interviews|EPG 110.3.1]].

::c. Check interviews against payroll, and record all findings in the Wage Interview Log as well as SiteManager.

:9. Electronic Filing of Payrolls

::a. After payrolls have been checked for compliance, and corrected if necessary, the checker shall digitally sign the payroll in the upper right-hand corner of the first page to indicate review of the payroll is complete.

::b. Electronic payrolls shall be saved in eProjects.
<div id="Certified Payroll Exceptions"></div>

===Certified Payroll Exceptions===

====Lead Workers/Foreman/Supervisor====
Lead workers must be paid no less than the prevailing hourly wage for the classification they are working in. If a lead worker is salaried, the contractor must provide documentation of the amount actually paid and the hours actually worked. Salaried superintendents are not covered by prevailing wage provisions and are not required to be listed on the certified payroll. Refer to [[:Category:109 Measurement and Payment#109.5.1 Daily Force Account Record, Labor Account|EPG 109.5.1 Daily Force Account Record, Labor Account]] for additional information.

====Professional Services====
When a contractor hires a Professional Service to perform a support function that does not fit into a federal or state job classification, those workers do not need to be listed on the certified payroll. Some examples of Professional Services include Material Testing Service, Inspection Service, Smoothness Profiling Service, Surveying/Staking, etc. Even though a Surveying/Staking company is considered a Professional Service and does not require workers to be listed on a certified payroll, it may require a subcontract if there is a contract pay item for this work. Refer to [[:Category:108 Prosecution and Progress#In addition to the submission of the|EPG 108.1 Subletting of Contract]] for additional information. A certified welder hired by a contractor to perform specialty welding would be an example of a Professional Service that ''would'' require a certified payroll since that work falls under the classification for Ironworker.

====Other Job Duties Performed by Contractor Personnel====
When a contractor provides personnel to perform a function that does not fit into a federal or state job classification, those workers do not need to be listed on the payroll. Examples would include Material Testing, Inspection, Surveying/Staking, etc.

===Owner-Operator===
[[image:135.5.jpg|right|375px]]
In lieu of submitting a [http://www.modot.org/business/contractor_resources/documents/RequesttoSubcontract_C-220.pdf C-220 (Request to Subcontract Work)], a contractor may request permission to rent a piece of equipment that comes with an operator who also owns that equipment. This is commonly referred to as an “owner-operator” arrangement. The RE can approve these arrangements as long as the following conditions are met:

:1. The operator must be the owner, or partial owner, of the equipment.
:2. No other employees of the owner-operator can operate the equipment or perform any other work on the project.
:3. No other family members of the owner can operate the equipment unless they can provide proof they are partial owners.
:4. The contractor must provide verification from the owner-operator that the owner-operator is receiving no less than the contract prevailing wage.
:5. The owner-operator must be covered under the contractor’s insurance policy.
:6. The contractor shall not exceed the contract sublet limits.

===Equipment Rental with Operator and Purchase Ordered Work===

A prime contractor using rental equipment that is provided with an operator, via purchase ordered work or other financial arrangement, must include the operators on the certified payroll of the contractor. All related documentation must be provided by the contractor to substantiate this arrangement. The operators are subject to wage rate interviews and are to be paid prevailing wage on prevailing wage contracts. This is to ensure a legitimate arrangement is being used, not an attempt to circumvent prevailing wage rate laws.

===Application of Prevailing Wage off of the Worksite===

Some work associated with a project may be performed away from the project site. This work may, or may not, be subject to prevailing wage. A [http://www.modot.org/business/materials/PreCon%20Flow%20Chart%20-%20Federal.pdf wage flowchart for federal jobs] and a [http://www.modot.org/business/materials/PreCon%20Flow%20Chart%20-%20State.pdf wage flowchart for state jobs] are provided for reference; however, the contractor is advised to seek legal advice when applying the charts. MoDOT cannot predetermine how the law may be interpreted in any particular instance.

===Sample Letters to Address Final Paperwork Requirements for Contractors===

Occasionally there are problems receiving final paperwork from contractors, particularly the C-242 Contractor's Affidavit Regarding Settlement of Claims. Below is a series of letters available to remediate this. The letters may need to be modified to suit your particular situation. The fourth letter is to be the last resort. MoDOT does not want to keep a project open indefinitely and may have to final a project without all the documentation. Any tardy paperwork should be reflected in the Contractor Performance Rating.
<center>
{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto" style="text-align:center"
|+
! style="background:#BEBEBE" width="100"|Letter!! style="background:#BEBEBE" width="500"|Application
|-
|[[media:110.3 letter 1.doc|1]] ||align="left" width="500"|To the contractor as a district request for final paperwork.
|-
|[[media:110.3 letter 2.doc|2]]||align="left" width="500"|To the bonding company with a copy to the contractor requesting assistance in closing the project.
|-
|[[media:110.3 letter 3.doc|3]]||align="left" width="500"|To the contractor stating that MoDOT will assess liquidated damages against an active project if final paperwork is not received by a specified date.
|-
|[[media:110.3 letter 4.doc|4]]||align="left" width="500"|All attempts to get the paperwork have failed and request the job be finaled out.
|}
</center>

===110.3.1 Wage Interviews===
The [[:category:105 Control of Work#105.9 Authority and Duties of Resident Engineer (Sec 105.9)|resident engineer]] or delegated representative is to conduct wage rate interviews as part of the Wage Rate Compliance Checks (WRCC). The wage rate interview is necessary to verify compliance with wage rate laws as well as Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) laws.

For all state and federal funded projects, wage rate interviews shall be conducted at an average rate of one interview per each two weeks that work is active, except for Job Order Contracts. Wage interviews for Job Order Contracts shall be conducted at a rate of one interview for each month that work is active.

The wage rate interview frequency should increase during periods of high activity so that compliance can be verified on a wide range of worker classifications and/or subcontract workers. This also helps maintain the desired average rate during periods of low activity and small crews.

When inaccuracies are found in WRCC, the frequency of interviews should increase until the RE has confidence that the contractor is in compliance with the wage rate laws.

On smaller jobs it may be possible to interview every employee over time. There is no need to interview an individual a second time unless additional interviews are justified. Once everyone on a job has been interviewed, a note can be used for documentation and wage interviews can cease until new employees are present on the job.

The interviewer should determine employee's name, employer's name, classification of employee, actual wage paid, and posted wage. All wage rate interviews shall be recorded on the [http://epg.modot.mo.gov/forms/CM/CR1_Wage_Rate_Interview.pdf Wage Interview form]. All questions on the form should be asked during the interview.

Interviews should be noted in SiteManager as a Daily Work Report (DWR) “Wage Interview” remark type. The remark must begin with a single digit numeric character in order for the Cognos report to correctly calculate the number of wage interviews conducted for a given contract (for example, “2 wage interviews conducted today…”).

===110.3.2 Errors, Omissions and Non-Compliance===
When there is any condition or evidence that suggests that the labor laws are not being fully complied with, the resident engineer shall investigate until satisfied of lawful compliance. Investigations shall be limited in nature and cases beyond our investigative ability should be referred to the Divison of Labor. Poor compliance efforts by the contractor should be noted on the [http://p0003/ContractorRating/updateLogin.do Contractor Performance Evaluation].

When payrolls are not submitted within 7 days and/or contain errors, the resident engineer should notify the contractor and encourage them to improve. Payrolls containing errors should be corrected and resubmitted in a timely manner. When payrolls are routinely late and there is no effort to improve on the contractors part, the [[:category:105 Control of Work#105.9 Authority and Duties of Resident Engineer (Sec 105.9)|resident engineer]] should withold payment until the next regular estimate date after compliance is attained.

When a wage rate is believed to be below the contractual lawful minimum, the Division of Labor should be notified. The Divison of Labor will open a complaint case at the request of MoDOT, the employee, the union, or other third party. The Divison of Labor will perform an investigation and then close the complaint either as a violation or non-violation. The resident engineer should ensure a copy of all correspondance from the Divison of Labor is kept in the contract files.

===110.3.3 Semi-Annual Labor Report===
The district construction engineer is to submit a semi-annual report to the main office containing the following information:
:a. Number of contractors/subcontractors against whom complaints were received.
:b. Number of investigations completed.
:c. Number of contractors/subcontractors found in violation.
:d. Amount of wage restitution found due under:
::(1) Davis-Bacon and related acts.
::(2) Work Hours Act of 1962 (The Davis-Bacon Act encompasses prevailing wage rate violations, whereas the Contract Work Hours Act encompasses daily and weekly overtime violations).
:e. Number of employees due wage restitution under Davis-Bacon and related acts and/or Work Hours Act of 1962.
:f. Amount of liquidated damages assessed under Work Hours Act of 1962.

Due dates for the Semi-Annual Labor report are:

{| border="1" class="wikitable" style="margin: 1em auto 1em auto"
|+ '''Semi-Annual Labor Report Due Dates'''
! style="background:#BEBEBE" width="250" | Reporting Period !! style="background:#BEBEBE" width="250" | Due Date
|-
| align="center" | October 1 to March 31 || align="center" | April 4
|-
| align="center" | April 1 to September 30 || align="center" | October 5
|}

The above report is due not later than April 4 for the period from October 1 to March 31, and not later than October 5 for the period from April 1 to September 30. This report should include all information gathered on Federal Aid Projects. The report should be submitted to [http://wwwi/intranet/cm/ Construction and Materials], Central Office, Attention: Jennifer Smith.

===110.3.4 Missouri DOL Form PW-2===
The project office or contractor are not required to provide this form to the Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations (DOL). DOL and MoDOT agreed that MoDOT Construction Division will submit a listing of all newly awarded contracts to DOL at the first of each month. This listing would be in lieu of the [https://labor.mo.gov/pubs-and-forms PW-2 form].

If the DOL PW-2 form is requested, the following standard statement is available for a reply:
:“The issue of filling out a PW-2 form had been previously discussed with Department of Labor in June of 2016. It was agreed that MoDOT would send a project award notification to DOL at the first of each month. This would be in lieu of the PW-2 form. Brenda Hentges with Department of Labor was our contact on this matter. Brenda is sent the monthly updates and can provide you the necessary information.”

==110.4 Work Performed in Adjoining States (Guidance for [http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=4 Sec 110.4])==
[http://www.modot.org/business/standards_and_specs/SpecbookEPG.pdf#page=4 Sec 110] provides information on contracts that involve work in Missouri and in an adjoining state.

==110.5 Other Requirements==

===110.5.1 [http://www.modot.mo.gov/about/commission/openrecords.htm Open Records Policy (Sunshine Act)]===

The Missouri Open Records Law (Sunshine Act) requires governmental agencies to conduct business in a manner open and accessible to all citizens and make their records available to the public. The vast majority of our records may be shared with the public upon request. Some information, however, should not be released. When responding to requests for information, the procedures outlined in the Sunshine Act Policy should be followed. The district construction engineer and each resident engineer have been provided a copy of this policy to assist in responding to requests for information. If the request requires the removal of records from the office, personnel must be available at all times to accompany the records to ensure that they are not lost or destroyed.

===110.5.2 Equal Employment Opportunity===
[[image:135.6 espanol.jpg|right|225px]]
All federal-aid contracts contain specific requirements related to equal opportunities in employment for all persons or contain requirements of a Hometown Plan with the same objectives. These requirements are as much a contractual obligation as any other part of the standard specifications.
<div id="Resource Manual for Equal Opportunity Contract Compliance"></div>
A [[media:110.5.2 Resource Manual.pdf|Resource Manual for Equal Opportunity Contract Compliance]] is issued to all project offices contains detailed information concerning E.E.O. matters.

The [[:category:105 Control of Work#105.9 Authority and Duties of Resident Engineer (Sec 105.9)|resident engineer]] has a responsibility to ensure that the contractor and any nonexempt subcontractors are complying with the specific EEO requirements. To assist the resident engineer in this area, Construction & Materials prepared questionnaires, [http://ghepg01/forms/CO/EEO%20Checklist.dot Resident Engineer EEO Checklist], to be used for checking the various aspects of the EEO Compliance portion of the Federal-Aid contract. Detailed instructions are contained in the E.E.O. Contract Compliance Resource Manual. A [http://www.modot.mo.gov/pdf/business/Subcontractor%20Certification%20Regarding%20Affirmative%20Action.pdf statement of compliance] must be completed by all contractors on the project, excluding suppliers and vendors.

From time to time, contractors and subcontractors may be subjected to a detailed compliance review. This may be conducted by the Federal Highway Administration or by [http://www.modot.mo.gov/ecr/index.htm External Civil Rights Administration]. On occasion, this may be done by both representatives. The district may also be requested to conduct such reviews as needed. The reviews will take place at the jobsite and include interviewing the contractor’s workforce.

[[image:110.3.jpg|center|825px]]